JP7549229B2 - Ball game machine - Google Patents

Description

This relates to a pinball game machine that has a play area from which game balls are shot.

Among various pinball game machines, the so-called first-class pachinko game machines display multiple symbols while changing in a display area such as a liquid crystal display provided in the approximate center of the game board (hereinafter, such display will be referred to as "symbol change" or "changing display"). This game machine is known as a game machine that transitions to a special game called a jackpot, in which more prize balls can be obtained than in normal game, when the combination of symbols when the symbol change in multiple rows is stopped becomes a specific state. The symbol change display in the display area is not simply a display of multiple symbols, but is designed to heighten the player's sense of expectation by making the time of the changing display longer than usual when one more symbol is aligned, such as in a so-called reach screen. In addition, the player's sense of expectation is also heightened by a performance that gives a story to the changing display by using characters in the images of the symbols, etc., and a preview performance that preliminarily suggests the high expectation of transitioning to the special game (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2003-230714 A

There are already many gaming machines that use the above-mentioned configuration as conventional models. In order to differentiate from conventional models, there is a demand for more efficient control and more optimized presentation.

The present invention was developed in consideration of the above problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can achieve efficient control and optimal presentation.

A pinball game machine according to one embodiment of the present invention comprises a game board on which a game area is formed, a first starting port provided in the game area, a second starting port provided in the game area and having a ball entry variation mechanism operable to change the state in which the game ball enters from a relatively difficult state to an easy state, a winning/losing determination means for determining whether or not the game has won based on a lottery value obtained in response to a ball entering the first starting port or the second starting port, a pattern display device that displays a varying pattern and indicates the result of the winning/losing determination by displaying the pattern in a stopped state, and a variation pattern determination means for determining a variation pattern that determines the variation time from the start of the pattern variation to the stopped display based on a variation pattern selection state. The device is equipped with a special game control means that, when a pattern indicating that the result of the hit/miss judgment will be a jackpot is displayed on the pattern display device, enables the player to play a special game that is more advantageous to the player than normal game after the stopped display, a probability state control means that transitions from a low probability state in which the probability of the result of the hit/miss judgment being a jackpot is normal to a high probability state in which the probability of the result of the hit/miss judgment being a jackpot is higher than normal, a fall determination means that executes a fall determination from the high probability state to the low probability state, and a ball entry state control means that transitions from a normal ball entry state in which the ease of scoring into the second starting hole is relatively low to an easy ball entry state in which the ease of scoring into the second starting hole is relatively high. When the display of the changing patterns starts, the display of the changing patterns starts after the execution of the change start process in which the winning/losing judgment for the pattern is executed, and when the process of starting the change of the patterns starts in the high probability state, the winning/losing judgment is executed after the fall judgment is executed in the change start process, and if the fall judgment is won, the winning/losing judgment is executed in the low probability state, and if the fall judgment is not won, the winning/losing judgment is executed in the high probability state, and after the special game ends, the state transitions to the high probability state and the easy-to-score state, and the number of times the patterns change after the special game ends is within a predetermined number of times. If the player wins the fall judgment related to the pattern change, the number of pattern changes after the special game ends is a predetermined number, and the player is transferred to a normal ball entry state after the pattern change stops, and is transferred to a high probability state and a ball entry easy state after the special game ends. If the player wins the fall judgment related to the pattern change, the number of pattern changes after the special game ends exceeds a predetermined number, the player is transferred to a low probability state and a normal ball entry state after the winning fall judgment, and when the pattern change start process starts, the change pattern selection state is determined after the win/loss judgment is performed in the change start process, and the decision is made. A variation pattern that determines the variation time of the pattern is determined based on the variation pattern selection state determined, and the variation pattern selection state when a variation pattern related to a pattern variation in which the number of pattern changes after transitioning to a high probability state and an easy-to-score state is a predetermined number is determined is different from the variation pattern selection state when a variation pattern related to a pattern variation in which the number of pattern changes after transitioning to a high probability state and an easy-to-score state is less than a predetermined number is determined, and is also different from the variation pattern selection state when a variation pattern related to a pattern variation exceeding a predetermined number is determined. When the number of pattern changes after transitioning to a high probability state and an easy-to-score state is less than a predetermined number, the variation pattern selection state determined after winning the fall judgment is the same as the variation pattern selection criterion determined after not winning the fall judgment. When the number of pattern changes after transitioning to a high probability state and an easy-to-score state is more than a predetermined number, and the result of the win/loss judgment is a miss, the variation pattern selection criterion determined after winning the fall judgment is different from the variation pattern selection criterion determined after not winning the fall judgment.

In addition, any combination of the above components, or mutual substitution of the components or expressions of the present invention between methods, devices, systems, computer programs, recording media storing computer programs, data structures, etc., are also valid aspects of the present invention.

According to one aspect of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can achieve efficient control and optimal presentation.

A diagram showing the basic structure of the front side of a pachinko game machine. A diagram showing the basic structure of the rear side of a pachinko game machine. A diagram showing the functional blocks of a pachinko game machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of a main board. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of a win/loss determination table. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the range settings of the win/lose lottery values for each setting value. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a pattern determination table. A diagram showing a variation pattern table. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of a pre-entry pass/fail determination table referenced in the pre-entry pass/fail determination. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of a pre-win/lose determination table corresponding to a game setting. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a sub-board. FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a schematic overview of a mobile link system. 2 is a block diagram showing a schematic hardware configuration of a main board and a sub board. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a schematic hardware configuration of a performance control device. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the control start processing of the main board in a pachinko gaming machine. 16 is a flowchart showing the setting change process of S124 in FIG. 15 in detail. 16 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process of S126 in FIG. 15 in detail. 16 is a flowchart showing the main process of S120 in FIG. 15 in detail. 13 is a flowchart showing details of an interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing the control start processing of a sub-substrate in a pachinko gaming machine. 21 is a flowchart showing the main process of S518 in FIG. 20 in detail. 13 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when a command is received from the main board. 13 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing when a timer interrupt for controlling a performance display occurs. 10 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when a sub CPU receives a command from a control CPU. 10 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when a timer interrupt for controlling various devices occurs. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of displaying special patterns in a variable manner. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of varying and displaying decorative patterns. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of a special game. A flowchart showing the process of small win gaming. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a screen of a performance display device. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an example of contraction of a frame image in a screen transformation performance. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating examples of frame image shaking in a screen deformation effect. 13 is a diagram showing a schematic layer structure of a performance screen in a screen transformation performance. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the process of a movable character effect that is executed simultaneously with the screen transformation effect. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a frame buffer divided into a plurality of buffer areas. 10 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between the display size of a frame image and the capacity of a frame buffer area. FIG. 10A to 10C are diagrams illustrating a process of transforming a frame image stored in a buffer area. A figure showing an example screen of the third special effect pattern. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating a process of using a buffer area in a third special effect pattern. 1 is a perspective view showing the basic structure of the exterior of a slot machine. 11 is a rear view of the housing door portion that is exposed when the housing door portion is opened. FIG. 4 is a front view showing the internal configuration of the housing base that is exposed when the housing door is opened. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on the reels. FIG. 2 is a functional block diagram of the slot machine. 1 is a flowchart showing a basic game sequence in a slot machine. A block diagram showing an outline of the hardware configuration of a main control device and a sub-control device. A block diagram showing an outline of the hardware configuration of the performance display control unit. 4 is a flowchart showing main program control processing of a main control device in the slot machine. 5 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process in the main control device. This shows the transition of the game state after moving to a high probability state and an easy ball scoring state. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a process for starting variation of special symbols. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a pattern stop process for a special pattern. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a game flow according to an embodiment. A figure showing an example of the process of changing presentation. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of the timing of switching the presentation mode. A figure showing an example of the execution process of the first performance triggered by an operation instruction performance. A figure showing an example of the execution process of the second performance triggered by an operation instruction performance. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the process of executing an opening performance. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the process of executing an opening performance. A figure showing an example of the process of executing a normal color change presentation. A figure showing an example of the process of executing a special color change effect. A figure showing an example of the process of executing the reel operation performance. A figure showing an example of a presentation process in which the execution mode of the suggestion presentation can be selected. A figure showing an example of the execution process of the number of times increase effect. A figure showing an example of the process of executing individual performances. A figure showing an example of the transition process of the variation pattern selection state when transitioning to the latent mode. A figure showing an example of the output of a test signal and an outer end signal regarding an easy-to-score state. A figure showing an example of the output of a test signal and an outer end signal regarding an easy-to-score state.

(Based Technology 1)
In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, multiple games corresponding to the conventional first-class pachinko machine are mixed. The first game and the second game as the multiple games are executed preferentially so that they are not executed simultaneously. In order to balance these playability, the machine is equipped with multiple start winning holes, multiple special pattern display devices, and multiple reserved lamps. The machine is designed so that the number of balls that are awarded in the second game is generally greater than the number of balls that are awarded in the first game. For example, the second game is designed to be relatively more profitable than the first game, with a higher probability of hitting a jackpot with a probability of winning, and with a larger number of unit games constituting the special game when the jackpot is hit (including cases where a long-open unit game with a long opening time of the big prize entrance and a short-open unit game with a short opening time are mixed in one special game, and the second game has a larger number of long-open unit games than the first game even if the unit games are the same). On top of that, the gameplay is realized in which the player first aims for a first hit in the first game, and after the time reduction is granted in the first game, the player repeatedly aims for the second game to get a lot of balls.

Figure 1 shows the basic structure of the front side of a pachinko game machine. The pachinko game machine 100 is mainly composed of a game machine frame and a game board. The game machine frame of the pachinko game machine 100 includes an outer frame 101, a front frame 102, a transparent plate 103, a door 104, an upper ball tray 105, a lower ball tray 106, a launch handle 107, a speaker 108, a performance button 109, a cross key 110, and a decorative lamp 111. The outer frame 101 has an opening and is a frame body for fixing the pachinko game machine 100 in a position to be installed. The front frame 102 is a frame body that fits into the opening of the outer frame 101 and is attached to the outer frame 101 so that it can be opened and closed by a hinge mechanism (not shown). The front frame 102 includes a mechanism for launching game balls, a mechanism for detachably storing the game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting game balls, etc.

The transparent plate 103 is made of glass or the like, and is supported by the door 104. The door 104 is attached to the front frame 102 by a hinge mechanism (not shown) so that it can be opened and closed. The upper ball tray 105 has a mechanism for storing game balls, sending game balls to the launch rail, and removing game balls to the lower ball tray 106. The lower ball tray 106 has a mechanism for storing and removing game balls. Speakers 108 are provided on the left and right sides of the upper part of the door 104, and output sound effects and music according to the game status and performance, etc., by a means for controlling the performance. Most of the resin material that constitutes the exterior of the door 104 is translucent, and a decorative lamp 111 is provided inside the transparent part. The decorative lamp 111 is an LED that emits light in various colors according to the game status and performance, etc., by a means for controlling the performance, and plays a role in the performance by flashing, etc.

The game board 80 includes a first start port 11, a second start port 12, a big prize port 20, a first operation port 31, a second operation port 32, a general prize port 33, an out port 34, a performance display device 60, and a center decoration 64 on a game area 81 partitioned by rails 82. The center decoration 64 is a decorative resin member provided to form the screen frame of the performance display device 60 from the approximate center of the game area 81 to its upper and right parts, and has functions such as a flow path for game balls, protection of the performance display device 60, and decoration. A stage 65 on which the game balls that flow in roll is formed at the bottom of the center decoration 64, and the falling direction from the stage 65 is divided into a direction in which the ball enters the first start port 11 and a lateral direction in which the ball does not enter the first start port 11 depending on the way the ball rolls. A movable role object 66 that is driven according to the performance content and performs a performance action is provided at the top of the center decoration 64. In the game area 81, a mechanism such as a plurality of game nails and a windmill (not shown) for forming a flow path for game balls is installed. In this specification, "ball entry", "winning", and "falling in" may be synonymous with each other. In addition, each winning port and each ball entry port may be configured as a "passing port" (also called a "gate" or "through chucker") through which game balls pass, and "ball entry", "winning", "falling in" and "passing" may also be synonymous with each other.

The first starting hole 11 is provided as a starting winning hole corresponding to the first game, and the second starting hole 12 is provided as a starting winning hole corresponding to the second game. The first starting hole 11 and the second starting hole 12 are configured so that the player can aim to enter one of them by shooting the game ball with strength according to his/her will. The first starting hole 11 is provided in the approximately center lower part of the game area 81, and the second starting hole 12 is provided directly below the first starting hole 11. A flow path is formed by the arrangement of the game nails so that the ball can be entered or entered easily into the first starting hole 11 and the second starting hole 12 when hit from the left, that is, when the ball is hit relatively weakly with the aim of flowing to the left passage of the center ornament 64, while the ball can be entered or entered easily into the second starting hole 12 when hit from the right, that is, when the ball is hit relatively strongly with the aim of flowing to the right passage of the center ornament 64, the ball can be entered or entered easily into the first starting hole 11, but the ball cannot be entered or entered easily into the first starting hole 11. However, under normal circumstances, the upper part of the opening of the second starting hole 12 is covered by the first starting hole 11, preventing the inflow of game balls, so unless the expansion mechanism of the second starting hole 12 is opened, it is impossible or difficult for a ball to enter the second starting hole 12. The winning/losing lottery is a lottery that determines whether or not to move to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than normal play, and is held every time a ball enters the first starting hole 11 or the second starting hole 12.

The first starting hole 11 and the second starting hole 12 may be located far enough apart from each other that the ball can be aimed at either one depending on the strength of the shot. The first starting hole 11 and the second starting hole 12 may be located far away on the left and right sides of the game area 81, respectively, so that a ball aimed at one of them is unlikely to enter the other. For example, the first starting hole 11 is located at a position where the ball can or can easily enter when the ball is hit from the left, that is, when the ball is shot relatively weakly with the aim of flowing into the left passage of the center ornament 64. The second starting hole 12 is located at a position where the ball can or can easily enter when the ball is hit from the right, that is, when the ball is shot relatively strongly with the aim of flowing into the right passage of the center ornament 64.

The first starting opening 11 is equipped with a first starting winning detection device 16. The first starting winning detection device 16 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting opening 11, and generates first starting winning information indicating the entry of the ball when the ball enters. The second starting opening 12 is equipped with a second starting winning detection device 17, a normal electric device 90 (a so-called electric tulip) that is an opening mechanism, and a normal electric device solenoid 91 for opening and closing the normal electric device 90. The second starting winning detection device 17 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting opening 12, and generates second starting winning information indicating the entry of the ball when the ball enters.

The first operating port 31 is provided at the left side of the play area 81 and includes a first passage detection device 36. The first passage detection device 36 is a sensor that detects the passage of the game ball to the first operating port 31, and generates passage information indicating the passage when the game ball passes through. The second operating port 32 is provided at the right side of the play area 81 and includes a second passage detection device 37. The second passage detection device 37 is a sensor that detects the passage of the game ball to the second operating port 32, and generates passage information indicating the passage when the game ball passes through. The passage of the game ball through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32 triggers an opening lottery that determines whether or not to open the normal electric role object 90. When the game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, a normal pattern, which is a pattern indicating the judgment result of the opening lottery, is displayed variably on the normal pattern display unit 45. Therefore, the opening lottery is also called a "normal pattern lottery". After a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the display of the normal symbols stops fluctuating. When the normal symbols stop at a winning symbol, the normal electric device 90 is opened by the driving force of the normal electric device solenoid 91, increasing the possibility of the ball entering the second starting hole 12. As an alternative, the number of operating holes may be one, and it may be configured to be located on the left side of the play area 81.

The three general winning openings 33 each have a general winning detection device 38 for detecting the entry of a game ball. The general winning detection device 38 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 33, and generates general winning information indicating the entry of the ball when the ball enters.

The large prize opening 20 is equipped with a large prize detection device 25 for detecting the entry of a game ball and a large prize opening solenoid 92 for opening and closing the large prize opening 20. The large prize detection device 25 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 20, and generates large prize opening winning information indicating the entry of the ball when the ball enters. The large prize opening 20 is a horizontal rectangular winning opening that opens as a "big win" when the first special pattern 51 or the second special pattern 52 stops in a predetermined manner. The large prize opening 20 is provided in a position to the upper right of the out opening 34. As a modified example, another large prize opening may be provided in the lower center of the game area 81 or above or below the large prize opening 20, so that multiple large prize openings are provided. The out opening 34 is an outlet through which game balls that did not enter any of the winning openings are discharged, and is provided with an out detection device 39. The out detection device 39 is a sensor that detects game balls that pass through the out port 34 and are discharged, and generates discharge information indicating the detection upon detection. The out port 34 is provided at the bottom center of the game area 81 so that all game balls that do not enter any of the winning ports can be guided through it. A plurality of out detection devices 39 may be provided side by side while ensuring a game ball passage of sufficient width to prevent balls from clogging the out port 34.

The symbol etc. display unit 120 is disposed below and outside the play area 81 on the play board 80. The symbol etc. display unit 120 is provided with various display sections, such as a first special symbol display section 41, a second special symbol display section 42, a first special symbol reserved display section 71, a second special symbol reserved display section 72, a normal symbol display section 45, a normal symbol reserved display section 75, a play status display section 76, and an abnormality notification section 77. Specifically, the first special symbol display section 41 corresponding to the first game and the second special symbol display section 42 corresponding to the second game are arranged side by side at the lower left position, and the fluctuations of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are displayed.

The first special symbol 51 is a symbol corresponding to the result of the first winning/losing lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 11, and when the symbol stops in a predetermined winning manner, a jackpot occurs as a special game. The second special symbol 52 is a symbol corresponding to the result of the second winning/losing lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 12, and when the symbol stops in a predetermined winning manner, a jackpot occurs as a special game. The first special symbol display unit 41 and the second special symbol display unit 42 are eight-segment LED display devices consisting of eight segments, for example, seven segments forming a "figure of eight" and one segment representing a "dot". In an eight-segment LED, eight segments can be combined to represent eight bits of numerical value. The first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52, which are represented by a combination of segments, do not necessarily take the form of letters or numbers, and may be symbols that do not generally have meaning and are formed by the combination of each segment. These symbols are displayed in rapid succession on the first special symbol display section 41 and the second special symbol display section 42, or a predetermined display (e.g., "-") and non-display (e.g., all lights off) are repeated for a predetermined time, and then a pattern corresponding to the judgment result is displayed, thereby realizing the display of the varying patterns of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. Note that the first special symbol display section 41 and the second special symbol display section 42 may be an LED dot array other than an 8-segment LED, and a plurality of types of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 may be expressed by a combination of lighting patterns and lighting colors.

In addition, since the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 do not necessarily have to play a role in the presentation, in this embodiment they are displayed in an inconspicuous size on the first special symbol display section 41 and the second special symbol display section 42 at the lower left of the play area 81. However, if a method is adopted in which the special symbols themselves play a role in the presentation, and thus are expressed without using decorative symbols, the special symbols may be displayed on another display device, such as a liquid crystal display, rather than on an 8-segment LED.

Above the first special symbol display section 41, a first special symbol reserved display section 71 is provided as a reserved lamp for the special symbol change corresponding to the first game, and above the second special symbol display section 42, a second special symbol reserved display section 72 is provided as a reserved lamp for the special symbol change corresponding to the second game. The first special symbol reserved display section 71 is made up of two lamps, and the number of lamps that are lit or blinking indicates the number of reserved win/lose lottery values in the first game (hereinafter, the number of reserved win/lose lottery values is also simply referred to as the "reserved number"). The reserved number in the first special symbol reserved display section 71 is the number of times (number) that a lottery value has been obtained based on winning the first starting hole 11 during the change of the first special symbol 51 or during the execution of the special game, and indicates the number of winning balls for which the pattern change has not yet been executed. The second special symbol reserved display section 72 is also made up of two lamps, and the number of lamps that are lit or blinking indicates the number of reserved balls in the second game. The reserved number in the second special symbol reserved display section 72 is the number of times (number) that a lottery value has been obtained based on winning into the second starting hole 12 while the second special symbol 52 is changing or while a special game is being played, and indicates the number of winning balls for which the symbol change has not yet been performed. The reserved number of winning/losing lottery values is also displayed at the bottom of the screen of the performance display device 60 as the number of lit reserved lamp images.

On the right side of the pattern etc. display unit 120, a normal pattern display section 45 is provided. For convenience, the normal pattern display section 45 is composed of two lamps, and the display state of the normal pattern is expressed by the combination of their lighting. First, the first lamp and the second lamp are simultaneously flashed to express the fluctuation of the normal pattern, and finally, the stopping pattern of the normal pattern is expressed by the combination of the lighting states of the first lamp and the second lamp. For example, a missing stopping pattern is expressed by the lighting of the first lamp and the extinguishing of the second lamp, a first winning pattern is expressed by the extinguishing of the first lamp and the lighting of the second lamp, and a second winning pattern is expressed by the lighting of both the first lamp and the second lamp.

In addition, a normal symbol pending display section 75 is provided to the right of the normal symbol display section 45 as a pending lamp for normal symbol changes. The normal symbol pending display section 75 also consists of two lamps, and the number of lamps that are lit or flashing indicates the number of pending normal symbol changes. The number of pending normal symbol changes is the number of game balls that have passed through the first actuation port 31 or the second actuation port 32 during the normal symbol change, and indicates the number of normal symbol draws for which the normal symbol change has not yet been executed.

The symbol display unit 120 is provided with a game state display section 76 and an abnormality notification section 77. The game state display section 76 is a display section that displays a game state corresponding to a specific game state, which will be described later, and is composed of, for example, one lamp and one 7-segment LED. For example, the lamp is lit when the probability is fluctuating, flashes when the ball is likely to be scored, and is turned off when the ball is in a normal state to notify each game state, and the 7-segment LED displays the number of unit games (number of rounds) to be executed in the special game during execution of the special game. The abnormality notification section 77 is a display section that notifies an abnormality in a part of the gaming machine, and is composed of, for example, multiple lamps, and notifies an abnormality by a lighting pattern according to the type of abnormality. Note that these display sections may not be centrally arranged in the symbol display unit 120, but each display section may be configured separately, or may be configured separately as multiple display devices appropriately grouped together. In addition, the notification of a game state such as a specific game state may be configured to be performed only for a predetermined period, such as a certain period after the power is restored from a power outage.

A performance display device 60 is provided in approximately the center of the play area 81 so that the screen is exposed from the screen frame formed by the center ornament 64, and displays changes in the performance image including a decorative pattern 61 linked to the first special pattern 51 or the second special pattern 52. Hereinafter, such displays will be referred to as "pattern changes" or "change displays", etc.

The performance display device 60 is a display device composed of a liquid crystal display that displays the decorative pattern 61 in a variable manner in conjunction with the variable display of the first special pattern 51 or the second special pattern 52. The decorative pattern 61 is a pattern for visually displaying the lottery result display shown by the first special pattern 51 and the second special pattern 52. The performance display device 60 displays, as the decorative pattern 61, a moving image that changes multiple rows of patterns, for example, imitating a slot machine game, in the center area of the screen. In this embodiment, patterns consisting of the numbers "0" to "9" are displayed and changed in three rows, and a winning or losing combination of three patterns that are finally stopped and displayed indicates a winning or losing. Each of the multiple patterns that make up the decorative pattern 61 is composed of numbers, letters, or symbols decorated with colors and patterns, but these numbers, letters, and symbols may be configured in a form that is integrated by adding a pattern common to all patterns or a different pattern for each pattern. This image is a pattern depicting a motif related to the decoration or presentation theme set for that model of pachinko gaming machine 100, and may be a pattern depicting a human or animal character, for example. The decorative pattern 61 may be configured to switch between a pattern that includes the image as an integrated unit and a pattern in which the image is separated and only the numbers, letters, and symbols are displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the development of the presentation. In the background of the decorative pattern 61, a moving image having a presentation effect related to the decoration or presentation theme set for that model of pachinko gaming machine 100 is displayed in conjunction with the pattern change.

The performance display device 60 is composed of a liquid crystal display, which is a high-definition dot matrix type display device, and the width of the display area may be about half the width of the game area, or it may be a large size that exceeds half. In the case of a large size, the game ball passage on the right side of the performance display device is formed with a passage width that is wide enough for one game ball to pass through, and if the player hits the ball with maximum strength as a so-called "right hit", the game ball can almost certainly pass through the right-side passage, and it can be distinguished from so-called "left hit". The performance display device 60 may be composed not only of a single display device, but also of a combination of multiple display devices. In the case of multiple display devices, displays of different sizes such as a combination of a main liquid crystal display and a sub liquid crystal display may be combined, and the sub liquid crystal may be placed adjacent to the main liquid crystal display, or may be installed in a position other than the game board, for example, near the launch handle (upper ball tray, right side decorative lamp, etc.). When installed near the launch handle, it may be configured in the form of a touch panel that the player can operate and input. The performance display device 60 is not limited to a liquid crystal display, and may be configured with a display device such as an organic EL display, or may be configured with a mechanical display means such as a drum rotation type or an LED matrix type display means.

The performance button 109 is an operation input means that the player presses to input a specific instruction to the gaming machine according to the performance content, and the performance content, etc. are changed depending on the pressing manner. The performance button 109 is provided on the front frame 102. The performance button 109 is usually stored in the front frame 102, but a rod-shaped member is attached to the back side of the performance button 109, and it is provided so that the rod-shaped member and the performance button 109 can be protruded in a direction approximately perpendicular to the board surface. When protruding to the outside, the rod-shaped member and the performance button 109 function as a performance lever 112, and the player can grasp the performance button 109 and pull the performance lever 112 downward. This also allows the player to input a specific instruction to the gaming machine. The cross key 110 is an operation input means that the player inputs directional instructions to the gaming machine, and is provided on the outer wall surface to the left of the upper ball tray 105.

The method of playing and the flow of control performed in the gaming machine configured as above will be outlined. When the player rotates the launch handle 107 by hand, the game balls stored in the upper ball tray 105 are guided one by one to the rail 82 and launched into the game area 81 with a strength according to the rotation angle. When the player fixes the rotation position of the launch handle 107 by hand, the launch of the game balls is repeated at regular time intervals. The game balls launched to the upper part of the game area 81 hit multiple game nails, windmills, center decorations 64, etc. and fall in a direction according to the way they hit. When the game balls fall into each of the winning holes of the general winning hole 33, the first starting hole 11, the second starting hole 12, and the large winning hole 20, the prize balls according to the type of winning hole are paid out to the upper ball tray 105 or the lower ball tray 106. Game balls that fall into each winning port, such as the general winning port 33, are treated as safe balls, and game balls that fall into the out port 34 are treated as out balls. The discharge of safe balls may be made to be outside the scope of detection by the out detection device 39, or safe balls may be guided to an area where the out detection device 39 is provided and all discharged safe balls may be detected by the out detection device 39. Alternatively, the number of discharged balls may be calculated by adding the number of detected safe balls to the number of detected out balls, without guiding safe balls or detecting safe balls with the out detection device 39.

When the game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, the normal pattern is displayed in a variable manner in the normal pattern display section 45, and is displayed in a stopped manner after the variable display time determined prior to display has elapsed. When the normal pattern is displayed in a stopped manner in the first winning manner or the second winning manner, the normal electric device 90 is expanded based on the winning manner of the stopped and displayed pattern and the game state when it is displayed in a stopped manner. That is, when the game state when the pattern is stopped is the normal game state, and the normal pattern is displayed in the first winning manner, a short opening of 0.1 seconds is executed as the opening of the normal electric device 90. When the normal pattern is displayed in the first winning manner in a specific game state (e.g., a state where it is easy to score a ball), and when the normal pattern is displayed in the second winning manner in normal and specific game states (e.g., a state where it is easy to score a ball), a long opening of 6 seconds is executed as the opening of the normal electric device 90. Here, the winning probability of the normal symbol and the execution probability of the long opening are set to be different depending on the game state. Specifically, in the opening lottery in the normal state, the normal symbol wins with a probability of 1/100, and the execution probability of the short opening (the probability of selecting the winning symbol of the first winning mode) in that case is set to 1/3, and the execution probability of the long opening (the probability of selecting the winning symbol of the second winning mode) is set to 2/3. Also, in the opening lottery in a specific game state (for example, a state where it is easy to enter the ball), the normal symbol wins with a probability of 99/100, and the selection probability of the first winning mode and the second winning mode is the same as in the normal game state, but the long opening is set to be executed regardless of the mode in which it is won. In this way, in the easy-to-score state, the easiness of scoring into the second starting hole 12 is increased by the function of varying the probability of winning with the normal symbol (varies the probability from 1/100 to 99/100) and the function of extending the opening time (extending the opening time from 0.1 seconds to 6.0 seconds when stopped and displayed in the first winning mode). The function of extending the operating period of the normal electric device 90 (long opening) is sometimes called the "opening extension."

As described above, the probability of long opening is higher than the probability of short opening in the normal state, so that long opening is performed at a certain rate even in the normal state when a normal pattern is won. As a variant, the probability of short opening may be higher than the probability of long opening in the normal state, or the probabilities of both may be the same, or a short opening may always be performed. In addition, when the ball is in an easy-to-enter state, a configuration may be used to increase the ease of ball entry into the second starting hole 12 by using three functions, including a function to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal pattern. In that case, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is, for example, 10 seconds in the normal state and 2 seconds in the easy-to-enter state. In addition, the winning probability of the opening lottery in the normal state may be set to zero (0/100), and the normal electric device 90 may be expanded only when the opening lottery is performed in the easy-to-enter state. Furthermore, when the normal electric role 90 opens, the fact may be notified in advance, or the pending change of the normal pattern may be predicted and a notification may be given before the change of the normal pattern begins, or a notification may be given while the normal pattern is changing.

As a modified example of the opening mode when the normal electric device 90 of the second starting hole 12 is opened for a long time, the total opening time may be extended to about 6 seconds by repeating a 2-second opening three times, which is longer than the short opening. In addition, a configuration may be made in which multiple combinations of opening time and number of openings are prepared and one of them is selected. For example, in the case of three 2-second openings, the total opening time is the same as that in the case of one 6-second opening, but the former is longer than the latter when the interval period is included. Therefore, in the configuration of the modified example in which the second starting hole 12 is arranged in the right-hand hitting direction, it can be said that the former has a longer chance of scoring if the player who notices the opening adjusts the hitting direction to the second starting hole 12 from that point on. In addition, a configuration may be made in which there are multiple winning types of normal patterns, and the opening mode of the expansion mechanism may be made different depending on the winning type. For example, if a normal symbol results in a first hit, the ball may be opened once for 0.1 seconds in the normal state, and three times for 1 second in the easy-to-score state; if a second hit results in a second hit, the ball may be opened once for 6 seconds in the normal state, and two times for 2 seconds in the easy-to-score state.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first starting hole 11 or the second starting hole 12, the first special pattern 51, the second special pattern 52, and the decorative pattern 61 are displayed in a variable manner on the first special pattern display section 41, the second special pattern display section 42, and the performance display device 60. The display of the first special pattern 51, the second special pattern 52, and the decorative pattern 61 is stopped after the display time determined prior to the display has elapsed. The first special pattern 51 and the second special pattern 52 are displayed in a variable manner according to a variable pattern in which the change mode from the start of the change to the stop is determined. The decorative pattern 61 is displayed in a variable manner according to a variable performance pattern in which the change mode from the start of the change to the stop is determined. A plurality of types of the change pattern and the change performance pattern are prepared, each of which has a variable time of various lengths. While the first special pattern 51 and the second special pattern 52 are displayed in a variable manner according to the variable pattern, the decorative pattern 61 is displayed in a variable manner according to a variable performance pattern having the same change time. For each variation pattern, a variation display time is set as the end condition for the pattern variation, and the variation of the first special pattern 51, the second special pattern 52, and the decorative pattern 61 is stopped when the variation display time has elapsed. Below, an example of the variation display of the decorative pattern 61 displayed according to the variation performance pattern is shown, and the variation performance pattern is briefly explained. Details of the variation pattern and the method of determining the variation performance pattern will be explained separately.

As an example of the display of the change in the decorative pattern 61, first, when the change starts, the patterns in all three columns change like the reels of a slot machine spinning, and when the timing for the change to end is approached, the columns are stopped one by one to display the pattern combination as the final stop mode. Note that as the operation when the change in the decorative pattern 190 stops, it is possible to control the columns to stop simultaneously rather than one by one, so as to draw attention to the performance display other than the decorative pattern during the change display, or to make it possible to display the pattern change in a shorter change time. Also, as the operation when the change in the decorative pattern 190 starts, it is possible to control the start of the change in some columns to be delayed depending on the subsequent development in the change (such as the type of performance pattern) to create a sense of anticipation.

Next, the variable presentation patterns will be briefly explained. The variable presentation patterns include a normal miss presentation pattern, a reach miss presentation pattern, and a reach jackpot presentation pattern. The normal miss presentation pattern is a presentation pattern when a normal miss pattern combination is displayed. The reach miss presentation pattern is a presentation pattern when a miss pattern combination is displayed after passing through a reach state, in which one more pattern will result in a jackpot. The reach jackpot presentation pattern is a presentation pattern when a jackpot pattern combination is displayed after passing through a reach state. In particular, patterns when passing through a reach state include patterns with various long and short fluctuation times, and a reach pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time is called a "normal reach", and a reach pattern with a long fluctuation time is called a "super reach". The normal miss presentation pattern, reach miss presentation pattern, and reach jackpot presentation pattern each include a normal pattern displayed in a normal state and a time-saving pattern displayed in a time-saving state. However, even in the normal state, if the second pattern change corresponds to the ball entering the second starting hole 12, the probability of the jackpot accompanying the probability change or the probability of the unit number of plays of the special game being increased is higher than the first change corresponding to the ball entering the first starting hole 11, so a pattern for chance presentation may be used to indicate that there is a relatively favorable chance of a jackpot occurring. In the embodiment, a time-saving pattern is used in the time-saving state, but since the time-saving pattern is also used in the probability change state, a time-saving pattern is also used in the probability change state. However, in a modified example, a specification may be used in which a pattern for the probability change different from that for the time-saving pattern is used in the probability change state. Alternatively, a specification may be used in which a common pattern is used for the time-saving and probability change, or a specification may be used in which a pattern for the time-saving and probability change is not used in particular, and a pattern for the probability change is used in the probability change state.

When the number of reserved symbols for the winning/losing lottery reaches a predetermined number (for example, three), the pattern change time in the case of a loss is shortened from the normal time in order to increase the game efficiency (hereinafter, also referred to as "shortened change"). Similarly, when the number of reserved symbols for the winning/losing lottery reaches four, the pattern change time in the case of a loss is shortened even further than the case of three symbols in order to further increase the game efficiency (hereinafter, also referred to as "ultra-shortened change"). After the above-mentioned pattern change, if the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 at the time of stopping are in a stopped state indicating a jackpot, the game moves to a special game, which is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than normal game, and the opening and closing operation of the big prize opening 20 is started. The stopping state of the decorative symbol 61 indicating a jackpot is, for example, a combination state in which the types of the three symbols match.

There are two types of special games: normal special games and shortened special games, and the profits from winning balls vary greatly. A normal special game is started by the display of a presentation screen called the start demo time. After the start demo time screen is displayed, the large prize winning hole 20 is opened, and after the opening continues for about 30 seconds or after nine or more game balls have fallen in, it is closed once. The opening and closing of the large prize winning hole 20 is basically called a unit game, but there may be cases where the opening is repeated for a short period of time multiple times during one unit game. After the opening and closing of the large prize winning hole 20 or the unit game is repeated a predetermined number of times, for example, four or ten times, the normal special game is ended by the display of a presentation screen called the end demo time. In a normal special game, nine or more balls can be fully expected to enter per unit game, and a sufficient number of prize balls (also called "balls") can be acquired by ten unit games, resulting in a large profit. A special game in which 10 unit games are repeated is also referred to as a "10R jackpot" as appropriate, and a special game in which 4 unit games are repeated is also referred to as a "4R jackpot" as appropriate. Although the unit games are repeated 10 times, it is also possible to realize a normal special game (sometimes referred to as an "effective nR jackpot") that is essentially the same as a small number of unit games being repeated by opening the big prize opening 20 for a shorter time (e.g., 1.6 seconds) in some unit games.

On the other hand, in the shortened special game, the start demo time and end demo time are short or almost nonexistent (e.g., 0.1 seconds), and the large prize winning hole 20 is opened for only 1.6 seconds in one unit game. This unit game is repeated twice to end the shortened special game. In the shortened special game, the opening of the large prize winning hole 20 is repeated only twice for a very short time, so that almost no balls enter the large prize winning hole 20, and the amount of balls paid out is essentially equal to zero or a small number (for example, the number of balls paid out according to the number of balls that enter, such as a few balls to several tens of balls, up to about 1 to 2 balls per round). A special game in which two unit games are repeated is also referred to as a "2R jackpot" as appropriate. Note that although the number of unit games is the same as in the normal special game, the shortened special game can also be realized by opening the large prize winning hole 20 for a shorter time than normal in all unit games.

Furthermore, after the above-mentioned pattern change, if the first special pattern 51 or the second special pattern 52 and the decorative pattern 61 at the time of stopping are in a predetermined small win mode, the game transitions to a small win game consisting of one unit game, and the opening and closing operation of the large prize opening 20 is executed. In one unit game that constitutes the small win game, the large prize opening 20 is opened for only about 1.6 seconds, and the appearance is an operation mode that is similar to a 2R big win.

When a special game occurs and the winning stop pattern at that time is a specific pattern (for example, "777"), a special game, which is a special game, will start after the special game ends. During the special game, a lottery is held with a higher probability of winning than in the normal probability state, and a new special game may occur relatively quickly. Note that the result of the lottery is a specific jackpot, i.e., a jackpot with a special jackpot, may not be clearly indicated on the outside, and a latent special jackpot state may be set in which no explicit notification is given as a decorative pattern or performance content. In that case, even during the special jackpot, the performance display device 60 does not clearly indicate whether the jackpot is in a special jackpot or not. Note that the performance display device 60 may clearly indicate whether the jackpot is in a special jackpot or not when a specified condition is met.

In the normal game after the special game ends, an easy-to-enter state, which is one of the specific game states, is started. In the easy-to-enter state, the probability of winning the opening lottery is increased from normal, and the opening extension is performed by lengthening the opening time of the normal electric device 90. In addition to the possibility of increasing the number of times that normal symbols are won per certain time, the ease of entering the second starting hole 12 is also increased, so that the number of balls entering the second starting hole 12 is also likely to increase. Therefore, as a result of the increased opportunity to win prize balls by entering the second starting hole 12, it becomes possible to continue playing with almost no balls being lost, or while gradually increasing the number of balls being held.

In the easy-to-score state, as one of the specific game states, the time for the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 to change is shortened from the normal state, so-called time reduction is further implemented. The time for the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 to change is returned to the original time after a predetermined number of changes, for example 100 times, but if a jackpot occurs before the number of changes is reached, the time reduction is also terminated. Since the time for the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 to change is shortened in the time reduction, the time until a jackpot occurs can be shortened compared to the normal state in which the symbols change at the normal time, and the ease of winning a jackpot can be relatively increased. In a modified example, the time reduction for the special symbols may not be implemented in the easy-to-score state.

Figure 2 shows the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko game machine. The power switch 150 is a switch that turns the power of the pachinko game machine 100 on and off. The main board 200 controls the overall operation of the pachinko game machine 100, and in particular processes the general game operation, such as the lottery when the first start hole 11 and the second start hole 12 are won. The sub-board 300 is equipped with a liquid crystal unit 151, controls the display content on the performance display device 60, and in particular changes the performance display content according to the judgment result by the main board 200. The back set mechanism 152 includes a prize ball tank 153, a flow path for prize balls, a payout device 154 that pays out prize balls, etc. The payout device 154 pays out game balls supplied from the prize ball tank 153 to the upper ball tray 105 according to the winning of each winning hole. The payout control board 155 controls the payout operation by the payout device 154. The launching device 156 launches the balls stored in the upper ball tray 105 into the play area 81 one by one. The launching control board 157 controls the launching operation of the launching device 156. The power supply board 158 supplies power to each part of the pachinko game machine 100. A performance display unit 159 is provided on the main board 200. The performance display unit 159 is composed of four 7-segment LEDs that display, for example, a four-digit number, the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the total number of launched balls, which is the sum of safe balls and out balls.

A setting change device 170 is provided on the main board 200. The setting change device 170 is a device for changing the setting to one of a plurality of settings (also called game settings) corresponding to a plurality of game specifications. For example, six game settings (setting 1 to setting 6) are prepared as game settings, and the probability of a jackpot can be made different depending on the game setting. Specifically, the larger the numerical value among settings 1 to 6, the more advantageous the game specification can be for the player, and if the jackpot probabilities for settings 1 to 6 are M1 to M6, the jackpot probabilities for each setting can be determined so that M1≦M2≦M3≦M4≦M5≦M6. It is not necessary to assign different jackpot probabilities to different game settings, and the jackpot probabilities may be the same between different game settings. For example, the same jackpot probability may be assigned to all game settings from setting 1 to setting 6.

The setting change device 170 includes a setting key cylinder 171 into which a setting key held by an employee of the game establishment is inserted, a setting change button 172 for changing the setting to one of a number of game settings, a setting display unit 173 for lighting and displaying the set setting value, and a setting memory for storing the set setting value. The setting key cylinder 171 is a turnkey-type switch for transitioning to a state in which the setting can be changed (hereinafter referred to as the "setting change state") or a state in which the setting can be confirmed (hereinafter referred to as the "setting confirmation state"). First, the power switch 150 is turned off, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder 171, the setting key is turned on by turning it, and then the power switch 150 is turned on to transition to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. To transition to the setting change state, the power switch 150 is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch (sometimes called the "RWM clear switch"). On the other hand, to transition to the setting confirmation state, the power switch 150 is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch.

When the setting change state is entered, the setting display unit 173 displays the number "1" indicating setting 1 as the initial value of the game setting, and the setting can be changed by pressing the setting change button 172. The setting display unit 173 is composed of a 7-segment LED that displays a single digit number. Each time the setting change button 172 is pressed once, the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 is changed in the order of 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → .... When the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to its original position after the setting is changed and turned off, the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 at that time is stored in the setting memory, the setting change is confirmed, and the game becomes playable. On the other hand, when the setting confirmation state is entered, the setting value stored in the setting memory is displayed on the setting display unit 173. In the setting confirmation state, even if the setting change button 172 is pressed, the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 does not change, and the setting cannot be changed. After that, when the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to its original position and turned off, the game becomes playable. Furthermore, when the setting key is turned off to enable play, the setting display unit 173 goes dark and the current setting value cannot be seen.

The setting change button 172 may also be used as a RAM clear switch. In this case, if the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch pressed while the setting key is not turned (setting key off state), RAM clear is executed. On the other hand, if the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch pressed while the setting key is turned (setting key on state), RAM clear is executed and the state transitions to the setting change state. Also, if the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch not pressed while the setting key is off, the power is restored without RAM clear. On the other hand, if the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch not pressed while the setting key is on, the state transitions to the setting confirmation state. Also, the setting display unit 173 may also be used as the performance display unit 159. In this case, the combined display unit may function as the performance display unit 159 in the playable state, and function as the setting display unit 173 in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Alternatively, the setting change device 170 may not be provided, and the game settings may not be changed.

<Function block>
3 shows the functional blocks of the pachinko game machine 100. Below, we will explain the functions realized by using each component, but in this specification, in order to align the physical configuration with the functional configuration, for example, the main board 200, the payout control board 155, the launch control board 157, etc., the terms already explained as the physical configuration may be used as they are for convenience.

The pachinko game machine 100 is configured in such a way that functions are shared among a power supply board 158 that generates power for use within the game machine based on an AC power source (AC 24V, etc.) supplied from outside the game machine, a main board 200 that acts as the main control device that controls the basic game operations and game progress, a payout control board 155 that acts as a frame control device that controls the payout of prize balls, a launch control board 157 that controls the launch of game balls into the game area, and a sub-board 300 that acts as a sub-control device that controls the performance operations and processing.

The main board 200 is electrically connected to the first start port 11, the second start port 12, the big winning port 20, the first operating port 31, the second operating port 32, the general winning port group (first general winning port 33a, second general winning port 33b), the out port 34, the pattern display unit 120, and the external information output terminal 160, and transmits and receives various control signals between them. The payout control board 155 is electrically connected to the main board 200, the launch control board 157, and the payout device 154. The payout control board 155 indirectly controls the launch control board 157 by transmitting a launch permission signal to the launch control board 157 based on a signal indicating the prize ball payout transmitted from the main board 200 and the control state of the main board 200, and also controls the payout of the prize balls by the payout device 154. The payout device 154 includes a payout motor 166 and a ball counting sensor 167. The launch control board 157 is electrically connected to the payout control board 155, the launch device 156, and the ball sending device 164, and controls the ball sending device 164 and the launch device 156 based on a launch permission signal sent from the payout control board 155 to launch the game balls. The sub-board 300 is electrically connected to the performance display device 60, the movable role 66 (drive motor 67, position detection sensor 68), the speaker 108, the performance input operation device 115 (performance button 109, cross key 110), and the decorative lamp 111, and transmits and receives various control signals between each of them.

Data transmission between the main board 200 and the sub-board 300 is one-way from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300, and each component for realizing the overall operation by one-way data transmission is arranged on the main board 200 and the sub-board 300. Since the one-way data transmission from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 is maintained, data cannot be transmitted from the components included in the sub-board 300 to the components included in the main board 200, and data transmission cannot be requested. Therefore, the sub-board 300 cannot refer to information generated by the main board 200 unless that information is transmitted. In addition, data is transmitted in both directions between the main board 200 and the dispensing control board 155, and between the dispensing control board 155 and the launching control board 157. However, as with the main board 200 and the sub-board 300, a configuration in which data is transmitted in one direction from the main board 200 to the dispensing control board 155, or a configuration in which data is transmitted in one direction from the dispensing control board 155 to the launching control board 157 may be used.

Note that the functional blocks included in the main board 200, the payout control board 155, the launch control board 157, and the sub-board 300 described below are merely examples, and as a modified example, some of the functional blocks may be mounted on other boards. For example, the functional blocks included in the main board 200 may be configured to be mounted on the sub-board 300, or the functional blocks included in the launch control board 157 may be configured to be mounted on the payout control board 155. Also, for example, some of the functional blocks included in the main board 200 may be configured to be mounted on the main board 200, or the remaining parts may be mounted on the payout control board 155, and some of the functional blocks may be divided and provided on multiple boards to form a single functional block as a whole.

<Main Board 200>
4 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the main board 200. The main board 200 includes a ball entry determination means 201, a performance display unit 159, a random number generation means 202, a first lottery means 211, a second lottery means 212, a pre-determination means 235, a normal drawing lottery means 213, a hold control means 240, a main display control means 250, a special game control means 260, a small win game control means 265, a specific game control means 270, an opening/closing control means 275, a special drawing adjustment means 276, a main initial processing execution means 280, a main power cut processing execution means 282, a main error detection means 284, a setting change means 286, a setting confirmation means 287, and a command communication means 205.

<Ball entry determination means 201>
The ball entry determination means 201 determines whether a game ball has entered each winning hole. When the ball entry determination means 201 receives the first start winning information, it determines that the game ball has entered the first start hole 11. When the ball entry determination means 201 receives the second start winning information, it determines that the gaming ball has entered the second start winning hole 12. When the ball entry determination means 201 receives the special winning hole winning information, it determines that the gaming ball has entered the special winning hole 20. When the ball entry determination means 201 receives the general winning information, it determines that the gaming ball has entered the general winning opening 33. When the ball entry determination means 201 receives the passing information, it determines that the gaming ball has entered the first operating opening 31 or the second operating opening 32. When the ball-entering determination means 201 receives the discharge information, it determines that the game ball has passed through the outlet 34. The ball-entering determination means 201 determines the total number of shot balls, which is the sum of the safe balls and the out balls. The ratio of the total number of winning balls to the total number of winning balls is calculated and displayed on the performance display unit 159. The ball entry determination means 201 determines the number of balls paid out when the probability of a jackpot is in a normal probability state and a normal ball entry state (a so-called low-low state in which the probability of a jackpot is low and the balls are entered low), by dividing the number of balls paid out by the number of balls out by 100. The value of is displayed on the performance display unit 159. Therefore, the performance display unit 159 displays the base in the low base state.

<Random number generation means 202>
The random number generating means 202 generates random numbers to be used for various determinations in the first lottery means 211, the second lottery means 212, and the general lottery means 213. Specifically, the random number generating means 202 generates random numbers in the range of "0" to "65535" by a predetermined means as random numbers (also called "win/lose lottery values") to be used in the win/lose lottery by the first win/lose determination means 221 and the second win/lose determination means 222. In addition, the random number generating means 202 generates random numbers in the range of "0" to "255" by a predetermined means as random numbers (also called "design determination lottery values") to be used in design determination (design lottery) by the first design determination means 226 and the second design determination means 227. The random number generating means 202 generates random numbers in the range of "0" to "255" by a predetermined means as random numbers (also called "variation pattern determination lottery values") used in the determination of the variation pattern by the first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232. The random number generating means 202 generates random numbers in the range of "0" to "99" by a predetermined means as random numbers used in the winning/losing lottery by the normal pattern lottery means 213. The random number generating means 202 generates random numbers in the range of "0" to "2" by a predetermined means as random numbers used in the determination of the normal pattern. The "random numbers" referred to here may be physical random numbers generated by a random number generating circuit or true random numbers in the mathematical sense, as well as pseudo-random numbers such as random numbers using a 16-bit counter or software random numbers using a random number generating algorithm. Or they may be random numbers generated by combining hardware random numbers and software random numbers. Furthermore, the random numbers obtained by the first lottery means 211 and the second lottery means 212 may be generated by the same generating means, or may be generated by different generating means.

<General drawing lottery means 213>
When the game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, the normal symbol lottery means 213 obtains a random number used for lottery of the normal symbol and a random number used for determining the stop symbol of the normal symbol from the random number generating means 202 and executes a lottery. The normal symbol lottery means 213 holds a normal symbol hit/miss judgment table (not shown) referred to for judging the hit/miss of the normal symbol and a normal symbol judgment table referred to for determining the stop symbol of the normal symbol to be displayed on the normal symbol display unit 45. The normal symbol hit/miss judgment table defines a correspondence between the lottery value for hit/miss lottery and a hit, and the normal symbol judgment table defines a correspondence between the lottery value for determining the stop symbol and the normal symbol, and the hit/miss and the stop symbol of the normal symbol are determined based on the hit probability and the symbol selection probability described above. When the lottery value for the normal pattern lottery corresponds to a win, the normal pattern lottery means 213 refers to the normal pattern judgment table to determine the stop pattern of the normal pattern, and when the lottery value for the normal pattern lottery corresponds to a miss, it always determines the state of the miss pattern of 1. When the result of the win/loss judgment of the normal pattern corresponds to a win and the normal pattern stops in a predetermined pattern (first win state or second win state), the opening/closing control means 275 described later expands the normal electric role 90 of the second start hole 12 according to the state of the stopped pattern and the game state. The expansion time is 0.1 seconds at the time of short opening and 6 seconds at the time of long opening. The lottery value of the normal pattern is temporarily reserved by the reservation control means 240 described later. However, the lottery value is reserved only when it does not exceed the predetermined reserved upper limit number reserved by the reservation control means 240.

<First lottery means 211 and second lottery means 212>
The first lottery means 211 includes a first lottery value acquisition means 216, a first winning/losing judgment means 221, a first symbol determination means 226, and a first variation pattern determination means 231 as a function of executing a first lottery related to a first game, and executes a first winning/losing lottery as a winning/losing lottery corresponding to a ball entering the first starting hole 11. Based on various lottery results by the first lottery means 211, the main display control means 250 displays the first special symbol 51 in the first special symbol display section 41. Also, based on information transmitted from the command communication means 205, the display area of the performance display device 60 displays the decorative symbol 61. The second lottery means 212 includes a second lottery value acquisition means 217, a second winning/losing judgment means 222, a second symbol determination means 227, and a second variation pattern determination means 232, and executes a second winning/losing lottery as a winning/losing lottery corresponding to a ball entering the second starting hole 12. Based on various lottery results by the second lottery means 212, the main display control means 250 performs a variable display of the second special symbol 52 in the second special symbol display section 42. Also, based on information transmitted from the command communication means 205, a variable display of the decorative symbol 61 is performed in the display area of the performance display device 60.

<First lottery value acquisition means 216 and second lottery value acquisition means 217>
The first lottery value acquisition means 216 acquires random numbers for various lotteries and decisions by the first lottery means 211 from the random number generation means 202 in response to the entry of a ball into the first starting hole 11. Specifically, the first winning/losing lottery value for the winning/losing decision by the first winning/losing decision means 221, the first pattern lottery value for the stop mode decision of the first special pattern 51 by the first pattern decision means 226, and the first pattern lottery value for the decision of the change pattern (change time) of the first special pattern 51 by the first change pattern decision means 231 are acquired from the corresponding random number generation means. The second lottery value acquisition means 217 acquires random numbers for various lotteries and decisions by the second lottery means 212 from the random number generation means 202 in response to the entry of a ball into the second starting hole 12. Specifically, the second win/lose lottery value for determining win/lose by the second win/lose determination means 222, the second pattern lottery value for determining the stopping mode of the second special pattern 52 by the second pattern determination means 227, and the second pattern lottery value for determining the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the second special pattern 52 by the second fluctuation pattern determination means 232 are obtained from the corresponding random number generation means.

The first win/loss determination means 221 executes a win/loss determination based on the first win/loss selection value to determine whether or not to transition to a special game. The second win/loss determination means 222 executes a win/loss determination based on the second win/loss selection value to determine whether or not to transition to a special game. More specifically, the win/loss determination determines whether or not the result corresponds to a "big win" indicating a transition to a special game, a "small win" indicating a transition to a small win game, or a "miss" indicating no transition to a special game or a small win game. The first win/loss determination means 221 and the second win/loss determination means 222 hold a win/loss determination table to be referenced in the win/loss determination. Note that the win/loss determination executed when starting the pattern variation is also referred to as the "win/loss determination as the main determination" as appropriate to distinguish it from the advance win/loss determination described later. In this specification, the terms "table" and "selection criteria" do not strictly refer to data in which a correspondence between a first parameter, such as a lottery value, and a second parameter, such as a value indicating an option, is defined in a table structure, but also broadly include cases where such a correspondence is realized by a program structure that derives the second parameter from the first parameter. These are all referred to as "selection criteria" as appropriate, as a concept that is essentially synonymous with "table." Furthermore, when a table structure is used, a selection criterion that is essentially one type may be composed of a combination of multiple structurally subdivided tables, but when "multiple types of selection criteria" are used, the actual number of types of tables is indicated, not the number of subdivided tables.

The first hit/miss judgment means 221 and the second hit/miss judgment means 222 hold a table corresponding to each hit/miss judgment as a hit/miss judgment table to be referred to in the hit/miss judgment. Specifically, a hit/miss judgment table for hit/miss judgment by the first hit/miss judgment means 221 (also referred to as the "first hit/miss judgment table") and a hit/miss judgment table for hit/miss judgment by the second hit/miss judgment means 222 (also referred to as the "second hit/miss judgment table") are held, and the table to be referred to is selected according to the hit/miss judgment to be performed. In the multiple hit/miss judgment tables, the judgment results of a big hit, a small hit, and a miss are associated with a hit/miss lottery value, and the hit/miss probability is determined according to the associated range setting of the big hit. In addition, multiple types of hit/miss judgment tables corresponding to multiple game settings are prepared, and for example, a hit/miss judgment table with a different correspondence between the hit/miss lottery value and the hit/miss judgment result is prepared for each of the game settings from setting 1 to setting 6. In addition, if the probability of winning a big win, a small win, or a miss is the same across multiple game settings, a win/loss determination table that is common to the multiple game settings may be prepared.

Figure 5 is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of a hit/miss judgment table. This diagram shows a hit/miss judgment table corresponding to a specific game setting, and shows a hit/miss judgment table corresponding to setting 6. In the hit/miss judgment table in this diagram, the judgment results of a big hit, a small hit, and a miss are associated with a hit/miss lottery value, and the hit/miss probability of a big hit or a small hit is determined according to each associated range setting. The first hit/miss judgment means 221 and the second hit/miss judgment means 222 refer to the hit/miss judgment table in this diagram in the hit/miss judgment as the main judgment. In both the first hit/miss lottery by the first hit/miss judgment means 221 and the second hit/miss lottery by the second hit/miss judgment means 222, a big hit is determined only when the hit/miss lottery value falls within the range of 0 to 299 during normal times. During a probability change, the range of a big hit is expanded, and a big hit is determined not only when the hit/miss lottery value falls within the range of 0 to 299, but also when it falls within the range of 300 to 2999. In this way, the range that corresponds to a jackpot changes depending on the game state. Note that in this diagram, a single hit/miss determination table is used to show the jackpot ranges for both normal and special bonuses, but separate hit/miss determination tables may be prepared for normal and special bonuses, or for the first and second hit/miss lotteries.

In this embodiment, even if the winning/losing lottery value does not fall within the jackpot range, it will be a small win if it falls within a specified range. In the example of this figure, if the winning/losing lottery value acquired by the first winning/losing judgment means 221 falls within the range of 56500 to 65535, it will be a small win, and if the winning/losing lottery value acquired by the second winning/losing judgment means 222 falls within the range of 64000 to 65535, it will be a small win. In other words, the range of small wins is wider in the first winning/losing lottery than in the second winning/losing lottery, and small wins are more likely to occur. In this way, if it does not fall within the jackpot range, it is originally a "miss", but in the example of this figure, the winning/losing lottery value range in the case where it does not fall within the jackpot range and does not fall within the small win range is specifically expressed as a "miss". In other words, if "winning/losing" is viewed from the perspective of "whether it is a jackpot or not", a "small win" may be considered to be included in the broad sense of "miss" in the sense of "not a jackpot". Furthermore, when considering "hit or miss" in terms of "hit or miss," "small hits" can be considered to be included in the broader definition of "hit" along with "big hits." Note that while this diagram shows an example in which the judgment table for whether or not it is a big hit and the judgment table for whether or not it is a small hit are realized in the form of a single hit or miss judgment table, they may also be realized as separate tables. Also, a "small hit" may be provided in only one of the first game or the second game, or may not be provided in either game. In that case, a value corresponding to a small hit is not set in the corresponding hit or miss judgment table.

Figure 6 shows a schematic diagram of the range setting of the winning/losing lottery value for each set value. Figure 6 (a) shows the correspondence between the first winning/losing lottery value acquired by the first winning/losing judgment means 221 and the winning/losing judgment result. Figure 6 (b) shows the correspondence between the second winning/losing lottery value acquired by the second winning/losing judgment means 222 and the winning/losing judgment result. The range of the first winning/losing lottery value and the second winning/losing lottery value that will result in a jackpot during normal play and during a special chance is 0 to 294 for the set value "1", 0 to 295 for the set value "2", 0 to 296 for the set value "3", 0 to 297 for the set value "4", 0 to 298 for the set value "5", and 0 to 299 for the set value "6". Therefore, the larger the set value, the wider the range of winning/losing lottery values that will result in a jackpot during normal play, and the higher the probability of a jackpot during normal play. In addition, the range of the first hit/miss lottery value and the second hit/miss lottery value that will be a jackpot only during the probability change (i.e., a miss during normal times) is 295 to 2949 for the setting value "1", 296 to 2959 for the setting value "2", 297 to 2969 for the setting value "3", 298 to 2979 for the setting value "4", 299 to 2989 for the setting value "5", and 300 to 2999 for the setting value "6". Therefore, the larger the setting value, the larger the range of the hit/miss lottery value that will be a jackpot during the probability change, and the higher the probability of a jackpot during the probability change. The range of the hit/miss lottery value is determined so that the ratio between the normal time jackpot probability that will be a jackpot during normal times and the probability change jackpot probability that will be a jackpot during the probability change will be constant regardless of the setting value. In this diagram, the range of the winning/losing selection value is set so that the probability of a jackpot during a special bonus is 10 times the probability of a jackpot during normal play, and this range is common to all setting values "1" to "6". In addition, the range of the winning/losing selection value is set so that the probability of a small win is also constant regardless of the setting value. For all setting values "1" to "6", a small win occurs when the first winning/losing selection value ranges from 56,500 to 65,535, and a small win occurs when the second winning/losing selection value ranges from 64,000 to 65,535. A winning/losing selection value range outside the range of a jackpot or small win is a "miss". In this diagram, the winning probability is different for each setting value, but the correspondence between the winning/losing selection value and the winning/losing judgment result may be set so that the winning probability is the same between different setting values.

<First symbol determination means 226 and second symbol determination means 227>
Returning to FIG. 4, the first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 determine the stop symbol when the symbol starts to change based on the symbol lottery value obtained from the random number generation means 202 and the result of the hit/miss judgment. The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 hold a plurality of symbol determination tables to be referred to in order to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol. Specifically, the first symbol determination means 226 holds a plurality of symbol determination tables according to the result of the hit/miss judgment by the first hit/miss judgment means 221, and the second symbol determination means 227 holds a plurality of symbol determination tables according to the result of the hit/miss judgment by the second hit/miss judgment means 222. The first hit/miss judgment means 221 holds a first symbol determination table at the time of a big hit to be referred to at the time of a big hit, a first symbol determination table at the time of a small hit to be referred to at the time of a small hit, and a first symbol determination table at the time of a miss to be referred to at the time of a miss. The second hit/miss judgment means 222 holds a second symbol judgment table at the time of a big hit, a second symbol judgment table at the time of a small hit, and a second symbol judgment table at the time of a miss. The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 select the symbol judgment table to be referenced according to the result of the hit/miss judgment. The symbol judgment performed when starting the symbol variation is also called "symbol judgment as the main judgment" as appropriate to distinguish it from the preliminary symbol judgment described later.

Figure 7 is a diagram showing a pattern determination table. Figure 7(a) is a table to be referred to when the result of the hit/miss determination is a big hit, Figure 7(b) is a table to be referred to when the result of the hit/miss determination is a miss, and Figure 7(c) is a table to be referred to when the result of the hit/miss determination is a small hit. The first pattern determination means 226 and the second pattern determination means 227 refer to this pattern determination table in the pattern determination as the main determination. In each pattern determination table, a correspondence between the numbers "0" to "10" indicating the type of special pattern and the first pattern selection value or the second pattern selection value is determined. The types of special patterns are respectively associated with the hit/miss determination results of big hit, small hit, and miss, with "0" to "4" corresponding to big hit, "5" to "9" corresponding to small hit, and "10" corresponding to miss. Each type is assigned multiple special patterns, that is, multiple symbols that generally have no meaning and are formed by a combination of segments.

As shown in FIG. 7(a), the types of special symbols "0" to "4" correspond to the presence or absence of a jackpot and probability fluctuation after the jackpot. Specifically, type "0" indicates a 10R jackpot with a probability change as a specific jackpot, and is associated with "0 to 99" for the first symbol lottery value and "0 to 144" for the second symbol lottery value. Type "1" indicates a 4R jackpot with a probability change (or "effectively 4R win") as a specific jackpot, and is associated with "100 to 149" for the first symbol lottery value and "145 to 149" for the second symbol lottery value. Type "2" indicates a 2R jackpot with a probability change, and type "2" is associated with "150 to 189" for both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value. Type "3" indicates a 10R jackpot without a probability change as a normal jackpot, and type "3" corresponds to a first pattern selection value and a second pattern selection value of "150-189". Type "4" indicates a 4R jackpot without a probability change as a normal jackpot, and type "4" corresponds to a first pattern selection value and a second pattern selection value of "230-255". In this way, the selection probability for each jackpot type (i.e. the content of the jackpot and whether or not there is a probability change afterwards) is determined by the size of the range of the pattern selection value.

It is also possible to provide more types of special symbols, and in that case, by configuring the system so that one jackpot type is determined in correspondence with the multiple types of special symbols, it is possible to increase the number of symbol types while setting a small number of jackpot types. Alternatively, it is possible to subdivide the jackpot types into more types in correspondence with the increased number of symbol types. Furthermore, it is also possible to provide different symbol types for the first and second lotteries. In this case, the system is configured so that one jackpot type is determined in correspondence with each of the types of special symbols selected in the first and second lotteries. However, it is desirable to set the probability fluctuation rate to be the same for the first and second lotteries.

As shown in FIG. 7(b), type "10" corresponds to the entire range of symbol selection values when the result of the win/loss determination is a miss. Therefore, it is determined that the same special symbol will always be displayed when the result is a miss. It is also possible to provide multiple special symbols to be displayed when the result is a miss.

As shown in FIG. 7(c), special symbol types "5" to "9" are associated with small wins. Type "5" is associated with the symbol selection value range "0-49", and type "6" is associated with the symbol selection value range "50-99". Type "7" is associated with the symbol selection value range "100-149", type "8" is associated with the symbol selection value range "150-199", and type "9" is associated with the symbol selection value range "200-255".

In this embodiment, in order to save the storage area in the main board 200, the table in FIG. 7 is also referred to as the pre-pattern determination table in the pre-pattern determination. The first and second pattern determination means 226 and 227 transmit the value "0" to "10" indicating the type of special pattern as a result of the pre-pattern determination to the performance determination means 303 together with the value indicating the first or second win/lose lottery and the number of reserved symbols. The pre-pattern determination table may be one that is further subdivided to enable complex determination, or one that simplifies the determination range of the jackpot pattern for executing a similar special game. In addition, when the pattern is determined uniformly in the case of a miss as in this embodiment, a specific pattern may be determined without referring to the acquired pattern lottery value or without preparing a pattern determination table for a miss.

<First variation pattern determination means 231 and second variation pattern determination means 232>
Returning to FIG. 4, the first variation pattern determination means 231 determines a variation pattern in which the display process of the pattern variation to be displayed on the first special symbol display unit 41 and the performance display device 60 is determined from among a plurality of variation patterns based on the first pattern lottery value obtained from the random number generation means 202. The second variation pattern determination means 232 determines a variation pattern in which the display process of the pattern variation to be displayed on the second special symbol display unit 42 and the performance display device 60 is determined from among a plurality of variation patterns based on the second pattern lottery value obtained from the random number generation means 202. The first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 each refer to a variation pattern table when starting the pattern variation and determine the variation pattern of the pattern variation. In addition, the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 perform a pre-pattern determination of which variation pattern range the pattern lottery value corresponds to. The first variation pattern determination means 231, the second variation pattern determination means 232, and the control means of the main board 200 each hold or share a variation pattern table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern when the variation start condition is satisfied, and a pre-pattern determination table that is used to generate information for determining whether to execute a pre-reading process when the ball enters the starting hole. The variation pattern has a variation time from the start of the variation to the stop when the special symbol is displayed, and the variation time varies depending on the type. In other words, for each variation pattern in which the display process of the pattern variation is determined, a variation display time is essentially determined for each pattern as the end condition of the pattern variation, and the variation of the special symbol is stopped when the variation display time has elapsed. In addition, the variation pattern determination performed when starting the pattern variation is also referred to as "variation pattern determination as main determination" as appropriate in order to distinguish it from the pre-pattern determination. In addition, in order to contribute to the selection of the variation performance pattern of the decorative symbol described later, it may be defined as a different type of variation pattern despite having the same variation time.

Figure 8 is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of a fluctuation pattern table. The first fluctuation pattern determination means 231 and the second fluctuation pattern determination means 232 refer to the table in this figure (a) in the normal state, and refer to the table in this figure (b) in the time-saving state.

As shown in Figure 8(a), when the result of the hit/miss judgment in the normal state is a miss, if the pattern selection value is 0-4, the super reach "Super 1" with pattern range number "0" is selected, and if the pattern selection value is 5-9, the super reach "Super 2" with pattern range number "1" is selected. If the pattern selection value is 10-19, the normal reach "Normal 1" with pattern range number "2" is selected, and if the pattern selection value is 20-29, the normal reach "Normal 2" with pattern range number "3" is selected. If the pattern selection value is 30-255, the "no reach miss" with pattern range number "4" is selected. For the "no reach miss", a different variation pattern is selected depending on the number of reserved balls, and when the number of reserved balls is 0-2, a 10-second variation pattern is selected, when the number of reserved balls is 3, a 7-second variation pattern is selected, and when the number of reserved balls is 4, a 4-second variation pattern is selected.

In this diagram, an example is shown where the variation times are mainly classified into five types, but the sub-board 300 has multiple variation presentation patterns prepared for each of these variation patterns, which means that a total of several dozen variation presentation patterns are associated with the lottery value ranges for each classification.

The range of pattern selection values assigned to "Normal 1", "Normal 2", and "No reach, miss" also differs depending on the number of reserved balls. When the number of reserved balls is 0 or 1, it is as shown in this figure (a), but as the number of reserved balls increases, the selection value range of "Normal 1" and "Normal 2" becomes narrower, and the selection value range of "No reach, miss" becomes wider. The smaller the number of reserved balls, the wider the selection value range of the fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time, and the higher the probability that a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time will be selected. Therefore, the smaller the number of reserved balls, the longer the average fluctuation time will be, and the more the number of reserved balls, the shorter the average fluctuation time will be. By using a fluctuation pattern table in which the correspondence between the pattern selection value range and the fluctuation pattern differs for each number of reserved balls, it is possible to realize control that makes it easier to select a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time when the number of reserved balls is small.

When the result of the hit/miss judgment in normal state is a 4R jackpot or a 10R jackpot, if the pattern selection value is 0-123, it selects "Super 1", which is a super reach with pattern range number "5", and if the pattern selection value is 124-248, it selects "Super 2", which is a super reach with pattern range number "6". If the pattern selection value is 249-252, it selects "Normal 1", which is a normal reach with pattern range number "7", and if the pattern selection value is 253-255, it selects "Normal 2", which is a normal reach with pattern range number "8".

When the result of the hit/miss judgment is a 2R big hit or small hit under normal conditions, if the pattern selection value is 0 to 122, the super reach "Super 3" with pattern range number "9" is selected, and if the pattern selection value is 123 to 255, the normal reach "Normal 3" with pattern range number "10" is selected.

When the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 transmit the preliminary judgment result to the performance determination means 303 as a so-called pre-reading result, they transmit the pattern range number value (0 to 10) along with a value indicating whether it is the first win/lose lottery or the second win/lose lottery and the number of reserved items. Note that in the embodiment shown in FIG. 8, a table is provided for each win/lose judgment result in the preliminary pattern judgment, but it is also possible to use one preliminary pattern judgment table regardless of the win/lose lottery result to derive only information regarding the approximate range in which the random number value is located, and to control the control means of the sub-board 300 to determine what variation will be executed along with the preliminary win/lose judgment result.

In the variation pattern table of FIG. 8(b) referred to in the time-saving state, pattern selection values are assigned to all variation patterns for time-saving. However, the correspondence between the range of pattern selection values and the variation time is the same as that of FIG. 8(a) except for "reach no miss shortened" selected by miss. "reach no miss shortened" is a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time that corresponds to the same selection value range and pattern range number as "reach no miss" in FIG. 8(a). "reach no miss shortened" also selects a different variation pattern according to the reserved number, and when the reserved number is 0 or 1, a 10-second variation pattern is selected, and when the reserved number is 2 to 4, a 1-second variation pattern is selected. Note that the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 may refer to different variation pattern tables, or may refer to different variation pattern tables according to the game state. For example, in a gaming machine in which the second lottery is set to be more advantageous than the first lottery and the second lottery is processed with priority over the first lottery, it is undesirable for the player if the reserved balls for the second lottery are depleted and the first lottery is executed continuously, even in a state where it is easy to score due to time saving. Therefore, in a losing variation in the first lottery in a state where it is easy to score, a variation pattern table may be referenced in which a long variation pattern (for example, 10 seconds) that does not shorten the variation time is uniformly selected regardless of the number of reserved balls.

<Suspension control means 240>
Returning to FIG. 4, the reservation control means 240 includes a special pattern reservation means 241 and a normal pattern reservation means 242. When the first or second winning or losing lottery value is newly acquired, if the pattern change corresponding to the previously acquired first or second winning or losing lottery value is displayed, the special pattern reservation means 241 reserves the start of the pattern change corresponding to the newly acquired first or second winning or losing lottery value, and stores the winning or losing lottery value until the corresponding pattern change display starts. Here, for the first special pattern, the first winning or losing lottery value, the first pattern selection value, and the first pattern selection value are stored with a maximum of four each, and for the second special pattern, the second winning or losing lottery value, the second pattern selection value, and the second pattern selection value are stored with a maximum of four each. The normal pattern reservation means 242 stores the normal pattern selection value acquired by the normal pattern selection means 213 as a reserved ball. The number of reserved items is represented by the number of lights or the number of flashes of the first special chart reserved display unit 71, the second special chart reserved display unit 72, and the normal chart reserved display unit 75. The number of reserved items by the special chart reserved means 241 is also displayed on the performance display device 60.

The lottery value of the second win/lose lottery reserved in the special chart reservation means 241 is consumed preferentially over the lottery value of the first win/lose lottery, and the pattern change is displayed. Therefore, even if the lottery value of a jackpot is reserved as the first win/lose lottery, the pattern change corresponding to the jackpot lottery value of the first win/lose lottery will not be displayed as long as there is a lottery value reserved as the second win/lose lottery. Therefore, even if a jackpot is reserved as the first win/lose lottery, it is possible to win multiple consecutive jackpots by continuing to play until a jackpot is reserved as the second win/lose lottery.

<Main Display Control Means 250>
The main display control means 250 includes a first special symbol control means 251, a second special symbol control means 252, and a normal symbol control means 254. The first special symbol control means 251 displays the variation of the first special symbol 51 on the first special symbol display unit 41 according to a variation pattern determined in response to the result of the first winning/losing lottery by the first lottery means 211. The first special symbol control means 251 sets the start condition of a new pattern variation as the end of the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the first winning/losing lottery or the second winning/losing lottery performed previously. The second special symbol control means 252 displays the variation of the second special symbol 52 on the second special symbol display unit 42 according to a variation pattern determined in response to the result of the second winning/losing lottery by the second lottery means 212. The second special symbol control means 252 also sets the condition for starting a new pattern change as the end of the display of the changing patterns corresponding to the previously performed first win/lose lottery or second win/lose lottery.

When the special chart holding means 241 has stored the winning/losing lottery value for the second winning/losing lottery, the first special chart control means 251 reserves the start of the pattern change display corresponding to the first winning/losing lottery. On the other hand, the second special chart control means 252 starts the pattern change display corresponding to the second winning/losing lottery regardless of whether the special chart holding means 241 has stored the winning/losing lottery value for the first winning/losing lottery. As a result, when lottery values are held for both the first winning/losing lottery and the second winning/losing lottery, the lottery value held in the second winning/losing lottery is read out preferentially and the pattern change is displayed. In such a case, the lottery value held in the first winning/losing lottery is not read out and the pattern change does not start until the number of holds for the second winning/losing lottery becomes 0.

The first special symbol control means 251 and the second special symbol control means 252 transmit a change start command and a change stop command to the performance determination means 303 (sub-main) by the command communication means 205 described later at the timing to start and stop the display of the change of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. When transmitting the change start command, the values indicating the hit/miss judgment result, the stop symbol, and the change pattern determined as the main judgment, and the value indicating whether it is the first hit/miss lottery or the second hit/miss lottery are transmitted to the performance determination means 303 together with the change start command. When transmitting the change stop command, the value indicating the stop symbol is transmitted again to the performance determination means 303 together with the change stop command. In addition, the performance determination means 303 (sub-main) transmits the change start command, the change stop command, etc. to the performance control means 304 in order to control the display of the decorative symbol by the performance control means 304 (sub-sub). This synchronizes the variable display by the main display control means 250 and the performance control means 304 (sub-sub), and maintains linkage. The normal pattern control means 254 displays the result of the lottery by the normal pattern lottery means 213 on the normal pattern display unit 45 as a variable display of the normal pattern.

<Special figure adjustment means 276>
The special pattern adjustment means 276 waits for the start of the variable display of the first special pattern 51 and the second special pattern 52 while displaying one of them in a variable manner. Regardless of the order in which the game ball enters the second starting hole 12, the variable display of the second special pattern 52 based on the ball entering the second starting hole 12 is changed to the first starting hole 11. This takes precedence over the variable display of the first special pattern 51 based on the ball entering the lottery. For example, when both the first winning/losing lottery value and the second winning/losing lottery value are reserved, the second winning/losing lottery value is always consumed preferentially. and causes the second special pattern 52 to be displayed in a continuously varying manner.

The special pattern adjustment means 276 in the modified example may selectively change the display of the first special pattern 51 and the display of the second special pattern 52 according to the ball entry order into the first starting hole 11 and the second starting hole 12. For example, when the balls enter the first starting hole 11, the first starting hole 11, and the second starting hole 12 in that order, the display of the first special pattern 51, the first special pattern 51, and the second special pattern 52 is changed in that order. In this case, the special pattern adjustment means 276 monitors the reservation control means 240 and stores the reservation order of the winning/losing lottery values. Which special pattern should be changed is determined according to the ball entry order, that is, the reservation order of the winning/losing lottery values in the reservation control means 240, so that the player can easily visually grasp the order of the changes.

In another modified example, the special pattern adjustment means 276 may display the first special pattern 51 and the second special pattern 52 in a predetermined consumption order regardless of the ball entry order. For example, it may be preferred to alternate between the first special pattern 51 and the second special pattern 52. For example, when both the first win/lose lottery value and the second win/lose lottery value are reserved, the first special pattern 51 and the second special pattern 52 are alternately displayed. Since which special pattern should be changed is simply alternated regardless of the ball entry order, the player can easily intuitively grasp the order of change.

The special pattern adjustment means 276 also waits for the start of the variable display of the first special pattern 51 or the second special pattern 52 when one of them is stopped in a winning state. In this case, the variable display of the special pattern does not start while the special game is being played, so the player can concentrate on the special game.

<Prior determination means 235>
The pre-judgment means 235 includes a first lottery pre-judgment means 236 and a second lottery pre-judgment means 237. The first lottery pre-judgment means 236 includes a first winning/losing judgment means 221, a first symbol determination means 226, a first variable Before the pattern determination means 231 executes various judgments, the first lottery value acquisition means 216 uses various random numbers acquired to obtain information regarding the variation before the first special symbol control means 251 starts varying the first special symbol. The second lottery pre-determination means 237 determines whether the second lottery value acquisition means 217 has determined ... Using the various acquired random numbers, information regarding the variation of the second special pattern is determined in advance before the second special pattern control means 252 starts to vary the second special pattern.

The first lottery pre-judgment means 236 holds a first pre-win/lose lottery value judgment table, a first pre-pattern lottery value judgment table, and a first pre-variation pattern random number value judgment table as judgment tables for pre-judgment related to the first lottery means 211. The first lottery pre-judgment means 236 judges the random number group to which the first win/lose lottery value stored in the special chart holding means 241 belongs using the first pre-win/lose lottery value judgment table. The first lottery pre-judgment means 236 judges the random number group to which the first pattern lottery value stored in the special chart holding means 241 belongs using the first pre-pattern lottery value judgment table. The first lottery pre-judgment means 236 judges the random number group to which the first variation pattern lottery value stored in the special chart holding means 241 belongs using the first pre-variation pattern judgment table. Then, these judgment results are temporarily stored as pre-judgment results, and information regarding the pre-judgment results is transmitted to the sub-board 300 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207) described later.

Figure 9 is a schematic diagram showing a pre-win/lose determination table referenced in the pre-win/lose determination. The first lottery pre-determination means 236 (pre-win/lose determination for the first game) refers to the first pre-win/lose lottery value determination table in Figure 9 (a) when the ball enters the first starting hole 11, and if the win/lose lottery value is "0 to 299", a value of "1" indicating this is set as the pre-win/lose determination result. If the win/lose lottery value is "300 to 2999", a value of "2" indicating this is set as the pre-win/lose determination result. If the win/lose lottery value is "3000 to 56499", a value of "3" indicating this is set as the pre-win/lose determination result. If the win/lose lottery value is "56500 to 65535", a value of "4" indicating this is set as the pre-win/lose determination result. Next, by referring to the first pre-pattern selection value determination table (not shown), if the first pattern selection value is "0 to 99", a value of "0" indicating that is set as the pre-pattern determination result. If the first pattern selection value is "100 to 149", a value of "1" indicating that is set as the pre-pattern determination result. If the first pattern selection value is "150 to 189", a value of "2" indicating that is set as the pre-pattern determination result. If the first pattern selection value is "190 to 229", a value of "3" indicating that is set as the pre-pattern determination result. If the first pattern selection value is "230 to 255", a value of "4" indicating that is set as the pre-pattern determination result. Furthermore, by referring to the first pre-variable pattern random number value determination table (not shown), if the first pattern selection value is "0 to 9", a value of "A" indicating that is set as the pre-pattern determination result. If the first pattern lottery value is "10 to 29", the value "B" indicating this is set as the pre-pattern determination result. If the first pattern lottery value is "30 to 255", the value "C" indicating this is set as the pre-pattern determination result. As described above, the pre-determination information set by the first lottery pre-determination means 236 (pre-win/lose determination for the first game) is transmitted to the performance determination means 303 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207) described later in accordance with the transmission timing of information indicating a ball entering the first starting hole 11 (indicating that this is the first win/lose lottery), information indicating the number of reserved balls, etc.

The second lottery pre-judgment means 237 (pre-judgment of win/loss for the second game) refers to the second pre-judgment value judgment table in FIG. 9(b) when the ball enters the second starting hole 12, and if the win/loss lottery value is "0-299", a value of "1" indicating that is set as the pre-judgment result. If the win/loss lottery value is "300-2999", a value of "2" indicating that is set as the pre-judgment result. If the win/loss lottery value is "3000-63999", a value of "3" indicating that is set as the pre-judgment result. If the win/loss lottery value is "64000-65535", a value of "4" indicating that is set as the pre-judgment result. Next, the second pre-pattern lottery value judgment table (not shown) is referred to, and if the second pattern lottery value is "0-144", a value of "0" indicating that is set as the pre-pattern judgment result. If the second pattern lottery value is "145 to 149", a value of "1" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. If the second pattern lottery value is "150 to 189", a value of "2" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. If the second pattern lottery value is "190 to 229", a value of "3" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. If the second pattern lottery value is "230 to 255", a value of "4" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. Furthermore, by referring to the second preliminary variable pattern random number value determination table (not shown), if the second pattern lottery value is "0 to 9", a value of "A" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. If the second pattern lottery value is "10 to 29", a value of "B" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. If the second pattern lottery value is "30 to 255", a value of "C" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. As described above, the pre-determination information set by the second lottery pre-determination means 237 (pre-win/lose determination regarding the second game) is transmitted to the performance determination means 303 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207) described later in accordance with the timing of transmission of information indicating the ball entering the second starting hole 12 (indicating that it is a second win/lose lottery), information indicating the number of reserved balls, etc.

The various information temporarily stored as the pre-judgment results by the pre-judgment means 235 are stored in a predetermined pre-judgment result storage area, with a maximum of four items each, similar to the number of reserved memories. The pre-judgment results may be stored using a reserved storage area stored by the reservation control means 240. The information may be erased based on the pre-judgment results by the pre-judgment means 235 being transmitted to the performance determination means 303 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207) described later. In this way, by sharing with other areas or erasing information based on the completion of transmission, efficient use of the storage area in the main board 200 can be expected. In addition, as a judgment table for pre-judgment, a judgment table for this judgment may be used without providing a table dedicated to pre-judgment, and a pre-judgment table that is partially or entirely common may be shared between the pre-judgment for the first game and the pre-judgment for the second game. In this way, by sharing with other judgment tables, a reduction in data capacity in the main board 200 can be expected. The content to be transmitted as the result of the preliminary judgment means 235 can be appropriately selected, for example, by transmitting only the result of the judgment of whether or not the result is correct. Also, without making a judgment by the preliminary judgment means 235, the random number values acquired by the first lottery value acquisition means 216 and the second lottery value acquisition means 217 can be transmitted to the sub-board 300 by the command communication means 205 described above, and the content of the preliminary judgment can be determined by the sub-board 300.

The advance judgment means 235 may refer to an advance win/loss lottery value judgment table in which the correspondence between the win/loss lottery value and the advance win/loss judgment result differs depending on the setting value set by the setting change device 170. As with the above-mentioned win/loss judgment table, multiple types of advance win/loss lottery value judgment tables corresponding to multiple game settings may be prepared, and the advance win/loss lottery value judgment table to be referenced may be switched depending on the setting value of the game setting. Alternatively, an advance win/loss lottery value judgment table that can be commonly used between multiple game settings may be used. In this case, the win/loss may be pre-judged based on a combination of the setting value of the game setting and the value of the advance win/loss judgment result.

Figure 10 is a schematic diagram of a pre-judgment table corresponding to a game setting. Figure 10 (a) is the pre-judgment table referred to by the first pre-judgment means 236, and figure 10 (b) is the pre-judgment table referred to by the second pre-judgment means 237. When the pre-judgment value is "0 to 294", the pre-judgment result is "11", indicating that a jackpot will be awarded for all settings 1 to 6. When the pre-judgment value is "295", the pre-judgment result is "12", indicating that a jackpot will be awarded for settings 2 or higher during normal play or for all settings during special mode. When the pre-judgment value is "296", the pre-judgment result is "13", indicating that a jackpot will be awarded for settings 3 or higher during normal play or for all settings during special mode. When the pre-judgment value is "297", the pre-judgment result is "14", indicating that a jackpot will be awarded for settings 4 or higher during normal play or for all settings during special mode. If the winning/losing lottery value is "298", the preliminary winning/losing judgment result will be "15", indicating that the jackpot will be a jackpot for settings 5 or higher during normal play or for all settings during special mode. If the winning/losing lottery value is "299", the preliminary winning/losing judgment result will be "16", indicating that the jackpot will be a jackpot for settings 6 during normal play or for all settings during special mode. If the winning/losing lottery value is "300 to 2949", the preliminary winning/losing judgment result will be "21", indicating that the jackpot will be a jackpot for all settings during special mode. If the winning/losing lottery value is "2950 to 2959", the preliminary winning/losing judgment result will be "22", indicating that the jackpot will be a jackpot for settings 2 or higher during special mode. If the winning/losing lottery value is "2960 to 2969", the preliminary winning/losing judgment result will be "23", indicating that the jackpot will be a jackpot for settings 3 or higher during special mode. When the winning/losing lottery value is "2970-2979", the preliminary winning/losing judgment result is "23", indicating that the jackpot will be a big hit in settings 4 or higher during the special mode. When the winning/losing lottery value is "2980-2989", the preliminary winning/losing judgment result is "25", indicating that the jackpot will be a big hit in settings 5 or higher during the special mode. When the winning/losing lottery value is "2990-2999", the preliminary winning/losing judgment result is "26", indicating that the jackpot will be a big hit in settings 6 during the special mode. Furthermore, when the first winning/losing lottery value shown in (a) is "3000-56499" and when the second winning/losing lottery value shown in (b) is "3000-63999", the preliminary winning/losing judgment result is "30", indicating that the jackpot will be a small hit in all settings. In addition, when the first winning/losing selection value shown in (a) is "56,500 to 65,535," and when the second winning/losing selection value shown in (b) is "64,000 to 65,535," the preliminary winning/losing judgment result is "40," indicating a loss for all settings. By using such a preliminary winning/losing judgment table, it is possible to show an appropriate preliminary winning/losing judgment result for each setting value of the game settings.

<Special Game Control Means 260>
When the first winning/losing lottery by the first lottery means 211 results in a transition to a special game, the special game control means 260 determines that the special game operation condition is established when the first special symbol 51 stops in a predetermined jackpot mode, and executes the special game by opening the large prize opening 20. Similarly, when the second winning/losing lottery by the second lottery means 212 results in a transition to a special game, the special game control means 260 determines that the special game operation condition is established when the second special symbol 52 stops in a predetermined jackpot mode, and executes the special game by opening the large prize opening 20.

The special game is a game in which the opening and closing operation of the large prize winning hole 20 continues multiple times in succession, and is composed of multiple unit games. The special games include a 10R jackpot in which the unit game is repeated 10 times, a 4R jackpot in which the unit game is repeated four times, and a 2R jackpot in which the unit game is repeated only twice, which has a shorter opening time than the 10R jackpot and 4R jackpot. The 10R jackpot is a jackpot in the second winning/losing lottery, and the 4R jackpot is a jackpot in the first winning/losing lottery. In the 10R jackpot and 4R jackpot, the large prize winning hole 20 is opened for about 30 seconds in one unit game as a rule. In the 2R jackpot, the large prize winning hole 20 is opened for only about 1.6 seconds in one unit game. The special game control means 260 ends the special game when the set number of rounds of the unit game is consumed. In addition, even if a 2R jackpot occurs, if certain conditions are met, the large prize opening 20 may be opened in the same manner as for a 10R jackpot and a 4R jackpot.

<Small win game control means 265>
When the first drawing by the first drawing means 211 results in a small win, the small win game control means 265 determines that the small win game operation condition is established when the first special symbol 51 stops in a predetermined small win mode, and executes the small win game by having the opening/closing control means 275 open the large winning opening 20. Similarly, when the second drawing by the second drawing means 212 results in a small win, the small win game control means 265 determines that the small win game operation condition is established when the second special symbol 52 stops in a predetermined small win mode, and executes the small win game by having the opening/closing control means 275 open the large winning opening 20.

In a small win game, one unit game is executed, and the large prize opening 20 is opened and closed twice in one unit game. The small win game control means 265 opens the large prize opening 20 for approximately 0.8 seconds per opening and closing, and then closes the large prize opening 20 to end the small win game.

<Specific Game Control Means 270>
The specific game control means 270 controls the normal game in the probability variable state, the time-saving state, and the easy-to-enter state. When the special symbol is a symbol of a specific jackpot accompanied by a transition to the probability variable state, the specific game control means 270 transitions the game state to the probability variable state, the time-saving state, and the easy-to-enter state after the special game ends. The probability variable state, the time-saving state, and the easy-to-enter state continue until the next jackpot occurs. In the time-saving state, the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 select a variation pattern with a short variation time so that the variation display time of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is generally short. However, in the normal state, the variation pattern table according to the number of reserved winning/losing lottery values by the reserved control means 240 is referred to, and the smaller the number of reserved numbers by the reserved control means 240, the more likely it is that a variation pattern with a long variation time will appear. In the easy-to-enter state, at least one of the three functions of the probability of normal symbols being changed, the time reduction of normal symbols, and the extension of the opening of the second starting hole 12 is performed, thereby improving the frequency of the ball being entered into the second starting hole 12 (ease of entering the ball). During the probability of the change, the probability that the result of the judgment by the first hit/miss judgment means 221 and the second hit/miss judgment means 222 will be a jackpot is maintained at a high value. In addition, the specific game control means 270 puts the second starting hole 12 into an extended opening state when a specific jackpot is obtained, and further shifts the winning probability of the opening lottery to a probability of the change, which is higher than the normal probability state, only if the hit/miss lottery is the second hit/miss lottery.

<Opening/Closing Control Means 275>
The opening/closing control means 275 controls the opening/closing of the normal electric role 90 of the second starting hole 12 and the large winning hole 20. When the normal pattern is stopped in a specific manner, the opening/closing control means 275 sends an opening instruction to the normal electric role solenoid 91 to open the normal electric role 90 of the second starting hole 12. In the normal state, the opening/closing control means 275 opens the second starting hole 12 with a short opening or long opening opening time depending on the result of the opening lottery, and opens the second starting hole 12 with a long opening opening time in the ball entry easy state. This increases the ball entry ease of the second starting hole 12, allowing the player to continue playing without reducing the number of balls he has. In the special game, the opening/closing control means 275 sends an opening instruction to the large winning hole solenoid 92 to open the large winning hole 20.

<Main initial process execution means 280, main power cut process execution means 282, main error detection means 284>
The main initial process execution means 280 executes control start processing of the main board 200 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power outage. The main power outage process execution means 282 executes abnormality response processing such as power outage processing in the main board 200 when a power outage or other power abnormality occurs. The main error detection means 284 executes abnormality detection processing in the main board 200. The control start processing, abnormality response processing, and abnormality detection processing of the main board 200 will be described later.

<Setting Change Means 286, Setting Confirmation Means 287>
The setting change means 286 executes a "setting change process" for changing the game settings. When the power switch 150 is turned on while the setting key cylinder 171 is in the on state and the RAM clear switch is pressed, the setting change means 286 transitions to the above-mentioned setting change state. When transitioning to the setting change state, the setting change means 286 causes the setting display unit 173 to display the setting value stored in the setting memory. In response to pressing of the setting change button 172, the setting change means 286 changes the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 in the order of 1→2→3→4→5→6→1→..., and updates the setting value stored in the setting memory to the same value as the display on the setting display unit 173. When the setting key cylinder 171 is turned off, the setting change means 286 ends the setting change state and turns off the setting display unit 173.

The setting confirmation means 287 executes a "setting confirmation process" to confirm game settings. When the setting key cylinder 171 is in the ON state and the power switch 150 is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch, the setting confirmation means 287 transitions to the setting confirmation state described above. When transitioned to the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation means 287 causes the setting display unit 173 to display the setting value stored in the setting memory. Unlike the setting change means 286 described above, the setting confirmation means 287 does not change the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 even if the setting change button 172 is pressed, and does not update the setting value stored in the setting memory. When the setting key cylinder 171 is turned off, the setting confirmation means 287 ends the setting confirmation state and turns off the setting display unit 173.

The set value data managed by the setting memory may be numerical values from "0" to "5" instead of numerical values from "1" to "6". In this case, the set value "0" may correspond to setting 1, the set value "1" may correspond to setting 2, the set value "2" may correspond to setting 3, the set value "3" may correspond to setting 4, the set value "4" may correspond to setting 5, and the set value "5" may correspond to setting 6. By using "0" as the normal value of the set value data, when the RAM is cleared and the set value data is set to the initial value "0" in the event of a RAM abnormality, an abnormality is not judged, so that the RAM clear process in the event of an abnormality can be simplified. In addition, when performing some kind of lottery using the set value data, for example, when selecting different tables or data for each set value in the look-ahead process, there is also the advantage that the offset process for the selection can be simplified. For example, when "1" to "6" are used as the set value data, additional processing such as subtracting 1 from the start address is required when using these values as they are as offset data for table or data selection. On the other hand, when "0" to "5" are used as the setting value data, the numerical value of the setting value data can be used as is as the offset data. When the setting change means 286 and the setting confirmation means 287 use numerical values of "0" to "5" as the setting value data, they may display the numerical value of the setting value data as is on the setting display unit 173, or may display a numerical value obtained by adding +1 to the numerical value of the setting value data on the setting display unit 173. In the latter case, the numerical data of "0" to "5" is converted to the numerical values of settings 1 to 6 in the game settings and displayed, which allows for a display that is easy to understand for the manager of the gaming machine.

<Command Transmission Means>
The command communication means 205 includes a payout control command communication means 206 for transmitting control commands required for executing payouts, etc., to the payout control board 155, and a sub-control command transmission means 207 for transmitting control commands required for executing performance control, etc., to the sub-board 300. The payout control command communication means 206 transmits a payout command instructing the payout of a number of prize balls corresponding to each winning port based on the judgment of balls entering each winning port by the ball entry judgment means 201, and transmits a command indicating the state of an error that has occurred in the main board 200. When starting the pattern variation, the sub-control command transmission means 207 transmits the judgment result of the lottery corresponding to the pattern variation together with the control command for the pattern variation to the performance determination means 303.

The sub-control command sending means 207 sends a change start command and a change stop command to the performance determination means 303 (sub-main) at the timing when the first special pattern control means 251 and the second special pattern control means 252 start and stop the change display of the first special pattern 51 and the second special pattern 52. When sending a change start command, the sub-control command sends the values indicating the hit/miss judgment result, the stop pattern, and the change pattern judged or determined as the main judgment, and the value indicating whether it is the first hit/miss lottery or the second hit/miss lottery, together with the change start command to the performance determination means 303. When sending a change stop command, the value indicating the stop pattern is sent again to the performance determination means 303 together with the change stop command. In addition, the performance determination means 303 (sub-main) sends a change start command, a change stop command, etc. to the performance control means 304 in order to control the change display of the decorative pattern by the performance control means 304 (sub-sub). As a result, the main display control means 250 and the performance control means 304 (sub-sub) are synchronized and linked. In addition, the sub-control command transmission means 207 transmits the pre-determination result by the pre-determination means 235 to the performance determination means 303. The pre-determination result is temporarily stored in the transmission buffer, and then transmitted to the performance determination means 303 together with the type information of the winning port (first start port 11, second start port 12) corresponding to the pre-determination result, the number of reserved items, the game status, etc., regardless of whether the pattern change display corresponding to the lottery is immediately started or not, and is deleted from the transmission buffer or later overwritten. As a result, the sub-substrate 300 can predict the result of winning or losing in advance before the turn of the pattern change start comes around based on the received pre-determination result, which is called "pre-reading" processing. The processing based on the pre-determination information performed by the sub-substrate 300 will be described later. The sub-control command transmission means 207 transmits to the sub-board 300 information on special games by the special game control means 260, information on small win games by the small win game control means 265, information on the lottery results by the normal drawing means 213, and setting value information for game settings set by the setting change means 286. The sub-control command transmission means 207 also transmits to the sub-board 300 information on various controls on the main board 200, such as information on initial processing by the main initial processing execution means 280 and the main error detection means 284, information on errors, and the like, or information on various signals transmitted to the main board 200, as appropriate.

Figure 11 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the sub-board. The sub-board 300 includes a symbol mode determination means 301, a pattern storage means 302, a performance determination means 303, a performance control means 304, a timing means 307, a performance setting means 308, a sub initial processing execution means 360, a sub power cut processing execution means 362, a sub error detection means 364, a command receiving means 370, and a sub-side advance judgment means 371.

The pattern storage means 302 holds multiple presentation patterns, each of which has a predetermined display process and the image content to be displayed on the presentation display device 60 when the decorative pattern 61 changes. The presentation patterns include multiple presentation patterns, each of which has a predetermined display process and presentation process from the start to the stop of the decorative pattern 61 change display, and multiple advance notice presentation patterns, which are displayed separately from the decorative pattern change display and which give a preview of the high expectation of a jackpot before the change display stops.

The command receiving means 370 receives various commands transmitted from the command communication means 205, and the sub-side advance judgment means 371 holds the advance judgment result transmitted from the command communication means 205. The performance determination means 303 includes a normal performance determination means 373 and a look-ahead performance determination means 374. The normal performance determination means 373 determines the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device 60 by the performance control means 304 and output to the speaker 108, decorative lamp 111, etc., according to the information on the judgment result of the first win/lose lottery or the judgment result of the second win/lose lottery transmitted from the command communication means 205. The performance determination means 303 determines the performance content according to the setting value of the game setting transmitted from the command communication means 205. The look-ahead performance determination means 374 determines the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device 60 by the performance control means 304 and output to the speaker 108, decorative lamp 111, etc., according to the advance judgment result transmitted from the command communication means 205. The normal performance determination means 373 selects one of a plurality of performance patterns corresponding to the special symbol performance pattern determined by the first or second performance pattern determination means 231 or 232 and transmitted from the command communication means 205, and reads it from the pattern storage means 302. The normal performance determination means 373 sends information on the read-out performance pattern to the performance control means 304. The normal performance determination means 373 holds a pattern table to be referred to in order to select a performance pattern. The normal performance determination means 373 may determine a performance pattern by referring to the pre-determination result transmitted from the command communication means 205, or may determine a performance pattern together with the contents of the pre-reading performance by the pre-reading performance determination means 374. The pre-reading performance determination means 374 more accurately specifies the result of this determination based on the pre-determination result from the command communication means 205 and the past pre-determination results and game state information held in the sub-board 300, and determines whether or not to execute the pre-reading performance before this determination based on the specified result, and the execution contents. Specifically, the look-ahead performance determination means 374 determines whether the current game state is a probability-varying game state, and then determines whether to transition to a normal game state based on the pre-determination result that precedes the currently received pre-determination result. Based on the determination result, it identifies the result of the actual determination related to the currently received pre-determination result, the variation pattern to be selected, etc., and determines whether or not to execute the look-ahead performance and the execution content of the look-ahead performance based on the identified result. Note that since the normal performance determination means 373 and the look-ahead performance determination means 374 cooperate in many areas in the performance determination means 303, it will be described as the performance determination means 303 that includes both, except for parts that are particularly necessary.

For each variation performance pattern, a variation time is set as the end condition for the pattern variation, and the pattern variation is stopped when the variation time has elapsed. The performance determination means 303 selects a variation performance pattern of a performance image having the same variation time according to the variation pattern of the special pattern.

The pattern mode determination means 301 determines the combination of the stopping patterns of the decorative patterns 61 and their arrangement according to the result of the lottery by the first lottery means 211 or the second lottery means 212, the stopping patterns of the special patterns, the variation pattern of the special patterns, and the variation presentation pattern of the decorative patterns. The pattern mode determination means 301 transmits information indicating the determined combination of stopping patterns to the presentation control means 304. The pattern mode determination means 301 holds a pattern range table to be referenced in order to determine the stopping patterns of the decorative patterns.

The stop patterns of the decorative patterns 61 are formed as a combination of three patterns, and for example, when the result of the hit/miss judgment by the first hit/miss judgment means 221 and the second hit/miss judgment means 222 indicates a transition to a special game of a 4R big win or a 10R big win, a specific combination, for example, a combination of three patterns such as "777" or "111", is selected. When the hit/miss judgment result is a 2R big win or a small win, a specific combination, for example, a predetermined combination such as "357", is also selected, but these specific combinations do not necessarily have to be combinations of three patterns. When the hit/miss judgment result is neither a big win nor a small win, a combination that does not have three patterns, such as "312" or "946", and does not fall under the specific combinations selected for a 2R big win or a small win, is selected. If the result of the hit/miss judgment is not a 4R or 10R jackpot, and a variation pattern indicating a miss with reach is selected, a combination with only one missing symbol, such as "191" or "727", is selected.

The decorative pattern variation presentation pattern defines the variation display mode of the decorative pattern, that is, the presentation process from the start of the decorative pattern variation to the end of the variation. The variation presentation patterns include a pattern when a normal losing pattern is displayed, a pattern when a losing pattern is displayed after passing through a reach state where one more pattern will result in a jackpot, and a pattern when a jackpot pattern is displayed after passing through a reach state. In particular, patterns when passing through a reach state include patterns with various variation times, both long and short. For each variation presentation pattern, a variation time is set for each pattern as the end condition for that pattern variation, and the pattern variation is stopped when that variation time has elapsed. The presentation determination means 303 selects a decorative pattern variation presentation pattern with a variation time equal to that of the special pattern, depending on the variation pattern of the special pattern.

When the fluctuation pattern selected by the first fluctuation pattern determination means 231 or the second fluctuation pattern determination means 232 in the time-saving state is a pattern for time-saving, the presentation determination means 303 selects a fluctuation presentation pattern for which the presentation content for time-saving has been determined. The presentation content for time-saving is a presentation in which background images and sounds are output to impress upon the player that the time-saving or special bonus state is favorable to the player.

Preview performance patterns are performance patterns that temporarily display images, animations, videos, etc. of specific characters or motifs on the screen, performance patterns that operate role-playing devices, and performance patterns that output specific sounds. Performances using preview performance patterns are executed in parallel with the pattern change, and pre-emptively suggest that there is a high probability that the pattern change will stop in a jackpot mode. For example, there is a normal preview performance in which only one image of a character is displayed on the screen, and a group preview performance in which a group of many characters are displayed passing from one end of the screen to the other. In addition, step-up preview performances are included, in which the display process of the preview performance is divided into multiple stages, and the number of stages displayed is variable so that the greater the number of stages, the higher the probability of a jackpot.

There are two types of preview performance patterns: a performance is executed after the display state of the decorative pattern 61 has reached a reach state, and the final stopping state of the pattern is predicted (post-reach preview), and a performance is executed before any of the decorative patterns 61 have stopped, and the performance simultaneously predicts that a reach state will be reached (pre-reach preview).

The performance determination means 303 determines whether or not to display a preview performance on the performance display device 60 according to the result of the hit/miss lottery or the preliminary determination result by a predetermined preview lottery, sets the preliminary performance, and determines the preview performance pattern to be displayed. The performance determination means 303 holds a preview decision table to be referred to in determining whether or not to display a preview performance, and a preview type table to be referred to when selecting the type of preview performance pattern. The preview decision table is set so that different columns are referred to depending on the result of the hit/miss lottery or the preliminary determination result, and a correspondence between the result of the hit/miss lottery determination and whether or not to display a preview performance is determined so that a preview performance is displayed with a higher probability when the hit/miss lottery is a hit than when it is a miss. This makes it possible for the display of a preview performance to suggest a high degree of expectation for a jackpot.

The performance control means 304 causes the performance display device 60 to change and display a performance image including the decorative pattern 61 according to the selected change performance pattern data. The performance control means 304 determines that receipt of a command to start changing the decorative pattern 61 is the start condition for the change display of a new decorative pattern. When the performance decision means 303 decides that a preview performance is to be displayed, the performance control means 304 causes the performance display device 60 to display a preview performance according to the selected preview performance pattern in a form superimposed on the performance of the pattern change.

If the winning/losing lottery value for the second winning/losing lottery is stored, the performance control means 304 reserves the start of the pattern change display corresponding to the first winning/losing lottery, and starts the pattern change display corresponding to the second winning/losing lottery regardless of whether the winning/losing lottery value for the first winning/losing lottery is stored. As a result, if the lottery values for both the first winning/losing lottery and the second winning/losing lottery are reserved, the reserved lottery value for the second winning/losing lottery is read out preferentially and the decorative pattern change is displayed. In such a case, the reserved lottery value for the first winning/losing lottery is not read out and the decorative pattern change does not start until the reserved number for the second winning/losing lottery becomes 0. In this way, the performance control means 304 causes the performance display device 60 to display a pattern change performance including the change display of the decorative pattern 61.

The performance control means 304 further controls the turning on and off of the decorative lamps 111 and the operation of the movable props 66. The performance control means 304 has a performance display control means 305, an audio control means 306, and a lamp control means 309. The performance display control means 305 controls the display on the performance display device 60, and the audio control means 306 controls the audio output from the speaker 108. The lamp control means 309 controls the turning on and off of the decorative lamps 111.

While the first special pattern 51 and the second special pattern 52 are changing, the effect display device 60 must display an image indicating that the patterns are changing. Normally, a normal-sized decorative pattern 61 having a certain size is displayed changing, but a special effect in which the main effect content is something other than the change in the decorative pattern 61 may be displayed in a manner that impairs the visibility of the display of the change in the normal-sized decorative pattern 61. In this case, the player is informed that the patterns are changing by displaying a substitute pattern, which is a decorative pattern smaller than the normal-sized decorative pattern. Hereinafter, when simply referring to a decorative pattern, it means a normal-sized decorative pattern, but when distinguishing it from the substitute pattern, the normal-sized decorative pattern is also called a "normal decorative pattern" or "main decorative pattern".

The alternative pattern is displayed while the visibility of the normal decorative pattern is impaired, for example, while the normal decorative pattern is not displayed. The alternative pattern is a form of decorative pattern for suggesting the result of the winning/losing judgment in a dramatic way, and has a display form that is simplified (in other words, simplified) than the normal decorative pattern, and is displayed in a variation process that is simplified more than the normal decorative pattern. The alternative pattern has an external display form that corresponds to the part of the normal decorative pattern that indicates the pattern type, for example, a display form that indicates the number, letter, or symbol that indicates the pattern type. The alternative pattern is displayed in a smaller area than the area in which the normal decorative pattern is displayed, and is typically displayed in a position that is less likely to interfere with the main performance by elements other than the pattern, for example, in the corner of the screen of the performance display device 60. The alternative pattern is displayed relatively smaller than the normal decorative pattern, but has a display form that at least makes the pattern type identifiable on the outside. The alternative pattern may be a reduced version of the normal decorative pattern, or may be the same as the normal decorative pattern except for the size.

The multiple substitute patterns displayed in place of the multiple normal decorative patterns indicate the high expectation that the result of the winning/losing lottery will be favorable to the player depending on the combination of the stop mode at the end of the variation. For example, the multiple substitute patterns indicate a high expectation of a big win in the variation by a ready state in which two of the three substitute patterns are aligned. In addition, the left and right patterns in the ready state may be specific types of patterns such as "3" and "7" that indicate a relatively high expectation, or types of patterns such as "1" and "2" that indicate a relatively low expectation, thereby indicating the high or low expectation of the ready state. Note that the substitute patterns do not appear to be in a definite stopped state, but are in a temporary stopped state in which a slight shaking is maintained. After the temporary stop of the substitute patterns, the normal decorative patterns may be displayed in place of the substitute patterns, and the normal decorative patterns may be displayed in a definite stopped state. In addition, the normal decorative patterns and the substitute patterns may not be displayed exclusively, but may have an overlapping display period. Furthermore, during a predetermined performance in which the visibility of the normal decorative pattern is impaired, the display of the normal decorative pattern may be continued and the display of the alternative pattern may be displayed. Unlike the alternative pattern, a simple pattern may be displayed in a predetermined area of the performance display device 60 during the variation of the first special pattern 51 and the second special pattern 52, with an image of the same size as or smaller than the alternative pattern, suggesting that the special pattern is changing. The simple pattern may be configured as a three-pattern combination display similar to the normal decorative pattern, or as a single pattern display, or as a simple symbol (such as "○" or "×") that is switched sequentially. The simple pattern may not be related to the variation display mode of the normal decorative pattern or the alternative pattern, and may display a certain variation from the start of the variation of the special pattern to the end of the variation, and may be displayed in association with the stop display mode of the normal decorative pattern when the pattern is stopped. In addition, the simple symbols may be modified as appropriate, such as by displaying a combination of two symbols, as long as they indicate that the special symbols are being displayed and notify the result of the special symbols at a minimum. The simple symbols may also be called "simple decorative symbols," "sub decorative symbols," "sub decoration symbols," "mini decorative symbols," "mini decoration symbols," etc. In addition to the performance display device 60, a decorative symbol display called a fourth symbol, which displays a display equivalent to the simple symbols by an illuminating mode of an LED or the like, may be used. The fourth symbol is used to indicate the progress of the game (display of the special symbols being displayed while they are changing, display of the results) in the event of a malfunction of the performance display device 60. As an example of the display mode of the fourth symbol, the LED may be displayed by sequentially lighting up "white," "blue," "green," "yellow," "orange," and "red" (it may also be flashed, including being turned off), or the LED may be flashed in a single color according to the type of special symbol to indicate the display, and the color of the light emitted when the symbol is stopped may indicate the type of miss or big win.

The clock means 307 is a clock circuit that outputs time information used in the game. The clock means 307 is a timer circuit that uses a counter to measure the time since the power was turned on and outputs it as time information. However, it may also be a real-time clock circuit that has a built-in battery and can continue to measure the date and time using the battery even when the pachinko game machine 100 is turned off or there is a power outage. In the case of a real-time clock circuit, there is a possibility that slight differences in the time between each gaming machine may occur due to individual differences and time skew, whereas in the case of a timer circuit, there is little possibility of time differences occurring between multiple gaming machines as long as they are powered on at the same time.

The effect determination means 303 executes a synchronized effect that starts at a predetermined timing when the time information output by the clock means 307 indicates a predetermined time. The synchronized effect is an effect that is displayed on the effect display device 60 during a synchronized effect period that is a period that is substantially asynchronous with the pattern change period and the game state. The synchronized effect period lasts for several minutes, is longer than one pattern change period, and can include multiple pattern change periods. The synchronized effect effect pattern is stored in the pattern storage means 302, and the playback of a predetermined music piece and video is set for the effect pattern. Multiple types of synchronized effect effect patterns are prepared, and different types of effect patterns can be selected depending on the date and time, such as the month, date, day of the week, and time of day.

The synchronization effect is executed regardless of whether the game is in normal play or special play. Here, "normal play" includes the display of the so-called standby demo screen. That is, "normal play" includes (1) "normal play during change display" in which the pattern is displayed in a changing manner, (2) "normal play during change stop" in which the pattern is not displayed in a changing manner and the standby demo screen is not displayed, and (3) "normal play during standby demo screen display" in which the pattern is not displayed in a changing manner and the standby demo screen is not displayed. The synchronization effect can be executed during any of the periods (1) to (3), but in the periods (2) and (3), the output mode for controlling the reduction of the volume and brightness in the synchronization effect may be different from that in the period (1). In addition, while the standby demo screen is displayed, the player can input information about the mobile link system described later by operating the effect button 109 or the cross key 110, and when such input is made, the output of the image and sound of the synchronization effect is suppressed, and the screen display such as the performance customization by the mobile link system is prioritized.

The synchronized performance is, for example, a performance in which a predetermined piece of music or a video is played at a predetermined time (called the "synchronized performance start time"). The time that triggers the playback of the synchronized performance may be a time that arrives at a predetermined time interval from when the pachinko game machine 100 is turned on, or may be the time every hour or half past the hour based on standard time. Alternatively, a time that can vary depending on the date or day of the week may be set, and the interval may not be a fixed interval such as "every hour," but may vary, such as one hour first, then three hours later, or the interval may vary depending on the date or day of the week. The time may be variable, so that the time can be specified by the game store staff for each game store. However, the same synchronized performance is set in advance so that it is executed at least at the same time between multiple machines of the same model installed in the same game store. For example, in the case of a specification that triggers the playback of the synchronized performance at a time that arrives at a predetermined time interval from when the power is turned on, multiple machines are turned on at the same time in the game store. As a result, the same synchronized performance is executed simultaneously on the multiple game machines when the predetermined time is reached. As a result, the effects are displayed simultaneously as if they were synchronized across multiple devices, and the same music and video are played at the same time, creating a synergistic effect that feels as if a live performance or movie screening is taking place on the spot.

The synchronized performance function is also built into other gaming machines of the same model, and multiple gaming machines on the same gaming island are turned on at the same time by gaming store staff every day. All of the multiple gaming machines that are turned on at the same time will reach the synchronized performance start time at almost the same time, allowing them to execute synchronized performances simultaneously. This is called multiple-machine synchronized performance. In this case, not only are the images displayed on multiple machines synchronized, but the output of sound effects and background music will also be synchronized on multiple machines, and the more synchronized machines there are, the greater the synergistic effect of executing the performance simultaneously.

The performance setting means 308 stores the game history of the player. The game history includes the game result history and the performance result history. The game result history is the game result that leads to the balls that the player obtains as a result of the game, such as the number of hits, the number of prize balls, the number of jackpots, the number of probability changes, and the number of time reductions. The performance result history is information such as performance scores that are recorded to obtain benefits such as the right to change the content and type of the performance or the right to make a specific type of performance appear more easily, unlike the game profit. For example, in order to score the number of times a specific performance appears or the results of a mini-game, etc. and give them to the player, coded information indicating the score and game history, such as a two-dimensional code, is displayed on the screen. When the player reads the two-dimensional code with the camera of his/her mobile device and decodes it, the score and game history information obtained by decoding are stored in the player's mobile device. The linking system between the gaming machine and the player's mobile device via the two-dimensional code will be described later. The points mentioned here are necessary to expand the scope of performance customization, which will be described later, and the number of customizable items increases when the points reach a certain cumulative value (for example, when the points reach 1000 points, or every time 100 points are reached, etc.).

The effect setting means 308 stores the setting of which of multiple types of effect contents to select as the effect customization based on the selection instruction of the player and the game history. For example, multiple types of effect patterns with different motifs, characters, and music to be displayed as the effect patterns to be displayed during the special game are prepared in the pattern storage means 302, and the player is allowed to select which of them to display. Alternatively, multiple types of motifs or character designs are prepared in the pattern storage means 302 as the design of the image included in the decorative pattern that changes the image, and the player is allowed to select which of them to display. In such cases, the operation of the effect button 109 or the cross key 110 by the player is accepted while the standby demo screen is being displayed, and when the effect pattern is selected through the operation, the effect setting means 308 stores the selection. The effect determination means 303 selects the type of effect pattern during the special game according to the setting stored by the effect setting means 308.

The sub-initialization processing execution means 360 executes control start processing for the sub-board 300 when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered on or when the power is restored after a power outage. The sub-power-off processing execution means 362 executes abnormality response processing such as power-off processing in the sub-board 300 when a power abnormality such as a power outage occurs. The sub-error detection means 364 executes abnormality detection processing in the sub-board 300. When the sub-error detection means 364 detects a power outage, the sub-power-off processing execution means 362 backs up the data in the RAM to a backup RAM as a power-off process.

Figure 12 is a diagram showing a schematic overview of the mobile linkage system. As a premise of the mobile linkage system, the player registers as a user by setting an account and password in advance on the mobile terminal 354 in the game history server 358, which has a dedicated site. When the player presses the performance button 109 at the start of the game, the performance display control means 305 displays a two-dimensional code 350 encoding the address of the dedicated site of the game history server 358 on the screen of the performance display device 60, and has the player read it with the camera of the mobile terminal to access the dedicated site of the game history server 358. Character information (also called "password information") encoding the player's identification information and performance score history is transmitted from the dedicated site to the mobile terminal and displayed on the screen of the mobile terminal. The performance display control means 305 displays an input screen for the password information on the performance display device 60, and has the player input the password information via button operation of the cross key 110 or the like. The input password information is decrypted by the effect setting means 308 and registered as the player's identification information and effect score history, allowing the player to inherit the game content and effect score status up to the previous time. The input of this password information serves as an instruction to start recording the game history of the player and an instruction to start effect customization to select various effect elements. Thereafter, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, as the game and effects progress, the effect setting means 308 adds points to the player as effect benefits as needed and accumulates them as effect score history, and the player can perform effect customization as needed and select and set elements of his/her choice as various effect elements. The effect points are basically added for each pattern change, and the higher the effect type with a higher expected transition to special play, the higher the score is awarded, and a high score is also awarded when transitioning to special play.

As a performance customization, the player can use a part of the accumulated points to change the performance elements such as color, background, shape, character, and music that constitute the performance content displayed on the performance display device 60 to the type of his/her preference according to the number of points used. The performance setting means 308 receives an instruction to change the performance elements via the button operation by the player, and changes various performance elements according to the instruction. For the performance elements that can be customized, multiple types of items are prepared for each element, and different values are set as the number of points required for each item. Therefore, when the accumulated points reach a predetermined value, the number of customizable items increases, or a chance to increase the number of customizable items is given. When the player operates a button to end the game or performance customization, the performance setting means 308 generates a two-dimensional code 350 that encodes information such as performance benefits and performance score history, and the performance display control means 305 displays this on the performance display device 60. The player reads the two-dimensional code 350 with the camera of his/her mobile terminal, and the information can be acquired by decoding the read two-dimensional code 352 and stored in the mobile terminal 354. This information is also sent from the mobile terminal 354 to a game history server 358 on a dedicated website via network 356, and is managed in association with the player's account information. In this way, information such as special effects and performance score history is transmitted to the mobile terminal 354 via the transmission means of displaying and reading the two-dimensional code 350, and is managed by the game history server 358, so that the game and performance content can be carried over to the next game. Also, the longer the game is played, the more points can be earned as the number of pattern changes and performances increases.

Figure 13 is a block diagram showing the hardware configuration of the main board 200 and the sub board 300. The main board 200 includes electronic components such as a main CPU 290, a main RAM 291, and a main ROM 292. The main ROM 292 stores a main control program and data for controlling the overall game operation. The main control program or data is read from the main ROM 292 to the main RAM 291, and the main control program is executed by the main CPU 290. Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus or a data bus (not shown). The ball entry signal from each ball entry port and the payout signal from the payout control board 155 are acquired by the main CPU 290 through various interfaces (not shown). The main CPU 290 drives and controls external devices such as each winning port solenoid, the first special symbol display unit 41, and the second special symbol display unit 42 by various drive circuits (not shown). In addition, commands necessary for performance control are sent from the main CPU 290 to the sub-board 300 along with information such as the results of the winning/losing lottery, the results of the design determination, and the results of the variation pattern determination. Signals are sent from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 via one-way communication.

The command data sent from the main board 200 to the sub board 300 is a two-byte combination of one byte of command type data, known as MODE data, and one byte of command content data, known as EVENT data. The main board 200 can send one command by associating the command type data and command content data and sending them to the sub board 300. The command type data is a bit string that indicates the type of command, and a unique type code is assigned to each command type in advance during the development stage. The command content data is a bit string that indicates the content of the command. The most significant bit of the command type data and command content data is an identification bit that indicates whether it is command type data or command content data, and when the most significant bit is 1, it indicates that it is command type data, and when the most significant bit is 0, it indicates that it is command content data.

Since communication from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 is designed to send one byte of data per data transmission, two transmissions of one byte each are required to send two bytes of command data. The first communication sends the upper byte, MODE data, and the second communication sends the lower byte, EVENT data. To account for the possibility of communication failure due to noise, etc., the main board 200 sends the same data continuously, and confirms that transmission and reception of that data is complete when the same data has been read twice in succession by the sub-board 300. Until it has been read twice in succession, the main board 200 continues to send the same data up to a maximum of five times.

The sub-board 300 includes electronic components such as a sub-CPU 310, a sub-RAM 311, a sub-ROM 312, and a performance control device 313. The sub-ROM 312 is one of the data storage means for holding a sub-control program including performance pattern data in which a performance process is defined and display pattern data in which a performance display process is defined. The sub-control program including performance pattern data, display pattern data, and audio pattern data is read from the sub-ROM 312 to the sub-RAM 311, and the performance control by the sub-control program is executed by the sub-CPU 310. The electronic components are connected by buses such as a system bus and a data bus (not shown). Signals from external devices such as the performance button 109 are acquired by the sub-CPU 310 through various interfaces (not shown). The sub-CPU 310 drives external devices such as the performance display device 60, the speaker 108, the decorative lamp 111, and the movable role object 66 by the performance control device 313 and various drive circuits and control circuits (not shown) according to the performance pattern data to control the display output, audio output, lamp lighting, and role object operation. The sub-CPU 310 transmits the display pattern data and the audio pattern data to the performance control device 313. Note that, in this embodiment, an example is described in which the sub-substrate 300 includes the performance control device 313, but the sub-substrate 300 and the performance control device 313 do not need to be integrated as a substrate, and may be formed as separate substrates that are separated and connected to each other.

Figure 14 is a block diagram showing the hardware configuration of the performance control device 313. The performance control device 313 includes a control CPU 320, a control RAM 322, a data ROM 324, a display control circuit 326, and an audio control circuit 314. The data ROM 324 is one of the data storage means that stores, in a data compressed state, performance image data and motion data used for performance display, and material data such as audio data used for audio output. The performance image data is an image used for variable display and performance display as a performance object showing the result of a win/lose lottery, and is a material image such as a sprite image of a decorative pattern used for decorative pattern variation, a sprite image used for preview performance, and a video used for various performances. The motion data is data that defines the action when a performance action is added to an image used for various performances at a predetermined timing. The audio data is audio data such as music, background sound, sound effects, and character lines output during the performance.

Based on the display pattern data sent from the sub-CPU 310, the performance image data and motion data specified in the display pattern data are read from the data ROM 324 to the control RAM 322, and the performance display using the performance image data and motion data is executed by the control CPU 320. As a result, commands, performance image data, and motion data related to the performance display are sent from the control CPU 320 to the display control circuit 326, and the display is controlled by the display control circuit 326. Similarly, commands and audio data related to audio output are sent from the control CPU 320 to the audio control circuit 314, and the audio output is controlled by the audio control circuit 314.

The display control circuit 326 includes a decoder 332, a drawing memory 334, a drawing circuit 336, a frame buffer 338, and a display circuit 340, each of which is connected via a bus 330. For convenience, the bus 330 in this diagram is a comprehensive representation of buses such as a system bus, a data bus, and an address bus.

The performance image data and motion data sent from the control CPU 320 are stored in the drawing memory 334, and compressed parts of that data are decoded by the decoder 332. The drawing memory 334 is a VRAM (Video RAM) that is used as a work area when the performance image data and motion data are decoded by the decoder 332, and is used as a work area when the drawing circuit 336 performs drawing processing and image processing.

The drawing circuit 336 uses the data stored in the drawing memory 334 to execute commands sent from the control CPU 320 in sequence to generate images for display, and stores the generated images for display as frames of moving images in the frame buffer 338. The frame buffer 338 is a VRAM that serves as a buffer memory for temporarily storing frames of moving images to be output to the performance display device 60.

The display circuit 340 outputs the display images stored in the frame buffer 338 to the performance display device 60 in the form of a video signal in the order in which they were stored. The frame buffer 338 has a memory area for, for example, two frames, and while the display circuit 340 outputs a display image from the memory area for one frame, the drawing circuit 336 generates the next display image and stores it in the memory area for the other frame.

The data ROM 324 holds "detailed display pattern data" that defines the display control process performed by the display control circuit 326. At this time, the display pattern data sent from the sub-CPU 310 can be called "outline display pattern data" that defines the outline of the performance display process. For example, the outline display pattern data defines the general flow of a series of performance display processes, such as the timing of when the decorative patterns start and stop changing, the order in which multiple moving images are played, and the timing of when they start and stop playing. On the other hand, the detailed display pattern data defines the detailed display control processes, such as the display order of sprite images to realize the changing display of decorative patterns, and the display processing order on a frame-by-frame basis to display moving images based on motion data.

When the performance control device 313 performs display control based on the "summary display pattern data" sent from the sub-CPU 310, it reads out the "detailed display pattern data" required for the process from the data ROM 324, and executes the display process using both display pattern data. Therefore, it can be said that the performance control device 313 executes the display control process based on the display pattern data including the "summary display pattern data" and the "detailed display pattern data". Therefore, in this specification, unless explicitly stated, the "summary display pattern data" stored in the sub-ROM 312 and the "detailed display pattern data" stored in the data ROM 324 are not distinguished, and are simply referred to as "display pattern data". For example, when the performance control means performs a specific process based on the display pattern data stored in the data storage means, this display pattern data includes the "summary display pattern data" and the "detailed display pattern data". In a modified example, the display pattern data is not divided into the "summary display pattern data" and the "detailed display pattern data", and the display pattern data serving both functions may be stored in the sub-ROM 312 or the data ROM 324.

In this embodiment, the hardware configuration of the performance control device 313 includes a control CPU 320, a control RAM 322, a data ROM 324, and a display control circuit 326. In a modified example, the control CPU 320, the control RAM 322, the data ROM 324, and the display control circuit 326 may be integrated rather than being configured as separate electronic components. In addition, the processing performed by the display control circuit 326 may be performed by the control CPU 320, the control RAM 322, or the data ROM 324. For example, the control CPU 320 included in the performance control device 313 may execute the processing performed by the decoder 332, the drawing circuit 336, and the display circuit 340 included in the display control circuit 326. In addition, the control RAM 322 included in the performance control device 313 may also function as the drawing memory 334 and the frame buffer 338. Alternatively, the performance control device 313 may have a hardware configuration that does not include the display control circuit 326, in which case the processing executed by the display control circuit 326 may be executed by the control CPU 320, the control RAM 322, or the data ROM 324.

In addition, in this embodiment, the hardware configuration of the sub-substrate 300 includes the sub-CPU 310, the sub-RAM 311, and the sub-ROM 312, as well as the performance control device 313. In a modified example, the sub-CPU 310, the sub-RAM 311, the ROM 312, and the performance control device 313 may be integrated, rather than being configured as separate electronic components. In addition, the processing performed by the performance control device 313 may be performed by the sub-CPU 310, the sub-RAM 311, or the sub-ROM 312. For example, the sub-CPU 310 may perform the processing of the control CPU 320, the sub-RAM 311 may also function as the control RAM 322, and the sub-ROM 312 may also function as the data ROM 324. In addition, the hardware configuration may not include the performance control device 313 in the sub-substrate 300, and in this case, the processing performed by the performance control device 313 may be performed by the sub-CPU 310, the sub-RAM 311, or the sub-ROM 312.

Figure 15 is a flow chart showing the control start process of the main board 200 in a pachinko gaming machine. This control start process is executed by the main initial process execution means 280, but from here on, it will be described as being executed by the main CPU 290 functioning as the main initial process execution means 280. When the power switch 150 is turned on, the main CPU 290 sets a stack pointer (S100), permits access to the main RAM 291 (S102), and executes initial settings related to the hardware, such as setting the main CPU 290's built-in registers (S104).

The main CPU 290 checks the operation state of the setting key, and if the setting key is ON (Y in S105), checks the operation state of the RAM clear switch. If the RAM clear switch is ON (Y in S122), it executes a setting change process (S124). On the other hand, if the RAM clear is OFF (N in S122), it executes a setting confirmation process (S126). Note that if the setting key is OFF in S105 (N in S105), the processes of S122 to S126 are skipped.

Next, depending on the operation state of the RAM clear switch, the value of the power off information flag, and the state of the data stored in the main RAM 291, a power off recovery process or a main RAM 291 initialization process is executed. Specifically, if the RAM clear switch is not turned ON and both the value of the power off information flag and the data stored in the main RAM 291 are normal, a power off recovery process is executed. In other cases, that is, if the RAM clear switch is turned ON, or if the RAM clear switch is not turned ON but either the power off information flag or the data stored in the main RAM 291 is not normal, a main RAM 291 initialization process is executed.

The main CPU 290 checks the operation state of the RAM clear switch, and if the RAM clear switch is ON (Y in S106), initializes the main RAM 291 (S116). If the RAM clear switch is not ON (N in S106), the main CPU 290 checks the value of the power off information flag (S108). If the value of the power off information flag does not match the power off normal data (N in S108), initializes the main RAM 291 (S116). If the value of the power off information flag matches the power off normal data (Y in S108), checks the data stored in the main RAM 291 (S110). As described below, if the process was completed normally at the time of the previous power off, the checksum of the data stored in the main RAM 291 is stored in the main RAM 291, so the main CPU 290 checks the data in the main RAM 291 using the checksum. If the data stored in the main RAM 291 is not normal (N in S112), initializes the data in the main RAM 291 (S116). If the data stored in the main RAM is normal (Y in S112), processing is performed to restore the state before the power was turned off (S114).

In the power failure recovery process (S114), normal power-on data indicating that the power was turned on normally is stored in the power failure information flag, and various error initialization and communication initialization with the payout control board 155 are performed. Next, any command requests that have not been sent before the power failure are cleared, and a request is made to send commands for various information indicating the game status. Next, a request is made for performance commands corresponding to the number of balls pending activation for the first special pattern and the second special pattern. Next, the open/closed state of the second start port 12 and the large prize port 20 is restored to the state before the power failure. Next, a process is executed to notify the activation state of the probability fluctuation function of the special pattern.

In the RAM initialization process (S116), normal power-on data is stored in the power-off information flag, the entire area of the main RAM 291 is cleared to 0, and the main RAM 291 is initialized and the performance display is initialized. Note that in the initialization process of S116, the setting values stored in the setting memory of the setting change device 170 are not cleared, and the setting values set in the setting change process of S124 are retained as they are.

When the power-off recovery process (S114) or RAM initialization process (S116) is completed, a count value is set to start the interrupt process described below, and the interrupt timer starts operating (S118). As a result, a timer interrupt occurs every predetermined time (e.g., 4 milliseconds), and the interrupt process described below is executed. Next, the main CPU 290 executes the main process for managing the gaming machine (S120).

Figure 16 is a flow chart showing the setting change process of S124 in Figure 15 in detail. The value of the setting memory where the setting value of the game setting should be stored is checked, and if the setting memory value is not normal (N in S132), the setting value is initialized to the initial value (S134). When "1" to "6" are used as the setting value data, "1" is set as the initial value, and when "0" to "5" are used as the setting value data, "0" is set as the initial value. If the setting memory value is normal (Y in S132), the processing of S134 is skipped. Next, the setting is changed (S136), and the setting value stored in the setting memory is displayed on the setting display unit 173 (S138). If a change operation is performed using the setting change button 172 (Y in S140), the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 is updated, and the setting value stored in the setting memory is updated (S142). If no change operation is performed (N in S140), the processing of S142 is skipped. If the setting key remains ON (N in S144), the process repeats S138 to S142. If the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to its original position and turned OFF (Y in S144), the setting display unit 173 is made invisible so that the setting value cannot be seen (S146), and the process returns.

Figure 17 is a flow chart showing the details of the setting confirmation process of S126 in Figure 15. The value of the setting memory where the game setting value should be stored is confirmed, and if the setting memory value is not normal (N in S152), the setting value is initialized to the initial value (S154). If the setting memory value is normal (Y in S152), the process of S154 is skipped. A setting confirmation state is entered (S156), and the setting value stored in the setting memory is displayed on the setting display unit 173 (S158). If the setting key remains ON (N in S160), the process of S158 is repeated to continue displaying the setting value, and if the setting key is turned OFF (Y in S160), the setting display unit 173 is made invisible so that the setting value cannot be seen (S162), and the process returns.

Figure 18 is a flow chart showing the main processing of S120 in Figure 15 in detail. The main CPU 290 temporarily prohibits timer interrupts (S200), starts the operation of the watchdog timer (S202), and monitors for power cutoff (S204). When a drop in the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 158 is detected in a power supply voltage monitoring circuit (not shown), the power supply voltage monitoring circuit inputs an unconditional interrupt request signal to the main CPU 290, and in the power cut storage processing executed by this, the power cut confirmation data is stored in the power cut confirmation flag. Therefore, the main CPU 290 monitors the value of the power cut confirmation flag (S204), and if the value of the power cut confirmation flag matches the power cut confirmation data (Y in S206), proceeds to S212 to execute processing for power cutoff. If the value of the power off confirmation flag does not match the power off confirmation data (N in S206), the initial value random number update process is executed (S208) to update the initial value random number for the normal symbol, the initial value random number for the special symbol, and the soft initial value random number for the special symbol, and the process returns to S200. After that, S200 to S210 are repeated. If a timer interrupt occurs while timer interrupt is prohibited (S202 to S208), the timer interrupt is permitted in S210, and the interrupt process described below is executed.

When a power cut is detected in S206 (Y in S206), the main CPU 290 restarts the watchdog timer (S212) and checks the contents of the power cut information flag (S214). If the contents of the power cut information flag do not match the power-on normal data (N in S214), it is determined that the data at the time of power-on is not stored correctly, and the power cut abnormality data is stored in the power cut information flag (S216), and the process proceeds to S222. If the contents of the power cut information flag match the power-on normal data (Y in S214), it is determined that the data at the time of power-on is stored correctly, and the power cut normal data is stored in the power cut information flag (S218). Next, in order to check the backed-up data of the main RAM 291 at the next power-on, the checksum of the data stored in the main RAM 291 is calculated and stored in the main RAM 291 (S220). Next, access to the main RAM 291 is prohibited (S222), and the process loops until the power is turned off. The above power-off processing is executed by the main power-off processing execution means 282 implemented by the main CPU 290.

Figure 19 is a flow chart showing details of the interrupt process. When a timer interrupt occurs during the main process (S120), the main CPU 290 executes the interrupt process. First, the interrupt operation conditions are set (S300), and the watchdog timer is restarted (S302). Next, in order to manage the gaming machine, input processing (S304), various random number update processing (S306), initial value update type random number update processing (S308), initial value random number update processing (S310), timer subtraction processing (S312), second start hole valid period setting processing (S314), winning monitoring processing (S316), prize ball control processing (S318), normal pattern operation gate monitoring processing (S320), normal pattern control processing (S322), normal pattern change start monitoring processing (S324), start hole monitoring control processing (S326), special pattern control processing (S328), special electric role control processing (S330) are performed. ), large prize opening validity period setting process (S332), special pattern change start monitoring control process (S334), abnormality detection process (S336), ball entry passing time abnormality detection process (S338), game status display process (S340), handle status signal inspection process (S342), LED output process (S344), launch control signal output process (S346), test signal output process (S348), solenoid output process (S350), performance control command transmission process (S352), and external information output process (S354) are executed in that order, the next timer interrupt is permitted (S356), and then the process returns.

In input processing (S304), data from the input ports of the switches attached to the game board, open/short circuit/power supply abnormality detection signals, door/frame opening signals, magnetic detection signals, radio wave detection signals, and touch status signals are monitored, and data indicating the input status is created and stored in main RAM 291. Note that this data indicating the input status is level data (input port data at the time of the current interruption) and rising or falling data (data indicating the switch that was found to have switched by comparing the input port data at the time of the current interruption with the input port data at the time of the previous interruption using an exclusive OR).

In the various random number update process (S306), the normal pattern fluctuation pattern random number and the fluctuation pattern random number are updated. The normal pattern fluctuation pattern random number is read from main RAM 291, and if the value is less than a predetermined maximum value, the value is incremented and stored, and if the value is equal to or greater than the predetermined maximum value, 0 is stored. Also, the fluctuation pattern random number is read from main RAM 291, and if the result of subtracting a predetermined value from the value is equal to or greater than 0, the subtraction result is stored, and if it is less than 0, the predetermined maximum value is stored. In this way, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern random number and the fluctuation pattern random number are updated every time a timer interrupt occurs.

In the initial value update type random number update process (S308), the random number per normal symbol, the pattern random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol are updated. The value, maximum value, and initial value of each random number are read from the main RAM 291, and the random number value is incremented. If the increment result exceeds the maximum value, the random number value is set to 0. If the increment result matches the initial value, the initial value random number is read from the main RAM 291, and the initial value is updated. In this way, the random number per normal symbol, the pattern random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol are updated every time a timer interrupt occurs, and when the value of the random number returns to the initial value, i.e., when one cycle of the random number range has been completed, a new initial value is set and a random number is generated.

In the initial value random number update process (S310), the initial value random number for a normal pattern, the pattern initial value random number for a special pattern, and the soft initial value random number for a special pattern are updated. The initial value random number is read from the initial value random number update table in the main RAM 291, and the value of the initial value random number is incremented. If the increment result exceeds the upper limit value, the value of the initial value random number is set to 0. The same process is also executed in the initial value random number update process (S208) in the main process (S120).

In the timer subtraction process (S312), the 2-byte timer is updated. The timer values for various controls are read from the main RAM 291 according to the respective tables, and if the timer value is other than 0, the value is sequentially decremented and stored. If the timer value is 0, the timer is not updated.

In the second start port valid period setting process (S314), the valid period of the second start port 12 is set. In the second start port 12, a valid period during which the prize ball is paid out and the lottery for the second special pattern is executed when a game ball enters, and an invalid period during which the prize ball is not paid out and the lottery for the second special pattern is not executed even if a game ball enters, are set. As described later, in the start port monitoring control process (S326), the monitoring process for the second start port entry is not executed during the invalid period of the second start port 12, so that the prize ball is not paid out and the lottery for the second special pattern is not executed even if a game ball enters the second start port 12. The same applies when a valid period and an invalid period are set for the first start port 11, the large prize port 20, the first operation port 31, the second operation port 32, the general prize port 33, etc. If the state of the normal pattern is "normal electric role in operation", the second start port valid period flag is stored with data indicating that the second start port 12 is in a valid period. If the state of the normal pattern is not "normal electric role in operation", if the value of the second start port valid extension timer is not 0, the second start port valid period flag is stored with data indicating that the second start port 12 is in a valid period, and if the value of the second start port valid extension timer is 0, the second start port valid period flag is stored with data indicating that the second start port is in an invalid period.

In the winning monitoring process (S316), the game ball passing through the switch is checked, and when the game ball passes through the switch, if the switch is not in an invalid period or is currently in an active period, and if a prize ball has been paid out, the winning counter is updated. Also, a security output request to be output to the external information output terminal 160 is created, and a command is sent.

In the prize ball control process (S318), the following operations are sequentially performed: monitoring data reception from the payout control board 155, requesting command transmission to the payout control board 155, transmitting the command to the payout control board 155, and inspecting the data received from the payout control board 155.

In the normal symbol activation gate monitoring process (S320), the passage of the game ball through the first activation port 31 and the second activation port 32 is monitored, and when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the first activation port 31 or the second activation port 32, if the number of reserved normal symbol variations is less than the upper limit of four, the number of reserved normal symbols is updated, and a random number related to the normal symbol is stored in the main RAM 291.

In the normal pattern control process (S322), the state of the normal pattern is monitored, and if it is determined that the normal pattern is being controlled, a process related to the normal pattern display unit 45 or the normal electric role 90 is executed. If the state of the normal pattern is "normal pattern changing", a process during normal pattern change is executed; if it is "normal pattern stop pattern displaying", a process during normal pattern stop pattern display is executed; if it is "normal electric role in operation", a process during normal electric role operation is executed; if it is "normal electric role operation end demo in progress", a process during normal electric role operation end demo is executed. In the normal pattern change process, after the normal pattern is changed, the change time is monitored, and if it is determined that the normal pattern change time has ended, a change stop setting for the normal pattern is executed, and the state of the normal pattern is set to "normal pattern stop pattern displaying". In the normal pattern stop pattern display process, the stop pattern display time of the normal pattern is monitored, and if it is determined that the stop pattern display time of the normal pattern has ended, a normal pattern operation end setting corresponding to the result of the winning judgment is executed. In the case of a win, the state of the normal symbol is set to "normal electric device in operation", the operation state of the normal electric device opening extension function at the time when the normal electric device operation started is saved, and the operation setting of the normal electric device solenoid 91 corresponding to the operation state of the normal electric device opening extension function at the time when the normal electric device operation started is executed. In the case of a loss, the state of the normal symbol is set to "standby for normal symbol change". In the normal electric device operation process, the winning of the game ball in the winning hole related to the normal electric device 90 is monitored, and if it is determined that the number of winning holes related to the normal electric device 90 has reached the maximum number of winning, the operation end setting of the normal electric device 90 and the setting of the effective extension time of the second starting hole are executed. If it is determined that the number of winnings at the winning port related to the normal electric role 90 has not reached the maximum number of winnings, the opening/closing time of the entrance of the winning port related to the normal electric role 90 is monitored, and the opening/closing of the entrance of the winning port related to the normal electric role 90 is set. If it is determined that the opening of the entrance of the normal electric role 90 has ended, the operation end setting of the normal electric role 90 and the setting of the effective extension time of the second starting port are executed. Note that if it is determined that the opening/closing time of the entrance of the winning port related to the normal electric role 90 has not ended, the opening/closing setting of the entrance of the winning port related to the normal electric role 90 is not executed. In the normal electric role operation end demo processing, the operation end demo time of the normal electric role 90 is monitored, and if it is determined that the operation end demo time of the normal electric role 90 has ended, the state of the normal pattern is set to "waiting for normal pattern change".

In the normal pattern change start monitoring process (S324), the state of the normal pattern is monitored, and if it is "waiting for normal pattern change" and the value of the number of balls reserved for normal pattern operation is other than 0, it is determined that the normal pattern change should be started. If it is determined that the normal pattern change should be started, the number of balls reserved for normal pattern operation is decremented, and a win determination is made, the stopping pattern is decided, the change pattern number of the normal pattern is set, and the change time of the normal pattern is set. After that, the state of the normal pattern is set to "normal pattern changing", and the area of main RAM 291 used for setting the state of the normal pattern, the win determination, and the change pattern determination is cleared.

In the start port monitoring control process (S326), the entry of the game ball into the first start port 11 and the second start port 12 is monitored. When the entry of the game ball is confirmed when the number of activated reserved balls of the first special pattern is less than 4, a built-in random number is acquired, and the value obtained by adding the value of the special pattern soft random number to the acquired built-in random number is stored in the buffer as the special pattern random number used in the jackpot judgment. In addition, a pattern random number and a variable pattern random number are acquired and stored as random numbers related to the special pattern. When the reserved second special pattern is consumed in priority to the reserved first special pattern, only the reservation related to the winning is updated, but when the reserved special pattern is consumed in the order of winning, in addition to updating the reservation related to the winning, the total reserved number is updated and the winning order is stored. Next, in order to request a notice performance command corresponding to the random number stored at the time of the winning of the start port, the state of the gaming machine is checked, and if it is determined to be a command transmission period, a winning notice performance request, a winning pattern notice performance request, and a pattern notice performance request are executed in that order. Here, it is determined that it is a command transmission period when it corresponds to any of the following cases: (1) when a random number related to the first special symbol is stored while waiting for a win and the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol is not yet activated, (2) when a random number related to the second special symbol is stored while waiting for a win and the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol is not yet activated, and (3) when a random number related to the second special symbol is stored during a big win or a small win. Next, it requests a performance command corresponding to the number of reserved balls for operation of the special symbol. This notifies the sub-substrate 300 that the number of reserved balls for operation of the special symbol has been updated. As described above, in the pre-reading, four pieces of pre-judgment information (pre-win/loss judgment information, pre-pattern judgment information, pre-pattern judgment information), and the number of reserved balls are transmitted to the sub-substrate 300 as a set. In the above example, the main CPU 290 controlled the transmission of commands for the pre-judgment process, but in another example, when a ball enters the starting hole, it transmits them uniformly, and the sub-CPU 310 may make various situation judgments such as whether it is a pre-reading possible period or not. Next, the value of the second start port valid period flag is checked, and if the value of the second start port valid period flag is data indicating that the second start port 12 is in a valid period, the second start port winning monitoring process is executed as in the case of a first start port winning. If the value of the second start port valid period flag is data indicating that the second start port 12 is in an invalid period, the second start port winning monitoring process is not executed. Note that if a game ball winning is confirmed when the number of reserved balls is 0, the number of reserved balls is once changed from 0 to 1, and the control process related to the start of fluctuation, which will be described later, is executed.

In the special symbol control process (S328), the waiting state is checked, and if the special electric role is in operation, i.e., in the middle of a big win or small win, the special symbol control process is terminated. If the special electric role is not in operation, the state of the special symbol is checked, and if it is "waiting for special symbol change", the special symbol control general process is terminated, if it is "start of change", the special symbol change start process is executed, if it is "special symbol changing", the special symbol change process is executed, and if it is "special symbol stop pattern displaying", the special symbol stop pattern display process is executed. In the special symbol change start process, the selection number of the special symbol change pattern is obtained based on the change pattern random number, the change time corresponding to the special symbol change pattern number is determined, and the sub-board 300 is requested to start the performance display, and the change additional symbol information, change pattern, and character information commands are requested, the state of the special symbol is set to "special symbol changing", and the change pattern determination area used to determine the special symbol change pattern is cleared to 0. In the special symbol variation process, after the special symbol varies, the variation time is monitored, and if it is determined that the variation time of the special symbol has ended, a setting to stop the variation of the special symbol is performed, and the state of the special symbol is set to "special symbol stopped symbol being displayed." In the special symbol stopped symbol display process, the display time of the special symbol stopped symbol is monitored, and if it is determined that the display time of the special symbol stopped symbol has ended, a setting to end the operation of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the winning determination is executed. In the event of a jackpot, the state of the special pattern is set to "waiting for special pattern change" to end the operation of the special pattern, the number of times the special electric device will operate in succession is set, the special pattern probability change function, special pattern change time reduction function, normal pattern probability change function, normal pattern change time reduction function, and normal electric device opening extension function are deactivated, the state of the gaming machine is set to preparing to open the large prize opening, and the settings are made for the hit start demo display time, a command request for the hit start demo performance, and a command request for the launch position designation performance (a command request for executing a performance that suggests a recommended launch position, such as "right hit"). If the result of the hit judgment is a small hit, the operation end judgment of the special pattern change time shortening function and the normal pattern probability change function is performed, the change pattern selection state is updated, a command request for the game state is made, and in order to end the operation of the special pattern, the state of the special pattern is set to "waiting for special pattern change", the state of the gaming machine is set to the small hit start demo, and a command request for setting the hit start demo display time, a command request for the hit start demo performance, and a command request for the launch position designation performance are executed. If the result of the hit judgment is a miss, the operation end judgment of the special pattern change time shortening function and the normal pattern probability change function is performed, the change pattern selection state is updated, a command request for the game state is made, and in order to end the operation of the special pattern, the state of the special pattern is set to "waiting for special pattern change", and a command request for the launch position designation performance is executed.

In the special electric device control process (S330), in order to execute processing related to the special electric device, the operating status of the condition device and the special electric device is checked, and if it is determined that the condition device is operating or the special electric device is operating, the processing related to the special electric device is executed. Depending on the operating status of the special electric device, the processing during preparation for opening the large prize opening, the processing during special electric device operation, the processing during closing of the large prize opening, the processing during demo during the end of the large prize, the processing during demo during the start of the small prize, the processing during special electric power operation for the small prize, the processing during closing of the large prize opening for the small prize, and the processing during demo during the end of the small prize are executed.

In the large prize opening valid period setting process (S332), in order to save the result of the valid period determination of the large prize opening 20, if the value of the large prize opening valid time is 0, the large prize opening invalid period data is stored in the large prize opening valid period flag, and if it is other than 0, the large prize opening valid period data is stored in the large prize opening valid period flag.

In the special symbol change start monitoring control process (S334), the operating state of the special symbol is monitored, and it is determined whether the special symbol is in a state where it can start changing. If the order of consumption of reserved balls for the special symbol is the priority consumption of the second special symbol, it is determined that the special symbol is in a state where it can start changing when all of the following are met: (1) not in a big win or small win, (2) the first special symbol is waiting to change, (3) the second special symbol is waiting to change, and (4) the number of reserved balls for the special symbol is other than 0. If the order of consumption of reserved balls for the special symbol is the order of winning, it is determined that the special symbol is in a state where it can start changing when all of the following are met: (5) the total number of reserved balls for the special symbol is other than 0, and (6) the judgment matches the consumption order, i.e., the order of winning, in addition to the above (1) to (3).

When it is determined that the special symbol is in a state where it can start to change, the number of reserved balls for that special symbol is subtracted, and a performance command corresponding to the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is requested. This notifies the sub-board 300 that the number of reserved balls for the special symbol has been updated.

Next, a hit determination for the special symbol is performed. In the hit determination, the special symbol hit random number is used to determine whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss, and the determination result is stored in the special symbol determination flag. Next, the symbol is determined. In determining the symbol, if the hit determination is a big hit, the big hit symbol is determined based on the special symbol hit random number, if it is a small hit, the small hit symbol is determined, and if it is a miss, the miss symbol is determined.

If the result of the hit determination is a jackpot, the operation contents of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol are determined based on the value of the group determination number indicating the type of winning symbol determined in the pattern determination process, and the game state after the jackpot is set, such as the operation contents of the special symbol fluctuation time reduction function and the easy winning state of the normal symbol. Next, settings during the jackpot are executed, such as the number of times the special electric roler operates consecutively and the contents of the opening time of the large winning port. Next, the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection state are set by selecting the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to after the jackpot is ended based on the result of the hit determination and the operating state of the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol. Next, the start demo time and end demo time are set by referring to the table selected based on the value of the group determination number indicating the type of winning symbol and the game state. Next, the area of the main RAM 291 used for the hit determination and symbol determination is cleared, and the state of the special symbol is set to "start of fluctuation".

If the result of the hit judgment is a small hit, the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection state are set by selecting the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to after the small hit ends, the start demo time and end demo time are set, the area of main RAM 291 used for hit judgment and pattern determination is cleared, and the state of the special pattern is set to "fluctuation start." If the result of the hit judgment is a miss, the area of main RAM 291 used for hit judgment and pattern determination is cleared, and the state of the special pattern is set to "fluctuation start."

In the abnormality detection process (S336), the main CPU 290 functioning as the main error detection means 284 checks the magnetic detection signal, the open/short circuit power supply abnormality detection signal, the radio wave detection signal, and the door/frame open signal, and if there is a change in the error state, it stores the error state and requests the sub-board 300 to display an error state presentation of the gaming machine. At this time, the light emission mode of the light-emitting means such as an LED mounted on the control board may be controlled according to the error state. If there is no change in the error state, the request to store the error state and to display the error state presentation is not executed.

In the ball entry passing time abnormality detection process (S338), the main CPU 290, functioning as the main error detection means 284, monitors the continuous on time of each switch level to detect ball entry passing time abnormalities, and if it determines that the continuous on time (e.g., the value of a counter that increments with each interrupt when the switch is on) is an abnormal value, it sequentially sets a ball entry passing time abnormality, requests to send a command, and creates a security output request to be output to the external information output terminal 160. At this time, the light emission mode of a light emitting means such as an LED mounted on the control board may be controlled according to the ball entry passing time abnormality. If it determines that the continuous on time is not abnormal, it does not create a security output request.

In the game status display process (S340), the display data for each of the following is created to request the display of the number of times the special electric device has been activated in succession, the error state, the number of activated balls for normal symbols, and the number of activated balls for special symbols.

In the steering wheel state signal inspection process (S342), the steering wheel state is inspected to monitor the touch state of the steering wheel. If the inspection determines that there has been a change in the steering wheel state, the steering wheel state monitoring timer is decremented, the steering wheel state is updated, the steering wheel state monitoring timer is set, and a request to send a command to display the steering wheel state is executed. If the inspection determines that there has been no change in the steering wheel state, the steering wheel state monitoring timer is set. If the result of decrementing the steering wheel state monitoring timer is other than 0, it is determined that the timer is decrementing, and no further processing is executed.

In the LED output process (S344), the display is initialized, and display data is acquired and output in order to display the special symbol, the normal symbol, the number of balls reserved for activation of the special symbol, the number of balls reserved for activation of the normal symbol, the game status, the number of times the special electric device will operate consecutively, the operating status of the special electric device when the device continuous operation device is not operating, the type of shot, the error, and the prize ball ratio.

In the launch control signal output process (S346), in order to output a signal prohibiting/allowing the launch of game balls, the communication status with the payout control board 155 and the setting of prohibiting/allowing launch corresponding to the disconnection/short circuit power supply abnormality, as well as the launch prohibiting/allowing data are acquired, and then the launch prohibiting/allowing signal is output.

In the test signal output process (S348), a signal to be output to the test device is created and output to the corresponding output port.

In the solenoid output process (S350), in order to output the output data of the normal electric role solenoid 91 and the large prize opening solenoid 92, the output data of the normal electric role solenoid 91 is acquired, the output data of the large prize opening solenoid 92 is acquired, and the output data is output. The operation flag and operation timer of each solenoid are acquired, and output data corresponding to the acquired solenoid operation flag and solenoid operation timer is acquired. Next, the solenoid operation timer is updated, and the output data is output to the solenoid output port.

In the performance control command transmission process (S352), the presence or absence of a request to send a command to the sub-board 300 is checked, and if it is determined that there is a request to send, the requested command data is obtained, the command buffer used is cleared to 0, and the following steps are sequentially performed: obtaining MODE data corresponding to the obtained command data, outputting the MODE data, retaining the MODE data, obtaining EVENT data corresponding to the obtained command data, and outputting the EVENT data.

In the external information output process (S354), a signal is created to be output to the external information output terminal 160, and the created signal is output to the external information output port.

The random numbers used in the operation process of the main board 200 described above will be explained in more detail. The random numbers used in the main board 200 mainly include normal pattern random numbers and normal pattern variation pattern random numbers as random numbers related to normal patterns, and special pattern random numbers (hard random numbers), special pattern soft random numbers, special pattern random numbers, and variation pattern random numbers as random numbers related to special patterns. In addition, the random numbers for providing the initial values of the normal pattern random numbers, special pattern random numbers, and special pattern soft random numbers, which are initial value update type random numbers, include normal pattern initial value random numbers, special pattern initial value random numbers, and special pattern soft initial value random numbers.

The normal symbol random number is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined position in the main RAM 291. When the normal symbol activation gate monitoring process (S320) of the interrupt process determines that the game ball has passed through the first activation port 31 or the second activation port 32, and the number of reserved normal symbol fluctuations is less than the upper limit of four, the normal symbol random number is obtained from a predetermined position in the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The normal symbol random number is used to determine a win and the stopping symbol when it is determined in the normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (S324) that the normal symbol fluctuation should be started.

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number takes a value between 0 and 232, for example, and is updated in the various random number update processes (S306) of the interrupt process and stored in a predetermined position in the main RAM 291. When it is determined in the normal symbol activation gate monitoring process (S320) of the interrupt process that the game ball has passed through the first activation port 31 or the second activation port 32, and the number of reserved normal symbol fluctuations is less than the upper limit of four, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number is obtained from a predetermined position in the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number is used to determine the normal symbol fluctuation pattern when it is determined in the normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (S324) that the normal symbol fluctuation should be started.

The special symbol random number is generated by obtaining the values of the built-in random number and the special symbol soft random number and adding them together when a winning game ball is confirmed when the number of activated balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than four in the start gate monitoring control process (S326) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a specified location in the main RAM 291. The special symbol random number is used to execute a big hit determination and a small hit determination in the special symbol change start monitoring control process (S334) of the interrupt process.

The soft random number for the special symbol is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined position in the main RAM 291. The soft random number for the special symbol is obtained from a predetermined position in the main RAM 291 when the start port monitoring control process (S326) confirms that a game ball has won when the number of activated balls for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than four, and is used to generate the random number for the special symbol, as described above.

The special symbol hit random number takes a value between 0 and 999 (0 and 255 in the example of FIG. 7), for example, and is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process and stored in a predetermined location in the main RAM 291. The special symbol hit random number is obtained from a predetermined location in the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291 when the start gate monitoring control process (S326) confirms that a game ball has won when the number of active balls for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than four. The special symbol hit random number is used to determine the jackpot symbol when the hit determination is a jackpot in the special symbol change start monitoring control process (S334) of the interrupt process.

The fluctuation pattern random number takes a value between 0 and 49999 (0 to 255 in the example of FIG. 8), for example, and is updated in the various random number update processes (S306) of the interrupt process and stored in a predetermined position in the main RAM 291. The fluctuation pattern random number is obtained from a predetermined position in the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291 when the winning game ball is confirmed in the start gate monitoring control process (S326) when the number of activated balls of the first special pattern or the second special pattern is less than four. The fluctuation pattern random number is used to determine the special pattern fluctuation pattern in the special pattern control process (S328) of the interrupt process.

The normal pattern initial value random number, the special pattern initial value random number, and the special pattern soft initial value random number take values in the same range as the normal pattern random number, the special pattern random number, and the special pattern soft random number, and are updated in the initial value random number update process (S208) of the main process (S120) and the initial value random number update process (S310) of the interrupt process, and are stored in a predetermined position in the main RAM 291. The normal pattern initial value random number, the special pattern initial value random number, and the special pattern soft initial value random number are used as the initial values of the respective random numbers when updating the normal pattern random number, the special pattern random number, and the special pattern soft random number in the initial value update type random number update process (S308).

The interrupt process is executed at regular intervals by a timer interrupt, so the various random number update processes (S306) and the initial value update type random number update process (S308) included in the interrupt process are also executed at regular intervals. That is, the normal symbol random number, the normal symbol variation pattern random number, the special symbol random number, the special symbol soft random number, the special symbol symbol random number, and the variation pattern random number are updated at regular intervals. In contrast, the main process (S120) is repeated from the end of the interrupt process to the occurrence of the next timer interrupt, that is, for the time obtained by subtracting the time required for the interrupt process from the fixed time measured by the timer. The time required for the interrupt process differs depending on the game state, etc., so the initial value random number update process (S208) in the main process (S120) is not executed at regular intervals, unlike the various random number update processes (S306) and the initial value update type random number update process (S308). This allows the initial value random number obtained when setting the initial value in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) to be random each time.

Figure 20 is a flowchart showing the control start process of the sub-substrate 300 in a pachinko game machine. This control start process is executed by the sub-initialization execution means 360, but from now on, it will be described as being executed by the sub-CPU 310 functioning as the sub-initialization execution means 360. When control of the sub-substrate 300 is started, the sub-CPU 310 sets a stack pointer (S500), prohibits all interrupts until various initial settings are completed (S502), and executes initial settings related to hardware such as register settings and port initialization of the sub-CPU 310 (S504). The control program is read from the sub-ROM 312 and placed in the sub-RAM 311, and among various variables in the control program, initial values are set for variables with initial values, and zero-clear data is set for variables without initial values, thereby initializing the sub-RAM 311 (S506). Note that the interrupt process in the sub-substrate 300 is executed with the highest priority as the process at power up and the reset process at the occurrence of various abnormalities when the watchdog function is active. The next highest priority level 7 interrupt process is command processing received from the main board 200, and the next highest priority level 3 interrupt process is reset processing when a CPU runaway is detected by the watchdog timer. The next highest priority level 2 interrupt process is processing related to commands sent and received between the control CPU 320, and the lowest priority level 1 interrupt process is communication processing with the real-time clock and various device control processes such as lamps, solenoids, and motors. If interrupts related to the above various processes occur simultaneously, they are executed in order of priority, starting from the highest priority set for each type of interrupt. The processes shown in this figure include the highest priority level interrupts, processing when the power is turned on and reset processing when various abnormalities occur, and the priority level 3 interrupt reset processing when a CPU runaway is detected.

Interrupts (priority level 7) other than commands received from the main board 200 are prohibited (S510), and various error information to be used for that model is set from all pre-stored error information for all models (S512). All lamps such as the decorative lamp 111 are turned off (S514), the watchdog timer starts operating (S516), and main processing is executed (S518). Normally, the flow does not return from the main processing of S518 to this flow, but when it does return, it transitions to sleep (low power consumption mode) (S520).

Figure 21 is a flow chart showing in detail the main processing of S518 in Figure 20. In order to check within the main processing of this figure whether the control program placed in the sub-RAM 311 in S506 in Figure 20 is correctly placed, the start address for the check is obtained (S530), all interrupts are permitted in the subsequent processing (S532), and initialization operations are performed for devices such as motors and solenoids (S534).

If the watchdog timer is set to be used, the watchdog timer is cleared (S536), the counter for the decorative symbols is updated so that the combination of the decorative symbols that will result in a loss becomes a random combination (S540), and the input port of the sub-CPU 310 is monitored (S542). Since S540 is a process in a method of determining the loss of the decorative symbols using a counter, the process of S540 is not executed in the case of a method of determining the loss of the decorative symbols using a lottery sheet that incorporates all the pattern combinations that will result in a loss. The process of determining the loss of the decorative symbols using the lottery sheet is executed when a command indicating the stop pattern of the special pattern is received from the main board 200 as described later in S552. The sub-CPU 310, which functions as the sub-error detection means 364, monitors the error state and reports the error when it detects various errors (S544), executes a process according to the input state of the performance button 109 (S546), and executes a notice lottery (S548). In addition, in order to send the command for the preview performance to be displayed immediately after the start of the pattern change to the performance control device 313 as early as possible, the lottery process in S548 is not processed in one loop but is divided into multiple loops, and the preview performance to be displayed immediately after the start of the pattern change is selected in the first loop. If there is an operation request for a device such as a real-time clock, a lamp, a motor, or a solenoid, the operation is executed (S550), the command stored in the command buffer is analyzed (S552), and if it is immediately after the command analysis, the process returns to S536 (Y in S554), and if it is not immediately after the command analysis (N in S554), the lottery software random number is updated (S556), which is a low-priority process that can be performed in a spare time, and the process returns to S536. In addition, in S552, if the analyzed command indicates a special pattern change pattern, the decorative pattern change presentation pattern is determined by the processing of this S552, and if the analyzed command indicates a special stopping pattern, and if a lottery sheet is used to determine the losing decorative pattern, the decorative stopping pattern is determined by the processing of this S552.

Figure 22 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing when a command is received from the main board 200. The main command received from the main board 200 is an interrupt command with a priority level of 7, which is the next highest priority after the reset interrupt and the error interrupt. The data received from the main board 200 is read from the input port, and when the same data is read twice in succession, the data is confirmed as a new command (Y in S600). If the confirmed command is the first command (MODE data) (Y in S602), the first command is saved in the temporary storage area (S604). A hard random number is obtained for subsequent processing (S606), and the original routine is returned to. In this way, by obtaining a hard random number every time there is an interruption of the main command from the main board 200, periodicity is not generated in the timing of obtaining the random number, and the randomness of the value is increased. If the data read in S600 does not match twice in succession (it can be read up to five times), S602 is skipped and the original routine is returned to (N in S600).

In S602, if the confirmed command is not the first command but the second command (N in S602), and it is confirmed that the first command has already been properly received (Y in S608), a command write pointer, which is the read position in the command buffer (ring buffer for command data), is obtained (S610), and the first command and the second command are saved in the command buffer (S612). The command data saved in the command buffer is analyzed in S552 of FIG. 21. The command write pointer is updated (S614), the first command saved in the temporary storage area is cleared (S616), and the original routine is returned to. If the first command has not been received in S608, S610 and subsequent steps are skipped (N in S608), and the original routine is returned to.

Figure 23 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing when a timer interrupt for controlling the display of effects occurs. This timer interrupt is a priority level 2 interrupt for sending commands related to the display of effects from the sub CPU 310 to the control CPU 320, and occurs at a cycle of 500 μs. In this interrupt, the buffer is checked (S620), and if there is command data to be sent in the buffer (Y in S622), the command data is read (S624) and sent to the control CPU 320 (S626). Note that the command data to be sent to the control CPU 320 is attempted up to three times at a predetermined time interval until the sub CPU 310 receives a command from the control CPU 320 indicating that the data has been received normally on the control CPU 320 side. After sending, the setting of the read address of the buffer is updated (S628), and the original routine is returned to. If there is no data to be sent in the buffer (N in S622), S624 and subsequent steps are skipped and the original routine is returned to.

Figure 24 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing when the sub CPU 310 receives a command from the control CPU 320. This interrupt is also a priority level 2 interrupt. The command that the sub CPU 310 receives from the control CPU 320 is mainly a command indicating that the command sent from the sub CPU 310 to the control CPU 320 was received successfully. When a command is received from the control CPU 320, the received command data is read (S630), the command is analyzed (S632), and saved in the command buffer (S634), and the original routine is returned to.

Figure 25 is a flow chart showing interrupt processing when a timer interrupt for controlling various devices occurs. This timer interrupt is an interrupt for lamp control such as the decorative lamp 111, control of the solenoid and motor that drives the movable prop 66, and management control of various timers, and occurs at a 1 ms cycle. Since this is an interrupt of priority level 1, which has the lowest priority, interrupts of priority level 2 or higher are permitted (S640), and input/output of ports that input/output signals such as signals indicating input from the performance button 109, signals indicating error detection, signals indicating power failure, and drive signals for controlled devices such as motors and solenoids is processed (S642). At this time, if a signal indicating power failure is input, the process immediately transitions to backup processing. Data related to device control is updated (S644), such as counting based on the control patterns of devices such as motors and solenoids, and on/off control of the buffer for writing data to the port in S642, a timer for timing the performance is updated (S646), a timer for managing the effective input time of the performance button 109 is updated (S648), and task control counters for switching the decorative lamp 111 on and off and for monitoring runaway control of the control CPU 320 are updated to create a 16 ms cycle (S650).

The minimum unit for the lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111 is 16 ms. One frame of image display control is 16 ms or 32 ms, and by setting an integer multiple of this as the minimum unit for the lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111, it is possible to easily synchronize the lamp control and the image display control. Also, when counting a relatively long period, such as a 30-second error notification, if a count with a one-interrupt (1 ms) cycle is used, the count value will be longer than necessary, but by using a count value with a 16 ms cycle, the count value can be shortened.

There are 16 types of tasks in the task control, from processes 0 to 15, of which one task is the lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111, and the other two are runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320. The lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111 is performed once every 16 interrupts according to the count value of the task control counter, thereby achieving switching at a cycle of 16 ms. The runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320 is assigned to processes 0 and 8, for example, and when the count value of the task control counter is 0 and 8, i.e. once every 8 interrupts, the toggle signal from the control CPU 320 is monitored (S652), thereby achieving monitoring at a cycle of 8 ms.

The control CPU 320 outputs a toggle signal that is inverted on and off every frame, and if this toggle signal does not change and remains the same value for 1600 ms consecutively, it is determined that the control CPU 320 is out of control, and a reset signal is sent from the sub CPU 310 to the control CPU 320, and upon receiving the reset signal, the control CPU 320 executes a reset. Since the toggle signal is received from the control CPU 320 at a cycle of one frame (16 ms or 32 ms), it is monitored at a cycle of 8 ms, which is shorter than that cycle. Finally, a timer that manages a relatively long error notification period, such as the 30 second error notification described above, is decremented (S654), and the error notification ends when the timer times out.

Figure 26 is a flow chart showing the process of displaying the special symbol variation. If the second winning/losing lottery value is reserved (Y in S700), the second winning/losing determination means 222 reads out the second winning/losing lottery value and determines whether the second special symbol 52 is a winning/losing symbol (S702), the second winning/losing determination means 222 determines the stopping symbol of the second special symbol 52 (S704), the second variation pattern determination means 232 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 (S706), and sends a variation start command together with the determined result to the sub-board 300 to start the variation of the second special symbol 52 (S716).

If the second winning/losing selection value is not reserved (N in S700) and the first winning/losing selection value is reserved (Y in S708), the first winning/losing determination means 221 reads out the first winning/losing selection value and determines again whether the first special pattern 51 is a winning/losing selection (S710), the first winning/losing determination means 221 determines the stopping pattern of the first special pattern 51 (S712), the first variation pattern determination means 231 determines the variation pattern of the first special pattern 51 (S714), and sends a variation start command together with the determined result to the sub-board 300 to start the variation of the pattern of the first special pattern 51 (S716). If the first winning/losing selection value is not reserved, the processes from S710 to S722 are skipped (N in S708).

The display of the special pattern change is processed (S718), and S718 is repeated until the predetermined change time has elapsed and the timing to stop the pattern display is reached (N at S720). When the predetermined change time has elapsed and the timing to stop the pattern display is reached (Y at S720), a change stop command is sent to the sub-board 300 to stop the pattern change being displayed at a predetermined stop pattern (S722), and the display of the special pattern change is ended.

27 is a flowchart showing the process of displaying the change in the decorative pattern. The effect determination means 303 of the sub-board 300 receives a command indicating the start of the change and the display content from the main board 200 (S750), determines the stop mode of the decorative pattern according to the received stop pattern of the special pattern, the change pattern, and the result of the hit/miss judgment (S752), and determines the change performance pattern corresponding to the change pattern (S754). Here, if the premonition setting is turned on by the premonition judgment (Y in S756), if the already determined change performance pattern is not a pattern including a specific performance content that should be avoided from being superimposed with the advance notice performance (N in S758), and if it is not the pattern change that triggered the premonition setting to be turned on (N in S760), execute the setting to display the predetermined advance notice performance (S764), and if it is the pattern change that triggered the premonition setting to be turned on (Y in S760), turn off the premonition setting (S762). If the premonition setting is not on (N in S756) or if the variable presentation pattern includes specific presentation content (Y in S758), processing from S760 to S764 is skipped.

Then, the display of the decorative pattern change performance is started (S766), and the decorative pattern change performance display process (S768) and the preview performance display process are executed (S770). S768 and S770 are repeated (N in S772) until a change stop command is received from the main board 200. When the change stop command is received (Y in S772), the decorative pattern change display is stopped by displaying the decorative pattern in the stop mode determined in S752 (S774), and the decorative pattern change performance is ended (S776).

Figure 28 is a flow chart showing the process of the special game. First, the effect display control means 305 starts the effect processing of the special game (S800), and the opening/closing control means 275 opens the large prize opening 20 (S802). If the predetermined opening time has not elapsed (N in S804) and the number of balls entering the large prize opening 20 has not reached 9 or more, the process returns to S804 (N in S806). If the predetermined opening time has elapsed (Y in S804) or the number of balls entering the large prize opening 20 has reached 9 or more (Y in S806) even though the opening time has not elapsed (N in S804), the opening/closing control means 275 closes the large prize opening 20 (S810).

If the unit game has not reached the final round (N in S810), the number of rounds is incremented by 1 and the process returns to S802 (S812). If the unit game has reached the final round (Y in S810), the presentation display control means 305 ends the presentation processing of the special game (S814), the special game control means 260 ends the special game (S816), and starts the execution of a specific game, i.e., a special bonus, time-saving, or easy-to-score state (S818).

Figure 29 is a flow chart showing the process of a small win game. In a small win game, a unit game that is executed only once is started (S819), the large prize opening 20 is opened (S820), and the opening is continued until a predetermined opening time has elapsed (N in S822). If the opening time has elapsed (Y in S822), the large prize opening 20 is closed (S824). If the opening and closing has not been completed the set number of times (N in S826), the number of openings and closings is incremented by 1 and the process returns to S820 (S828). If the opening and closing has been completed the set number of times (Y in S826), the small win game ends.

In the premise technology, the number of balls in the second game is generally larger than the number of balls in the first game, that is, the expected value of winning balls in one jackpot in the second game is larger than that in the first game. In another example, the first game may be designed to have a larger expected value of winning balls than the second game, or the expected value of winning balls in the first game and the second game may be designed to be approximately equal. In the latter case, the average number of unit games included in the special game executed in the first game and the special game executed in the second game may be designed to be equal. For example, in the first game, a special game in which the unit game is executed 7 times with a 100% probability may be executed, and in the second game, a special game in which the unit game is executed 4 times with a 50% probability and a special game in which the unit game is executed 10 times with a 50% probability may be executed. In either case, a specific area may be provided in the big prize opening, and when the game ball that entered the big prize opening enters or passes through the specific area, a specific game such as a probability variable state may be implemented in the normal game after the special game ends. In this case, the special game executed when a jackpot is reached in the second game may be configured so that the ball is easier to enter the specific area than the special game executed when a jackpot is reached in the first game, and the probability of the normal game in the probability variable state being executed after the special game ends may be higher. For example, a first win in which a special game in which it is relatively difficult to enter the specific area is executed and a second win in which a special game in which it is relatively easy to enter the specific area is executed may be provided, and the second game may be configured so that the probability of the second win is higher than that of the first game. Alternatively, the probability of the second win in the first game may be less than 100%, but the probability of the second win in the second game may be 100%.

(First embodiment)
In this embodiment, we propose suitable control and presentation in a pachinko gaming machine equipped with a screen deformation presentation as a special presentation. In the following, elements that are the same as or correspond to the elements constituting the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the base technology are given the same reference numerals and described. In addition, the contents already explained in the base technology are omitted as appropriate, and mainly the contents that are different from the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the base technology are described.

<Special effects>
As a special effect in this embodiment, a screen deformation effect will be described. The screen deformation effect here refers to an effect in which a frame image included in a displayed video is deformed by enlarging, reducing, moving, distorting, oscillating, color inversion, color conversion, and the like, together with a frame image arranged around the frame image. The frame image deformation can be performed in two ways: a case where a deformation is sequentially applied to one frame image included in the original video (also called "frame still effect"), and a case where a deformation is sequentially applied to each of a plurality of frame images included in the original video (also called "frame video effect"). The frame still effect is an effect in which the original video being displayed is frozen, and a deformation is applied to the frame image at the time of the freeze, so that a so-called screen capture image is fitted into the frame image as a still image and deformed. The frame video effect is an effect in which a deformation is applied to each frame image of the displayed video, so that the original video is fitted into the frame image as a moving image and deformed. The frame images of the original video are temporarily stored in a frame buffer, and new frame images are sequentially generated by applying deformations such as enlarging, reducing, moving, distorting, swinging, color inversion, and color conversion to the frame images, and the new video is displayed as a screen deformation performance. In this way, by dynamically generating a post-deformation image for an image of one scene in a video, it is not necessary to prepare in advance post-deformation frame images corresponding to many scenes in multiple videos, and it is possible to diversify the performance while suppressing increases in data volume and processing load.

First, the screen before the screen transformation effect is executed will be described.
FIG. 30 shows an example of the screen of the performance display device 60. FIG. 30(a) shows the state during the stop of the change. In the performance screen 500 of the performance display device 60, the normal decorative pattern 502 is displayed vertically as the decorative pattern 61 using most of the area in the approximate center, and the simple decorative pattern 504 is displayed vertically as the decorative pattern 61 in the upper right corner. In this way, the decorative pattern 61 of this embodiment is composed of the normal decorative pattern 502 and the simple decorative pattern 504. The normal decorative pattern 502 is composed of the first normal decorative pattern 502a which is the left pattern, the second normal decorative pattern 502b which is the middle pattern, and the third normal decorative pattern 502c which is the right pattern.

A normal reserved image 506 and a simple reserved image 507 are displayed as reserved images. At the bottom of the performance screen 500, a normal reserved image 506 showing the number of reserved lottery values, up to a maximum of four, is displayed. In the figure, the first normal reserved image 506a, the second normal reserved image 506b, the third normal reserved image 506c, and the fourth normal reserved image 506d are displayed in a horizontal line from left to right in the order of ball entry (i.e., the order in which the fluctuation starts). The first normal reserved image 506a, the second normal reserved image 506b, the third normal reserved image 506c, and the fourth normal reserved image 506d are usually displayed as images imitating balls that light up in a predetermined color (e.g., blue). When each reserved image is determined to have a high probability of winning based on the so-called pre-reading at the time of ball entry, that is, the advance judgment information of the lottery value corresponding to each reservation, an image imitating a ball that lights up in a color corresponding to the high probability of winning is displayed. In the example of FIG. 30(a), only the third normal reserved image 506c is displayed as an image imitating a ball that lights up in a color different from blue (for example, red). The effect of lighting up in a color different from blue due to pre-reading in this way is the pre-reading notice effect in this embodiment. For example, the effect determination means 303 determines the color of the normal reserved image 506 so that the normal color "blue" suggests the lowest probability of winning, followed by "green", "red", and "rainbow" in that order. The number and color (or pattern) of these reserved images suggest to the player the number of reserved images and the probability of winning. The pattern change corresponding to the third normal reserved image 506c, which is scheduled to start the pattern change third, is the pattern change that is the target of pre-reading (the trigger for the execution of the pre-reading notice effect), and is hereinafter also referred to as the "target change".

In the right corner of the presentation screen 500, a simplified hold image 507 is displayed, which is a hold image that is smaller and simpler than the normal hold image 506. The simplified hold image 507 is an image that indicates the number of normal hold images 506 being displayed using a number, and in Figure 30 (a), the number "4" is displayed.

Figure 30(b) shows the state during the pattern change display. Figure 30(b) shows the state during the change display after the pattern change starts following the state of Figure 30(a), and the four normal reserved images 506, the first normal reserved image 506a to the fourth normal reserved image 506d in Figure 30(a), are moved one reserved image to the left from their respective positions. The first normal reserved image 506a in Figure 30(a) moves to the left and is displayed as the changing image 508. The changing image 508 is an image showing the lottery value currently changing, has a larger diameter than the normal reserved image 506, and a background pattern is displayed around it, emphasizing that the pattern is changing as distinguished from the normal reserved image 506. Note that the changing image 508 and the normal reserved image 506 are not separate image data, but common image data. Specifically, the image data only includes the image data of the changing image 508, and the normal reserved image 506 is displayed by reducing the image data of the changing image 508. The second normal reserved image 506b, the third normal reserved image 506c, and the fourth normal reserved image 506d in FIG. 30(a) move one by one to the left to become the first normal reserved image 506a, the second normal reserved image 506b, and the third normal reserved image 506c. The first normal decorative pattern 502a has already finished the variable display and is displayed in a state of temporary stop, that is, it is substantially stopped but is fluctuating finely and the stop is not confirmed. The second normal decorative pattern 502b is fluctuating at high speed. The third normal decorative pattern 502c is in a state of fluctuating at a low speed after high speed rotation and about to stop. The simple decorative pattern 504 is rotating at high speed, and when all of the first normal decorative pattern 502a, the second normal decorative pattern 502b, and the third normal decorative pattern 502c stop (confirmed stop), the simple decorative pattern 504 is also stopped (confirmed stop). The fixed stop refers to a stop mode in which there is no fine oscillation and no slight movement, unlike the provisional stop. However, if the normal decorative pattern 502 is composed of numbers (or letters or symbols) and pictures of human or animal characters, and the simple decorative pattern 504 is composed only of numbers (or letters or symbols), the numbers (or letters or symbols) of the simple decorative pattern 504 are not temporarily stopped, but are only fixedly stopped, and do not oscillate finely or move slightly when fixedly stopped. On the other hand, the normal decorative pattern 502 can be temporarily stopped, and when it is temporarily stopped, both the numbers (or letters or symbols) and the picture oscillate finely, and when it is fixedly stopped, both the numbers (or letters or symbols) and the picture oscillate finely and do not move slightly, but after a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed since the fixed stop, at least one of the numbers (or letters or symbols) or the picture oscillates finely even when fixedly stopped.

The simple hold image 507 displayed in the right corner of the presentation screen 500 is an image that indicates the number of normal hold images 506 being displayed in numbers, and in FIG. 30(b) the number "3" is displayed. The movable role 520 is a movable decorative lamp that is shaped like the logo of the model title of this gaming machine, and when activated at a specified timing, it indicates in a presentation manner that there is a high possibility of a jackpot. The details will be described later, but in this embodiment there are multiple movable roles other than the movable role 520.

Figure 31 shows a schematic example of a frame image contraction in a screen transformation performance. Figure 31 (a) shows a state in which an enemy character 512 appears at a predetermined timing in a predetermined pattern change performance such as a super reach performance with a story motif of fighting an enemy character 512. During the execution of such a predetermined pattern change performance (super reach performance), it is preferable to hide the normal pending image 506 and the changing image 508 as shown in Figure 31, but the changing image 508 may continue to be displayed even when the normal pending image 506 is not displayed. For example, when it develops into a super reach performance, the normal pending image 506 is hidden, but the changing image 508 may be configured to be displayed during at least a part of the execution period of the super reach performance (for example, the first half period). Also, during the execution of such a predetermined pattern change performance (such as a super reach performance), as shown in FIG. 31, the normal decorative pattern 502 is not displayed, but the display mode may be made small (or, in the case of the normal decorative pattern 502 consisting of numbers and pictures, only the numbers may be displayed). For example, when the performance progresses to a super reach performance, the normal decorative pattern 502 may be configured to be displayed in a reach mode, small and/or only the numbers, during at least a part of the execution period of the super reach performance (for example, the first half period). Here, when a still-in-frame performance is executed as a screen deformation performance, as shown in FIG. 31(b), the image of the enemy character 512 displayed on the screen as in FIG. 31(a) is frozen, and the still frame image is reduced to a size one size smaller, and a frame image 510 like a picture frame that was not displayed until then is displayed around the reduced frame image. Although not shown in the figure, a plurality of frame images included in the original video are sequentially subjected to a transformation process such as shrinking, as in the case of the still frame production, and such a plurality of frame images are also included in the target of transformation, unless otherwise specified below. At least a part of this frame image 510 may be displayed in advance (for example, a part of the area closer to the inside of the frame image 510 may be displayed). The inside of the frame image 510 is hereinafter referred to as the frame image 514. Here, the frame image 510, which was not displayed on the production screen 500 in the state of FIG. 31(a), is displayed around the frame image 514 in the state of FIG. 31(b). Although the display control process itself is actually being executed by the production display control means 305 at the time of FIG. 31(a), this portion of the frame image 510 is an image portion that is not displayed in the production screen 500 and is not visualized because it is a portion disposed at a position corresponding to the outside of the frame of the production screen 500. As shown in the figure, in this embodiment, the entire frame image 510 is made visible, but it is also possible to make only the upper portion of the frame image 510 visible (i.e., the rest of the frame image is invisible), or to make only the left and right portions of the frame image 510 visible (i.e., the top and bottom portions are invisible).

Here, the framed image 514, which is a reduced version of the frame image in FIG. 31(a), does not include the simple decorative pattern 504 and the simple reserved image 507. In other words, the simple decorative pattern 504 and the simple reserved image 507 are not subject to the screen transformation effect, and are displayed in a layer in front of the layer in which the screen transformation effect is displayed. The normal decorative pattern 502, the normal reserved image 506, and the changing image 508, which were displayed at the stage of FIG. 30, are switched to a non-display state, are not included in the transformation object, and are not included in the framed image 514. In other words, the display of the decorative pattern is guaranteed by making the normal decorative pattern 502 non-displayed while continuing the display of the simple decorative pattern 504 (making it possible to recognize whether or not it is changing), and the display of the reserved image is guaranteed by making the normal reserved image 506 and the changing image 508 non-displayed while continuing the display of the simple reserved image 507 (making it possible to recognize whether or not there is a reservation, and how many reservations there are). In a modified example, the normal decorative pattern 502 and the changing image 508 may be included in the framed image 514 and may be the subject of transformation. In other words, as described above, when the normal decorative pattern 502 and the changing image 508 are configured to continue displaying even in a predetermined pattern change performance (such as a super reach performance), the normal decorative pattern 502 and the changing image 508 may be included in the framed image 514 and may be the subject of the screen transformation performance. In addition, the normal reserved image 506 may be configured to continue displaying in a predetermined pattern change performance (such as a super reach performance), and may be included in the framed image 514 like the normal decorative pattern 502 and the changing image 508 and may be the subject of the screen transformation performance. The framed image 514 is an image in a state in which the frame image in FIG. 31(a) is reduced as described above and, in addition, the color is inverted (also called "negative-positive inversion"). The framed image 514 and the framed image 510 are objects to be subjected to subsequent transformation processing, and are therefore called target objects 516.

Figure 32 shows a schematic example of the shaking of a frame image in a screen transformation performance. The target object 516 is further reduced from the state shown in Figure 31 (b), and the previously two-dimensionally changed object is further changed in the depth direction to be transformed into a three-dimensional object. As a result, the target object 516 becomes an image in which a frame image of the moving image that was displayed until just before (in the case of a still-framed performance, it is an image like a captured image that freezes the moving image of the performance, and in the case of a moving-framed performance, the frame images that switch one after another) is pasted or projected onto one surface of the three-dimensional object. The target object 516 has a shape in which a framed image 514 is placed inside a curved frame image 510 as shown in the figure, and although it is not strictly rectangular, for the sake of convenience of explanation, it is assumed to be rectangular from here on, and the left end side is called the left side, the right end side is called the right side, the top end side is called the top side, and the bottom end side is called the bottom side. In FIG. 32(a), a four-vertex transformation is performed to make the left side of the target object 516 appear to move forward and the right side to move backward. That is, the left side is lengthened, the right side is shortened, and the top and bottom interior angles of the left side are smaller than a right angle, and the top and bottom interior angles of the right side are larger than a right angle, forming a trapezoid. In FIG. 32(b), a four-vertex transformation is performed to make the right side of the target object 516 appear to move forward and the left side to move backward. That is, the right side is lengthened, the left side is shortened, and the top and bottom interior angles of the right side are smaller than a right angle, and the top and bottom interior angles of the left side are larger than a right angle, forming a trapezoid. By alternately repeating the states of FIG. 32(a) and FIG. 32(b) at high speed, the left and right sides are alternately rotated back and forth in the forward and backward directions, making it appear as if the target object 516 is swaying.

<First aspect>
(Feature 1) The effect determination means 303 determines whether or not to execute a screen deformation effect as the effect content to be displayed on the effect screen 500 of the effect display device 60 according to the variation pattern. The screen deformation effect is displayed as a moving image by sequentially generating new frame images by synthesizing at least an image of the target object 516 obtained by deforming a frame image stored in the frame buffer 338 at a predetermined timing, a background image 518, and an image showing the game status, and storing the new frame images in the frame buffer 338. Here, the background image 518 is solid black (blacked out), but the display form is not limited to this, and may be, for example, a display form in which a moving image in which the word "CHANCE" flows like a ticker is played in a loop.

Figure 33 shows a schematic layer structure of the presentation screen 500 in a screen transformation presentation. The layer structure of the presentation screen 500 is composed of, from the foreground to the background, an error display layer 521, a volume and light intensity display layer 522, a game status layer 523, a presentation layer 524, and a background layer 525, in that order. The foreground error display layer 521 displays an error warning image 536 indicating that an error has occurred and indicating the type of error, etc. The next layer, the volume and light intensity display layer 522, displays a volume setting image 532 showing an interface for the player to adjust the volume, and a light intensity setting image 534 showing an interface for the player to adjust the light intensity.

The next layer, the game status layer 523, displays images such as the simple decorative pattern 504, the simple reserved image 507, the changing image 508, and the guide display 530 for guiding right hit, and the display contents are constantly updated. As a variant, the changing image 508 may be displayed on the performance layer 524 instead of the game status layer 523. The next layer, the performance layer 524, is a layer where mainly the change of the normal decorative pattern 502, the normal reserved image 506, and the target object 516 are displayed. The shape, color, and display position of the target object 516 are constantly updated, but the contents of the framed image 514 included in the target object 516 are fixed in the case of a still performance such as a screen capture unless a change such as deformation or movement is added, and in the case of a performance in which a video is fitted into the framed image 514, the frame images included in the original video are fitted in sequence. The normal decorative pattern 502 and the normal reserved image 506 may be subject to deformation as part of the target object 516 in the screen deformation performance. Also, as described above, when the changing image 508 is displayed on the performance layer 524 instead of the game status layer 523, the changing image 508 may also be subject to deformation as part of the target object 516 in the screen deformation performance. The background layer 525 at the rear is a background image 518 of solid black. By displaying the background image 518 on the background layer 525, it is possible to make it look like a three-dimensional space with a sense of depth, and the target object 516 displayed on the performance layer 524 can also be made to look three-dimensional. As performance images that can be displayed on the performance display device 60, at least one or more first images belonging to the first image group and one or more second images belonging to the second image group are included, and in the screen deformation performance, a special first image in which the first image is deformed in a predetermined manner and a second image that is not deformed in a predetermined manner are displayed. The first image group refers to a collection of images that constitute the transformation target performance described later, that is, images that are categorized as images that are the target of the transformation process, and the second image group refers to a collection of images other than the images that constitute the transformation target performance described later, that is, images that are categorized as images that are not the target of the transformation process. The first image is an image that can be the target of transformation in the screen transformation performance and can be displayed on the performance layer 524. The first image group includes, for example, the target object 516 as the first image, and may further include the normal decorative pattern 502 and the normal reserved image 506. The second image is an image that is not the target of transformation in the screen transformation performance and is an image that is displayed on a layer other than the performance layer 524. The second image group includes, for example, the simple decorative pattern 504, the simple reserved image 507, the changing image 508, and the guide display 530 as the second image. The special first image is, for example, the transformed target object 516, and if the normal decorative pattern 502 or the normal reserved image 506 is the target of transformation in the screen transformation performance, the special first image may further include the transformed normal decorative pattern 502 and the transformed normal reserved image 506.

(Feature 2) The presentation determination means 303 selects one of a plurality of types of presentation patterns as the presentation pattern. The plurality of types of presentation patterns include presentation patterns that are targets for the screen transformation presentation during the presentation process, and presentation patterns that are not targets for the screen transformation presentation. The presentation pattern that is targets for the screen transformation presentation may be defined so that the screen transformation presentation may or may not be performed depending on a separate lottery result, or may be defined so that the screen transformation presentation is always performed. This allows the presentation to be different depending on whether or not the screen transformation presentation is performed halfway through, even if the presentation pattern is the same, or even if the presentation progress is the same up to a certain point. For example, in the case of a presentation flow that develops into a super reach presentation, the presentation flow can be either "start of the presentation → formation of a reach state → development of the super reach presentation → no occurrence of a screen transformation presentation during the super reach presentation → end of the super reach presentation → end of the presentation" or "start of the presentation → formation of a reach state → development of the super reach presentation → occurrence of a screen transformation presentation during the super reach presentation → end of the super reach presentation → end of the presentation".

The performance determination means 303 selects one of a plurality of types of preview performance patterns as the preview performance pattern. The plurality of types of preview performance patterns include preview performances that are targets for the execution of the screen deformation performance during the performance process (for example, in addition to the performance of stopping the enemy character during the super reach performance described above, a step-up preview performance that is a part of the preview performance before the reach state, etc.), and preview performances that are not targets for the execution of the screen deformation performance (for example, a preview performance pattern in which a special normal decorative pattern 502 (for example, a normal decorative pattern 502 with the letters "NEXT") is displayed, which is a part of the preview performance before the reach state and is displayed during a pseudo consecutive performance in which the normal decorative pattern 502 temporarily stops and then changes again, and a preview performance pattern in which the movable role 520 is driven after the performance of stopping the enemy character during the super reach performance described above ends, and the screen is displayed in a rainbow color). The preview performances that are targets for the execution of the screen deformation performance may be defined so that the screen deformation performance may or may not be executed depending on the result of a separate lottery, or may be defined so that the screen deformation performance is always executed. This allows the same preview performance pattern to be displayed differently depending on whether or not a screen deformation performance is performed. Note that the performance that is the target of the screen deformation performance, i.e., the pattern change performance and preview performance that may result in a screen deformation performance during the performance process, are hereinafter referred to as "transformation target performance."

(Feature 3) The performance determination means 303 determines whether or not to execute a so-called pre-reading preview performance, which indicates in advance the high expectation that the result of the lottery will be a win when a new ball is placed in the starting hole and the reserve occurs, according to the pre-judgment information (pre-judgment information transmitted from the main board 200 as the main control device when a new ball is placed in the starting hole). In addition, the expectation of the screen deformation performance differs depending on the state of the pre-reading preview performance (pre-reading preview). In other words, if the reserve related to the target variation is a reserve related to a variation for which the screen deformation performance is scheduled to be executed, or a reserve related to a variation with a high probability of the screen deformation performance being executed (more specifically, if the reserve related to the variation for which the preview performance for which the screen deformation performance is executed is executed), a pre-reading preview with a higher expectation is executed than when there is no such reserve (in the case of the reserve change performance described later, the red normal reserve image 506 is a pre-reading preview with a higher expectation than the blue normal reserve image 506). In this case, even if the performance pattern is the same, it is preferable to configure the screen deformation performance so that the expectation of a big win is higher when the screen deformation performance is executed than when the screen deformation performance is not executed. For example, it is preferable to configure the screen deformation performance so that the expectation of a big win is higher when the performance of stopping the enemy character during the super reach performance described above (the screen deformation performance is executed) is executed than when the performance of stopping the enemy character during the super reach performance is not executed (the screen deformation performance is not executed and the enemy character does not stop). The advance notice performance by the foresight is a performance (hold change performance) that suggests the expectation of a big win or the expectation of execution of the screen deformation performance by the lighting color of the normal reserved image 506 corresponding to the target variation that is the foresight target, as shown in FIG. 30, for example. This makes it possible to make the ease of execution of the screen deformation performance different depending on the type of advance notice performance, that is, the lighting color of the normal reserved image 506. For example, the screen deformation performance is more likely to be executed in the target variation that is the target of the foresight when a red normal reserved image 506 (e.g., a jackpot expectation of 50%) is displayed than a blue normal reserved image 506 (e.g., a jackpot expectation of 10%). Such a hold change presentation may be executed not only for normal hold image 506 but also for changing image 508. For example, when first normal hold image 506a moves to become changing image 508, (1) first normal hold image 506a displays a blue normal hold image 506, and changing image 508 also displays a blue normal hold image 506 (more precisely, blue changing image 508), allowing one to understand that the jackpot expectation rate of the current change is 10%, and (2) first normal hold image 506a displays a blue normal hold image 506, and changing image 508 displays a red normal hold image 506 (more precisely, red changing image 508), allowing one to understand that the jackpot expectation rate of the current change has increased from 10% to 50%. In addition, when a variation performance pattern that is the target of the screen transformation performance is selected, whether or not to execute the screen transformation performance is decided at the start of the pattern change due to that variation performance pattern, and the probability of executing the screen transformation performance differs depending on the type of pre-reading notice that has been executed up until the start of the change. As a variation example, at the time the pre-reading notice is executed (at the time the execution of the pre-reading notice is decided), whether or not to execute the screen transformation performance may be decided based on the change (target change) that triggered the execution of the pre-reading notice.

(Feature 4) The expectation of the screen deformation effect being executed differs depending on the state of the advance notice of the change. The change here means the current change, and in the case of a pre-reading advance notice being executed, it is the change that triggered the execution of the advance notice (the target change), not the change that is executing the advance notice (the change before the target). In addition, the state of the advance notice of the change here means the state of the advance notice (excluding the screen deformation effect) executed in the change in which the advance notice effect that is the target of the screen deformation effect is executed, and is not the state of the advance notice, that is, it is not the state of the advance notice effect in the change prior to the change in which the advance notice effect that is the target of the screen deformation effect is executed. Note that the execution and state of the advance notice effect of the change, the execution and execution of the advance notice effect that is the target of the screen deformation effect, and the execution and execution of the screen deformation effect are all determined by separate lotteries at the start of the change. In this way, even if a change effect pattern that is the target of the screen deformation effect is selected, the screen deformation effect is not necessarily executed. For example, the mode of the preview performance of the change may be such that the expectation of the screen transformation performance is higher when the color of the speech bubble in a dialogue preview performance in which the dialogue of an appearing character is displayed in the form of a speech bubble (this dialogue preview performance is executed in the change at a timing prior to the execution of the preview performance that is the target of the screen transformation performance), is a giraffe pattern (a display mode that has a higher expectation of a jackpot than blue) than when the color of the speech bubble is blue. As a modified example, whether or not to execute the preview performance of the change and the mode thereof, whether or not to execute the preview performance that is the target of the screen transformation performance, and whether or not to execute the screen transformation performance may be determined all at once by the same lottery at the start of the change.

The display can be made different depending on whether or not the screen transformation performance is performed, even if the progress of the performance is the same. In addition, the expectation regarding the difference in the display of the performance can be made gradual by combining the performance content of the pre-reading notice and the performance content of the target change, which are performed in advance. The reserved change performance and the dialogue notice performance described above can be performed in both target change and pre-target change. For example, the expectation of the execution of the screen transformation performance can be made to appear high by displaying a red normal reserved image 506 in the pre-reading notice, and then the expectation of the execution of the screen transformation performance can be made to appear low by displaying a blue dialogue balloon in the target change performance. In addition, for example, the expectation of the execution of the screen transformation performance can be made to appear low by displaying a blue normal reserved image 506 in the pre-reading notice, and then the expectation of the execution of the screen transformation performance can be made to appear high by displaying a giraffe-patterned dialogue balloon in the target change performance. In a modified example, if the series of steps from the start of execution of the look-ahead preview (the change before the target) to the target change, or the series of steps from the look-ahead preview to the timing of the execution of the screen deformation effect during the target change, are determined in one go, it is possible to prevent the expectation of the execution of the screen deformation effect from being hindered midway.

<Second aspect>
FIG. 34 shows a schematic diagram of the process of the movable role performance executed simultaneously with the screen deformation performance. FIG. 34(a) shows the initial stage of the operation of the movable role 520, and FIG. 34(b) shows the movable role 520 in operation. The movable role 520 in this embodiment includes a first movable role 520a, a second movable role 520b, a third movable role 520c, and a fourth movable role 520d. The first movable role 520a is a movable decorative lamp with the logo of the model title of this gaming machine, and moves greatly to fall downward as shown in FIG. 34(b) at a predetermined timing during a predetermined performance, thereby suggesting that the expectation of a big win is high. The second movable part 520b and the third movable part 520c are scissor arm-type decorative members, and as shown in Fig. 34(b), the second movable part 520b extends from the left side of the performance screen 500 to the center of the performance screen 500, and the third movable part 520c extends from the right side of the performance screen 500 to the center of the performance screen 500, thereby suggesting a high probability of winning in terms of presentation. The fourth movable part 520d is a mountain-shaped decorative lamp like a saw blade, and suggests a high probability of winning in terms of presentation by moving significantly so as to protrude upward as shown in Fig. 34(b) at a predetermined timing during a predetermined presentation. As shown in FIG. 34(b), the simple decorative pattern 504 and the simple reserved image 507 are displayed at a position where visibility is not hindered even when all of the first movable part 520a, the second movable part 520b, the third movable part 520c, and the fourth movable part 520d are in operation. In addition, by configuring the movable parts not to operate, i.e., to be in their initial positions, at least at the boundary of the game (i.e., a situation where the game progress is temporarily stopped), during the operation of at least one of the movable parts among the first movable part 520a, the second movable part 520b, the third movable part 520c, and the fourth movable part 520d, it is possible to ensure more reliable visibility. In addition, as a modified example, the simple decorative pattern 504 and the simple reserved image 507 may be configured to be displayed at a position where visibility is not hindered when at least one of the movable parts is in operation among the first movable part 520a, the second movable part 520b, the third movable part 520c, and the fourth movable part 520d. For example, the simple decorative pattern 504 and the simple reserved image 507 may be displayed in a position where the visibility is hindered when the third movable part 520c is in operation, but the visibility is not hindered when other movable parts are in operation. In such a configuration, it is preferable that the frequency at which the third movable part 520c operates is lower than the frequency at which any of the first movable part 520a, the second movable part 520b, and the fourth movable part 520d operates, and it is also preferable that the time during which the third movable part 520c operates within one fluctuation is shorter than the time during which the third movable part 520c does not operate. In such a configuration, it is more preferable that the time during which the third movable part 520c operates within one fluctuation is shorter than the time during which the third movable part 520c does not operate in all fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times).

(Feature 5) The movable role 520 is provided near the performance display device 60 and operates in a performance manner in conjunction with the performance displayed on the performance display device 60. The presence or absence of the movement of the movable role 520 and the presence or absence of the execution of the screen deformation performance are associated so that the display of the screen deformation performance and the movement of the movable role 520 are relatively often executed simultaneously in parallel. For example, the screen deformation performance is more often executed simultaneously in parallel with the movable role 520 than other types of performances that do not involve the screen deformation performance (for example, capture performances, reversal performances, step-up notices, dialogue notices, hold change performances, group notices, and other notice performances). Also, for example, the screen deformation performance is more often accompanied by the movement of the movable role 520 than when it is not accompanied by the movement of the movable role 520. The performance control means 304 operates the movable role 520 according to the presence or absence of the movement of the movable role 520 determined by the performance determination means 303. By linking the screen transformation performance with the operation of the movable role 520 in this way, the three-dimensionality and dynamism of the performance content displayed on the performance display device 60 when executing the screen transformation performance can be further enhanced. In other words, not only is the performance content displayed three-dimensional and dynamic movement expressed, but the three-dimensionality and dynamism are also produced around the performance display device 60. Conversely, in a screen transformation performance that does not involve the operation of the movable role 520, the content of the screen transformation performance itself can be made more prominent by refraining from the operation of the movable role 520. Note that, when the movable role 520 is operating and viewed from the front, the first movable role 520a, the second movable role 520b, the third movable role 520c, and the fourth movable role 520d operate to be in a position and shape that does not impede the visibility of the simple decorative pattern 504, as shown in FIG. 34.

(Feature 6) The decorative patterns include a normal decorative pattern 502 that is displayed as a main pattern on the performance display device 60 at least when the special pattern is stopped, and a simple decorative pattern 504 that is displayed in a display form that is simplified from the normal decorative pattern 502 when the normal decorative pattern 502 is difficult to see. The normal decorative pattern 502 is a pattern that is displayed in a larger size than the simple decorative pattern 504. The normal decorative pattern 502 is composed of three patterns, and in principle, each pattern is stopped one by one after the variable display. The simple decorative pattern 504 is also composed of three patterns, but the three patterns are stopped simultaneously after the variable display. The combination of the stopped patterns of the simple decorative pattern 504 is the same as the combination of the stopped patterns of the normal decorative pattern 502.
During the execution of the super reach performance, the normal decorative pattern 502 may be configured to be displayed small (alternative pattern may be displayed) for at least a part of the period, or the normal decorative pattern 502 may be hidden (alternative pattern may not be displayed either), but in such a situation, the simple decorative pattern 504 is always displayed in a variable manner. This simple decorative pattern 504 is displayed small in the upper right corner of the performance display device 60, and displays a variable manner while the special pattern is changing, and displays a stationary manner while the special pattern is stopped, and displays three patterns in a variable manner and stationary manner, just like the normal decorative pattern 502. By providing this simple decorative pattern 504, even in a situation where it is desired to make the normal decorative pattern 502 small or hidden (for example, when performing a super reach performance, when a performance using a movable role is performed and the center of the performance display device 60 is hidden, etc.), it is possible to notify that the normal decorative pattern 502 is changing (in other words, the result of winning or losing has not been determined). In other words, this simple decorative pattern 504 can be said to be a pattern for display guarantee (to compensate for the display state of the normal decorative pattern 502). When this simple decorative pattern 504 is displayed in a variable manner, it is preferable that the variable display is always continued from the start of the special pattern's variation until the special pattern is displayed in a stopped state. In other words, even if the normal decorative pattern 502 is temporarily stopped midway (for example, when a special normal decorative pattern 502 that displays characters such as "NEXT" is temporarily stopped when executing a pseudo consecutive performance), it is preferable that the simple decorative pattern 504 is configured not to be temporarily stopped midway (for this reason, a special pattern that displays characters such as "NEXT" is not provided for the simple decorative pattern 504, and the simple decorative pattern 504 is configured in a manner that does not cause a temporary stop). The easy decorative pattern 504 only performs a fixed stop), and further, in order to prevent a miss variation from being mistaken for a jackpot, and in order to prevent a jackpot variation from being noticed in advance, it is preferable to display the variation while maintaining the pattern combination that indicates a miss to the player, whether it is a miss variation or a jackpot variation (for example, if the type of simple decorative pattern 504 is "1" to "7", the variation is displayed as "123" → "234" → "345" → "456" → "567" → "671" → "712" → "123" → ...). Furthermore, when the normal decorative pattern 502 and the simple decorative pattern 504 start to change from a fixed state, the starting pattern combination (the first pattern combination immediately after the change starts) is a pattern combination that is one step forward from the pattern combination at the time of the fixed stop, but when the simple decorative pattern 504 starts to change from a fixed state, the starting pattern combination is a predetermined pattern combination regardless of the combination at the time of the fixed stop. For example, when the normal decorative pattern 502 and the simple decorative pattern 504 start to vary in a situation where both the number combinations related to the normal decorative pattern 502 and the simple decorative pattern 504 are fixed at "243", the pattern combination that is the starting point of the normal decorative pattern 502 is "354", but the pattern combination that is the starting point of the simple decorative pattern 504 is fixed at "123", and when both the number combinations related to the normal decorative pattern 502 and the simple decorative pattern 504 are fixed at "333", when the normal decorative pattern 502 and the simple decorative pattern 504 start to vary, the pattern combination that is the starting point of the normal decorative pattern 502 is "444", but the pattern combination that is the starting point of the simple decorative pattern 504 is fixed at "123". In addition to this, the simple decorative pattern 504 can have the following characteristics to clearly differentiate its role from the normal decorative pattern 502.
(1) The display area of the normal decorative pattern 502, which is easy for the player to recognize, is larger than the display area of the simple decorative pattern 504 for display guarantee (to compensate for the display state of the normal decorative pattern 502). This is preferable not only in a situation where the normal decorative pattern 502 and the simple decorative pattern 504 are fixed and stopped, or in a situation where the normal decorative pattern 502 is immediately after forming a reach state (a reach state in a state where it has not yet developed into a super reach performance) and the simple decorative pattern 504 is being displayed in a variable manner, but also in a situation where the normal decorative pattern 502 is a small pattern during a super reach performance or the like and the simple decorative pattern 504 is being displayed in a variable manner.
(2) The display position of the normal decorative pattern 502 is set to a different display position depending on whether it is the first presentation mode (e.g., normal mode, or stage A in normal mode) or the second presentation mode (e.g., rush mode, or stage B in normal mode), thereby realizing a variety of presentations with the normal decorative pattern 502 depending on the presentation mode. On the other hand, since the simple decorative pattern 504 only needs to fulfill the role of compensating for the display state of the normal decorative pattern 502, it is preferable to avoid unnecessary development and design by setting it to the same display position regardless of whether it is the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode. Details of the presentation modes will be described later.
(3) The display mode of the normal decorative pattern 502 is different depending on whether it is the first presentation mode (e.g., normal mode, or stage A in normal mode) or the second presentation mode (e.g., rush mode, or stage B in normal mode), thereby realizing a diversity of presentations in the normal decorative pattern 502 depending on the presentation mode. For example, in the first presentation mode, the normal decorative pattern 502 is composed only of the normal decorative pattern 502 of numbers (normal decorative pattern 502 such as "1", "2", ..., "7"), and in the second presentation mode, the normal decorative pattern 502 is composed by combining the normal decorative pattern 502 of numbers with the normal decorative pattern 502 of an ally character (normal decorative pattern 502 such as "1" + "character a", "2" + "character b", ..., "7" + "character g"). On the other hand, since the simple decorative pattern 504 only needs to fulfill the role of compensating for the display state of the normal decorative pattern 502, it is preferable to configure the simple decorative pattern 504 using only the same display mode, for example the normal decorative pattern 502 of numbers, regardless of whether the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode is selected, thereby avoiding unnecessary development and design work.
(4) The display area of the normal decorative pattern 502 can be varied (moved or made into a small pattern) depending on the changing situation (for example, whether or not a normal reach is in progress, whether or not a super reach is in progress, etc.), thereby adding diversity to the presentation of the normal decorative pattern 502. On the other hand, since the simple decorative pattern 504 only needs to fulfill the role of compensating for the display state of the normal decorative pattern 502, it is preferable to not vary the display area of the simple decorative pattern 504 (not move, not made into a small pattern) to avoid unnecessary development and design.
(5) The normal decorative pattern 502 can be varied in speed to low, medium, high, or ultra-high speed depending on the change situation (e.g., whether it is at the start of change, during change, or about to end change, etc.), thereby providing diversity to the presentation of the normal decorative pattern 502. On the other hand, since the simple decorative pattern 504 only needs to play a role in compensating for the display state of the normal decorative pattern 502, it is preferable to not vary the speed of the simple decorative pattern 504 or to reduce the number of stages in which it is varied (e.g., only low and high speed), thereby avoiding unnecessary development and design. In addition, regarding the direction of change, the normal decorative pattern 502 can change not only from top to bottom but also from bottom to top (enabling change in multiple directions), while the simple decorative pattern 504 can only change from top to bottom.
(6) The normal decorative pattern 502 is temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped in the middle of the special pattern's fluctuation, with a slight fluctuation) before it is fixedly stopped (stopped at the timing when the special pattern stops), and at that time, a specific pattern that is a normal decorative pattern 502 other than a number (for example, a normal decorative pattern 502 with the word "Super" written on it, which predicts the development to a super reach performance) is temporarily stopped, so that the performance of the normal decorative pattern 502 can be related to other performances. On the other hand, since the simple decorative pattern 504 only needs to fulfill the role of compensating for the display state of the normal decorative pattern 502, it is preferable not to temporarily stop the simple decorative pattern 504 or to temporarily stop the specific pattern, thereby avoiding unnecessary development and design.
(7) The normal decorative pattern 502 overlaps with the display area of other preview performances (e.g., comment preview performances, step-up preview performances, etc.), that is, is superimposed. In order to use as much of the area on the performance display device 60 as possible to perform a powerful performance, such superimposed display is permitted, but for the simple decorative pattern 504, in order to compensate for the display state of the normal decorative pattern 502, it is desirable to design the display area of the simple decorative pattern 504 so that it does not overlap (does not superimpose) with the display area of the other preview performances. However, in terms of the relationship with special preview performances that inevitably overlap (e.g., group preview performances, background preview performances, etc. displayed on the entire performance display device 60), it is preferable to set the display priority of the simple decorative pattern 504 higher than the display priority of the special preview performance (set so that the simple decorative pattern 504 is displayed in front of the special preview performance). In addition, it is desirable to ensure that the right-hit notification image (different from the image displayed during the special game, the right-hit notification image for the high base state displayed during the high base state, but may be an image common to the image during the special game) is always visible to the player, so it is desirable to design the display area of the simple decorative pattern 504 so that it does not overlap (do not display in a superimposed manner) with the display area of the right-hit notification image. However, when the display area of the normal decorative pattern 502 is moved or enlarged, the display area of the normal decorative pattern 502 and the display area of the right-hit notification image may overlap (display in a superimposed manner), and in that case, it is preferable to set the display priority of the normal decorative pattern 502 lower than the display priority of the right-hit notification image (set so that the normal decorative pattern 502 is displayed behind the right-hit notification image).
(8) During a special game, the normal decorative symbols 502 may be displayed only one at a time, not in combination. For example, if a special game is executed after "777" is fixed, "7" is displayed during the special game, and if a special game is executed after "222" is fixed, "2" is displayed during the special game. This allows the player to recognize which normal decorative symbol 502 has been used to win during the special game. As a modified example, only normal decorative symbols 502 corresponding to a high-advantage jackpot (for example, "333", "555", "777", etc., which indicate a jackpot of 7R or more or a jackpot of 10R) may be displayed during the special game. The display area displaying one normal decorative pattern 502 displayed during the special game is preferably configured not to overlap with the other display areas during the special game, that is, the round display area, the right-hand hit display area, the prize ball acquisition display area, and the cumulative prize ball number display area, that is, not to be displayed in a superimposed manner (however, it may be displayed in a superimposed manner with the highlighting, in which case the highlighting has a higher display priority). In addition, it is preferable to make the simple decorative pattern 504 invisible during the special game (because variable display is not performed during the special game), but it may be displayed during the special game. In this case, it is preferable to make the display area not to overlap with the other display areas during the special game, that is, the round display area, the right-hand hit display area, the prize ball acquisition display area, and the cumulative prize ball number display area, that is, not to be displayed in a superimposed manner, and it is also preferable not to be displayed in a superimposed manner with the highlighting.
(9) In the normal decorative pattern 502, in addition to fluctuating (for example, moving from top to bottom), a display accompanied by a specified action may be performed when the fluctuating pattern starts, immediately after a provisional stop, after a reach is achieved, during a provisional stop, etc. (The action in each situation may be referred to as an action at the start of the fluctuating pattern, an action at a provisional stop, an action at a reach is achieved, and a swinging action). For example, in the case of a non-reach (when the normal decorative pattern 502 and the simple decorative pattern 504 are displayed as "624" at the time of the fixed stop), when the variation starts, the left pattern, the middle pattern, and the right pattern in the normal decorative pattern 502 all expand and then start to vary, then when the left pattern temporarily stops, they make a bouncing motion, then the "6" temporarily stops and then continues to swing, then when the right pattern temporarily stops, they make a bouncing motion, then the "4" temporarily stops and then continues to swing, then when the middle pattern temporarily stops, they make a bouncing motion, then the "2" temporarily stops and swings a little, then at the fixed stop timing, all the movements of the left pattern, middle pattern, and right pattern are terminated. In this case, the simple decorative pattern 504 does not perform any of the movements. In addition, in the case of a normal reach (when the normal decorative pattern 502 and the simple decorative pattern 504 are displayed as "212" at the time of the fixed stop), when the variation starts, the left, middle, and right patterns in the normal decorative pattern 502 all expand and then start to vary, then when the left pattern temporarily stops, they make a bouncing motion, then the "2" temporarily stops and then continues to swing, then when the right pattern temporarily stops, they make a bouncing motion, then the "2" temporarily stops and then continues to swing, then the left and right patterns rotate to notify that it is a reach, then they continue to swing again, then when the middle pattern temporarily stops, they make a bouncing motion, then the "1" temporarily stops and swings a little, then at the fixed stop timing, all the movements of the left, middle, and right patterns are completed (the middle pattern does not rotate). In this case, the simple decorative pattern 504 does not perform any of the movements.
In addition, when the effect develops into a super reach performance (when the normal decorative pattern 502 and the simple decorative pattern 504 are displayed as "232" at the time of the final stop), at the start of the change, the left pattern, the middle pattern, and the right pattern in the normal decorative pattern 502 all expand before the change begins, and then, when the left pattern temporarily stops, it makes a bouncing motion, and then the "2" temporarily stops, and then the swinging motion continues, and then, when the right pattern temporarily stops, it makes a bouncing motion, and then the "2" temporarily stops, and then the swinging motion continues, and then, to notify that it is a reach, the left and right patterns make a rotating motion, and then the swinging motion continues again, and then, the left and right patterns make a rotating motion, and then the swinging motion continues again, and then, While the left and right patterns are swinging, the middle pattern changes (at this time, the middle pattern is expanding and swinging from top to bottom, and the left and right patterns that were not overlapping or had a small overlapping ratio before are overlapping or have a high overlapping ratio), and then the normal background changes to the reach background to execute the super reach performance, and when the super reach performance announces that it is a miss, the reach background changes to the normal background, and after the transition, the left, middle, and right patterns continue swinging for a predetermined period of time, and then, at the fixed stop timing, all of the left, middle, and right patterns end their movements (the middle pattern does not bounce or rotate). In this case, the simple decorative pattern 504 does not perform any of the movements. By configuring in this way, the performance of the normal decorative pattern 502 can be made more diverse, while the simple decorative pattern 504 only needs to play a role in compensating for the display state of the normal decorative pattern 502, so it is preferable to configure the simple decorative pattern 504 so that it does not perform any particular operation, and to avoid unnecessary development and design. In addition, even during the period from when the fluctuation stops until when the standby demo performance is displayed, the normal decorative pattern 502 may perform a shaking operation after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, after 10 seconds) after the fluctuation stops, but even in this situation, it is preferable that the simple decorative pattern 504 does not perform any operation. By configuring in this way, even during the game standby (pattern stopped), it is possible to stimulate the desire to play, and by not performing a shaking operation of the simple decorative pattern 504, it is possible to ensure that the game is standby. In addition, when the standby demo performance is displayed, it is preferable that the normal decorative pattern 502 is not displayed, but the simple decorative pattern 504 continues to be displayed. In this way, it is possible to ensure that the display of the stopped symbols is displayed while emphasizing the display of the standby demo performance screen. However, during the standby demo performance, since no game is being played, the simple decorative symbols 504 may also be hidden.
In addition, for a specific symbol among the normal decorative symbols 502 (for example, the middle symbol "7"), a predetermined action may not be performed or the probability of performing the action may be lower than for other symbols. This predetermined action may be, for example, the provisional stop action (a bouncing action) described above (especially for the middle symbol "7" after a reach is established). By configuring in this way, the rarity of the action for the specific symbol can be increased. In addition, when the normal decorative pattern 502 is formed by combining the normal decorative pattern 502 of a number with the normal decorative pattern 502 of an ally character (normal decorative pattern 502 such as "1" + "character a", "2" + "character b", ..., "7" + "character g"), both the normal decorative pattern 502 of the number and the normal decorative pattern 502 of the ally character perform a swinging motion of the normal decorative pattern 502, but the swinging width (the swinging distance, for example, if swinging up and down, the distance width between the state in which the normal decorative pattern 502 is displayed at the top and the state in which it is displayed at the bottom during the swinging motion) may be made different to realize a dynamic swinging motion. In such a configuration, the swinging width of the normal decorative pattern 502 of the number may be made smaller than the swinging width of the normal decorative pattern 502 of the ally character, or the normal decorative pattern 502 of the number may not perform a swinging motion, and only the normal decorative pattern 502 of the ally character may perform a swinging motion.

The normal decorative pattern 502 is included in the image of the target object 516 in the screen transformation performance and can be the target of transformation, that is, can be included in the first image belonging to the first image group, and is displayed on the performance layer 524. On the other hand, the simple decorative pattern 504 is not included in the image of the target object 516 in the screen transformation performance and is not the target of transformation, that is, is included in the second image belonging to the second image group, while it is an object that can be included in the image showing the game status in the screen transformation performance and is displayed on the game status layer 523. Note that the movable role object 520 can also be operated in a certain situation in which the screen transformation performance process is being performed including the normal decorative pattern 502 as the target (for example, a situation in which the screen transformation performance process is being performed while the normal decorative pattern 502 is fluctuating, while it is temporarily stopped, or while it is in a state in which a reach state is formed; in this situation, the image is transformed while continuously reproducing and displaying the scrolling movement of the normal decorative pattern 502 and the shaking movement at the time of the temporary stop and the time of the reach state, rather than a still screen). When the moving part 520 is viewed from the front, the visibility of the normal decorative pattern 502 during the screen transformation performance is hindered by at least one of the first moving part 520a, the second moving part 520b, the third moving part 520c, and the fourth moving part 520d in operation, but the visibility of the simple decorative pattern 504 during the screen transformation performance is not hindered by any of the first moving part 520a, the second moving part 520b, the third moving part 520c, and the fourth moving part 520d in operation as shown in Figure 34. As described above, it may be configured to be displayed in a position where visibility is not hindered during the operation of at least one of the moving parts.
In order to create a sense of unity in the screen transformation performance, the pattern change performance without the screen transformation performance and the normal decorative pattern 502 are configured to move in the same way. On the other hand, in order to easily grasp whether the pattern is currently changing or not, and if the pattern is temporarily stopped, which pattern it is temporarily stopped at, the simple decorative pattern 504 is excluded from the target of deformation by the screen transformation performance to ensure the visibility of the simple decorative pattern 504. In this case, the movement of the linked movable role object 520 is set to an operation mode that does not hinder the visibility of the simple decorative pattern 504, thereby more reliably ensuring the visibility of the simple decorative pattern 504. Note that the relationship between the normal decorative pattern 502 and the simple decorative pattern 504 may be applied to the relationship between the normal reserved image 506 (changing image 508) and the simple reserved image 507. In other words, movable prop 520 can also be operated in a specific situation in which a screen deformation performance process is being performed with normal pending image 506 (changing image 508) as the target (for example, a situation in which a screen deformation performance process is being performed while normal pending image 506 (changing image 508) is being displayed; in this situation, if normal pending image 506 (changing image 508) is displayed with a rotating animation or light-emitting animation rather than a still screen, the image will be deformed while the animation is continuously played and displayed). When the moving part 520 is viewed from the front during its operation, the visibility of the normal reserved image 506 (changing image 508) during the screen deformation performance is hindered by at least one of the first moving part 520a, the second moving part 520b, the third moving part 520c, and the fourth moving part 520d during its operation, but the visibility of the simple reserved image 507 during the screen deformation performance is not hindered by any of the first moving part 520a, the second moving part 520b, the third moving part 520c, and the fourth moving part 520d during its operation as shown in FIG. 34. As described above, it may be configured to be displayed in a position where visibility is not hindered during the operation of at least one of the moving parts.
In order to create a sense of unity in the screen transformation performance, the pattern change performance without the screen transformation performance and the normal reserved image 506 (changing image 508) are configured to move in the same way. On the other hand, in order to make it easier to understand whether the pattern is currently changing or not, and if the pattern is temporarily stopped, which pattern it is temporarily stopped at, the simple reserved image 507 is excluded from the deformation by the screen transformation performance to ensure the visibility of the simple reserved image 507. In that case, the operation of the linked movable role object 520 is set to an operation mode that does not hinder the visibility of the simple reserved image 507, thereby more reliably ensuring the visibility of the simple reserved image 507.

<Third aspect>
(Feature 7) In a screen transformation performance, regardless of the content of the frame image as the first image to be transformed, the background image 518 as the second image has the same content as the background image 518 in other screen transformation performances in which other images are transformed. For example, the common background image 518 in this embodiment is a solid black image, and is displayed on the background layer 525 in each screen transformation performance. By making the background image of each screen transformation performance a common solid black image, it is possible to suppress an increase in the display processing load and an increase in image capacity. As described above, the background image 518 may be displayed in a loop so that, for example, a moving image in which the word "CHANCE" flows like a ticker is played.

<Fourth aspect>
(Feature 8) In the event of a predetermined error (for example, a door opening error or a frame opening error that occurs when a door/frame opening signal is detected, or a prize ball payout error in which the payout of prize balls stops due to a shortage of game balls or the game balls in the upper ball tray 105 and the lower ball tray 106 becoming full), the performance display device 60 displays an error warning image 536 indicating the error (indicating the occurrence of an error and the type of error). In addition, when a screen deformation performance is performed under a situation in which the error warning image 536 is displayed due to an error occurring before the execution of the screen deformation performance, the display of the error warning image 536 continues as is. In this case, as shown in FIG. 33, the error warning image 536 is displayed on the error display layer 521 at the forefront and is not displayed on the performance layer 524, so that it is not included in the target object 516, which is the frame image to be transformed, and the transformation process is not performed. This not only makes it possible to configure the screen deformation performance so as not to impede the execution of the performance even when an error occurs, but also makes it possible to configure the error warning image 536 so as not to impede the visibility of the error warning image 536 by excluding the error warning image 536 from the target of the screen deformation performance.
Even if the error warning sound is output at the maximum volume, which is the specified volume, the volume level can be adjusted (volume adjustment) through the player's operation in parallel, and the volume setting image 532 can be displayed on the volume light display layer 522 in FIG. 33 by the player's operation. Depending on the type of error (type of error warning sound) that occurs during the game, the effect sound accompanying the game progress (for example, the background music of the super reach effect and the sound effect generated with the screen deformation effect) is configured not to be output due to the priority output of the error warning sound. For example, when an error occurs during the screen deformation effect, if the error is a prize ball payout error, both the error warning sound and the effect sound are output (however, the error warning sound is output at the maximum volume, which is the specified volume, and the effect sound is output at a volume corresponding to the currently set volume level), but if it is a door opening error, only the error warning sound is output and the effect sound is not output (or the effect sound is output at a lower volume than when the prize ball payout error occurs). The types of errors are only examples. In the event of such an error occurring during gameplay, even if a screen transformation effect is executed, the volume setting image 532 is also not displayed on the effect layer 524, and is therefore not included in the target object 516, which is the frame image to be transformed, and transformation processing is not performed. This not only makes it possible to configure the system so as not to impede the execution of volume adjustment even when an error occurs, but also makes it possible to configure the system so as not to impede the visibility of the volume setting image 532 by excluding the volume setting image 532 from the target of the screen transformation effect.
The volume setting image 532 can display the currently set volume level (for example, "volume level is 1", "volume level is 5", etc.), and when the volume level is adjusted by the player's operation, the display content is changed (for example, when the volume level is changed from 1 to 2, the display changes from "volume level is 1" to "volume level is 5"). Here, when the volume setting image 532 is displayed by the player's operation during the execution of the screen transformation performance, and the volume is adjusted and the display of the volume setting image 532 is changed by the player's operation during the execution of the screen transformation performance and while the volume setting image 532 is being displayed, the volume setting image 532 is displayed in a display mode without screen transformation in both the volume setting image 532 during the execution of the screen transformation performance and before the display change (for example, display of "volume level is 1") and the volume setting image 532 during the execution of the screen transformation performance and after the display change (for example, display of "volume level is 2"). In addition, if the volume setting image 532 is displayed by a player operation immediately before the execution of the screen transformation performance, and immediately thereafter (while the volume setting image 532 is being displayed) the screen transformation performance is executed, and the volume is adjusted and the display of the volume setting image 532 is changed by the player operation while the volume setting image 532 is being displayed and while the screen transformation performance is being executed, the volume setting image 532 before the execution of the screen transformation performance and before the display change (for example, displaying "volume level is 1") and the volume setting image 532 after the execution of the screen transformation performance and after the display change (for example, displaying "volume level is 2") are both displayed in a display mode without screen transformation. Note that, in order to ensure visibility, it is preferable to configure the error warning image 536 and the volume setting image so that they do not overlap (are displayed in different display areas).

<Fifth aspect>
(Feature 9) In the performance display device 60, as shown in FIG. 30, a normal reserved image 506 showing the number of reserved balls is displayed when a reserved ball is stored. In addition, when a reserved ball corresponding to a new ball is stored, the normal reserved image 506 is not displayed suddenly, but is displayed with an animation (details will be described later) that gradually displays the image in order to indicate that a reserved ball has been stored. Even if a screen transformation performance is performed during the animation display of the normal reserved image 506, that is, between the start and completion of the animation of the normal reserved image 506 (before the display of the normal reserved image 506 is completed), the animation display is not stopped. The animation display of the normal reserved image 506 here includes not only the animation display when a normal reserved ball occurs (when a reserved ball occurs without a pre-reading notice), but also the animation display executed when changing the color or pattern of the normal reserved image 506 as a pre-reading notice performance (for example, an animation in which the normal reserved image 506 changes color after glowing white when a reserved ball occurs, an animation in which a small character appears and casts a spell on the displayed normal reserved image 506 to change its color, etc.). However, when a screen transformation effect is being executed or during a change that executes a screen transformation effect (a situation in which a screen transformation effect is scheduled to be executed during that change but the execution timing has not yet arrived), if the system is configured so that no pre-reading notice is executed (no lottery or decision is made) even if a new ball is scored in order to draw attention to the screen transformation effect, and if the system is configured so that the animation display effect that occurs when a normal hold occurs is not executed, the only animation display that will not stop displaying the animation when a screen transformation effect is executed will be the animation display that occurs when a normal hold occurs (when a hold occurs without a pre-reading notice).
The animation display of the normal reserved image 506 at the time of normal reserved occurrence (at the time of reserved occurrence without a pre-reading notice) is, for example, a fade-in display of the normal reserved image 506, an animation that appears by moving from outside the screen such as the bottom of the screen, an animation that rotates or swings, an animation that adds a color change such as flashing for a moment, an animation that expands or contracts the size for a moment, etc. Since the normal reserved image 506 is displayed on the performance layer 524, if a screen deformation performance is executed in the middle of the animation display at the time of reserved occurrence, frame images including images in the middle of the animation display may be sequentially subjected to deformation, or the display content may be updated so as to continue the animation display of the normal reserved image 506 included in the target object 516 during the display of the screen deformation performance, i.e., during the deformation of the target object 516. In this way, even if a screen deformation performance is executed during the animation display of the normal reserved image 506 at the time of reserved occurrence, by continuing the animation display without stopping it, it is possible to prevent unnaturalness or discomfort from occurring in the flow of the performance.
In addition, even if consecutive hold occurrences cause consecutive animation displays at the time of the hold occurrences, the animation display of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the earlier ball score is not stopped, and the animation display of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the later ball score is executed simultaneously in parallel. Therefore, depending on the timing of the hold occurrence, (1) if a first ball is scored while the screen transformation effect is being executed, an animation of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the first ball is executed while the screen transformation effect is being executed, and if a later ball is scored while the screen transformation effect and the animation of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the first ball are being executed, the screen transformation effect, the animation of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the first ball, and the animation of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the later ball are executed simultaneously in parallel without stopping the animation of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the first ball; (2) if the timing to start the execution of the screen transformation effect is reached while the animation of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the first ball is being executed, a screen transformation effect is executed while the animation of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the first ball is being executed, and if a later ball is scored while the animation of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the first ball is being executed and the screen transformation effect is being executed, the animation of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the first ball is executed. (3) if a later ball is scored while the animation display of normal reserved image 506 corresponding to the earlier ball is being executed, the animation display of normal reserved image 506 corresponding to the later ball is executed while the animation display of normal reserved image 506 corresponding to the earlier ball is being executed, and if the timing to start executing the screen deformation effect is reached while the animation display of normal reserved image 506 corresponding to the earlier ball and the animation display of normal reserved image 506 corresponding to the later ball are being executed, the animation display of normal reserved image 506 corresponding to the earlier ball, the animation display of normal reserved image 506 corresponding to the later ball, and the screen deformation effect are executed simultaneously in parallel without stopping the animation display of normal reserved image 506 corresponding to the earlier ball and the animation display of normal reserved image 506 corresponding to the later ball. In addition, in any of the situations (1) to (3), even if there is a subsequent ball entry in that situation (in a situation being executed simultaneously in parallel) and that ball entry is a hold with a high probability of a jackpot (for example, a hold for which a super reach effect is scheduled to be executed, or a hold that is scheduled to become a jackpot), it is preferable not to execute the animation display that is normally executed when changing the color or pattern of the hold image 506 as a pre-reading preview effect for that hold in that situation.

(Feature 10) In this embodiment, there are multiple types of presentation modes, and for each presentation mode, it is determined which type of presentation, such as a pattern change presentation or a preview presentation, can be executed.
To explain the presentation modes and the contents of the presentations executed in the presentation modes in detail, for example, "normal mode", "chance mode", and "rush mode" are set as a plurality of types of presentation modes, and one of the plurality of types of presentation modes is selectively set according to the game state (or the variation pattern selection state) and the number of times the special symbol is displayed, and the variation presentation according to the set presentation mode is executed. Basically, when the game state is normal, "normal mode" is set, when the game state is time-saving state, "chance mode" is set, and when the game state is probability variable state, "rush mode" is set. When any of the presentation modes is set, a background image (background image of the decorative symbol 61) dedicated to the presentation mode is displayed on the screen as a presentation (variation presentation) indicating that the presentation mode is in question, and BGM dedicated to the presentation mode is output from the speaker 108. In this way, the background image and BGM are set to be different from each other for each presentation mode, so that the player can recognize which presentation mode the player is currently in from the type of background image or BGM. Specifically, the "normal mode" has four stages: "Stage A", "Stage B", "Stage C", and the "look-ahead stage". After 20 or more changes or if the Super Reach effect is missed, the player will transition from "Stage A" to "Stage B", from "Stage B" to "Stage C", and from "Stage C" to "Stage A". If the look-ahead preview effect judgement results in the execution (transition) of the "look-ahead stage", the player will transition from the current stage to the "look-ahead stage" (the execution of the Super Reach effect is confirmed at the time of transition to the "look-ahead stage", and if a jackpot is hit, a double number will be displayed in the "look-ahead stage", and if a miss occurs, a number other than a double number will be displayed in the "look-ahead stage", and the player will return to the stage before the transition to the "look-ahead stage" at the next change). The background music (stage BGM) is different for each of "Stage A,""StageB,""StageC," and the "Prediction Stage" (it is different from the stage BGM for "Chance Mode" and the stage BGM for "Rush Mode"), but in "Stage A," the stage BGM is interrupted (ended) when the fluctuation stops (confirmed stop) for a non-reach miss (a miss that does not form a reach state, for example a scattered number such as "351") and the stage BGM is restarted from the beginning when the next fluctuation begins, and in "Stage B,""StageC," and the "Prediction Stage," the stage BGM is not interrupted (ended) even when the fluctuation stops (confirmed stop) for a non-reach miss, and the stage BGM is output continuously for the next fluctuation (the same is true for "Chance Mode" and "Rush Mode").
Here, pseudo consecutive performances can be executed in any of "Stage A,""StageB,""StageC," and the "Pre-reading Stage," but in any stage, when there is a temporary stop in the pseudo consecutive performance (when a specified pseudo consecutive pattern (for example, a pattern of the letters "NEXT") is displayed as a middle pattern changing near a specified temporary stop position and then displayed as a temporary stop), the stage BGM is not output (interrupted), and the re-changing display (a second change after the temporary stop) triggers the stage BGM to start from the beginning, or it switches to a specific BGM different from the one before the re-changing display. Thereafter, when the Super Reach performance develops in "Stage A", "Stage B", "Stage C" or "Pre-reading Stage", the background image of each stage (the stage you were currently on) is switched to the background image of the Super Reach performance (and at the same time switches to BGM exclusive to the Super Reach performance), and the stage BGM is not output while the Super Reach performance is being executed, and when an effect indicating a miss is displayed in the Super Reach performance, the background image of each stage is switched back to that of the stage displayed before the Super Reach performance developed within the changing display in which the Super Reach performance was executed (the background image of the stage displayed before the Super Reach performance developed); in that situation, even if the background image of the stage is displayed until the next changing display begins, the stage BGM is not output, and the BGM exclusive to the Super Reach performance is not output either (it is silent, or a specific BGM different from both the stage BGM and the BGM exclusive to the Super Reach performance is output). Therefore, even if the fluctuation stops (confirmed stop) when the reach is not missed, the stage BGM will not be interrupted (end), and even if it is "Stage B,""StageC," or "Prediction Stage" where the stage BGM is output continuously for the next fluctuation (or "Stage A" where this is not the case), if it is a miss via the super reach performance, the stage BGM will be interrupted before the fluctuation stops (confirmed stop), and the stage BGM will start from the beginning when the next fluctuation begins.
In addition, in the "chance mode" and "rush mode", the pseudo consecutive performance is not executed. Here, a special performance that suggests that the pseudo consecutive performance will be executed (for example, a continuation line notice, such as "It will continue!", which confirms the execution of the pseudo consecutive performance, or "Maybe it will continue?", which does not confirm the execution of the pseudo consecutive performance) is executed, suggesting that the pseudo consecutive performance (re-changing display) will be executed later, but this special performance is displayed only in "stage A" and "stage C", and is not displayed in "stage B" and "pre-reading stage". In other words, by preparing both a stage where the possibility of the pseudo consecutive performance being executed can be sensed in advance and a stage where it cannot be sensed, and repeating the stage transition between the stages, a performance that does not tire the player is realized. In addition, in "stage A", a special performance with a character A as a motif is executed, but in "stage C", a special performance with a character B as a motif is executed. In addition, a pseudo consecutive confirmation effect is provided, which is different from the special effect and determines that a pseudo consecutive performance will be performed thereafter simply by its occurrence (for example, when character C appears, the line "Continuation confirmed!" is always displayed), and a development confirmation effect is provided, which is different from both the special effect and the pseudo consecutive performance and determines that a pseudo consecutive performance will not be performed thereafter and will develop into a super reach performance simply by its occurrence (for example, when character D appears, the line "Development confirmed!" is always displayed). This pseudo consecutive performance and development confirmation effect can be performed in any of "Stage A", "Stage B", "Stage C", and "Prediction Stage". In this way, when a pseudo consecutive performance is performed and when a pseudo consecutive performance is not performed, by displaying one or more combinations of the special effect, the pseudo consecutive performance, and the development confirmation effect, the execution expectation of the pseudo consecutive performance and the development expectation of the super reach performance can be diversified. In addition, the special effect, pseudo consecutive confirmation effect, and development confirmation effect may all be executed during one re-changing display, and in that case, during a certain re-changing display (for example, the first or second re-changing display), there may be a pattern in which a special effect is executed, a pattern in which a pseudo consecutive confirmation effect is executed, and a pattern in which a development confirmation effect is executed.Here, in a pattern in which a special effect is executed during a certain re-changing display (for example, the first or second re-changing display), after a special effect is executed during that certain re-changing display, a pseudo consecutive confirmation effect may further be executed during that certain re-changing display.
In this embodiment, different types of effects can be executed depending on which performance mode is being executed, and the type of the transformation target performance executed differs depending on the performance mode, and the type of the suggestive performance that suggests that the transformation target performance may be executed and the execution of the suggestive performance differ. In this embodiment, at the timing when the pseudo consecutive performance "NEXT" is displayed, in order to make the player aware of the execution of the pseudo consecutive performance, the screen transformation performance is not executed (not the transformation target performance), but is not limited to this, and the screen transformation performance may be executed (it may be the transformation target performance). In that case, it is preferable to configure it so that the possibility of the screen transformation performance is lower than other predetermined advance notice performances (for example, the performance that stops the enemy character during the super reach performance described above, or the step-up advance notice performance that is part of the advance notice performance before the reach state).

<Sixth aspect>
(Feature 11) First, even if the pattern change is one in which a screen transformation performance is executed or one in which a screen transformation performance is not executed, a ready state can be formed during the pattern change. In addition, the expectation of the screen transformation performance being executed differs depending on the pattern change performance mode and the ready pattern mode when the pattern is ready. Specifically, the ready pattern mode and the execution or non-execution (execution probability) of the screen transformation performance are associated so that the screen transformation performance is more likely to be executed when the pattern is "7" than when the pattern is "2". More specifically, when the pattern is "7" and the ready state is reached, the ratio of the screen transformation performance that stops the enemy character during the super ready state to the screen transformation performance that does not is 5:5, and when the pattern is "2" and the ready state is reached, the ratio of the screen transformation performance that stops the enemy character during the super ready state to the screen transformation performance that does not is 2:8. The configuration may be such that when a screen deformation effect is executed, it is more likely that a reach will occur with the symbol "7." For example, if a screen deformation effect is executed in a step-up preview effect and then a reach state occurs, the probability of a reach occurring with the symbol "7" is 10%, and of a reach occurring with the symbol "2" is 15%; however, if a screen deformation effect is not executed in a step-up preview effect and then a reach state occurs, the probability of a reach occurring with the symbol "7" is 1%, and of a reach occurring with the symbol "2" is 20%.

<Seventh aspect>
(Feature 12) In the screen transformation performance, the normal decorative pattern 502 may be included in the performance layer 524 as the target object 516, but the simple decorative pattern 504 may not be included in the target object 516 and may be included in the game status layer 523 as an image showing the game status. In addition, even during the execution of the screen transformation performance, it is possible to display a volume setting image 532 for adjusting the volume and to adjust the volume according to the player's operation.

(Feature 13) When a screen transformation effect is executed while the volume setting image 532 is displayed before the execution of the screen transformation effect, the volume setting image 532 is not included in the frame image that is the target of the transformation, that is, the volume setting image 532 continues to be displayed on the volume and light intensity display layer 522, which is a layer different from the effect layer 524, and the volume can be adjusted by the player's operation.

(Feature 14) The normal reserved image 506 can be subject to deformation by a screen deformation performance, but the simple reserved image 507 cannot be subject to deformation by a screen deformation performance. Since the movable role piece 520 can be operated even in a situation where a screen deformation performance that includes the normal reserved image 506 as a subject of deformation is being executed, the visibility of the simple reserved image 507 is not obstructed by the movable role piece 520 when the movable role piece 520 is in operation and viewed from the front. In this case, the visibility of the normal reserved image 506 may also be displayed in a manner that is not obstructed by the movable role piece 520, or may be obstructed. Alternatively, the normal reserved image 506 may not be subject to deformation by a screen deformation performance.

(Feature 15) When a screen transformation performance is executed, a specific performance sound (sound effect) is output. Specifically, when the screen transformation performance starts (for one second from the start), a sound effect of "Pikeen!" is output, while the screen transformation performance is being executed (for one second from the start to one second before the end), a sound effect of "Gugugugu" is output, and when the screen transformation performance ends (for one second until the end), a sound effect of "Splish!" is output. In this case, the sound effect at the start or end of the screen transformation performance is louder than the sound effect in the middle of the screen transformation performance under the same volume level in the volume adjustment (this relationship is true regardless of which volume level is set), so that the screen transformation performance can be made to have a sharp content not only visually but also aurally. Regarding the degree of deformation/ratio of the transformation target performance, unlike the volume, at the start or end of the screen transformation performance, the degree of deformation/ratio of the transformation target performance is small (if it is reduced, the reduction rate is small, and if it is four vertices transformation, the initial position movement distance of each vertex is short) compared to before the start of the screen transformation performance, while in the middle of the screen transformation performance, the degree of deformation/ratio of the transformation target performance is large (if it is reduced, the reduction rate is large, and if it is four vertices transformation, the initial position movement distance of each vertex is long) compared to before the start of the screen transformation performance. By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a performance with a sense of surprise in which visual and auditory sharpness are reversed. Note that the volume level in the volume adjustment has five levels, for example, and can be set to any one of levels 1 to 5 as the volume adjustment, and the performance sound corresponding to each type of performance is output at a volume corresponding to the set volume level. Here, even if the volume level is the same, the volume differs depending on the type of performance. For example, as mentioned above, the sound effect "Pikeen!" at the start of a screen transformation performance (1 second from the start) and the sound effect "Splat!" at the end of the screen transformation performance (1 second until the end) are louder than the sound effect "Gugugugu" during the screen transformation performance (1 second after the start to 1 second before the end) regardless of the volume level set (for example, at volume level 1, the sound effects "Pikeen!" and "Splat!" are 30 dB, and the sound effect "Gugugugu" is 20 dB, and at volume level 5, the sound effects "Pikeen!" and "Splat!" are 80 dB, and the sound effect "Gugugugu" is 70 dB).
(Feature 16) As described above, the normal pending image 506 and the changing image 508 may also be displayed as included in the target object 516 as the target of transformation in the screen transformation performance.
(Feature 17) Alternatively, as shown in the game status layer 523 of Figure 33, the normal pending image 506 and the changing image 508 may not be included in the target object 516 as the target of transformation in the screen transformation performance, but may be displayed in a separate layer, the game status layer 523.

<Eighth aspect>
(Feature 18) When a specific error occurs, an error warning image 536 indicating the error is displayed on the performance display device 60. When an error occurs during execution of a screen transformation performance, the error warning image 536 is not included in the frame image to be transformed, and is displayed on an error display layer 521, which is a layer different from the performance layer 524 on which the screen transformation performance is displayed.

(Feature 19) The process of the super reach effect has a first half and a second half, and when a screen deformation effect is performed, the first half is more likely to have a red light-emitting effect that suggests that the development to the second half, which is a so-called hidden button effect, is certain or highly anticipated. The screen deformation effect here is preferably performed before the super reach effect, for example, in the step-up notice effect before the reach state, but other than that, for example, a screen deformation effect that stops the enemy character during the super reach effect may be performed in the first half, and a red light-emitting effect that suggests the appearance of the hidden button effect may be more likely to occur in the first half. The hidden button effect is an effect in which a specific effect (here, a light-emitting effect) appears when the player operates the effect button 109 at a specified timing, even though no button image or button operation instructions are displayed on the screen, and is performed in the first half here. The light-emitting effect is an effect that changes the color of the decorative lamps 111 around the effect display device 60 and the color of the effect display simulating light (color as an image) on the effect display device 60, and the degree of expectation increases in the order of the light-emitting colors from blue to green to red (the degree of expectation of development to the latter half or the degree of expectation of a big win increases). In addition, the back button effect can also be automatically repeated by pressing and holding the effect button 109. As a modified example, if a screen deformation effect that stops the enemy character is executed in the latter half of the super reach effect rather than in the first half, when the screen deformation effect is executed in the latter half, compared to when the screen deformation effect is not executed, in the repeated pressing of the effect button 109 in the first half of the super reach effect (automatic repeated pressing is possible by pressing and holding the effect button 109), the color of the light of the decorative lamps 111 around the effect display device 60 and the color of the effect display simulating light on the effect display device 60 may be configured to be red, which suggests that the development to the latter half of the super reach effect is certain or has a high degree of expectation, rather than blue or green.

(Feature 20) When the screen deformation effect is executed, a button image that is not a normal color (e.g., white), for example, a red button image or a rainbow button image that suggests a relatively high probability of winning, is more likely to be displayed. The button image here may be a button image before the reach state or a button image during the super reach effect, and an effect other than the button image is displayed when the player actually operates the effect button 109 while this button image is displayed. For example, when a button image is displayed before the reach state and the effect button 109 is operated, a dialogue preview effect (an effect in which the expectation of a jackpot differs depending on the content of the dialogue or the color of the speech bubble) is displayed, and when a button image is displayed during the super reach effect (at the end of the second half) and the effect button 109 is operated, a cut-in effect (an effect in which a cut-in screen of an ally character is displayed, and an effect in which the expectation of a jackpot differs depending on the type of character displayed in the cut-in and the color of the cut-in) is executed. Here, when a button image of a non-normal color is displayed, it is more likely that a type of effect with a higher probability of winning (a dialogue preview effect in red rather than blue for a dialogue preview effect, or a cut-in effect in red rather than blue for a cut-in effect) will be displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 109 than when a button image of a non-normal color is displayed, compared to when a screen deformation effect is not executed. Note that an effect that instructs (prompts) a player to operate by displaying a button image is referred to as an operation instruction effect (button effect).
Furthermore, in this embodiment, there is a button appearance stirring performance, which is a performance that stirs up whether or not the operation instruction performance (button performance) will start. In this button appearance stirring performance, a silhouette image representing the silhouette of the performance button 109 is displayed on the screen in advance, and a performance that makes the player expect that a button image imitating the performance button 109 will appear thereafter (i.e., the operation instruction performance will start). In this button appearance stirring performance, if the silhouette image of the performance button 109 gradually changes to a button image, the stirring is successful. On the other hand, if the silhouette image of the performance button 109 fades out from the screen in this button appearance stirring performance, the stirring is unsuccessful. Note that when a button image is displayed, it is not necessary to execute such a button appearance stirring performance, and the button image may be displayed suddenly without going through the button appearance stirring performance. Here, the button appearance stirring performance may have a plurality of display modes, and in such a configuration, for example, the button appearance stirring performance accompanied by a red effect may be configured to be more likely to change to a button image than the button appearance stirring performance accompanied by a blue effect. As another variation, when a button appearance prompting effect is executed, it may always change to a button image. In this case, it may be configured so that a button appearance prompting effect accompanied by a red effect has a higher expectation of a jackpot than a button appearance prompting effect accompanied by a blue effect, or multiple types of button images may be provided (such as a blue button image and a red button image, where a red button image is more likely to result in a high expectation preview effect than a blue button image; for example, a red line preview effect is more likely to be executed than a blue line preview effect), and a more specific button image (for example, a red button image) may be provided for a button appearance prompting effect accompanied by a red effect than for a button appearance prompting effect accompanied by a blue effect. In the case where the button appearance prompting performance is always changed to a button image when it is executed, other than the above, a long-term (e.g., 4 seconds) button appearance prompting performance may be configured to have a higher expectation of a jackpot than a short-term (e.g., 2 seconds) button appearance prompting performance, or a long-term (e.g., 4 seconds) button appearance prompting performance may be configured to have a specific button image (e.g., a red button image) than a short-term (e.g., 2 seconds) button appearance prompting performance. In addition, when a plurality of types of display modes of the button appearance prompting performance are provided, a button appearance prompting performance with a higher expectation may be executed more easily in the latter half of the variable display (a specific timing after the reach) than in the first half of the variable display (a specific timing before the reach), or the button appearance prompting performance may not be executed in the first half of the variable display (a specific timing before the reach), and the button appearance prompting performance may be executed only in the latter half of the variable display (a specific timing after the reach).
During the execution of the operation instruction performance, an operation effective period (input effective time) during which the operation of the performance button 109 is effective is set. The operation effective period is a period during which the operation of the performance button 109 is effectively accepted when the performance button 109 is operated. "Effectively accepting the operation of the performance button 109" means that when the performance button 109 is operated, the operation of the performance button 109 is effectively accepted by the sub-substrate 300, and a predetermined process is performed based on the effective operation. The predetermined process corresponds to a process of proceeding with the dialogue preview performance triggered by the operation of the performance button 109. During this operation effective period, the performance button 109 (the LED element built into the performance button 109) is illuminated, and a button image imitating the performance button 109 and an indicator image visually indicating the remaining period of the operation effective period are displayed on the screen to notify that the operation of the performance button 109 is effective or to prompt the user to input an operation. In addition, a ring-shaped effect image (referred to as a "specific image") that emits sparks is displayed around the button image on the screen. This specific image gradually expands as the operation valid period elapses. Then, when the effect button 109 is operated during the operation valid period, it progresses to a dialogue preview effect. When the effect button 109 is operated, the display mode of the specific image is forcibly changed to the final display mode. The final display mode of the specific image is the display mode when the specific image is displayed at its maximum enlargement. This operation instruction effect (button effect) is an effect (button effect pattern A) in which the specific image is displayed while the button image and the indicator image are displayed (during the operation valid period), but other button effects (button effects other than the operation instruction effect) in this embodiment are effects (button effect pattern B) in which the specific image is not displayed while the button image and the indicator image are displayed (during the operation valid period).
In the line preview performance, when one of a plurality of characters (the aforementioned ally character and enemy character) appears and utters a predetermined line, a specific image is continuously displayed around the character in the final display mode. In this line preview performance, the expectation of a big win is suggested according to the display mode (display color) of the line uttered by the character. In this embodiment, three types of display colors of the lines are set, namely, "blue", "red", and "giraffe pattern", and the expectation of a big win increases by one step in the order of "blue"<"red"<"giraffepattern". When the line preview performance starts (when the performance button 109 is operated), the button image and the indicator image are not displayed, but the specific image is continuously displayed. As a modified example of this embodiment, the line preview performance may be configured as a step-up type performance. This step-up performance is set by dividing the display process of the preview performance into multiple stages, making the number of stages to be displayed variable so that the greater the number of stages, the higher the expectation of a big win. In this embodiment, it is an evolving type performance in which the performance mode (characters and lines) changes stepwise according to a predetermined order, and suggests or notifies the high expectation of a big win according to the number of stages that evolve. For example, the step-up performance may be configured with two performance steps (step-up 1, step-up 2), and the performance mode (characters and lines) displayed in step-up 1, which is the first performance step, may be different from the performance mode (characters and lines) displayed in step-up 2, which is the second performance step.
The flow of the performance is as follows:
(A) When the button appearance prompting performance starts, a silhouette image showing the silhouette of the performance button 109 is displayed on the screen. When this silhouette image gradually changes into a button image and the prompting is successful, the operation instruction performance starts.
(B) When the operation instruction performance is started, the operation valid period of the performance button 109 is set, the performance button 109 is illuminated, and a button image imitating the performance button 109 and an indicator image visually indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period are displayed on the screen. In addition, a specific image (effect image) in the shape of a ring emitting sparks is displayed around the button image. Such a display encourages the user to operate the performance button 109 within the button operation valid period.
(C) As the button operation valid period elapses, the display mode (remaining period) of the indicator image changes, and the specific image is enlarged and displayed around the button image. At this time, if the effect button 109 is operated within the operation valid period, the operation instruction effect is switched to the dialogue preview effect. At this time, the button image and the indicator image are hidden. Meanwhile, the effect image is forcibly changed to the final display mode and continues to be displayed as it is.
(D) When the line preview performance starts, a character and the line "This is your big chance" are displayed on the screen, and the color of the line indicates the likelihood of a big win. A specific image is continuously displayed around the character and line in the final display mode. By displaying the specific image across the operation instruction performance and the line preview performance in this way, it is possible to indicate to the player that the line preview performance will occur when the performance button 109 is operated (it is suggested that the current button performance is a line preview performance).
Also, as a modified example of the above embodiment, the execution of the button appearance prompting effect may be determined by lottery, and the probability of winning in the variable display may be relatively higher when the button appearance prompting effect is executed than when the button appearance prompting effect is not executed. Also, the longer the execution time of the button appearance prompting effect (the display time of the silhouette image) is, the higher the probability of winning in the variable display may be, or a highly accurate effect indicating whether or not a win has occurred may be generated by the button operation. At that time, when the line notice effect (button appearance prompting effect) is executed at the timing of the win/loss branch (a specific timing after the reach, which is the latter half of the variable display described above), it is preferable that the performance time of the button appearance prompting effect (the display time of the silhouette image) is set to a longer time than the effective operation period of the effect button 109. Conversely to this configuration, the performance time of the button appearance prompting effect (the display time of the silhouette image) may be set to a shorter time than the effective operation period of the effect button 109. As another modification, a plurality of display modes (for example, a blue button image, a red button image, a rainbow button image, a large button image, a small button image, etc.) may be prepared as the display mode of the button image. In that case, whether or not the button appearance prompting effect can be executed and the duration of the effect when executed may be varied according to the display mode of the button image to be executed thereafter.
As a further variation, the dialogue preview effect can be executed (a button image can be displayed) even during one or more variable displays (pre-reading variable displays which are variables before the target) before the pending activation ball that is the pre-reading target is consumed, and the possibility of a button appearance prompting effect being executed can be lowered during the execution of the pre-reading variable display than during the execution of the variable display (the relevant variable display) when the pending activation ball that is the pre-reading target is consumed, and the possibility of a high-expectation button appearance prompting effect (such as a button appearance prompting effect accompanied by a red effect as described above or a long-lasting (for example, 4 seconds) button appearance prompting effect) being executed can be lowered during the execution of the pre-reading variable display than during the execution of the variable display (the relevant variable display) when the pending activation ball that is the pre-reading target is consumed. As another variation, in the case where the button appearance prompting performance is not executed in the first half of the variable display (a predetermined timing before the reach) (or a button appearance prompting performance with a low expectation is executed without executing a button appearance prompting performance with a high expectation) and the button appearance prompting performance is executed in the second half of the variable display (a specific timing after the reach) (or a button appearance prompting performance with a high expectation is executed instead of a button appearance prompting performance with a low expectation), the longer the period between the predetermined timing before the reach, which is the first half of the variable display, and the specific timing after the reach, which is the second half of the variable display, is (for example, 90 seconds rather than 60 seconds), the higher the expectation of a big win may be configured, or the button image at the specific timing after the reach, which is the second half of the variable display, may be configured to be an image with a high expectation (for example, a red button image rather than a blue button image). Also, the button presentation pattern A may be configured to be used in the first half of the variable display (a predetermined timing before the reach), and the button presentation pattern B may be configured to be used in the second half of the variable display (a specific timing after the reach). Furthermore, although details will be described later, timing for displaying a button image at a specified timing before the reach, which is the first half of the changing display, may start from the start of the changing display, and timing for displaying a button image at a specific timing after the reach, which is the second half of the changing display, may start from the start of a specific performance (normal reach performance or super reach performance), and the timing for displaying a button image at a specific timing after the reach, which is the second half of the changing display, may be configured to be longer than the timing for displaying a button image at a specified timing before the reach, which is the first half of the changing display.

(Feature 21) A screen deformation effect may be executed as a preview effect by looking ahead. In such a configuration, the screen deformation effect is not executed from the pattern change being executed at the new ball entry timing, which is the look-ahead timing, but from the next change (the next change after the change with the new ball entry). Specifically, in the change with the new ball entry, the pattern change is normal (the screen does not deform and the normal decorative pattern 502 changes), and immediately after the start of the next change (for example, 0.5 seconds after the start of the change), the pattern change is also normal (the screen does not deform and the normal decorative pattern 502 changes), but from then on, the pattern change continues after the screen deformation effect is executed until the middle of the target change that was the subject of the look-ahead (for example, 10 seconds after the start of the target change). The pattern change after the screen deformation effect is executed is, for example, the change display of the normal decorative pattern 502 when the screen is tilted or reduced. As mentioned above, in the case of a target change that is the subject of a pre-read, the screen deformation effect continues until halfway through, after which it switches to the normal pattern change effect. It should be noted that it switches at least until it develops into a Super Reach effect. Even if a power outage or other power abnormality occurs in the change before the target that is partway through a screen deformation effect that continues across multiple pattern change effects, and the power is restored from that outage, as a general rule, the original screen deformation effect will not be restored in the change before the target. However, the screen deformation effect may be executed again in the case of a target change that is the subject of a pre-read.

(Feature 22) If an error occurs before the execution of a screen transformation performance, causing the performance before transformation that should be displayed in the frame image to be transformed to not start, the screen transformation performance will not be executed even when it is time to start the performance before transformation. For example, this is the case when a malfunction occurs in the timer that measures the timing of the performance using the timing means 307 of the sub-board 300, causing the performance before transformation that should be displayed in the frame image to be transformed to not start. As a variant, even if the performance before transformation does not start due to a malfunction of the timer, the screen transformation performance may be executed with only the background performance being displayed as the target of transformation.

(Feature 23) The standby demo screen is displayed on the performance layer 524, but is not subject to transformation by the screen transformation performance. In a modified example, the standby demo screen may be displayed on the game status layer 523.
(Feature 24) In the case where the screen transformation effect is to be executed in response to the operation of the effect button 109 by the player, the timing at which the execution of the screen transformation effect starts depends on the timing at which the operation of the effect button 109 starts. Note that the button image is also displayed on the effect layer 524, but is not subject to transformation by the screen transformation effect, and the screen transformation effect is executed after the effect button 109 is operated and the button image is erased. In a modified example, the button image may be displayed on the game status layer 523. In a further modified example, when the timing to display the button image is reached during the execution of the screen transformation effect, the button image may also be subject to the screen transformation effect (subject to transformation), and the effect displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 109 while the button image is displayed may also be subject to the screen transformation effect (subject to transformation). In addition, when a button image begins to be displayed while a screen transformation effect is being executed, if the timing at which the display of the button image ends is earlier than the timing at which the execution of the screen transformation effect ends, the button image will be displayed as a screen transformation effect from its start to its end, but if the timing at which the display of the button image ends is later than the timing at which the execution of the screen transformation effect ends, the button image will be displayed as a screen transformation effect from its start to a middle point, and then displayed in the normal form (without transformation) until the end. The same is true for the effect that is displayed in response to the operation of effect button 109 while the button image is displayed; if a effect that is displayed in response to the operation of effect button 109 while the button image is displayed begins to be displayed while a screen transformation effect is being executed, if the timing at which the display of the effect that is displayed in response to the operation of effect button 109 while the button image is displayed ends earlier than the timing at which the execution of the screen transformation effect ends, the effect that is displayed in response to the operation of effect button 109 while the button image is displayed will be displayed as a screen transformation effect from its start to its end, but if the timing at which the display of the effect that is displayed in response to the operation of effect button 109 while the button image is displayed ends later than the timing at which the execution of the screen transformation effect ends, the effect that is displayed in response to the operation of effect button 109 while the button image is displayed will be displayed as a screen transformation effect from its start to halfway through, and then will be displayed in the normal manner (without transformation) until it ends.

<Ninth aspect>
(Feature 25) During the execution of the screen deformation performance, even if a reserve corresponding to a new ball is generated and the advance information corresponding to the reserve is information that allows a look-ahead notice performance to be executed (for example, a reserve with a high expectation that allows a super reach performance to be executed, a reserve that will result in a big win, etc.), the execution of the look-ahead notice performance is restricted. For example, while the screen deformation performance is being executed, it may be controlled so that a look-ahead notice performance triggered by a new ball is not executed, or it may be controlled so that the look-ahead itself is not executed.

<Tenth aspect>
(Feature 26) When a screen transformation performance is executed, the simple decorative pattern 504 is displayed in a form that is included in the image showing the game status of the game status layer 523 that is not the target of transformation in the screen transformation performance. Therefore, the simple decorative pattern 504 that was displayed in a position in the performance screen 500, i.e., in a position overlapping with the framed image 514, before the start of the screen transformation performance, may be displayed outside the framed image 514, for example, in a position overlapping with the frame image 510 that is the special first image or the background image 518 that is the second image, when the framed image 514 is reduced in the screen transformation performance (such a display relationship is established at a predetermined timing (e.g., the middle) during the execution of the screen transformation performance). On the other hand, the normal decorative pattern 502 is not included in the image showing the game status of the game status layer 523 in the screen transformation performance, but may be included in the frame image that is the target of transformation in the performance layer 524. Therefore, in the screen transformation performance, the normal decorative pattern 502 may be displayed at a position overlapping the framed image 514, which is the special first image, but not at a position overlapping the background image 518, which is the second image. It is preferable that such a display relationship is always satisfied while the screen transformation performance is being performed, but as a modified example, such a display relationship may be achieved at least at a predetermined timing (for example, in the middle) during the screen transformation performance (if it is not the predetermined timing, it may be displayed at a position overlapping the background image 518). In addition, as another modified example, the normal decorative pattern 502 may also be displayed in a form that is included in the image showing the game status of the game status layer 523.

(Feature 27) When a screen transformation effect is executed, the simple pending image 507 is displayed in a form that is included in the image showing the game status of the game status layer 523, which is not the target of transformation in the screen transformation effect. On the other hand, the normal pending image 506 is not included in the image showing the game status of the game status layer 523 in the screen transformation effect, but may be included in a frame image that is the target of transformation in the effect layer 524. As a variant example, the normal pending image 506 may also be displayed in a form that is included in the image showing the game status of the game status layer 523.

(Feature 28) As described above, in addition to performing fluctuations (e.g., movement from top to bottom) in the normal decorative pattern 502, when configured to perform a display accompanied by a predetermined action (action at the start of fluctuation, action at temporary stop, action at reach, swinging action) at the start of fluctuation, immediately after temporary stop, after reach is achieved, during temporary stop, etc., a jackpot action such as enlarging the display of the pattern when three patterns are lined up to achieve a jackpot pattern combination, such as "777", may be configured to be executable as a further predetermined action. In such a configuration, it is preferable that the screen deformation effect is not executed when a jackpot action is executed, but that the screen deformation effect is executable when other predetermined actions are executed, and it is also preferable that the jackpot action is not executed during the execution of the screen deformation effect, but that other predetermined actions are executable.

(Feature 29) When a new hold occurs during the execution of a screen transformation effect, the normal pending image 506 may be included in the target of transformation by the screen transformation effect, or the normal pending image 506 may not be included in the target of transformation by the screen transformation effect. In the case of a change that develops into a Super Reach effect, this is preferably the specification for the change period until the development into a Super Reach effect. Since the normal pending image 506 is not displayed while the Super Reach effect is displayed, in either case, when a screen transformation effect is executed for a Super Reach effect, it is not included in the target of transformation by the screen transformation effect. Note that the duration of the process of transforming the frame image in the screen transformation effect (i.e., the execution period of the screen transformation effect) is set to be longer than the time of the animation display when the hold occurs, regardless of the effect that is the target of transformation.

<Eleventh aspect>
(Feature 30) When a reservation is stored during a normal performance, the performance display device 60 displays a normal reservation image 506 indicating the number of reservations. The normal reservation image 506 corresponding to the lottery value at which the pattern change display has started among the normal reservation images 506 is switched to a changing image 508 indicating that the pattern is changing. Here, during the execution of the screen transformation performance, the normal reservation image 506 is hidden, while the changing image 508 continues to be displayed. The frame still performance, which is one of the screen transformation performances, is a performance in which the performance that has been displayed until then is stopped as if it were a pause display, and the frame image, which is a still image, is transformed, and since it is preferable in terms of performance to not include a moving image in the frame image, the normal reservation image 506 is hidden. On the other hand, the changing image 508 does not increase or decrease during the pattern change, so it continues to be displayed as it is during the execution of the screen transformation performance. In a modified example, the changing image 508 may also be hidden during the execution of the screen transformation performance.

The simple hold image 507 continues to be displayed while the screen transformation performance is being performed. As a result, even if a new hold occurs while the screen transformation performance is being performed, the normal hold image 506 is not additionally displayed, but the number of holds shown in the simple hold image 507 is increased without disrupting the screen transformation performance.

(Feature 31) When executing a still-in-frame performance, which is one of the screen transformation performances, the normal hold image 506 may be included in the frame image, which is a still image in which the performance that was displayed up until that point is frozen as if paused. If an animation display was being executed when the hold occurred, that animation display is also included in the frame image in a still state. The display of the changing image 508 may also be included in the frame image, and that animation display is also included in the frame image in a still state. Note that while the screen transformation performance is being executed, the simple hold image 507 continues to be displayed. As a result, even if a new hold occurs while the screen transformation performance is being executed, no additional normal hold image 506 is displayed, but the number of holds shown in the simple hold image 507 is increased without impeding the screen transformation performance.

(Feature 32) When executing a still-in-frame effect, which is one of the screen transformation effects, the normal decorative pattern 502 may be hidden without being included in the frame image, which is a still image in which the effect that was displayed up until that point is stopped as if it were a paused display. On the other hand, the simple decorative pattern 504 continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Note that the time during which the effect is stilled in the screen transformation effect is longer than the time it takes for the simple decorative pattern 504 to change one revolution (for example, as mentioned above, if the type of the simple decorative pattern 504 is "1" to "7", and the display changes as follows, "123" → "234" → "345" → "456" → "567" → "671" → "712" → "123" → ..., one revolution is from the first "123" to the next "123"). In this way, if it is possible to recognize that the simple decorative pattern 504 makes at least one revolution during the screen transformation effect, it is possible to distinguish whether the current game situation is paused or truly stopped (the game is not progressing).

(Feature 33) Also, unlike feature 32, when executing a still-in-frame performance, which is one of the screen transformation performances, the normal decorative pattern 502 may be included in a frame image, which is a still image that freezes the performance that has been displayed up until that point, as if it were paused, but in that case, the normal decorative pattern 502 is a fixed display. In other words, the normal decorative pattern 502 does not display a variable display or an animation display. On the other hand, the simple decorative pattern 504 continues to display a variable display. Note that the still time of the performance in the screen transformation performance is longer than the time it takes for the simple decorative pattern 504 to change one cycle (for example, as mentioned above, if the type of the simple decorative pattern 504 is "1" to "7", and the display changes as follows, "123" → "234" → "345" → "456" → "567" → "671" → "712" → "123" → ..., the time from the first "123" to the next "123" is displayed is one cycle). In this way, if it can be recognized that the simple decorative pattern 504 rotates at least once during the screen transformation performance, it is possible to distinguish whether the current game situation is paused or has actually stopped (the game is not progressing).

(Feature 34) In a still-framed effect, which is one of the screen transformation effects, a still image in which the effect that has been displayed is made to freeze as if in a paused state may be included in the target object 516 as the still-framed image 514, and the stillness and color inversion may be processed simultaneously, or deformation processing may be performed simultaneously. However, while a still-framed effect, which is one of the screen transformation effects, is being executed, it is also possible to execute an still-framed effect in which a frame image, which is a still image in which the effect is frozen as if in a paused state, is the subject of deformation, but the execution of the deformation processing is not started while the effect is frozen.
(Feature 35) Even during the screen transformation effect, the volume setting image 532 can be displayed and the volume can be adjusted.
(Feature 36) When a screen transformation effect is executed under the condition that the volume setting image 532 is being displayed before the occurrence of the screen transformation effect, the display of the volume setting image 532 continues as is, and in parallel, the player can adjust the volume through operation.

(Feature 37) When a screen transformation performance is performed under a situation where an error warning image 536 is displayed due to an error occurring before the execution of the screen transformation performance, the display of the error warning image 536 continues as is. Note that even if the error warning sound is output at the maximum volume, which is the specified volume, the volume can be adjusted in parallel through the player's operation, and the volume setting image 532 can be displayed on the volume light amount display layer 522 in FIG. 33. However, the volume setting image 532 is not included in the target of transformation in the screen transformation performance. More specifically, when the volume setting image 532 is displayed by the player's operation during the execution of the screen transformation performance, and the volume is adjusted and the display of the volume setting image 532 is changed by the player's operation during the execution of the screen transformation performance and while the volume setting image 532 is displayed, the volume setting image 532 during the execution of the screen transformation performance and before the display change (for example, the display of "volume level is 1") and the volume setting image 532 during the execution of the screen transformation performance and after the display change (for example, the display of "volume level is 2") are both displayed in a display mode without screen transformation. In addition, if the volume setting image 532 is displayed by a player operation immediately before the screen transformation effect is executed, and the screen transformation effect is executed immediately thereafter (while the volume setting image 532 is displayed), and the volume is adjusted and the display of the volume setting image 532 is changed by the player operation while the volume setting image 532 is displayed and while the screen transformation effect is being executed, the volume setting image 532 before the screen transformation effect is executed and before the display change (for example, displaying "volume level is 1") and the volume setting image 532 after the screen transformation effect is executed and after the display change (for example, displaying "volume level is 2") are both displayed in a display mode without screen transformation.

(Feature 38) When a still frame effect (such as pausing the effect that was displayed up until that point), which is one of the screen deformation effects, is executed during the animated display of normal hold image 506 when a hold occurs, if the display of normal hold image 506 is to be maintained, the animated display of normal hold image 506 may be stopped (i.e., the display of normal hold image 506 continues, but is displayed without animation). The animated display of normal hold image 506 here refers to the animated display when a normal hold occurs, and excludes displays that change the color or pattern of normal hold image 506 as a preview preview effect.

(Feature 39) In a screen transformation presentation, when a frame image of a video that has been displayed up until that point (a single frame image frozen as in a paused display in the case of a still-framed presentation, or multiple frame images switched sequentially in the case of a video-in-frame presentation) is the subject of color inversion (subject to transformation), a volume setting image 532 can be displayed even during color inversion, and volume adjustment via operation by the player is possible in parallel. Note that in subsequent "color inversions," both the frame image frozen as in a paused display in a still-framed presentation, and the multiple frame images switched sequentially in a video-in-frame presentation, are subject to color inversion processing.
(Feature 40) In a situation where the volume setting image 532 is displayed before color inversion is performed, even if color inversion is subsequently performed, the display of the volume setting image 532 continues as is, and the player can also adjust the volume through operation in parallel.
(Feature 41) In a situation where an error occurs before color inversion and the error warning image 536 is displayed, even if color inversion is subsequently performed, the display of the error warning image 536 continues as is. Note that even if the error warning sound is output at the maximum volume, which is the specified volume, the volume can be adjusted in parallel through an operation by the player, and the volume setting image 532 can be displayed on the volume light amount display layer 522 in FIG. 33. However, the volume setting image 532 is not subject to color inversion. More specifically, when the volume setting image 532 is displayed by a player operation during color inversion, and the volume is adjusted and the display of the volume setting image 532 is changed by a further player operation during color inversion and while the volume setting image 532 is being displayed, the volume setting image 532 during color inversion and before the display change (for example, display of "volume level is 1") and the volume setting image 532 during color inversion and after the display change (for example, display of "volume level is 2") are both displayed in a display mode that is not color inverted. In addition, if the volume setting image 532 is displayed by a player operation immediately before color inversion is performed, and then color inversion is performed immediately thereafter (while the volume setting image 532 is being displayed), and the volume is adjusted and the display of the volume setting image 532 is changed by a player operation while the volume setting image 532 is being displayed and the color inversion is being performed, the volume setting image 532 before the color inversion is performed and before the display change (for example, displaying "volume level is 1") and the volume setting image 532 after the color inversion is performed and the display change (for example, displaying "volume level is 2") are both displayed in a non-color inverted display mode.
(Feature 42) When color inversion is performed during the animation display of normal hold image 506 when hold occurs, if the display of normal hold image 506 is to be maintained, the animation display of normal hold image 506 may be stopped (i.e., the display of normal hold image 506 continues, but is displayed without animation). The animation display of normal hold image 506 here refers to the animation display when a normal hold occurs, and excludes displays that change the color or pattern of normal hold image 506 as a preview performance.

<Twelfth aspect>
FIG. 35 shows a schematic diagram of a plurality of buffer areas obtained by dividing a frame buffer.
(Feature 43) The performance display control means 305 includes a frame buffer 338 that temporarily stores frame images that constitute a moving image to be displayed on the performance display device 60. The frame buffer 338 is divided to include five buffer areas, a first buffer area 540, a second buffer area 542, a third buffer area 544, a fourth buffer area 546, and a fifth buffer area 548, each of which has a capacity capable of storing a frame image.
(Feature 44) In a presentation pattern that executes a screen transformation presentation, for example, three buffer areas, namely, a first buffer area 540, a second buffer area 542, and a third buffer area 544, are used.

FIG. 36 shows a schematic diagram of the relationship between the display size of a frame image and the capacity of a frame buffer area.
(Feature 45) The frame buffer 338 of this embodiment includes at least a first buffer area 540 having a capacity capable of storing a frame image of a first display size that exceeds the screen area size of the performance display device 60, and a second buffer area 542 that is an area different from the first buffer area 540 and has a capacity capable of storing a frame image of a second display size that is the same as or smaller than the screen area size of the performance display device 60. As shown in FIG. 36, the first buffer area 540 has a capacity capable of storing an image of the target object 516 (i.e., the above-mentioned "frame image of the first display size"). The second buffer area 542 has a capacity capable of storing the framed image 514 (i.e., the above-mentioned "frame image of the second display size"), but is not capable of storing the entire target object 516. When the image of the target object 516 is displayed and controlled at 100% size, the display size exceeds the screen area size of the performance display device 60, and mainly the frame image 510 is outside the screen area, so that only the frame image 514 is actually displayed on the performance display device 60 so that it can be seen by the player. In other words, when the target object 516 is displayed and controlled at 100% size, most of the frame image 510 is not displayed on the performance display device 60, or even if it is partially displayed, it is hidden by the center decoration 64 and is almost difficult to see by the player. When displaying at least a performance that may be the target of the screen deformation performance, the first buffer area 540 is used as a frame buffer, and when displaying a performance that is not the target of the screen deformation performance, the second buffer area 542 is used as a frame buffer. The multiple types of performance patterns include a first special performance pattern in which a performance that may be the target of the screen deformation performance is determined, and a second special performance pattern in which a performance that is not the target of the screen deformation performance is determined.

As shown in FIG. 35, the third buffer area 544, the fourth buffer area 546, and the fifth buffer area 548 also have the same capacity as the second buffer area 542, and have the capacity to store the framed image 514, but not the entire target object 516. In this way, the first buffer area 540 is the only buffer area that can store the target object 516 including the frame image 510, and the other buffer areas are limited to a level where they cannot store the target object 516 but can store the framed image 514. As a result, even if the frame buffer 338 does not necessarily have an abundant data capacity, five buffer areas can be secured by limiting the capacity of each buffer area to the minimum necessary. This also makes it possible to avoid contention in the use of buffer areas in the drawing process, suppress the processing load, and efficiently diversify the presentation.

The first special effect pattern is a performance pattern in which a first special effect is defined in which the first buffer area 540 is used as a frame buffer, and a new frame image is generated in sequence by synthesizing an image obtained by deforming a frame image of a first display size stored in the first buffer area 540 at a predetermined timing so that the image can be displayed within the screen area of the performance display device 60, an image showing a game status, and a background image, and the new frame image is stored in the first buffer area 540. The second special effect pattern is a performance pattern in which a second special effect different from the first special effect is defined in which a new frame image is generated in sequence by synthesizing an image obtained by deforming a frame image of a second display size stored in the second buffer area 542 at a predetermined timing, an image showing a game status, and a background image, and the new frame image is stored in the second buffer area 542.
(Feature 46) For each of the multiple types of special effect patterns, it is determined which of the multiple buffer areas is to be used as a frame buffer.

<Thirteenth aspect>
(Feature 47) For example, the first special effect pattern uses the first buffer area 540, the second special effect pattern uses the second buffer area 542, and the third special effect pattern uses the third buffer area 544 and the fourth buffer area 546. In this way, it is possible to define a plurality of types of special effect patterns that use different buffer areas according to the size of the frame image that is the target of deformation by the screen deformation effect, and it is possible to provide diversity in the effects while maintaining the efficiency of the drawing process and the utilization efficiency of the frame buffer 338.
(Feature 48) The fourth special effect pattern may be determined to use the first buffer area 540 like the first special effect pattern, and the fifth special effect pattern may be determined to use the second buffer area 542 like the second special effect pattern, and there may be multiple types of special effect patterns that use overlapping buffer areas.
(Feature 49) The first special effect pattern and the second special effect pattern are not executed simultaneously in parallel (by design, they are not executed within the same fluctuation, or even if they are executed within the same fluctuation, the execution timings do not overlap). The fourth special effect pattern and the fifth special effect pattern are also not executed simultaneously in parallel (by design, they are not executed within the same fluctuation, or even if they are executed within the same fluctuation, the execution timings do not overlap). The third special effect pattern is not executed simultaneously in parallel with the first special effect pattern, the second special effect pattern, the fourth special effect pattern, and the fifth special effect pattern (by design, they are not executed within the same fluctuation, or even if they are executed within the same fluctuation, the execution timings do not overlap).

(Feature 50) For multiple special effect patterns that are scheduled to be displayed simultaneously (design-wise executable within the same variation, and execution timing may overlap within the same variation), it is specified that different buffer areas are used for each. However, for multiple special effect patterns that are not scheduled to be displayed simultaneously (design-wise not executed within the same variation, or execution timing may not overlap even if executed within the same variation), if it is decided to display a performance by one special effect pattern while displaying a performance by the other special effect pattern, the performance by the other special effect pattern that was determined later is displayed with priority over the performance by the one special effect pattern that was displayed earlier. For example, if the first special effect pattern and the fourth special effect pattern that use the same first buffer area 540 are executed simultaneously in parallel, the performance of the special effect pattern that was executed earlier is stopped, and the performance of the special effect pattern that was commanded later is started with priority. Similarly, if the second special effect pattern and the fifth special effect pattern, which use the same second buffer area 542, are executed simultaneously in parallel, the execution of the special effect pattern that was executed first is stopped, and the execution of the special effect pattern commanded later is started as a priority.

Here, "stop the execution of the special effect pattern that was executed earlier" may be a process of canceling the execution of the screen transformation effect that was executed up to that point and returning to the playback of the video image before the screen transformation effect was started. This makes it possible to avoid processing problems in advance when the buffer area to be used conflicts, even if the number of special effect patterns to be transformed by the screen transformation effect is increased. In addition, even if the screen transformation effect overlaps, normal image processing can be maintained and the burden on image processing can be reduced by switching between the cancellation of the screen transformation effect and the effect to be prioritized. In addition, as a modified example, the design may be configured so that multiple types of special effect patterns that use the same buffer area are executed simultaneously in parallel (that is, they may be designed to be executed simultaneously in parallel in advance). In such a case, for example, when the first special effect pattern and the fourth special effect pattern that use the same first buffer area 540 are executed simultaneously in parallel, the execution of the special effect pattern that was executed earlier is stopped, and the effect of the special effect pattern commanded later is started with priority. Similarly, when a second special effect pattern and a fifth special effect pattern that use the same second buffer area 542 are executed simultaneously in parallel, the effect of the special effect pattern that was executed first is stopped, and the effect of the special effect pattern that was commanded later is started as a priority.

Figure 37 shows a schematic diagram of the process of transforming a frame image stored in a buffer area. First, at a predetermined timing when the screen transformation performance is started, a frame image stored in the first buffer area 540 of the frame buffer 338 is read into the drawing memory 334 (S900). This frame image is a target object 516 including a frame image 514 and a frame image 510, and is one frame of the moving image that has been displayed up until that point. This frame image is read into the drawing memory 334 and transformed, and the frame image that follows the moving image that has been displayed up until that point is the frame image that was originally to be displayed, but from now on, a new frame image that will be generated by the transformation process and the synthesis process will be displayed in place of that frame image. Therefore, in the still frame performance, the enemy character included in the content of this frame image, which has been displayed in motion up until that point, becomes still in this frame image, so that it becomes like a captured image of the moving image. In the case of the moving image performance within the frame, the frame images read into the drawing memory 334 are sequentially switched, and the enemy character included in the content of those frame images is displayed in motion.

At the time when the target object 516 is stored in the first buffer area 540 and displayed on the performance display device 60, the frame image 510 is located outside the screen area of the performance display device 60, and is in a state where it is not substantially visible to the player, or where only a small part is visible. The target object 516 is reduced (S902) so that the frame image 510 fits within the screen area of the performance display device 60, thereby making the entire target object 516 visible. For convenience, in this figure, the size of the target object 516 in S10 is set to 100%, and in S12, the target object 516 is reduced to approximately 80%. However, in the actual drawing process of a moving image, instead of instantaneously switching from 100% to 80%, it is a gradual reduction process in which microscopically, drawing is repeated by reducing the size by, for example, 1% each time a new frame image is generated. The foreground image 517 and the background image 518 are superimposed on the target object 516 thus reduced (S904). In this diagram, an example of a foreground image 517 is shown in which a lightning-shaped object is overlaid on the foreground of the target object 516, but other images showing the game status, such as simple decorative patterns 504 and simple hold images 507, are also overlaid on the foreground while updating their content for each frame image. The images overlaid in S14 are combined to form the next frame image 519 (S906), and are written into the first buffer area 540 to become the next frame image that will make up the moving image.

The target object 516 of S14 is gradually deformed when drawing the subsequent frame images. For example, the target object 516 of S14 is color-inverted, another foreground image 517 is overlaid on the image (S908), and an image showing the game status such as the updated simple decorative pattern 504 and the simple reserve image 507 and a background image 518 are overlaid, and these overlaid images are synthesized to form a new frame image 519 (S910), which is written into the first buffer area 540 to become the next frame image that constitutes the moving image. Thereafter, the target object 516 is sequentially deformed for each subsequent frame image, and the foreground image 517 and background image 518 are overlaid, and an image showing the game status such as the updated simple decorative pattern 504 and the simple reserve image 507 is overlaid (S912), and thus a new frame image is synthesized to form the moving image.

<14th aspect>
(Feature 51) In the first special effect pattern and the fourth special effect pattern, a main image portion having a display size equivalent to the screen area size of the effect display device 60 and a frame image 510 formed to surround the periphery of the main image portion constitute one effect image, and a moving image is displayed on the effect display device 60 by sequentially generating new frame images in which an image in which the display ratio and shape of the effect image are changed and an image showing the game status are synthesized so that at least a part of the frame image 510 located outside the screen area of the effect display device 60 can be displayed within the screen area of the effect display device 60. In this way, when the screen deformation effect is performed, the frame image 510, which is normally difficult to see, is deformed by enlarging and reducing or swaying while being shown, thereby making it possible to create an even more dynamic effect. If the frame image 510 is to be displayed as a normal reserved image 506, an image including the normal reserved image 506 may be deformed by the screen deformation effect.

The second special effect pattern, the third special effect pattern, and the fifth special effect pattern create a single effect image with a main image portion having a display size equal to the screen area size of the effect display device 60, and a moving image is displayed on the effect display device 60 by sequentially generating new frame images that combine an image in which the display ratio and shape of the effect image have been changed with an image showing the game status.
(Feature 52) In the second, third, and fifth special effect patterns, the frame image 510 is not displayed. The frame image 510 is not displayed in a specific situation such as a standby demo screen or during a jackpot.

<Fifteenth aspect>
38 shows an example screen of the third special effect pattern. The third special effect pattern is an effect involving a screen transformation effect in which the transformation timing is determined by the operation input of the effect button 109. In the third special effect pattern, a button image 550 is displayed at a predetermined timing to prompt the player to operate the effect button 109. When the player operates the effect button 109, the frame image is transformed by the screen transformation effect. The button image 550 is displayed multiple times, and the frame image is transformed by the screen transformation effect every time the effect button 109 is operated in accordance with the button image 550.

(Feature 53) In the third special effect pattern, when the effect button 109 is operated, new frame images are generated in sequence by synthesizing an image obtained by modifying the frame image at the timing of the operation input with an image showing the game status, and the new frame images are stored in the first buffer area 540, causing a moving image to be displayed on the effect display device 60. Furthermore, when the effect button 109 is operated, new frame images are generated in sequence by synthesizing an image obtained by modifying the frame image stored in the first buffer area 540 at the timing of the operation input with an image showing the game status, and the new frame images are stored in the second buffer area 542, causing a moving image to be displayed on the effect display device 60.

Figure 39 shows a schematic diagram of the process of using the buffer areas in the third special effect pattern. In the third special effect pattern, frame images are stored alternately in the third buffer area 544 and the fourth buffer area 546 each time the player operates the effect button 109. That is, the frame images of the currently displayed moving image are stored sequentially in the third buffer area 544, and the button image 550 is displayed at a predetermined timing (S920). When the player operates the button image 550, a frame image is read from the third buffer area 544 (S922), an image is generated with deformation added by the screen deformation effect (S924), and the image is stored in the fourth buffer area 546 as the next frame image (S926). The frame images of the moving image are stored sequentially in the fourth buffer area 546, and the button image 550 is displayed again at a predetermined timing.

When the player operates the button image 550, a frame image is read from the fourth buffer area 546 (S928), an image with deformation due to the screen deformation effect is generated (S930), and the image is stored in the third buffer area 544 as the next frame image (S932). Frame images of the moving image are stored sequentially in the third buffer area 544, and the button image 550 is displayed again at a predetermined timing. When the player operates the button image 550, a frame image is read from the third buffer area 544 (S934), an image with deformation due to the screen deformation effect is generated (S936), and the image is stored in the fourth buffer area 546 as the next frame image (S938). Frame images of the moving image are stored sequentially in the fourth buffer area 546.

In this way, the third buffer area 544 and the fourth buffer area 546 are alternately used to repeatedly store frame images that have been moved little by little. This allows the player to clearly see the progress and display of effects that must be visually recognized by the player when a screen transformation effect is executed, such as the effect button 109 and images showing the game status, while still maintaining the sense of dynamism, thereby achieving both a sense of dynamism in the effect and visibility of the progress of the effect. Furthermore, when executing effects that place a high processing load, such as repeated screen transformation effects, the buffer area can be divided into multiple areas and processed alternately, distributing the processing load and avoiding malfunctions.

(Feature 54) In the third special effect pattern, button image 550 is not included in the target of transformation by the screen transformation effect.
(Feature 55) A sixth special effect pattern may be further included. The effect by the sixth special effect pattern is not subject to the transformation by the screen transformation effect, but includes an effect state as if the screen transformation effect was executed. However, since it is not a screen transformation effect, both the first display element and the second display element are operated in a dramatic manner, but it is not a dramatic operation in which the first display element and the second display element are completely synchronized like the screen transformation effect, but is a dramatic operation in which the first display element and the second display element are not synchronized (for example, the first display element is a background display, and the second display element is a normal decorative pattern 502 or a display object specific to that effect, etc.).

The present invention has been described above based on the embodiments. However, these embodiments are merely illustrative, and it will be understood by those skilled in the art that various modifications are possible in the combination of each component and each treatment process, and that such modifications are also within the scope of the present invention.
In addition, during the execution of the special game in this embodiment, a count-up effect can be executed in which the total number of prize balls is counted up on the screen of the effect display device 60 based on the detection of a ball entering the large prize opening in the special game (for example, if the number of prize balls currently acquired is "2000" and there are 15 prize balls, the effect of counting up by one, such as 2000 → 2001 → 2002 → ... 2015) can be executed, and a highlighting display can be executed to emphasize that the number of prize balls on the display displayed in the count-up reaches a specific number (for example, when the number of prize balls on the display displayed in the count-up reaches 2500, a display of "2500" is displayed larger than the number of prize balls on the display displayed in the count-up). For these effects and displays, the specifications described below may be adopted. When the large prize opening 20 is opened in one unit game, it is closed when nine game balls enter (the number of prize balls for one ball entering is "15"). In this way, the number of game balls, which is the end condition of a unit game (the closing condition of the large prize opening 20), is referred to as the specified count number.
(1) When an over-winning (a ball that exceeds the specified count) occurs while a count-up effect corresponding to the entry of game balls within a specified count number (particularly a count-up effect corresponding to the ninth count, which is the specified count number) is being performed and the count-up of 15 balls has not yet been completed, it is desirable to configure the count-up effect corresponding to the over-winning to start after all count-up effects that have not yet completed the count-up of 15 balls have been completed (after 15 balls have been counted). Here, if the over-winning is detected just before the end of the interval period (the pause time from when the end of each unit game is set until the setting of the next unit game or end demo is started), the count-up performance corresponding to the over-winning will overlap with the execution period of the next round (the next round that starts after the interval period has elapsed). However, even if a ball enters the large winning port 20 during the execution of the count-up performance corresponding to the over-winning which is executed during the execution of the next round (the next round that starts after the interval period has elapsed), if the timing of the ball entry is while the count-up performance corresponding to the over-winning is being executed and the count-up of 15 balls has not yet been completed, it is preferable that the count-up performance corresponding to the ball entering the large winning port 20 in the next round will start after all the count-up performances that have not yet completed the count-up of 15 balls have been completed (after the count-up of 15 balls has been completed).
(2) The time required to count up one prize ball (the time required to count up from "N" to "N+1") is set to "0.03 seconds", that is, the count up is performed in increments of "0.03 seconds". The execution time of the count up performance is derived by multiplying the time required to count up one prize ball by the value of the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) awarded when one game ball enters the large prize opening 20, and the execution time of the count up performance is "15 (unit number of prize balls) x 0.03 seconds (count up interval) = 0.45 seconds". However, even if a special game is being executed, the count up performance is configured not to be executed during the execution of the start demo and the end demo. In addition, the execution time of the count up performance is set to be shorter than the interval time (also called the "interval period") set after the end of each unit game. The interval time is a waiting time set between each unit game or between the final unit game and the end demo, and is a unit game waiting time or end demo waiting time during which the large prize winning hole 20 is kept closed from the start of the closing operation, and is set to "2 seconds" in common to all round games. In addition, by configuring the count-up performance time (0.45 seconds) to be shorter than the interval time (2 seconds), even if a count-up performance is performed based on a game ball entering the large prize winning hole 20 just before the end of a certain unit game, the count-up performance will be completed within the interval time after the end of the unit game. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the count-up performance will be performed beyond the interval period and extend to the next unit game or the end demo (if an over-winning is made, the interval period may be exceeded), and the division between each unit game or the division between the final unit game and the end demo can be clearly defined.
(3) The count-up presentation time is set to be shorter than the execution time of the end demo. As mentioned above, the count-up presentation time is set to "0.45 seconds". The execution time of the end demo is set to "20 seconds" for all jackpot types (performance during jackpot). The execution time of the end demo is the waiting time from the time when the interval time after the end of the final unit game in the special game has elapsed until the special game ends. In other words, the execution time of the end demo does not include the interval time set after the end of the final unit game. That is, the interval time after the end of the final unit game is set as the remaining time (grace time) of the unit game during which the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 20 may be effectively detected (i.e., detected as a target for prize ball payout, not determined as illegal entry), but the execution time of the end demo is set as a preparation time for a game (presentation mode) after the end of a special game separated from the unit game during which the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 20 may not be effectively detected. By configuring the count-up presentation time (0.45 seconds) to be shorter than the execution time of the end demo (20 seconds), even if the count-up presentation is performed based on the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 20 just before the end of the final unit game, or even if an over-entry occurs in the final unit game, or even after the closing of the large prize opening 20 after the final unit game (even during the end demo period), if the count-up presentation is performed, the count-up presentation will be completed within the end demo period. Therefore, the count-up performance is not performed beyond the end demo period and across to the variable display after the special game ends, and the division between the end of the special game and the start of the variable display of the first rotation can be clearly defined.
(4) When a specified number of game balls enter the big prize opening 20 in one unit game, the total time of the count-up performance for the specified number of game balls in this one unit game (the count-up performance for the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one unit game) is configured to be shorter than the execution time of the big win end demo. Specifically, the total time of the count-up performance for the specified number of game balls is "0.45 seconds (count-up performance time) x 10 balls (specified count number) = 4.5 seconds." On the other hand, the execution time of the big win end demo is set to "20 seconds" in common for all big win types (performance during big win), as described above. In this embodiment, the total time (4.5 seconds) of the count-up performance for the specified number of counts is configured to be shorter than the execution time (20 seconds) of the jackpot end demo, so that even if multiple count-up performances are performed consecutively based on multiple game balls entering the jackpot entry port 20 in succession just before the end of the final unit game, or even after the jackpot entry port 20 is closed after the final unit game (even during the jackpot end demo period), if the count-up performance is performed, the count-up performance will be completed within the jackpot end demo period. Therefore, the count-up performance will not be performed beyond the jackpot end demo period and before the variable display after the special game ends, and the division between the end of the special game and the start of the variable display for the first rotation can be clearly defined.

The techniques described in the examples and variants may be specified in the following ways:

[First aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
A winning/losing lottery means for executing a winning/losing lottery based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game, when a ball enters the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that variably displays a pattern to indicate the result of the winning/losing lottery;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
A reserve control means for storing a lottery value corresponding to the new ball entry as a reserve up to a predetermined number when a new ball entry is made into the start winning hole and a pattern change corresponding to the previous ball entry is displayed;
a performance display device on which performance content is displayed;
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
A performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
When a new ball is scored, advance information on a lottery value corresponding to the new ball is transmitted to the performance determination means;
As a performance image that can be displayed on the performance display device, at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group are included,
A special effect is executed in which a special first image in which the first image is transformed in a predetermined manner and the second image in which the second image is not transformed in the predetermined manner are displayed;
Based on the advance information, a specific performance suggesting a probability of transition to a special game related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information can be executed by a pattern change prior to a pattern change related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information,
The pinball game machine has a plurality of types of the specific performance, and the expectation of whether or not the special performance will be executed by the pattern change related to the reserved item that triggers the execution of the specific performance varies depending on the type of the specific performance that is executed by the pattern change prior to the pattern change related to the reserved item that triggers the execution of the specific performance.

[Second aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
A winning/losing lottery means for executing a winning/losing lottery based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game, when a ball enters the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device on which a special pattern for indicating the result of the winning/losing lottery is displayed in a variable manner;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the special symbol is determined;
a performance display device on which performance content is displayed;
A predetermined movable part that is provided near the performance display device and operates in a performance-oriented manner in conjunction with the performance displayed on the performance display device;
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
A performance control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
The display device has a decorative pattern which is a pattern which shows the result of the winning/losing lottery in a dramatic manner, and the decorative pattern includes at least a normal decorative pattern which is displayed as a main pattern on the performance display device when the special pattern stops, and a simplified decorative pattern which is displayed in a display form which is simplified more than the normal decorative pattern,
As a performance image that can be displayed on the performance display device, at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group are included,
A special effect is executed in which a special first image in which the first image is transformed in a predetermined manner and the second image in which the second image is not transformed in the predetermined manner are displayed;
When the special performance is performed, the operations of the predetermined movable parts are performed simultaneously and in parallel relatively more frequently than when the special performance is not performed,
A pinball game machine characterized in that, in the special performance, the normal decorative pattern may be included in a first image belonging to the first image group, while the simple decorative pattern may be included in a second image belonging to the second image group.

[Third aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
A winning/losing lottery means for executing a winning/losing lottery based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game, when a ball enters the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that variably displays a pattern to indicate the result of the winning/losing lottery;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
a performance display device on which performance content is displayed;
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
A performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
As a performance image that can be displayed on the performance display device, at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group are included,
A special effect is executed in which a special first image in which the first image is transformed in a predetermined manner and the second image in which the second image is not transformed in the predetermined manner are displayed;
A pinball game machine characterized in that even if the type of the first image that is the subject of transformation in the special performance is different, the second image that is not the subject of transformation in the special performance is a common image.

[Fourth aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
A winning/losing lottery means for executing a winning/losing lottery based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game, when a ball enters the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that variably displays a pattern to indicate the result of the winning/losing lottery;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
a performance display device on which performance content is displayed;
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
A performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
As a performance image that can be displayed on the performance display device, at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group are included,
A special effect is executed in which a special first image in which the first image is transformed in a predetermined manner and the second image in which the second image is not transformed in the predetermined manner are displayed;
When a predetermined error occurs, a warning image indicating that the predetermined error has occurred can be displayed;
A pinball game machine characterized in that, when the special effect is started under a situation in which the warning image is displayed due to the occurrence of the specified error before the special effect begins, the warning image does not change to the specified form but continues to be displayed in the same form as before the special effect began.

[Fifth aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
A winning/losing lottery means for executing a winning/losing lottery based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game, when a ball enters the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that variably displays a pattern to indicate the result of the winning/losing lottery;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
A reserve control means for storing a lottery value corresponding to the new ball entry as a reserve up to a predetermined number when a new ball entry is made into the start winning hole and a pattern change corresponding to the previous ball entry is displayed;
a performance display device on which performance content is displayed;
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
A performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
As a performance image that can be displayed on the performance display device, at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group are included,
A special effect is executed in which a special first image in which the first image is transformed in a predetermined manner and the second image in which the second image is not transformed in the predetermined manner are displayed;
When a hold corresponding to a new ball is generated, a hold image corresponding to the hold can be displayed.
When displaying the reserved image, the display can be started with a predetermined animation display,
This pinball game machine is characterized in that the display of the reserved image begins with the specified animation display before the execution of the special effect begins, and even if the special effect begins during the execution of the specified animation display, the specified animation display continues to be executed without being stopped.

[Sixth aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
A winning/losing lottery means for executing a winning/losing lottery based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game, when a ball enters the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that variably displays a pattern to indicate the result of the winning/losing lottery;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
A reserve control means for storing a lottery value corresponding to the new ball entry as a reserve up to a predetermined number when a new ball entry is made into the start winning hole and a pattern change corresponding to the previous ball entry is displayed;
a performance display device on which performance content is displayed;
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
A performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
When a new ball is scored, advance information on a lottery value corresponding to the new ball is transmitted to the performance determination means;
As a performance image that can be displayed on the performance display device, at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group are included,
A special effect is executed in which a special first image in which the first image is transformed in a predetermined manner and the second image in which the second image is not transformed in the predetermined manner are displayed;
Based on the advance information, a specific performance suggesting a probability of transition to a special game related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information can be executed by a pattern change prior to a pattern change related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information,
There are a plurality of types of the specific performance, and the expectation of whether or not the special performance will be executed by the pattern change related to the reservation that triggered the execution of the specific performance varies depending on the type of the specific performance that is executed by the pattern change prior to the pattern change related to the reservation that triggered the execution of the specific performance,
Whether the pattern change is one in which the special performance is executed or one in which the special performance is not executed, a ready state can be formed during the pattern change.
In the pinball game machine, when the pattern change forms the ready state, the expectation of whether or not the special performance is executed by the pattern change varies depending on the type of the pattern forming the ready state.

[Seventh aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
A winning/losing lottery means for executing a winning/losing lottery based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game, when a ball enters the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device on which a special pattern for indicating the result of the winning/losing lottery is displayed in a variable manner;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the special symbol is determined;
a performance display device on which performance content is displayed;
A predetermined movable part that is provided near the performance display device and operates in a performance-oriented manner in conjunction with the performance displayed on the performance display device;
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
A performance control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
The display device has a decorative pattern which is a pattern which shows the result of the winning/losing lottery in a dramatic manner, and the decorative pattern includes at least a normal decorative pattern which is displayed as a main pattern on the performance display device when the special pattern stops, and a simplified decorative pattern which is displayed in a display form which is simplified more than the normal decorative pattern,
As a performance image that can be displayed on the performance display device, at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group are included,
A special effect is executed in which a special first image in which the first image is transformed in a predetermined manner and the second image in which the second image is not transformed in the predetermined manner are displayed;
When the special performance is performed, the operations of the predetermined movable parts are performed simultaneously and in parallel relatively more frequently than when the special performance is not performed,
In the special performance, the normal decorative pattern may be included in a first image belonging to the first image group, and the simple decorative pattern may be included in a second image belonging to the second image group,
Even during the execution of the special effect, volume adjustment based on a player's operation can be performed, and when the volume adjustment is performed, a volume setting image can be displayed;
A pinball game machine characterized in that when the special effect is started under a situation in which the volume adjustment image is displayed before the special effect is started, the volume adjustment image does not transform to the specified form but continues to be displayed while maintaining the display form before the special effect is started.

[Eighth aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
A winning/losing lottery means for executing a winning/losing lottery based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game, when a ball enters the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that variably displays a pattern to indicate the result of the winning/losing lottery;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
a performance display device on which performance content is displayed;
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
A performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
As a performance image that can be displayed on the performance display device, at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group are included,
A special effect is executed in which a special first image in which the first image is transformed in a predetermined manner and the second image in which the second image is not transformed in the predetermined manner are displayed;
Even if the type of the first image to be transformed in the special effect is different, the second image that is not the target of transformation in the special effect is a common image,
When a predetermined error occurs, a warning image indicating that the predetermined error has occurred can be displayed;
A pinball game machine characterized in that, when the specified error occurs during execution of the special effect, the warning image is displayed without being deformed in the specified manner.

[Ninth aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
A winning/losing lottery means for executing a winning/losing lottery based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game, when a ball enters the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that variably displays a pattern to indicate the result of the winning/losing lottery;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
A reserve control means for storing a lottery value corresponding to the new ball entry as a reserve up to a predetermined number when a new ball entry is made into the start winning hole and a pattern change corresponding to the previous ball entry is displayed;
a performance display device on which performance content is displayed;
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
A performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
When a new ball is scored, advance information on a lottery value corresponding to the new ball is transmitted to the performance determination means;
As a performance image that can be displayed on the performance display device, at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group are included,
A special effect is executed in which a special first image in which the first image is transformed in a predetermined manner and the second image in which the second image is not transformed in the predetermined manner are displayed;
Based on the advance information, a specific performance suggesting a probability of transition to a special game related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information can be executed by a pattern change prior to a pattern change related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information,
When a predetermined error occurs, a warning image indicating that the predetermined error has occurred can be displayed;
When the special effect is started under a situation in which the warning image is displayed due to the occurrence of the predetermined error before the start of the execution of the special effect, the warning image is not transformed into the predetermined form, but is maintained in the display form before the start of the execution of the special effect and continues to be displayed,
This pinball game machine is characterized in that, when a hold corresponding to a new ball is generated during the execution of the special effect, the execution of the specific effect corresponding to the hold is restricted.

[Tenth aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
A winning/losing lottery means for executing a winning/losing lottery based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game, when a ball enters the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device on which a special pattern for indicating the result of the winning/losing lottery is displayed in a variable manner;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the special symbol is determined;
a performance display device on which performance content is displayed;
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
A performance control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
The display device has a decorative pattern which is a pattern which shows the result of the winning/losing lottery in a dramatic manner, and the decorative pattern includes at least a normal decorative pattern which is displayed as a main pattern on the performance display device when the special pattern stops, and a simplified decorative pattern which is displayed in a display form which is simplified more than the normal decorative pattern,
As a performance image that can be displayed on the performance display device, at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group are included,
A special effect is executed in which a special first image in which the first image is transformed in a predetermined manner and the second image in which the second image is not transformed in the predetermined manner are displayed;
When a hold corresponding to a new ball is generated, a hold image corresponding to the hold can be displayed.
When displaying the reserved image, the display can be started with a predetermined animation display,
The display of the reserved image is started together with the predetermined animation display before the execution of the special effect is started, and even if the special effect is started during the execution of the predetermined animation display, the predetermined animation display is not stopped but is continued;
A pinball game machine characterized in that, at a predetermined timing in the special effect, the simple decorative pattern may be displayed overlapping with the special first image and the second image in the special effect, while the normal decorative pattern may be displayed overlapping with the special first image in the special effect but not overlapping with the second image.

[Eleventh aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
A winning/losing lottery means for executing a winning/losing lottery based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game, when a ball enters the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that variably displays a pattern to indicate the result of the winning/losing lottery;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
A reserve control means for storing a lottery value corresponding to the new ball entry as a reserve up to a predetermined number when a new ball entry is made into the start winning hole and a pattern change corresponding to the previous ball entry is displayed;
a performance display device on which performance content is displayed;
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
A performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
A special effect can be executed in which a predetermined effect content displayed on the effect display device is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing,
When a reservation corresponding to a new ball is generated, a reservation image corresponding to the reservation can be displayed, and among the reservation images, a reservation image corresponding to the lottery value at which the pattern change display has started can be displayed as a changing image corresponding to the pattern change display.
This pinball game machine is characterized in that while the special performance is being performed, the reserved image is not displayed, while the changing image continues to be displayed.

[Twelfth aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
A winning/losing determination means for performing a winning/losing determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game, when a ball enters the starting winning hole;
a special game control means for executing the special game when the result of the win/loss determination is a jackpot;
A performance display device on which performance content is displayed;
A performance determination means for determining one of a plurality of performance patterns as a performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
A performance display control means for displaying performance content based on the determined performance pattern on the performance display device;
Equipped with
The performance display control means has a frame buffer that temporarily stores frame images constituting a moving image to be displayed on the performance display device,
The frame buffer comprises:
A first buffer area capable of storing a frame image having a first display size exceeding the screen area size of the performance display device;
A second buffer area that is different from the first buffer area and can store a frame image of a second display size that is equal to or smaller than the screen area size of the performance display device;
At least
The plurality of types of performance patterns include:
a first special effect pattern in which a first special effect is defined, in which the first buffer area is used as a frame buffer, and a frame image of the first display size stored in the first buffer area at a predetermined timing is transformed so that it can be displayed within the screen area of the effect display device, and a new frame image is generated in sequence by combining an image showing a game status with the transformed image, and the new frame image is stored in the first buffer area, thereby displaying a moving image on the effect display device;
a second special effect pattern in which a second special effect different from the first special effect is defined, the second buffer area being used as a frame buffer, new frame images being generated in sequence by synthesizing an image obtained by modifying a frame image of the second display size stored in the second buffer area at a predetermined timing with an image showing a game status, and the new frame images being stored in the second buffer area, thereby displaying a moving image on the effect display device;
A pinball game machine comprising:

[Thirteenth aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
A winning/losing determination means for performing a winning/losing determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game, when a ball enters the starting winning hole;
a special game control means for executing the special game when the result of the win/loss determination is a jackpot;
A performance display device on which performance content is displayed;
A performance determination means for determining one of a plurality of performance patterns as a performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
A performance display control means for displaying performance content based on the determined performance pattern on the performance display device;
Equipped with
The performance display control means has a frame buffer for temporarily storing frame images constituting a moving image to be displayed on the performance display device, and the frame buffer includes a plurality of buffer areas each capable of storing a frame image;
The plurality of types of presentation patterns each include a plurality of special presentation patterns in which it is determined which of the plurality of buffer areas is to be used as a frame buffer, and a new frame image is generated in sequence by synthesizing an image obtained by transforming a frame image stored in the buffer area at a predetermined timing with an image showing a game status, and the new frame image is stored in the buffer area, thereby displaying a moving image on the presentation display device,
The performance display control means
For multiple special effects patterns that are designed to overlap in execution timing within the same variation, it is stipulated that each use a different buffer area.
This pinball game machine is characterized in that, for a plurality of special presentation patterns designed so that their execution timing does not overlap within the same variation, when one special presentation pattern is being displayed while another special presentation pattern is being displayed, the presentation of the other special presentation pattern determined later is displayed in priority over the presentation of the one special presentation pattern that was displayed earlier.

[14th aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
A winning/losing determination means for performing a winning/losing determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game, when a ball enters the starting winning hole;
a special game control means for executing the special game when the result of the win/loss determination is a jackpot;
A performance display device on which performance content is displayed;
A performance determination means for determining one of a plurality of performance patterns as a performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
A performance display control means for displaying performance content based on the determined performance pattern on the performance display device;
Equipped with
A main image portion having a display size that can be displayed within the screen area of the performance display device and an outer frame image portion formed to surround the outer periphery of the main image portion constitute one performance image,
In the initial state of the performance image, a part or all of the outer frame image portion is not displayed within the screen area of the performance display device,
A pinball game machine characterized in that it is capable of executing a special effect in which a moving image is displayed on the performance display device by sequentially generating new frame images that combine an image in which at least one of the display ratio and shape of the performance image is changed with an image that indicates the game status, so that in the performance image in a specified situation different from the initial situation, part or all of the outer frame image portion that was not displayed within the screen area of the performance display device in the initial situation can be displayed within the screen area of the performance display device.

[Fifteenth aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
A winning/losing determination means for performing a winning/losing determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game, when a ball enters the starting winning hole;
a special game control means for executing the special game when the result of the win/loss determination is a jackpot;
A performance display device on which performance content is displayed;
A performance determination means for determining one of a plurality of performance patterns as a performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
A performance display control means for displaying performance content based on the determined performance pattern on the performance display device;
An operation input means for receiving an operation input by a player;
Equipped with
The performance display control means has a frame buffer for temporarily storing frame images constituting a moving image to be displayed on the performance display device, and the frame buffer includes a plurality of buffer areas each capable of storing a frame image;
The multiple types of presentation patterns include a special presentation pattern in which, when an operation input is made from the operation input means, a new frame image is generated in sequence by combining a deformed image of the frame image at the operation input timing with an image indicating the game status and the new frame image is stored in a first buffer area, thereby displaying a moving image on the presentation display device, and further, when an operation input is made from the operation input means, a new frame image is generated in sequence by combining a deformed image of the frame image stored in the first buffer area at the operation input timing with an image indicating the game status and the new frame image is stored in a second buffer area, thereby displaying a moving image on the presentation display device.

(Based Technology 2)
As a prerequisite technology, the basic configuration of a slot machine will be described.
FIG. 40 is a perspective view showing a basic structure of the outer surface of the slot machine 1010. The slot machine 1010 includes a housing base 1102 which is mainly a box-shaped body, a housing door 1104 provided on the front surface of the housing base 1102, and various devices provided on the housing base 1102 and the housing door 1104. The housing door 1104 is a door body attached to an opening of the housing base 1102 so as to be freely opened and closed, and the housing base 1102 and the housing door 1104 are integrated to form the housing of the slot machine 1010. The housing door 1104 is locked during business hours of the gaming establishment to prevent unauthorized access to the inside of the slot machine 1010. Access to the inside is possible only when the housing door 1104 is unlocked by an employee of the gaming establishment.

A transparent window 1132 is provided in the front center of the cabinet door 1104, and the reels rotating inside can be viewed through the transparent window 1132. A performance display device 1130 that displays performance content is provided at the top of the front of the cabinet door 1104. A first bet button 1112a, a second bet button 1112b, a settlement button 1113, a cross key 1118, a performance button 1120, and a medal insertion slot 1110 are provided in the operation area provided below the transparent window 1132 in the cabinet door 1104. The first bet button 1112a is a button for betting one medal (hereinafter also referred to as "betting"), and the second bet button 1112b is a so-called max bet button, and is a button for betting the maximum number of medals, which is three medals. The settlement button 1113 is a button for instructing the player to pay out medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 1110 and stored as reserve medals or bet medals. The cross key 1118 and the effect button 1120 are operation input means for receiving operation input from the player as an effect. Below the bet buttons 1112a and 1112b, a start lever 1114 is provided for the player to instruct the reels to start spinning. To the right of the start lever 1114, a left stop button 1116a, a center stop button 1116b, and a right stop button 1116c are provided for instructing the three reels to stop spinning, respectively. Below the cabinet door 1104, a medal payout opening 1108 and a medal tray 1106 are provided in front of it, and speakers 1122 are provided on the left and right of the payout opening 1108. A plurality of effect lamps 1124 are provided at a plurality of locations, such as around the outer periphery of the cabinet door 1104.

At the top of the performance display device 1130 (not shown), a status indicator lamp, a count indicator lamp, a stored number indicator lamp, and a payout number indicator lamp are provided. The status indicator lamp lights up when, for example, a bonus game or an AT (assist time) starts, and turns off when it ends. The count indicator lamp is a 7-segment indicator that displays the number of times a bonus game or an AT has been executed. The stored number indicator lamp is a 7-segment indicator that displays the number of stored (credited) game medals. The payout number indicator lamp is a 7-segment indicator that displays the number of game medals paid out when a minor winning combination is achieved. The payout number indicator lamp displays an alphabetical character that indicates the type of error when some abnormality (error) occurs in the slot machine 1010. For example, there are a hopper empty error, a game medal payout error, a game medal retention error, a game medal backflow error, an auxiliary storage unit full error, a reel stop error, a setting value error, etc. The hopper empty error occurs when the hopper tank 1162 is empty of game medals. The game medal payout error occurs when game medals are paid out at a timing different from the normal timing. The game medal retention error occurs when game medals are clogged inside the medal insertion port 1110. The game medal backflow error occurs when game medals move in a direction different from the normal route, such as when a game medal enters from a position different from the medal insertion port 1110. The auxiliary storage full error occurs when the hopper tank 1162 is full of game medals. The reel stop error occurs when each reel does not stop at a predetermined position. The setting value error occurs when a setting value is outside a predetermined numerical range.

Figure 41 is a rear view of the cabinet door 1104 that is exposed when the cabinet door 1104 is opened. A transparent window 1132 is provided in approximately the center. A sub-controller 1300, also known as a sub-board, that controls the presentation during the game is installed at the top. A medal selector 1150 is provided below the transparent window 1132, a medal guide path 1152 is provided to the right of the medal selector 1150, and a medal return path 1154 is provided below the medal selector 1150. When a medal is inserted into a medal insertion slot (described below), the medal selector 1150 distributes the medal to the medal guide path 1152 if the medal is in a state where it can be accepted, and distributes the medal to the medal return path 1154 if the medal is not in a state where it cannot be accepted. The medals distributed to the medal guide path 1152 are stored in a hopper tank (described below) via the medal guide path 1152.

Figure 42 is a front view showing the internal configuration of the cabinet base 1102 that is exposed when the cabinet door 1104 is opened. A left reel 1160a, a middle reel 1160b, and a right reel 1160c are rotatably mounted in approximately the center of the cabinet base 1102. The left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c are rotating members with multiple patterns printed on their outer periphery, and when each is rotated by the driving force of a stepping motor, the rotational movement of the patterns can be visually recognized by the player through the transparent window 1132.

On top of the cabinet base 1102, a main control device 1200, which is a so-called main board that controls the progress of the game, is installed. A setting change switch 1168 is provided on the right side of the main control device 1200. The setting change switch 1168 includes a button for changing the game specifications, which have six levels, a keyhole into which a setting key held by an employee of the game arcade is inserted, and a setting memory for storing the set setting value. The six setting values, each corresponding to a different game specification, range from setting 1 to setting 6, and the higher the value, the more advantageous the game specification is for the player. When an employee of the game arcade inserts the setting key into the keyhole and turns it, the button can be operated to change the setting.

A hopper tank 1162 is provided at the bottom of the cabinet base 1102, and a payout device 1164 (hereinafter also referred to as a "hopper") that pays out medals from a payout outlet 1108 is provided below the hopper tank 1162. A power supply board 1166 that supplies power to each part of the slot machine 1010 is provided to the left of the hopper tank 1162.

Figure 43 shows the arrangement of symbols on the reels. A row of symbols is printed on the outer periphery of each of the left reel 1160a, center reel 1160b, and right reel 1160c, as shown in the table in the figure. Twenty symbols corresponding to symbol numbers 0 to 19 are arranged at equal intervals on each reel. If a combination of symbols among these symbols that stops on an active line forms a predetermined identical symbol or a predetermined combination that creates a predetermined role, the role is determined to be a winning combination. On the other hand, the lines on which symbols are lined up also include combination lines that are not set as active lines, and on which a predetermined identical symbol or a predetermined combination stops, but are not treated as a winning role.

In the above slot machine 1010, the player bets medals by inserting one to three medals into the medal insertion slot 1110. If medals are stored as credits, the player bets one or three medals by pressing the first bet button 1112a, the second bet button 1112b, or the settlement button 1113. When the player operates the start lever 1114, the left reel 1160a, the center reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c start to rotate, and the rows of symbols on the reels move vertically at high speed. When the player presses the left stop button 1116a, the center stop button 1116b, and the right stop button 1116c in any order, the left reel 1160a, the center reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c stop rotating in the order corresponding to the order of the presses, and one of the symbols is displayed at the stop position. When the combination of symbols that stop on a specified winning line corresponds to one of several types of winning combinations, it is determined to be a "win" and a number of medals according to the type of winning combination is paid out or a change in game state is made.

Figure 44 is a functional block diagram of the slot machine 1010. The slot machine 1010 comprises a main control device 1200 and a sub-control device 1300. The main control device 1200 is electrically connected to the reels 1160a-c, bet buttons 1112a, b, settlement button 1113, start lever 1114, stop buttons 1116a-c, and setting change switch 1168, while the sub-control device 1300 is electrically connected to the performance lamp 1124, performance display device 1130, speaker 1122, cross key 1118, and performance button 1120. The main control device 1200 and the sub-control device 1300 each include elements such as a ROM and RAM for storing data and programs, and a CPU used for arithmetic processing in terms of hardware, but this diagram mainly describes the functional blocks from a software perspective.

Note that each functional block included in the main control unit 1200 may be configured in such a way that one of them is mounted on the sub-control unit 1300 instead of the main control unit 1200. Similarly, each functional block included in the sub-control unit 1300 may be configured in such a way that one of them is mounted on the main control unit 1200 instead of the sub-control unit 1300. However, since data transmission between the main control unit 1200 and the sub-control unit 1300 is unidirectional from the main control unit 1200 to the sub-control unit 1300, each configuration is arranged in the main control unit 1200 and the sub-control unit 1300 so that the entire operation is realized by such unidirectional data transmission. In this way, since the unidirectionality of data transmission from the main control unit 1200 to the sub-control unit 1300 is maintained, data cannot be transmitted from the configuration included in the sub-control unit 1300 to the configuration included in the main control unit 1200, and data transmission cannot be requested. Therefore, information generated by the main control unit 1200 cannot be referenced by the sub-control unit 1300 unless the main control unit 1200 transmits it unidirectionally to the sub-control unit 1300.

The main control device 1200 includes a role selection means 1202, a random number determination means 1204, a winning flag control means 1206, a reel control means 1208, a stop position determination table 1210, an operation sequence detection means 1212, a winning determination means 1214, a payout means 1216, a special game control means 1218, and a setting change means 1220.

The role selection means 1202 executes a role selection to determine a winning role from among multiple types of roles when the player operates the start lever 1114, and transmits the result of the role selection to the sub-controller 1300. There are small roles, special roles, and replay roles, and if none of the winning roles are determined, it is a miss. There are multiple types of small roles, and the number of medals paid out according to the type is determined. There are regular bonuses (also called "RB") and big bonuses (also called "BB"). The replay role is also called "replay", and is a role that allows the player to play again without inserting new medals, as if the same number of medals had been inserted. The random number determination means 1204 obtains the value of the random number used in the role selection as the selection value. Note that the "random number" referred to in this application does not have to be a mathematically generated random number, and may be a pseudo-random number generated by hardware random numbers, software random numbers, or the like. The role selection means 1202 selects a winning role by determining whether the selected value obtained by the random number determination means 1204 falls within any of the selected value ranges assigned to each role.

The winning flag control means 1206 turns on a flag corresponding to a winning role among multiple flags corresponding to each role. If the winning role that turned on the flag is a minor role, the winning is not carried over, so the flag is turned off when the game ends regardless of whether or not a prize is won. If the winning role that turned on the flag is a special role, the winning is carried over until a prize is won, so the flag remains on until a prize is won, and the flag is turned off when a prize is won. If the winning role that turned on the flag is a replay role, the winning is not carried over either, so the flag is turned off when the game ends.

The reel control means 1208, in response to the operation of the start lever 1114, controls the left reel 1160a, the center reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c to start spinning, and transmits information indicating the operation of the start lever 1114 to the sub-controller 1300. The reel control means 1208 selects one of a plurality of stop position determination tables 1210 according to the result of the role drawing. The reel control means 1208, in response to the individual pressing of the left stop button 1116a, the center stop button 1116b, and the right stop button 1116c, controls the left reel 1160a, the center reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c to stop spinning in response to the pressing, and transmits information indicating the pressing of the stop button to the sub-controller 1300. The reel control means 1208 controls the rotation and stopping of the left reel 1160a, center reel 1160b, and right reel 1160c by controlling the drive of the stepping motors provided for each reel.

The reel control means 1208 determines the stop positions of the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c according to the timing and order in which the left stop button 1116a, the middle stop button 1116b, and the right stop button 1116c are pressed, based on the stop position determination table 1210. The operation order detection means 1212 detects the order in which the left stop button 1116a, the middle stop button 1116b, and the right stop button 1116c are pressed. The reel control means 1208 detects the reference positions of the rotation positions of the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c by the corresponding photosensors.

The stop position determination table 1210 defines the correspondence between the result of the role lottery, the position of the reels 1160a-c when the stop buttons 1116a-c are pressed, the order in which the stop buttons 1116a-c are pressed, and which of the multiple symbols on the reels 1160a-c are to be stopped on the winning line. That is, individual stop position determination tables 1210 are prepared according to the type of small role, the type of special role, and the type of replay role, and the timing and order of pressing the stop buttons 1116a-c are defined in each stop position determination table 1210 as the winning conditions for each role. When any role is won, the reel control means 1208 determines the stop positions of the reels 1160a-c so that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role is aligned on the winning line based on the stop position determination table 1210 corresponding to the winning role, if the timing and order of pressing the stop buttons 1116a-c satisfy the winning conditions. Even if any of the roles is a winning combination, if the timing and order of pressing the stop buttons 1116a-c do not satisfy the winning conditions, the reel control means 1208 determines the stop positions of the reels 1160a-c based on the stop position determination table 1210 corresponding to the winning role so that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role does not line up on the winning line. If no role is a winning combination, the reel control means 1208 determines the stop positions of the reels 1160a-c based on the stop position determination table 1210 corresponding to the losing role so that the symbol combination corresponding to the role does not line up on the winning line.

In this specification, the term "table" does not only refer to data in which the correspondence between a first parameter, such as a lottery value, and a second parameter, such as a value indicating an option, is strictly defined in a table structure, but also broadly includes the case where such a correspondence is realized by a program structure that derives the second parameter from the first parameter. All of these are also referred to as "selection criteria" as appropriate, as a concept that is essentially synonymous with "table." Furthermore, when a table structure is used, a selection criterion that is essentially one type may be composed of a combination of multiple structurally subdivided tables, but the term "multiple types of selection criteria" refers to the actual number of types of tables, not the number of subdivided tables.

The winning determination means 1214 determines that a winning has occurred when a symbol combination corresponding to any of the winning roles is aligned on an active line, and determines the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the winning role. The payout means 1216 adds the number of medals to be paid out determined by the winning determination means 1214 to the number of medals stored. However, if the number of medals stored exceeds 50, the excess medals are paid out by the payout device 1164. In addition, if the winning role is a replay role, the same number of medals as the number of inserted medals that were bet in the previous play are again bet. The winning determination means 1214 transmits information regarding the winning role and information regarding the number of medals to be paid out to the sub-control device 1300.

The special game control means 1218 controls the transition from normal game to special game when a special combination is won, and from special game to normal game when the conditions for ending the special game are met. Special games include RB game, which is transitioned to when RB is won, and BB game, which is transitioned to when BB is won. RB game ends when a specified pattern or a specified combination stops on an active line eight times, or when 12 game results are obtained. BB game ends when the total number of medals paid out due to a specified pattern or a specified combination stopping on an active line exceeds 465.

The setting change means 1220 determines the game specification corresponding to the setting value set by the setting change switch 1168 from among the six game specifications, and changes the probability of winning each role in the role selection by the role selection means 1202. In the six game specifications, the higher the value from setting 1 to setting 6, the higher the probability of winning. Each time the setting change switch 1168 is operated, the setting value is incremented by one, such as "setting 1" → "setting 2" → "setting 3" → ... → "setting 6" → "setting 1", and the increment is circulated by returning from "setting 6" to "setting 1". Finally, by operating the start lever 1114, the setting value selected at that time is determined and the setting change is confirmed.

The sub-controller 1300 includes a pattern storage means 1302, a performance determination means 1304, and a performance control means 1306. The pattern storage means 1302 stores a plurality of types of performance patterns. The performance patterns include the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device 1130 as the game progresses, the lighting pattern of the performance lamp 1124, and the sound pattern to be output from the speaker 1122. The performance determination means 1304 receives information such as information indicating the operation of the start lever 1114, information indicating the pressing of the stop button 1116, information indicating the result of the role lottery, information regarding winning, and information regarding the number of medals paid out from the main controller 1200. The performance determination means 1304 selects one of the plurality of types of performance patterns stored in the pattern storage means 1302 according to the result of the role lottery by the role lottery means 1202, the winning status, and the game status, triggered by the operation of the start lever 1114 or the stop buttons 1116a-c or the stopping of the reels 1160a-c. The effect control means 1306 controls the display on the effect display device 1130, the lighting of the effect lamps 1124, and the output from the speaker 1122 according to the effect pattern selected by the effect determination means 1304. The effect control means 1306 changes the display content on the effect display device 1130, the lighting pattern of the effect lamps 1124, and the audio output from the speaker 1122 according to the input content of the effect buttons 1120 and the cross key 1118. If the bet buttons 1112a, b or the start lever 1114 are newly operated while controlling the effect based on the effect pattern, the effect control means 1306 cancels the effect being displayed, the effect determination means 1304 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the new game, and the effect control means 1306 starts the effect based on the selected effect pattern.

Figure 45 is a flowchart showing the basic flow of the game in the slot machine 1010. First, assume that none of the reels 1160a-c have yet spun (N in S1010) and no medals have been bet (N in S1012). In this state, if medals are saved as credits (Y in S1014) and one of the bet buttons 1112a, b is pressed (Y in S1016), a bet of the number of medals corresponding to the pressed bet button is set (S1018). If there are no credits, the routine of this flow is exited and the remaining processing is skipped until medals are inserted (N in S1014). If the bet buttons 1112a, b are not pressed in S1016, the routine of this flow is also exited and the remaining processing is skipped until they are pressed (N in S1016). If a bet has already been placed in S1012, skip from S1014 to S1018 (Y in S1012).

When the bet is set and the start lever 1114 is operated (Y in S1020), the role selection means 1202 executes role selection (S1022), the winning flag control means 1206 turns on the flag corresponding to the winning role according to the result of the role selection (S1024), and selects the stop position determination table 1210 according to the result of the role selection (S1025). If 4.1 seconds have not passed since the end of the previous game, it waits (N in S1026), and if 4.1 seconds have passed (Y in S1026), the reel control means 1208 starts the rotation of the reels 1160a-c (S1028) and exits the routine of this flow. If the start lever 1114 is not operated in S1020, it exits the routine of this flow and skips the remaining processing (N in S1020).

In S1010, if at least one of the reels 1160a-c is spinning (Y in S1010), and if any of the stop buttons 1116a-c is pressed (Y in S1030), the reel stop positions are determined based on the state of the flag indicating the winning combination, the timing and order of pressing the stop buttons, and the stop position determination table 1210 (S1032), and the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button is stopped (S1034). If no stop button is pressed, S1032 and S1034 are skipped (N in S1030). If all of the reels 1160a-c are stopped (Y in S1036), a winning combination is determined based on their stop positions (S1038), and if a winning combination is found, medals are paid out in the payout amount corresponding to the winning combination (S1040). If all of the reels are not stopped, S1038 and S1040 are skipped (N in S1036).

The reel stop management process involves setting a wait time, generating a control command including information indicating that the reels are waiting to start spinning and writing it to the command buffer, and storing the initial values of the various data used to accelerate the reels in a specified memory area. It is determined whether all the reels are spinning at a constant speed, and if it is determined that they are not spinning at a constant speed, it is determined whether the rotation of all the reels is abnormal, and if it is abnormal, it again stores the initial values of the various data used to accelerate the reels in a specified memory area and ends checking all the reels. On the other hand, if it is determined that they are spinning at a constant speed or that the rotation is not abnormal, it ends checking all the reels.

If it is not possible to store the medals to be paid out, a hopper payout is executed. In this hopper payout process, the hopper starts to operate and waits until a payout is detected (if a payout is not detected after a specified time has elapsed, a hopper empty error occurs). If a payout is detected, the number of payouts is added and it is determined whether or not payouts have been completed. If not, the payout process is repeated, and if payouts have been completed, the hopper operation is terminated.

Figure 46 is a block diagram showing the hardware configuration of the main control device 1200 and the sub-control device 1300. The main control device 1200 includes electronic components such as a main CPU 1250, a main RAM 1252, and a main ROM 1254. The main ROM 1254 stores a main control program and data for controlling the overall game operation. The main control program or data is read from the main ROM 1254 to the main RAM 1252, and the main control program is executed by the main CPU 1250. The electronic components are connected by buses such as a system bus and a data bus (not shown). Signals indicating the insertion of a medal, signals indicating the pressing of the bet buttons 1112a and 1112b, signals indicating the pressing of the settlement button 1113, signals indicating the operation of the start lever 1114, signals indicating the pressing of the stop buttons 1116a to 1116c, and signals indicating the positions of the reels 1160a to 1160c are acquired by the main CPU 1250 via various interfaces (not shown). The main CPU 1250 drives and controls external devices such as the stepping motors of the reels 1160a-c using various drive circuits (not shown). In addition, the main CPU 1250 transmits commands necessary for performance control to the sub-controller 1300 along with the results of the role selection, winning information, and information indicating the operation of each button and lever.

The sub-control device 1300 includes electronic components such as a sub-CPU 1350, a sub-RAM 1352, a sub-ROM 1354, and a performance display control unit 1360. The sub-ROM 1354 is one of the data storage means for storing a sub-control program including performance pattern data in which a performance process is defined and display pattern data in which a performance display process is defined, and is a hardware configuration that functions as the pattern storage means 1302 in FIG. 44. The sub-control program including the performance pattern data and display pattern data is read from the sub-ROM 1354 into the sub-RAM 1352, and performance control by the sub-control program is executed by the sub-CPU 1350. The electronic components are connected to each other by buses such as a system bus and a data bus (not shown), and are connected by bidirectional communication that allows signals to be sent and received between them. For example, when sending a command from the sub-CPU 1350 to the performance display control unit 1360, the command is sent multiple times, and the performance display control unit 1360 returns an acknowledgement (ACK) to the sub-CPU 1350 as soon as the command is properly received at least once, thereby avoiding communication errors due to noise, etc. If the order in which multiple commands are received is different from normal, the performance display control unit 1360 ignores them without returning an ACK, and returns only to the appropriate command. Signals from external devices such as the performance button 1120 are acquired by the sub-CPU 1350 via various interfaces (not shown), and a corresponding command is sent to the performance display control unit 1360 depending on the reception or number of receptions of the signal. The sub-CPU 1350 drives external devices such as the speaker 1122 by various drive circuits and control circuits (not shown) according to the performance pattern data to control the performance by audio output. The sub-CPU 1350 also transmits display pattern data to the performance display control unit 1360. The sub-CPU 1350 and the performance display control unit 1360 are hardware configurations that function as the performance determination means 1304 and the performance control means 1306 in FIG. 44. Note that in this embodiment, an example is described in which the sub-control unit 1300 includes the performance display control unit 1360, but the sub-control unit 1300 and the performance display control unit 1360 do not need to be integrated as a board, and may be formed as separate boards that are separated and connected to each other.

Figure 47 is a block diagram showing the hardware configuration of the performance display control unit 1360. The performance display control unit 1360 includes a control CPU 1362, a control RAM 1364, a data ROM 1366, and a display control circuit 1370. The data ROM 1366 is one of the data storage means that stores material data such as performance image data and motion data used for performance display, and object definition data of three-dimensional images in a data compressed state, and is a hardware configuration that functions as the pattern storage means 1302 in Figure 44. The performance image data is an image used for performance display as a performance object showing the winning judgment result, etc., and is a material image such as a sprite image used for various performances and a video used for various performances. The motion data is data that defines the action when a performance action is added at a predetermined timing to the image used for various performances. The object definition data is data that defines the shape of a three-dimensional object.

Based on the display pattern data sent from the sub-CPU 1350, material data such as performance image data, motion data, and object definition data specified in the display pattern data is read from the data ROM 1366 to the control RAM 1364, and a performance display using the material data is executed by the control CPU 1362. As a result, commands and material data related to the performance display are sent from the control CPU 1362 to the display control circuit 1370, and the display is controlled by the display control circuit 1370. If a signal indicating the operation of a new bet button 1112a, b or start lever 1114 is received during the performance display, the sub-CPU 1350 determines a new performance pattern and sends a command indicating the new performance display to the control CPU 1362. The sub-CPU 1350 and the display control circuit 1370 are hardware configurations that function as the performance determination means 1304 and the performance control means 1306 in FIG. 44.

The display control circuit 1370 includes a decoder 1374, a drawing memory 1376, a drawing circuit 1378, a frame buffer 1380, and a display circuit 1382, each of which is connected via a bus 1372. For convenience, the bus 1372 in this diagram is a comprehensive representation of buses such as a system bus, a data bus, and an address bus.

Material data such as performance image data, motion data, and object definition data sent from the control CPU 1362 is stored in the drawing memory 1376, and compressed data from this data is decoded by the decoder 1374. The drawing memory 1376 is a VRAM (Video RAM) that is used as a work area when the performance image data and motion data are decoded by the decoder 1374, and is used as a work area when the drawing circuit 1378 performs drawing processing and image processing.

The drawing circuit 1378 uses the data stored in the drawing memory 1376 to execute commands sent from the control CPU 1362 in sequence to generate an image for display, and stores the generated image for display in the frame buffer 1380 as a frame of a moving image. The frame buffer 1380 is a VRAM that serves as a buffer memory for temporarily storing frames of moving images to be output to the performance display device 1130. Note that the frame buffer 1380 and the drawing memory 1376 may be formed as a single VRAM with the area shared.

The display circuit 1382 outputs the display images stored in the frame buffer 1380 to the performance display device 1130 in the form of a video signal in the order in which they were stored. The frame buffer 1380 has a memory area for, for example, two frames, and while the display circuit 1382 outputs a display image from the memory area for one frame, the drawing circuit 1378 generates the next display image and stores it in the memory area for the other frame.

The slot machine 1010 is supplied with power from a power supply board 1166 that functions as a power supply. A power switch and a reset switch are connected to the power supply, and signals from each switch are sent to the main CPU 1250. The power switch is a switch that accepts operations to turn the power on and off from the power supply to the slot machine 1010. The reset switch is a switch for resetting each circuit mounted on the main control unit 1200 when an error occurs in the slot machine 1010. Power from the power supply is supplied to the main control unit 1200 and the sub-control unit 1300. A power supply monitoring means is provided on the power supply path from the power supply to the main control unit 1200 and the sub-control unit 1300, which monitors the supply voltage and detects a power failure when the voltage drops below a predetermined voltage. The power supply monitoring means determines that a power failure has occurred when the supply voltage drops to a predetermined voltage, and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main CPU 1250 or the sub-CPU 1350. The reference voltage value when detecting a power outage of the main control unit 1200 is set to a value higher than the reference voltage value when detecting a power outage of the sub-control unit 1300, and the main control unit 1200 executes the process (power outage process) that it is programmed to execute in the event of a power outage before the sub-control unit 1300.

Figure 48 is a flowchart showing the main program control process of the main control device 1200 in the slot machine 1010. In the game control process executed by the main control device 1200, first, a game start process is executed (S1100), a game medal management process is executed (S1102), and if the number of bets matches the specified number as a start condition and the operation of the start lever is accepted (Y in S1104), a lever acceptance time process is executed (S1106), and if at least one of the start conditions is not satisfied (N in S1104), the process returns to S1102. Following S1106, a role determination process is executed (S1108), and whether or not to execute a freeze (effect) as a freeze lottery process and the effect mode during the freeze are determined (S1110). If a pseudo game freeze is selected in the freeze lottery, a pseudo game is executed (S1112). The reel stop management process, such as waiting for a waiting time, is executed (S1114), and the stop display pattern determination process is executed to determine whether or not a game combination has been achieved (S1116). Next, the game medal payout process is executed (S1118), and the game end process is executed (S1120), and the flow of this figure is repeated by returning to S1100.

Figure 49 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in the main control device 1200. In this timer interrupt processing, the processing of reading each game operation signal output in response to a game operation such as a bet operation performed by a player, detecting (checking) the signal level, transmitting each control command, etc. is performed at regular intervals (for example, 2.235 milliseconds). First, the interrupt initial processing (saving the register, prohibiting the interrupt, etc.) is executed (S1200), and it is determined whether or not a power failure has been detected. If a power failure has been detected (Y in S1202), the power failure processing is executed (S1204). In the power failure processing, the register is saved, the stack pointer is saved, the interrupt status is saved, etc. In addition, the information on the hand determination result and the RT game status stored in a specified memory area are retained, and the checksum is calculated and stored. If a power failure has not been detected (N in S1202), the timer measurement is executed (S1206). The timer measurement measures the elapsed time of any timer set in the game control process. Next, control of the indicator lamp (updating the display value of the indicator lamp based on the control data output to the output port, etc.) is executed (S1208), and then reading of the input port is executed (S1020). When reading the input port, the signal levels of each game operation signal input to the input port are read and stored, and the signal levels are determined, etc.

Next, reel drive control (S1212) for controlling the acceleration, deceleration, constant speed maintenance, and stoppage of the reel rotation is repeated until all reels are completed (S1214). Next, port output processing is executed to output excitation to the reels, hoppers, blockers, etc. (S1216), and control command transmission processing is executed (S1218). The outer end signal data stored in a specified memory area is read out and the outer end signal is output (S1220), and interrupt end processing (register restoration, interrupt permission, etc.) is executed (S1222), and the interrupt is returned.

The main control power-on process is another control process executed by the main control device 1200. The main control power-on process is a process that is performed when power supply to the main control device 1200 starts (when the power is turned on), and involves setting a temporary stack pointer, calculating and checking a checksum, etc., so that the power restoration process can be executed. The stack pointer is restored and an interrupt is activated, and the game is played based on the information on the role determination results and the information on the RT game status that were stored in a specified memory area when the power was turned off.

Second Example
In this embodiment, we propose suitable control and presentation in a pachinko gaming machine equipped with a fall determination means. In the following, elements that are the same as or correspond to the elements constituting the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the base technology 1 and the first embodiment are described with the same reference numerals. In addition, the contents already described in the base technology are omitted as appropriate, and mainly the contents that are different from the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the base technology 1 and the first embodiment are described.

In this embodiment, a fall judgment is executed from the probability change state (also called a high probability state) to the normal probability state (also called a low probability state). When a transition is made to the high probability state after the end of a special game, a fall judgment is executed in the change start process executed when the pattern starts to change. If the fall judgment is won, the high probability state ends after the fall judgment and a transition is made to the low probability state. On the other hand, if the fall judgment is not won, the high probability state continues even after the fall judgment.

In this embodiment, the first lottery means 211 in FIG. 4 is further provided with a first fall judgment means, and the second lottery means 212 is further provided with a second fall judgment means. The first fall judgment means performs a fall judgment based on a lottery value acquired by the first lottery value acquisition means 216. The second fall judgment means performs a fall judgment based on a lottery value acquired by the second lottery value acquisition means 217. The first lottery value acquisition means 216 acquires a first fall lottery value for fall judgment by the first fall judgment means from the random number generation means 202 when a ball enters the first starting hole 11. The first fall lottery value acquired by the first lottery value acquisition means 216 is acquired separately from the first win/lose lottery value, the first design lottery value, and the first pattern lottery value. The second lottery value acquisition means 217 acquires a second fall lottery value for fall judgment by the second fall judgment means from the random number generation means 202 when the ball enters the second starting hole 12. The second fall lottery value acquired by the second lottery value acquisition means 217 is acquired separately from the second win/lose lottery value, the second pattern lottery value, and the second pattern lottery value. As a modified example, the first fall lottery value may be acquired not when the ball enters the first starting hole 11, but when the first special pattern 51 starts to change. Similarly, the second fall lottery value may be acquired not when the ball enters the second starting hole 12, but when the second special pattern 52 starts to change.

The first drop lottery value acquired by the first lottery value acquisition means 216 and the second drop lottery value acquired by the second lottery value acquisition means 217 are reserved in the special chart reservation means 241 until a new pattern change corresponding to the lottery value is started. The advance judgment means 235 is capable of determining in advance the first drop lottery value and the second drop lottery value reserved in the special chart reservation means 241 before the pattern change corresponding to the lottery value starts. The advance judgment means 235 is capable of determining in advance the transition of the game state based on the advance judgment result of the first drop lottery value and the second drop lottery value, and of determining in advance whether the game state when the lottery value subject to the advance judgment is actually judged will be a high probability state or a low probability state. The advance judgment means 235 is capable of determining in advance the lottery value reserved in the special chart reservation means 241 according to the advance judgment transition of the game state.

In this embodiment, the specific game control means 270 in FIG. 4 is provided with a probability state control means and a ball-entering state control means. The probability state control means transitions from a low-probability state in which the probability of the result of the hit/miss judgment being a jackpot is normal to a high-probability state in which the probability of the result of the hit/miss judgment being a jackpot is higher than the predetermined probability. When the condition enabling the transition to the high-probability state is satisfied, the probability state control means transitions to the high-probability state after the end of the special game. When the condition enabling the transition to the low-probability state is satisfied, the probability state control means transitions to the low-probability state after the end of the special game or when the pattern fluctuation begins. The ball-entering state control means transitions from a normal ball-entering state (also called a low ball-entering state) in which the ease of the ball-entering into the second starting hole 12 is relatively low to an easy ball-entering state (also called a high ball-entering state) in which the ease of the ball-entering into the second starting hole 12 is relatively high. When the conditions enabling a transition to the easy-to-score state are satisfied, the scoring state control means transitions to the easy-to-score state after the end of a special game or when the end of a pattern change is triggered. When the conditions for terminating the easy-to-score state (or the conditions for transitioning to the normal scoring state) are satisfied, the scoring state control means transitions to the normal scoring state after the end of a special game or when the start or end of a pattern change is triggered.

The probability state control means enables a transition to a high probability state after the end of a special game in which a predetermined type of jackpot pattern is stopped and executed. For example, a sure-win pattern (first jackpot pattern) and a non-sure-win pattern (second jackpot pattern) are prepared as patterns indicating a jackpot, and a transition to a high probability state is made after the end of a special game executed after the first jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, and a transition to a low probability state is made after the end of a special game executed after the second jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed. Note that only jackpot patterns that can transition to a high probability state may be prepared, and whether or not a transition to a probability variable state is made may be determined depending on whether or not a game ball enters a specific area in a large prize entry port that is opened during a special game after a jackpot. In other words, a configuration called "ball certain" or "V certain" in which a transition to a probability variable state is confirmed by a ball entering a specific area during a special game (V entry) may be used. As the large prize winning openings that can be opened during the special game, a first large prize winning opening without a specific area and a second large prize winning opening with a specific area may be provided, and a first unit game in which the first large prize winning opening is opened and a second unit game in which the second large prize winning opening is opened may be executed during one special game. In this case, a second unit game in which the opening mode and opening time of the second large prize winning opening are different depending on the type of the large prize winning pattern, and a second unit game in which the ease of ball entry in the specific area is different may be executed, so that the probability of transition to the probability variable state differs depending on the type of the large prize winning pattern. For example, when a large prize winning is won with the large prize winning pattern A and a special game is executed, a second unit game in which the opening time of the second large prize winning opening is relatively long may be executed, so that ball entry into the specific area is easy. On the other hand, when a jackpot is hit with the jackpot pattern B and a special game is played, a second unit game in which the opening time of the second large prize opening is relatively short may be played, making it difficult for the ball to enter the specific area. In addition, by making the opening timing of the large prize opening and the operation timing of the distribution mechanism for distributing game balls to either the specific area or the non-specific area within the large prize opening different depending on the type of jackpot pattern, a special game in which it is easy or possible for the ball to enter the specific area (jackpot pattern A) or a special game in which it is difficult or impossible for the ball to enter the specific area (jackpot pattern B) may be played. Alternatively, only a large prize opening in which a specific area is provided may be provided, and the distribution mechanism for distributing game balls to either the specific area or the non-specific area may not be operated in unit games other than the specific number of times that is the first unit game (for example, rounds other than the fourth round), and the distribution mechanism for distributing game balls to either the specific area or the non-specific area may be operated in unit games of a specific number of times that is the second unit game (for example, the fourth round), and the operation mode may be varied depending on the type of jackpot pattern, so that a special game in which it is easy or possible for the ball to enter the specific area (jackpot pattern A, distribution time value for which the ball can enter the specific area is 10 seconds) and a special game in which it is difficult or impossible for the ball to enter the specific area (jackpot pattern B, distribution time value for which the ball can enter the specific area is 0.05 seconds) may be executed. In this case, the opening time of the large prize opening may be the same (e.g., 30 seconds, whether it is a unit game of a specific number of times or a unit game of a non-specific number of times) in either a special game in which it is easy or possible for the ball to enter the specific area (jackpot symbol A) or a special game in which it is difficult or impossible for the ball to enter the specific area (jackpot symbol B). In this case, the operation timing of the distribution mechanism (the timing at which the operation of the mode of distributing to the specific area starts) may be the timing at which the number of balls entering the large prize opening reaches a specific number (e.g., 2 balls). For example, a specific number of balls entering (e.g., two balls entering) during a specific number of unit games (e.g., the fourth round) may be used to activate the allocation mechanism to switch from a mode of allocating to a non-specific area to a mode of allocating to a specific area, and the operation time (the period during which the mode of allocating to a specific area is maintained) may be varied according to the type of jackpot pattern, so that a special game in which it is easy or possible to enter a specific area (jackpot pattern A, the period during which the mode of allocating to a specific area is maintained is 10 seconds) and a special game in which it is difficult or impossible to enter a specific area (jackpot pattern B, the period during which the mode of allocating to a specific area is maintained is 0.05 seconds) may be executed.

In the above-mentioned "V sure" configuration, the probability of transition to the probability variable state may be made different by making the execution mode of the second unit game when the first special symbol 51 is a jackpot and a special game is executed different from the execution mode of the second unit game when the second special symbol 52 is a jackpot and a special game is executed. For example, when the first special symbol 51 is a jackpot and a special game is executed, the opening time of the second large prize winning hole in the second unit game may be made relatively short so that it is relatively difficult for the ball to enter the specific area, while when the second special symbol 52 is a jackpot and a special game is executed, the opening time of the second large prize winning hole in the second unit game may be made relatively long so that it is relatively easy for the ball to enter the specific area. For example, the probability of the ball entering the specific area in the second large prize winning hole may be about 50% when the first special symbol 51 is a jackpot and a special game is executed, while the probability of the ball entering the second large prize winning hole may be about 80% when the second special symbol 52 is a jackpot and a special game is executed. In addition, the second unit game may be configured so that the ball will almost certainly enter the second large prize winning hole if a game ball is shot toward the second large prize winning hole during the special game by lengthening the opening time of the second large prize winning hole in the second unit game when the second special symbol 52 is a jackpot and a special game is executed (for example, 5 seconds or more, 10 seconds or more, or 20 seconds or more). This may make it possible to make the probability of the ball entering the specific area in the second large prize winning hole substantially 100% when the second special symbol 52 is a jackpot and a special game is executed. In other words, the probability of transitioning to the probability fluctuating state when the second special pattern 52 is a jackpot may be substantially 100%. In this case, the probability of transitioning to the probability fluctuating state when the first special pattern 51 is a jackpot may be less than 100%, and the probability of transitioning to the probability fluctuating state when the first special pattern 51 is a jackpot may be about 50% to 80%. In other words, in the "V sure" configuration, the first special pattern 51 may be less than 100% sure, and the second special pattern 52 may be 100% sure.

When the fall judgment is won, the probability state control means transitions to a low probability state immediately after the fall judgment. In the change start process when the pattern change of the special pattern starts, each process is executed in the order of the fall judgment process, the win/loss judgment process, the pattern determination process, and the change pattern determination process, and the special pattern change display starts after each process is executed. In addition, when the fall judgment is won, the processes are executed in the order of the fall judgment, the transition from the high probability state to the low probability state due to the fall, and the win/loss judgment. Therefore, when the pattern change that won the fall judgment starts, the game state (probability state) before the start of the pattern change is a high probability state, but the game state (probability state) at the time of the win/loss judgment related to the pattern change is a low probability state. Therefore, in the win/loss judgment related to the pattern change that won the fall judgment, the win/loss judgment is executed in the low probability state, and the win/loss judgment is executed by referring to, for example, a win/loss judgment table for low probability. On the other hand, in the case of a winning/losing judgment related to a pattern change that does not result in a winning/losing judgment, the winning/losing judgment is performed in a high probability state, for example, by referring to a winning/losing judgment table for high probability.

In this embodiment, when the state is transitioned to a high probability state after the end of the special game, the state is transitioned to a high probability state and a state where it is easy to score. The easy to score state continues until the number of pattern changes after the end of the special game reaches at least a predetermined number (for example, 120 times, and otherwise 220 times), and the continuation of the easy to score state is determined depending on whether the high probability state continues or falls to a low probability state when the number of pattern changes reaches a predetermined number of times. Specifically, if the state is high probability when the number of pattern changes reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 120th time), the easy to score state continues as it is. After that, when the number of pattern changes exceeds a predetermined number of times (for example, after 121 times) in the change start process related to the pattern change, if the fall judgment is won and the state is transitioned to a low probability state, the state is transitioned to a low probability state and a normal score state, and the game state during the pattern change where the fall judgment is won becomes a low probability state and a normal score state. On the other hand, if the probability state is low when the number of pattern changes reaches a predetermined number (for example, 120th), the state is changed from the easy-to-score state to the normal-score state when the pattern changes. In other words, the state is easy to score until the end of the pattern change reaches a predetermined number (for example, 120th), but the state is changed to the normal-score state when the pattern changes more than the predetermined number (for example, 121st or later). As a modified example, if the probability state is low when the number of pattern changes reaches a predetermined number (for example, 120th), the state may be changed from the easy-to-score state to the normal-score state when the pattern changes. In other words, the state is easy to score until the end of the pattern change just before the number of pattern changes reaches a predetermined number (for example, 119th), but the state may be changed to the normal-score state when the number of pattern changes reaches a predetermined number or later (for example, 120th or later). Note that the "number of pattern changes" refers to the total number of changes of the first special pattern 51 and the second special pattern 52. In most cases, in an easy-to-score state, only the second game in which the second special symbol 52 is changed is played, so the number of symbol changes that can end the easy-to-score state can match the cumulative number of changes of the second special symbol 52.

Figure 50 shows the transition of the game state after transitioning to a high probability state and an easy ball entry state. In this figure, the high probability state is "high probability", the low probability state is "low probability", the easy ball entry state is "high ball entry", and the normal ball entry state is "low ball entry". Figure 50 (a) shows the case where the fall judgment is won in the first pattern change after the end of the special game. In this case, the low probability and high ball entry state is reached until the end of the pattern change in which the number of pattern changes after the end of the special game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 120th time). After that, the pattern change in which the number of pattern changes exceeds a predetermined number (for example, after the 121st time) is reached, and the low probability and low ball entry state is reached. Since the high ball entry state is a game state in which a right hit is required, in the high ball entry state, a right hit image indicating that the game state is a right hit is displayed on the performance display device 60. On the other hand, since the low ball entry state is a game state in which a left hit is required, in the low ball entry state, the right hit image is not displayed. In the case of FIG. 50(a), the right-hit image is displayed from the start of the easy-to-score state until the pattern stops changing after the pattern has changed a predetermined number of times (for example, 120 times), and the right-hit image is hidden when the pattern stops changing after the pattern has changed a predetermined number of times (for example, 120 times).

Figure 50 (b) shows a case where the first pattern change after the end of a special game does not result in a fall judgment, but the fall judgment is won in a pattern change where the number of pattern changes is within a predetermined number excluding the first time (for example, the second to 120th time). In this case, the first pattern change after the end of a special game is in a high probability and high ball winning state. If the fall judgment is won in a pattern change within a predetermined number of times excluding the first time (for example, the second to 120th time), the low probability and high ball winning state will be in place from the pattern change that won the fall judgment to the end of the pattern change where the number of pattern changes is the predetermined number (for example, the 120th time). Thereafter, the low probability and low ball winning state will be in place for pattern changes where the number of pattern changes exceeds the predetermined number (for example, after the 121st time). In the case of FIG. 50(b), the right-hit image is displayed from the start of the easy-to-score state until the pattern stops changing after the pattern has changed a predetermined number of times (for example, 120 times), and the right-hit image is hidden when the pattern stops changing after the pattern has changed a predetermined number of times (for example, 120 times).

Figure 50 (c) shows a case where the number of pattern changes within a predetermined number of times (for example, 1st to 120th) does not win the fall judgment. In this case, the high probability and high ball entry state continues until the fall judgment is won. If the fall judgment is won by a pattern change where the number of pattern changes exceeds a predetermined number of times (for example, 121st or later), the pattern change that won the fall judgment will result in a low probability and low ball entry state. Note that in Figure 50 (c), if the fall judgment is not won until the pattern change where the number of pattern changes exceeds a predetermined number of times (for example, 121st or later), and the winning/losing judgment is won by the pattern change where the number of pattern changes exceeds a predetermined number of times (for example, 121st or later) and a jackpot is won, the pattern change that won the winning/losing judgment will result in a low probability and low ball entry state. In the case of FIG. 50(c), the right-hit image is displayed from the start of the easy-to-score state until just before the start of the pattern change that results in a fall judgment or a win/lose judgment, and the right-hit image is hidden when the pattern change that results in a fall judgment or a win/lose judgment begins.

In this embodiment, in addition to the easy-to-score-ball state (also called time reduction A) which can be entered when a special game is played, there is also an easy-to-score-ball state (also called time reduction B or time reduction C) which can be entered when the result of the hit/miss judgment is other than a jackpot. The time reduction A is an easy-to-score-ball state which is entered after the end of a special game when the hit/miss judgment is a jackpot and a special game is played. The time reduction A may be entered when a specific jackpot is obtained which can be entered into the easy-to-score-ball state. The game state of the time reduction A may be a low probability state and an easy-to-score-ball state, or a high probability state and an easy-to-score-ball state. When the state is a high probability state and an easy-to-score-ball state, a fall judgment is executed, and if the fall judgment is successful, the state is entered into the low probability state.

The B time reduction is an easy-to-score state that is entered when the cumulative number of pattern changes reaches a specified ceiling number of times without a jackpot occurring in the low probability state. The ceiling number of times is 2.5 to 3 times (e.g. 798 to 957 times) the denominator of the probability of a jackpot occurring in the low probability state (e.g. 319). Only one type of ceiling number of times (e.g. 900 times) is set for the B time reduction. When the cumulative number of pattern changes in the low probability state reaches the specified ceiling number of times (e.g. 900 times), the state is entered into the easy-to-score state after the pattern change that becomes the ceiling number of times. In other words, the easy-to-score state begins with the pattern change following the pattern change that reached the ceiling number of times. In addition, since the ball enters the easy-to-score state after the end (stop) of the pattern change that has reached the ceiling number of times, for example, even if there are no reserved first lottery values or reserved second lottery values remaining after the end (stop) of the pattern change that has reached the ceiling number of times, and the next pattern change of the pattern change that has reached the ceiling number of times does not start, the ball enters the easy-to-score state during game standby (while the pattern is stopped) after the end (stop) of the pattern change that has reached the ceiling number of times. The cumulative number of pattern changes in the low probability state is initialized by the occurrence of a jackpot or RAM clear processing, but is not initialized by the transition to the B time reduction. If the B time reduction ends without a jackpot occurring during the B time reduction, the ceiling number of times for the B time reduction will not be initialized unless a jackpot occurs afterwards, so there will be no transition to the B time reduction again unless a jackpot occurs afterwards.

The C time reduction is a state where it is easy to enter the ball when the result of the hit/miss judgment in the low probability state is other than a big hit and the hit/miss lottery value or the pattern lottery value is in a specific range. For example, a specific pattern (also called a C time reduction pattern) indicating that it is possible to move to the C time reduction is prepared, and the C time reduction pattern is displayed in a stopped state in the low probability state to transition to the C time reduction. If the state is not in a low probability state, that is, if the state is in a high probability state, the C time reduction pattern is not transitioned to even if the C time reduction pattern is displayed in a stopped state. The C time reduction pattern is a pattern that indicates something other than a big hit. The C time reduction pattern in a gaming machine that does not have a small hit is a pattern that indicates a miss, and the C time reduction pattern in a gaming machine that has a small hit is a pattern that indicates a miss or a small hit. If a big hit does not occur and the low probability state continues, the game may transition to the C time reduction multiple times while the low probability state continues. For example, when the C time reduction ends without a jackpot occurring during the C time reduction, the game may transition to the C time reduction again triggered by the display of the C time reduction symbol, even if no jackpot occurs after that. The C time reduction may be transitionable only when the C time reduction symbol is displayed in a low probability and low ball entry state. In this case, the game may not transition to the C time reduction when the C time reduction symbol is displayed in a low probability and high ball entry state. In other words, the game may not transition to the C time reduction when the C time reduction symbol is displayed in a stopped state during the A time reduction, B time reduction, or C time reduction. In this case, the C time reduction symbol may be prepared only for the first special symbol 51, and the C time reduction symbol may not be prepared for the second special symbol 52. In the specification in which the C time reduction symbol is displayed in a stopped state during the A time reduction, B time reduction, or C time reduction, the C time reduction symbol may be prepared only for the second special symbol 52, and the C time reduction symbol may not be prepared for the first special symbol 51. The C time reduction may be possible when the C time reduction symbol is displayed in a stopped state with low probability and high ball entry. For example, when the C time reduction symbol is displayed in a stopped state while the A time reduction, B time reduction, or C time reduction is being performed, the A time reduction, B time reduction, or C time reduction may be ended and a transition may be made to the C time reduction. In this case, the C time reduction symbol may be prepared for both the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52, or the C time reduction symbol may be prepared only for the second special symbol 52, and the C time reduction symbol may not be prepared for the first special symbol 51.

Figure 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol variation start processing. The processing shown in Figure 51 is executed immediately before the special symbol variation display starts. In other words, the special symbol variation display starts after the processing of the flow in Figure 51. At the beginning of the variation start processing, the current game state is stored (S1300). The game state to be stored includes the probability state (low probability state or high probability state), the ball entry state (low ball entry state or high ball entry state), the variation pattern selection state, the cumulative number of pattern variations (the cumulative number of variations in the high ball entry state and the cumulative number of variations in the low probability state), etc. If the current game state is a high probability state (Y in S1302), a fall judgment is executed (S1304). If the fall judgment is won (Y in S1306), the state transitions to a low probability state (S1308). When the state is shifted to the low probability state, if the remaining number of times in the high ball entry state is 0 (Y in S1310), the state is shifted to the low ball entry state (S1312), and a hit/miss judgment is performed in the low probability state (S1314). If the remaining number of times in the high ball entry state is not 0 in S1310 (N in S1310), the process of S1312 is skipped, and a hit/miss judgment is performed in the low probability state (S1314). If the fall judgment is not won in S1306 (N in S1306), the high probability state continues, and a hit/miss judgment is performed in the high probability state (S1316). If the result of the hit/miss judgment in S1316 is a big hit (Y in S1318) and the remaining number of times in the high ball entry state is 0 (Y in S1320), the state is shifted to the low probability and low ball entry state (S1322). If the result of the hit/miss determination in S1318 is other than a jackpot (N in S1318) or if the remaining number of times in the high ball winning state is not 0 in S1320 (N in S1320), the process of S1322 is skipped and the high probability and high ball winning state is maintained. If the current game state is a low probability state in S1302 (N in S1302), the processes of S1304 to S1312 are skipped and the hit/miss determination is performed in the low probability state (S1314).

The "remaining number of high balls entering" in S1310 and S1320 refers to the remaining number of times until the cumulative number of changes after transition to the high ball entering state reaches a predetermined number. The "remaining number of times in the high ball entering state" in FIG. 51 may be the remaining number of times until the cumulative number of changes in the easy ball entering state, which is transitioned to after the end of the special game, reaches a predetermined number (120 times, 220 times, etc.) in the case of transitioning to the easy ball entering state after the end of the special game (i.e., A time reduction). When transitioning to the high ball entering state, a predetermined number (e.g., 120 times) is set as the remaining number of times in the high ball entering state. The remaining number of times in the high ball entering state is subtracted when the pattern stops. Therefore, when the pattern change of the first time in the high ball entering state stops, the remaining number is the number obtained by subtracting 1 from the predetermined number (e.g., 119 times). In the change start process related to the pattern change in which the number of pattern changes in the high ball entering state becomes a predetermined number (e.g., 120th time), the remaining number of times in the high ball entering state becomes 1. Therefore, since the remaining number of high balls in the variation start process related to the pattern variation in which the number of pattern variations in the high ball entry state is a predetermined number (for example, 120th time), is not 0, the process of S1310 becomes N, and the game is not transferred to the low ball entry state in the variation start process. On the other hand, if the fall judgment is not won in the pattern variation in which the number of pattern variations after the transition to the high probability and high ball entry state is within a predetermined number (for example, 1st to 120th), the remaining number of high balls in the variation start process related to the pattern variation exceeding the predetermined number (for example, 121st time or later) becomes 0. If the fall judgment is won when the remaining number of high balls in the state of 0 (Y in S1306), the game is transferred to the low probability state (S1308), and the process of S1310 becomes Y, so that the game is transferred to the low ball entry state (S1312). In other words, if the fall judgment is won for the pattern variation in which the number of pattern variations after the transition to the high probability and high ball entry state exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 121st time or later), the game is transferred to the low probability and low ball entry state in the variation start process. In addition, if the number of pattern changes after the transition to the high probability and high ball entry state is within a predetermined number (for example, 1st to 120th), the high probability and high ball entry state is maintained by the process of S1320 being N because the number of remaining high ball entries is 1 or more, and the high probability and high ball entry state is maintained. On the other hand, if the number of pattern changes after the transition to the high probability and high ball entry state exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 121st or later), the number of remaining high ball entries is 0, and the process of S1320 is Y, and the transition to the low probability and low ball entry state is maintained.

Then, the type of the special symbol is determined based on the result of the win/lose judgment and the symbol lottery value (S1324). Next, the variation pattern selection state is determined (S1326), and the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the determined variation pattern selection state and the pattern lottery value (S1328). In the process of determining the variation pattern selection state in S1326, for example, the variation pattern selection state may be determined based on the game state before the start of the variation stored in S1300 and the game state at the time of S1326.

Figure 52 is a flow chart showing an example of a pattern stop process for a special pattern. The process shown in Figure 52 is executed when the special pattern stops and is executed within the stop display period from when the special pattern stops to when the next pattern change starts. If a special pattern indicating a non-big win (miss or small win) is stopped and displayed (Y in S1330) and the remaining number of times in the high ball entry state is greater than 0 (Y in S1332), the remaining number of times in the high ball entry state is decremented by 1 (S1334). The process of S1334 is a process of counting the remaining number of times until the cumulative number of changes after the transition to the high ball entry state reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 120 times), and can also be called a time-saving number decrement process. The "remaining number of times in the high ball entry state" in FIG. 52 is not limited to the remaining number of times until the cumulative number of changes in the easy ball entry state reaches a predetermined number (120 times or 220 times) when the state transitions to the easy ball entry state after the end of the special game (i.e., time reduction A), but may be the remaining number of times until the cumulative number of changes in the easy ball entry state reaches a predetermined number (100 times or 200 times) when the state transitions to the easy ball entry state after the stopping of a pattern other than a jackpot (i.e., time reduction B or C). If the remaining number of times in the high ball entry state becomes 0 by the subtraction process of S1334 (Y of S1336), the state transitions to the low ball entry state (S1338). If the remaining number of times in the high ball entry state is not 0 (N of S1336), the process of S1338 is skipped and the high ball entry state continues. If the remaining number of times in the high ball entry state is not greater than 0 in S1332 (N of S1332), the processes of S1334 to S1338 are skipped.

Next, if the game state stored at the beginning of the fluctuation start process is a low probability and low ball entry state (Y in S1340) and a C time-saving symbol is displayed as stopped (Y in S1342), the remaining number of high ball entries for the C time-saving is set (S1344, for example, 100), and the game moves to the high ball entry state (S1346). If the game state stored at the beginning of the fluctuation start process is not a low probability and low ball entry state (N in S1340) or a symbol other than the C time-saving symbol is displayed as stopped (N in S1342), the game skips S1344 to S1346. The process of S1340 to S1346 is a process for determining whether to move to the C time-saving, and can also be called a C time-saving entry process.

Next, if the current game state when the pattern stops is a low probability state (Y in S1348), the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling is subtracted by 1 (S1350). The remaining number of times to reach the ceiling refers to the remaining number of times until the cumulative number of fluctuations in the low probability state reaches the ceiling number, which is the condition for transition to B time reduction. The remaining number of times to reach the ceiling is initialized by the occurrence of a jackpot or RAM clear processing, and the ceiling number (for example, 900 times) is set as the initial value of the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling. The processing of S1350 is a processing that counts the remaining number of times until the ceiling number, which is the condition for transition to B time reduction, is reached, and can also be called a processing of subtracting the number of times for B time reduction. If the subtraction processing of S1350 makes the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling 0 (Y in S1352), the remaining number of times to enter the high ball for B time reduction (for example, 200 times) is set (S1354), and the state transitions to the high ball entry state (S1356). If the current game state is not a low probability state in S1348 (N in S1348), the processes of S1350 to S1356 are skipped. If the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling is not 0 in S1352 (N in S1352), the processes of S1354 to S1356 are skipped. Note that, if the B time reduction is entered in the processes of S1354 and S1356, the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling is not initialized and remains 0. Since the game state during the B time reduction is a low probability state, in the pattern stop process during the B time reduction, S1348 becomes Y, and the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling is subtracted by 1 in S1350, so the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling becomes a negative value smaller than 0 and is subtracted. After that, even if the B time reduction ends, the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling is not initialized, so it will continue to be subtracted as a negative value and will not become 0. As a result, unless a jackpot occurs after switching to B time reduction and the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling is initialized, the game will not switch back to B time reduction.

If a special symbol indicating a jackpot is displayed in S1330 (N in S1330), the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling is initialized, the number of times to reach the ceiling (e.g., 900 times) is set as the initial value (S1358), and the game transitions to a low probability and low ball entry state (S1360). After that, the special game starts.

As a variant, rather than executing the process of transitioning to the high score state at S1346 and S1356, a flag indicating that a transition to the high score state is possible may be turned on. In this case, at the end of the flow in FIG. 52, if the flag indicating that a transition to the high score state is possible is on, the process of transitioning to the high score state may be executed. Note that if the flag is off, the process of transitioning to the high score state is skipped.

Figure 53 is a diagram showing a game flow according to an embodiment, and shows transitions between multiple presentation modes. In this embodiment, normal mode, A time-saving mode, B time-saving mode, C time-saving mode, latent mode, extension mode, and special mode are prepared as presentation modes selected according to the game state. When the first special pattern 51 is a jackpot in the first game played by hitting from the left, for example, there is a 90% probability of a 4R jackpot and a 10% probability of a 10R jackpot. When the second special pattern 52 is a jackpot in the second game played by hitting from the right, for example, there is a 100% probability of a 10R jackpot. In the normal mode, the transition of the presentation mode triggered by a jackpot in Figure 53 is triggered by a jackpot in the first game played by hitting from the left, and in modes other than the normal mode, it is triggered by a jackpot in the second game played by hitting from the right. The special mode is transitioned to only when the second lottery value is reserved in the presentation mode before the transition, and when the second lottery value is not reserved, the mode is transitioned to the normal mode instead of the special mode. In this embodiment, only the jackpot symbols that can transition to the high probability state are prepared, and whether or not the probability fluctuating state is determined depending on whether or not the game ball enters the specific area in the large prize winning port that is opened during the special game after the jackpot is determined. In this embodiment, the 4R jackpot is a special game in which it is difficult or impossible to enter the specific area (jackpot symbol B, the period during which the ball is allocated to the specific area is maintained is 0.05 seconds), and the 10R jackpot is a special game in which it is easy or possible to enter the specific area (jackpot symbol A, the period during which the ball is allocated to the specific area is maintained is 10 seconds). Therefore, in this embodiment, the transition of the presentation mode triggered by the jackpot is shown on the premise that the game ball does not enter the specific area in the 4R jackpot and the game ball enters the specific area in the 10R jackpot. These assumptions will be used in the following explanation.

Normal mode is a presentation mode that corresponds to the first game in which the game state is a low probability and low ball entry state (low-low state) and is a left-handed hit, and is the initial mode that is set at the start of the game. In normal mode, the right-handed hit image is not displayed. If a 4R jackpot is achieved in normal mode, the mode will transition to A time-saving mode after the special game ends. If a 10R jackpot is achieved in normal mode, the mode will transition to latent mode after the special game ends. In normal mode, if the cumulative number of pattern changes in the low probability state reaches a specified ceiling number (for example, 900 times), the mode will transition to B time-saving mode. If a C time-saving pattern is displayed in a stopped state in normal mode, the mode will transition to C time-saving mode.

The A time-saving mode is a presentation mode that corresponds to the second game in which the game state is a low probability and high ball entry state (low-high state) and the ball is hit to the right. In the A time-saving mode, a right-hit image is displayed. In the A time-saving mode, the number of times the high ball entry state continues (i.e. the end period) is set to 200 times. If a jackpot is hit in the A time-saving mode, the mode will transition to the latent mode after the special game ends. If the specified end period (200 times) of the high ball entry state is reached in the A time-saving mode, the mode will transition to the special mode after the pattern change that marks the specified end period (200th time) ends.

When the mode is switched to the time-saving mode A, the cumulative number of pattern changes in the low probability state (e.g., the number of times remaining to reach the ceiling) is initialized by the execution of the special game that triggered the transition to the time-saving mode A. Since the number of times at the end of the time-saving mode A (200 times) is less than the ceiling number of times (900 times) that is the condition for transition to the time-saving mode B, the condition for transition to the time-saving mode B is not met while the time-saving mode A is being executed. Therefore, there is no direct transition from the time-saving mode A to the time-saving mode B. As a variant, if the number of times at the end of the time-saving mode A is greater than the ceiling number that is the condition for transition to the time-saving mode B, the mode may be switched to the time-saving mode B when the cumulative number of pattern changes in the time-saving mode A reaches the specified ceiling number.

When the C time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed in the A time-saving mode, it may be impossible to switch to the C time-saving mode. For example, it may be possible to switch to the C time-saving mode only in a low probability and low ball-entry state, and it may be impossible to switch to the C time-saving mode in a low probability and high ball-entry state. The A time-saving mode is more advantageous for the player than the C time-saving mode, and the number of times the A time-saving mode continues (200 times) is greater than the number of times the C time-saving mode continues (100 times). Therefore, if the C time-saving mode is switched to after the start of the A time-saving mode, the number of times remaining in the high ball-entry state may be extremely reduced, which may be disadvantageous for the player. In order to prevent such a situation, the transition from the A time-saving mode to the C time-saving mode is prohibited. In a modified example, it may be possible to switch to the C time-saving mode when the C time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed in the A time-saving mode. For example, it may be possible to switch to the C time-saving mode when the C time-saving symbol is stopped in a low probability and high ball-entry state.

The B time-saving mode is a presentation mode corresponding to the second game in which the game state is a low probability and high ball entry state (low-high state) and the game is a right-hit state. In the B time-saving mode, a right-hit image is displayed. In the B time-saving mode, the number of times (end) of the high ball entry state is set to 200 times, and the number of times the high ball entry state continues is the same as in the A time-saving mode. In the B time-saving mode, for example, the same presentation as in the A time-saving mode can be executed. If a jackpot is won in the B time-saving mode, the mode is shifted to the latent mode after the special game ends. If the specified end (200 times) of the high ball entry state is reached in the B time-saving mode, the mode is shifted to the special mode after the pattern change that is the specified end (200 times) ends. In the case of a specification that allows a transition to the C time-saving mode only in a low probability and low ball entry state, if the C time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed in the B time-saving mode, the mode is not shifted to the C time-saving mode. In a modified example, when the C time-saving pattern is displayed in the B time-saving mode, the mode may be switched to the C time-saving mode. The number of times that the high ball score state continues in the B time-saving mode may be set to be greater than the number of times that the high ball score state continues in the A time-saving mode, and may be set to, for example, 500 times or 1000 times.

The C time-saving mode is a presentation mode corresponding to the second game in which the game state is a low probability and high ball entry state (low-high state) and the ball is hit to the right. In the C time-saving mode, a right-hit image is displayed. In the C time-saving mode, the number of times the high ball entry state continues (end period) is set to 100 times, which is less than the A time-saving mode and the B time-saving mode. Therefore, the C time-saving mode is more disadvantageous to the player than the A time-saving mode and the B time-saving mode. In the C time-saving mode, for example, a presentation different from the A time-saving mode and the B time-saving mode can be executed. If a jackpot is hit in the C time-saving mode, the mode is switched to the latent mode after the special game ends. If the specified end period (100 times) of the high ball entry state is reached in the C time-saving mode, the mode is switched to the special mode after the pattern change that is the specified end period (100 times) ends.

When the cumulative number of pattern changes in the low probability state during the C time-saving mode reaches a specified ceiling number (for example, 900 times), the mode is switched from the C time-saving mode to the B time-saving mode. The B time-saving mode has a higher number of continuous high ball entry states than the C time-saving mode, and is more advantageous for the player than the C time-saving mode, so the transition from the C time-saving mode to the B time-saving mode may not be prohibited. In the case of a specification that allows transition to the C time-saving mode only in a low probability and low ball entry state in order to prohibit transition from the A time-saving mode or the B time-saving mode to the C time-saving mode, if the C time-saving pattern is displayed in a stopped state in the C time-saving mode, the mode is not re-switched to the C time-saving mode. In a modified example, the mode may be designed to re-switch to the C time-saving mode when the C time-saving pattern is displayed in a stopped state in the C time-saving mode. For example, if the C time-saving pattern is displayed as stopped at the 50th pattern change in the C time-saving mode, the C time-saving mode may end once upon stopping, a new C time-saving mode may start, and the end of the high ball entry state may be reset to 100 times.

The latent mode is a presentation mode corresponding to the second game in which the game state is a high probability and high ball entry state (high-high state) or a low probability and high ball entry state (low-high state), and the game is played by hitting the right. In the latent mode, a right-hit image is displayed. The game state at the start of the latent mode is a high probability and high ball entry state (high-high state), but if a fall judgment is won during the latent mode, it will transition to a low probability and high ball entry state (low-high state). In the case of a "ball confirmation" specification in which a transition to a high probability state is confirmed by a V win during a special game, if a V win is made during a special game, the high probability state will be entered at the start of the latent mode, and if a V win is not made during a special game, the low probability state will be entered at the start of the latent mode. In the latent mode, the high ball entry state continues for at least a predetermined number of times (120 times or 220 times). The predetermined number of times that the high ball entry state can continue in the latent mode is determined, for example, according to the type of the jackpot pattern that triggered the transition to the latent mode. For example, among the jackpot patterns a, b, c, d, and e that are the jackpot patterns of the second special pattern 52, the predetermined number of times for the jackpot patterns a to c is set to 120 times, and the predetermined number of times for the jackpot patterns d to e is set to 220 times. If a jackpot is won in the latent mode, the mode is transitioned to the latent mode after the special game ends. If the number of pattern changes in the latent mode is within the predetermined number (120 times or 220 times) and the fall judgment is won, the mode is transitioned to the special mode after the end of the pattern changes that are the predetermined number (120 times or 220 times). If the number of pattern changes in the latent mode is within a predetermined number (120 or 220), and the player does not win the fall judgment, the game will transition to the extended mode after the pattern changes the predetermined number of times (120 or 220).

The extension mode is a presentation mode corresponding to the second game in which the game state is a high probability and high ball entry state (high high state) and the right hit is performed. The extension mode continues until the fall judgment is won in the extension mode, and if the fall judgment is won, the special mode is entered after the pattern change that won the fall judgment ends. If a jackpot is won in the extension mode, the hidden mode is entered after the special game ends. If the fall judgment is won in the extension mode, the game state is entered into a low probability and low ball entry state (low low state) immediately after the fall judgment. Therefore, the game state in the pattern change that won the fall judgment in the extension mode is a low probability and low ball entry state (low low state), and when the pattern change that won the fall judgment stops, the number of remaining times to reach the ceiling is reduced by one. In the extension mode, the right hit image is displayed until just before the start of the pattern change that won the fall judgment or the hit/miss judgment, and the right hit image is hidden when the pattern change that won the fall judgment or the hit/miss judgment starts. Note that the final change in the extension mode subtracts the number of times remaining to reach the ceiling, and the game will not transition to time-saving mode B. This is because the game state from the end of the special game until just before the final change in the extension mode is a high probability and high ball entry state, so the number of times remaining to reach the ceiling will remain at the initial value (for example, 900 times). If the number of times remaining to reach the ceiling is subtracted by 1 when the final change in the extension mode stops, the number of times remaining to reach the ceiling after the subtraction process will be the initial value minus 1 (for example, 899 times).

The special mode is a presentation mode corresponding to the first game in which the game state is a low probability and low ball entry state (low-low state) and the ball is hit from the left. In the special mode, the right-hit image is not displayed. The special mode is entered when the second lottery value is reserved at the end of the easy ball entry state, and the second special pattern 52 is displayed in a variable manner by consuming the second lottery value. In the special mode, a special presentation that can only be executed in the special mode can be executed, and for example, a special presentation that is not executed in the normal mode, the time-saving mode, the latent mode, and the extension mode is executed. In the special mode, for example, a presentation that teases whether or not the high ball entry state can be returned to by the occurrence of a jackpot is executed. If a jackpot is entered in the special mode, the latent mode is entered after the special game ends. If all the reserved second lottery values are consumed in the special mode, the normal mode is entered.

In the special mode, the second special symbol 52 is displayed in a variable manner, so if the C time-saving symbol is prepared only for the first special symbol 51, the C time-saving symbol will not be displayed stationary in the special mode. In this case, there is no direct transition from the special mode to the C time-saving mode. Note that if the C time-saving symbol is prepared for the second special symbol 52 (if the C time-saving symbol is prepared only for the second special symbol 52, or if the C time-saving symbol is prepared for both the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52), the C time-saving symbol may be displayed stationary in the special mode, and a direct transition from the special mode to the C time-saving mode may be made after the C time-saving symbol is displayed stationary.

In the game flow of this embodiment, when the time-saving mode, latent mode, or extension mode selected in the high ball entry state ends, the game is switched to the common special mode until the remaining reserved second lottery value is consumed. In the high ball entry state, since it is easy for game balls to enter the second starting hole 12, the reserved second lottery value is often maintained at the maximum (for example, four), and the second lottery value is almost always reserved when the time-saving mode, latent mode, or extension mode ends. Therefore, after the time-saving mode, latent mode, or extension mode ends, the game is switched to the special mode in most cases, and the remaining reserved second lottery value is consumed before switching to the normal mode. Note that if there is no reserved second lottery value when the time-saving mode, latent mode, or extension mode ends, the game is switched directly to the normal mode instead of the special mode.

In addition, as an irregular situation that may occur in the game flow according to this embodiment, it is considered that the first special symbol 51 becomes a jackpot instead of the second special symbol 52 during a game in which the ball should be hit to the right. In this embodiment, when only jackpot symbols that can transition to a high probability state are prepared and whether or not the probability fluctuating state is determined depending on whether the game ball enters a specific area in the large prize winning hole that is opened during the special game after the jackpot is determined, the 4R jackpot is a special game in which it is difficult or impossible to enter the specific area (jackpot symbol B, the period during which the ball is allocated to the specific area is maintained is 0.05 seconds), and the 10R jackpot is a special game in which it is easy or possible to enter the specific area (jackpot symbol A, the period during which the ball is allocated to the specific area is maintained is 10 seconds), so after the special game of the 4R jackpot ends, the state becomes a low probability state. Therefore, if the first special symbol 51 becomes a 4R jackpot during right-hand play (i.e., A time-saving mode, B time-saving mode, C time-saving mode, latent mode, and extension mode), the game state to which the special game is to be transitioned to after the special game ends will be a low probability state. In principle, if the game state to which the game is to be transitioned to after the special game ends will be a low probability state, it is considered that the game will transition to the A time-saving mode, but if the game transitions to the A time-saving mode again despite a jackpot during right-hand play, it will be disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, if the first special symbol 51 becomes a 4R jackpot during right-hand play, the game will not transition to the A time-saving mode, but will transition to a latent mode in which a low probability and high ball entry state is set 220 times. The latent mode to which the game is transitioned to after the special game ends after a 4R jackpot can be said to be an irregular latent mode in which the game state at the start is a low probability and high ball entry state. The number of times (220 times) that the low probability and high ball entry state set in the irregular latent mode continues is greater than the number of times (200 times) that the low probability and high ball entry state set in the A time-saving mode continues. By making the number of times (220 times) that the irregular latent mode continues greater than the number of times (200 times) that the A time-saving mode continues, it is possible to prevent the disadvantage to the player from becoming excessively large even if an unfortunate event occurs in which a 4R jackpot occurs during right-hand play. The number of times that the low probability and high ball entry state set in the irregular latent mode continues may be any number (for example, 500 times) that is greater than the number of times (200 times) that the A time-saving mode continues.

Below, we will explain some of the characteristic aspects of this embodiment.

(Mode 2-1: Variable effects suggesting the probability of a jackpot and the probability of entering a time-saving mode)
FIG. 54 is a diagram showing an example of the process of the variation performance. During one pattern variation period from the start of variation of the special pattern to the stop display, a pattern variation performance accompanied by a variation display of the decorative pattern can be executed. In the pattern variation performance, a specific performance that suggests the expectation of a jackpot can be executed. There are multiple types of specific performances, including at least the first specific performance, the second specific performance, and the third specific performance. The expectation of a jackpot is in the order of the first specific performance < the second specific performance < the third specific performance. In other words, the second specific performance suggests that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than the first specific performance, and the third specific performance suggests that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than the first specific performance and the second specific performance.

An example of the first specific performance is the long reach performance, which has a higher probability of winning a jackpot than the normal reach performance, but a lower probability of winning a jackpot than the SP reach performance. Specific examples of long reach performance include episode performance, in which episodes related to the characters that appear are displayed in a story format in order, and mission performance, in which the process by which a character accomplishes a specific mission is displayed. After the first specific performance is executed, there is either a jackpot or a non-jackpot (miss or small jackpot). If there is a non-jackpot after the execution of the first specific performance, there is no transition to the C time-saving mode. In other words, the end of the first specific performance does not trigger the stop display of the C time-saving pattern. If there is no jackpot after the execution of the first specific performance, transition to the C time-saving mode is denied.

An example of the second specific effect is the SP reach effect. A specific example of the SP reach effect is a battle effect that displays the process of the main character battling an enemy character. After the second specific effect is executed, there are cases where a jackpot is reached or where the C time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed. After the second specific effect is executed, no symbols other than the jackpot symbols that are different from the C time-saving symbol are stopped and displayed. Therefore, the second specific effect suggests that a jackpot will be reached or that the game will be switched to the C time-saving mode. When the second specific effect is executed, the game will be switched to the first easy-to-score state triggered by a jackpot, or to the second easy-to-score state triggered by the stopping of the C time-saving symbol. Therefore, when the second specific effect is executed, the game will be confirmed as being switched to the easy-to-score state (i.e., entering the time-saving mode).

An example of the third specific effect is a full rotation effect, in which multiple decorative pattern rows are displayed in a synchronized manner with the same pattern. For example, the three decorative pattern rows are displayed in a varying pattern such as 111→222→333→444→555→... The third specific effect is an effect that guarantees a jackpot, and after the execution of the third specific effect, a jackpot will always occur, and nothing other than a jackpot will occur.

In the case where a jackpot is obtained after the execution of a specific performance, the decorative pattern may be displayed temporarily or stopped in a jackpot mode upon the end of the specific performance. For example, after the execution of the first, second, or third specific performance, multiple decorative pattern rows are displayed temporarily or stopped with the same pattern (e.g., 777), and the special pattern is displayed stopped with a pattern indicating a jackpot. When multiple decorative pattern rows are the same pattern, if they are 777, a 10R jackpot is confirmed, and if they are other than 777 (e.g., 222 or 666), a 4R jackpot is confirmed. In addition, when multiple decorative pattern rows are other than 777 (e.g., 222 or 666), it is not confirmed whether the jackpot is a 4R jackpot or a 10R jackpot, and there may be cases where the jackpot is a 4R jackpot or a 10R jackpot. The probability of a 10R jackpot is higher when the second specific performance is executed and a jackpot is obtained than when the first specific performance is executed and a jackpot is obtained. When the first specific performance is executed and a jackpot is reached, and when the second specific performance is executed and a jackpot is reached, the multiple decorative pattern strings are more likely to be other than 777 than 777. Also, the probability of a 10R jackpot is higher when the third specific performance is executed and a jackpot is reached than when the second specific performance is executed and a jackpot is reached. When the third specific performance is executed and a jackpot is reached, the multiple decorative pattern strings are more likely to be 777 than other than 777.

Multiple specific effects may be executed within one pattern change period. A first specific effect and a second specific effect may be executed within one pattern change period, and for example, the first specific effect may develop into the second specific effect. On the other hand, the first specific effect may not develop into the third specific effect. The second specific effect may be able to develop into the third specific effect, or may not be able to develop into it. While the first specific effect may not develop directly into the third specific effect, the first specific effect may be able to develop into the third specific effect via the second specific effect. However, the second specific effect will not develop into the first specific effect, and the third specific effect will not develop into the first specific effect or the second specific effect. When the first specific performance develops into the second or third specific performance, the first specific performance does not become a miss mode (a performance mode in which the episode performance is not played out to the end), nor does the first specific performance become a big win mode (a performance mode in which the episode performance is played out to the end), but the first specific performance develops into a development mode (a performance mode in which the words "Battle Development!" or "Full Rotation!" are displayed during the episode performance) before developing into the second or third specific performance. When the second specific performance develops into the third specific performance, the second specific performance does not become a miss mode (a performance mode in which the battle performance is defeated), nor does the second specific performance become a big win mode (a performance mode in which the battle performance is won), but the second specific performance develops into a development mode (a performance mode in which the movable role 66 emits rainbow colors and the screen gradually turns white during the battle performance) before developing into the third specific performance.

A revival effect may be executed when a specific effect ends. The revival effect is an effect that appears to be a miss, and then becomes a jackpot. The revival effect is executed, for example, after multiple decorative pattern rows have temporarily stopped in a miss mode, and after the revival effect is executed, the multiple decorative pattern rows are displayed stopped in a jackpot mode. In the revival effect, for example, when multiple decorative pattern rows have temporarily stopped in a miss mode, a "button effect" that commands the player to press the effect button 109 or a "lever effect" that commands the player to pull the effect lever 112 may be executed. In the revival effect, a notification effect that notifies the player that a jackpot has been confirmed may be executed. One example of a notification effect is a role activation effect in which the movable role 66 is activated, and for example, a role activation effect is executed with rainbow lighting colors.

The revival performance may be executable when the second specific performance ends, but may not be executable when the first specific performance or the third specific performance ends. The revival performance that can be executed when the second specific performance ends is not a continuation of the battle performance, but is a performance in which the movable role 66 operates in rainbow lighting colors after returning from the background display of the battle performance to the background display when the normal reach performance is executed, and the multiple decorative pattern rows become the same pattern after the execution of the role operation performance. When the revival performance is executed when the second specific performance ends, a big win may be confirmed. In other words, when the revival performance is executed when the second specific performance ends, the C time reduction pattern may not be displayed. In other words, when the revival performance is executed when the second specific performance ends, the transition to the C time reduction mode may be denied. When the revival performance is executed after the execution of the second specific performance, a failure performance indicating that the battle was lost before the execution of the revival performance may be executed. If a failure effect (miss mode described above) is executed after the execution of the second specific effect, a revival effect may be executed and a jackpot may be obtained, or a revival effect may not be executed and a transition to time reduction C may occur. If a failure effect is not executed after the execution of the second specific effect, a success effect (jackpot mode described above) indicating that the battle has been won may be executed and a jackpot may be obtained.

During the pattern change period in which the second specific performance is executed, one or more advance notice performances may be executed at least before and during the execution of the second specific performance. The advance notice performance may be a temporary stop display that makes the decorative pattern appear as if it was stopped in the pseudo continuous change performance, or a temporary stop display of a pseudo consecutive dedicated pattern that suggests the performance content after the temporary stop in the temporary stop display. The advance notice performance may be a pre-reach notice executed at a timing before the reach state or a post-reach notice executed after the reach state in a reach change performance accompanied by a reach state of the decorative pattern. The advance notice performance may be a cut-in performance in which a wording or character image suggesting the degree of expectation is displayed for a relatively short time (about a few seconds), or an entry performance that suggests that the expectation will enter or develop into a state with a higher degree of expectation. In the advance notice performance, different types of characters may be displayed depending on the level of expectation, or the display color of the letters, window frame, etc. may differ depending on the level of expectation. The advance notice performance may be a role operation performance that activates the movable role 66. The advance notice performance may be a button repetition performance in which the display contents or display color of the screen change stepwise by repeatedly pressing the performance button 109. The advance notice performance may not be executed once during the pattern change period in which the second specific performance is executed, may be executed only once, or may be executed multiple times. By making the advance notice performance executable multiple times during the pattern change period in which the second specific performance is executed, a step-up advance notice performance (or chance-up performance) that gradually increases the expectation level may be executed. The advance notice performance executable during the pattern change period in which the second specific performance is executed may suggest the expectation level of a jackpot or a transition to the C time-saving mode. In other words, the probability that the jackpot pattern stops (or the probability that the C time-saving pattern stops) may differ depending on the execution mode of the advance notice performance during the pattern change period in which the second specific performance is executed. For example, during the pattern change period in which the second specific performance is executed, if the first character is displayed as the pre-reach notice, the probability that the jackpot pattern will stop is 40%, and the probability that the C time-saving pattern will stop is 60%, while if the second character is displayed as the pre-reach notice, the probability that the jackpot pattern will stop is 70%, and the probability that the C time-saving pattern will stop is 30%, and if the third character is displayed as the pre-reach notice, the probability that the jackpot pattern will stop may be 100%. Note that no matter which character is displayed as the pre-reach notice, the stopping of the C time-saving pattern is not confirmed.

According to this aspect, depending on which of the multiple types of specific effects is executed, it is possible to suggest not only the likelihood of a jackpot but also the likelihood of transitioning to an easy-to-score state (i.e., the likelihood of entering the time-saving mode). When the second specific effect is executed, it is possible to suggest that the likelihood of a jackpot is high, and that a transition to an easy-to-score state is confirmed. In other words, when the second specific effect is executed, it is possible to suggest a transition to an easy-to-score state triggered by a jackpot, or a transition to an easy-to-score state triggered by the stopping of the C time-saving pattern. Therefore, even if a jackpot is not obtained after the execution of the second specific effect, a transition to an easy-to-score state (C time-saving mode) can be expected, making it possible to provide a more promising performance development than in the past.

According to this embodiment, because the specific effects can suggest both the likelihood of a jackpot and the likelihood of entering the time-saving mode, the interest of the effects can be increased compared to when effects suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot and effects suggesting the likelihood of entering the time-saving mode are prepared separately. Also, compared to when effects suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot and effects suggesting the likelihood of entering the time-saving mode are prepared separately, it is possible to reduce the number of types of effects, and excessive increases in development man-hours can be suppressed.

As a variation of this embodiment, the end of the second specific effect may be triggered by the stopping of a pattern other than a jackpot (e.g., a miss) that is different from the C time-saving pattern. In this variation, when the second specific effect is executed, even if a jackpot is not reached, a transition to a state where it is easy to score (C time-saving mode) can be expected, making it possible to provide a more promising presentation than in the past.

As a variation of this embodiment, the end of the second specific effect may be a trigger to enter the B time-saving mode. For example, the second specific effect may be executable when the number of times remaining to reach the ceiling in the fluctuation start process is 1 and the pattern fluctuation is other than a jackpot. In this case, the special pattern may be displayed as a non-jackpot pattern after the execution of the second specific effect, and the number of times remaining to reach the ceiling may be reduced to 0, thereby entering the B time-saving mode. In this case, after the execution of the second specific effect, a branching effect may be executed to prompt the player to choose whether to enter the B time-saving mode or the C time-saving mode, and an announcement effect may be executed to announce the transition destination after the execution of the branching effect.

(Aspect 2-2: Stage change effect)
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of the switching timing of the performance mode. FIG. 55(a) shows the switching timing of the performance mode in the normal mode. In the normal mode, the first special pattern 51 (special pattern 1) is displayed in a variable manner in a low probability and low ball entry state. The normal mode has a plurality of performance modes, for example, the first normal performance, the second normal performance, and the third normal performance. In addition, each may be called the first normal stage, the second normal stage, and the third normal stage, and these may be collectively called the "normal stage". These correspond to the above-mentioned stages A to C, and may also include a "pre-reading stage". The plurality of performance modes can be switched with the start of the variation of the pattern as a trigger, and the performance modes are switched in order, for example, from the first normal performance to the second normal performance to the third normal performance to the first normal performance, and so on. For example, when the first normal effect is switched to the second normal effect by the start of the pattern change (switch 1), the first normal effect is being executed when the first special pattern 51 starts to change, and the first normal effect ends and the second normal effect starts after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) from the start of the pattern change. Similarly, when the second normal effect is switched to the third normal effect by the start of the pattern change (switch 2), the second normal effect is being executed when the first special pattern 51 starts to change, and the second normal effect ends and the third normal effect starts after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) from the start of the pattern change. Switching the effect mode is also called a stage change effect. This stage change effect may be an effect in which the stage is changed instantly without warning (for example, from the first normal effect to the second normal effect), or an effect indicating a stage change (for example, an effect in which the word "STAGE CHANGE" is displayed large on the screen for 0.5 seconds) (for example, from the first normal effect to the second normal effect). Each of the multiple effect modes has a different background display on the screen on which the decorative pattern 61 is variably displayed, for example.

Figure 55 (b) shows the timing of switching the presentation mode in the special mode. In the special mode, the second special pattern 52 (special pattern 2) is displayed in a variable manner in a low probability and low ball entry state. Since the special mode is a low ball entry state, it is difficult for a new game ball to enter the second starting hole 12. In the special mode, the second lottery value reserved in the high ball entry state (time-saving mode, latent mode, or extension mode) before switching to the special mode is consumed. The special mode continues until all reserved second lottery values are consumed, and ends after the reserved second lottery values are consumed before the variable display of special pattern 1 becomes possible. When special pattern 1 is displayed in a low probability and low ball entry state, the mode switches to normal mode.

In the time-saving mode, the latent mode, or the extended mode, the performance mode corresponds to each mode. The time-saving mode corresponds to the chance mode described above, and the latent mode and the extended mode correspond to the rush mode described above. In the final change of the time-saving mode, the latent mode, or the extended mode, an end suggestion performance is executed to suggest the end of each mode. The end suggestion performance may include a performance that incites whether or not the high ball entry state will continue. When the time-saving mode, the latent mode, or the extended mode ends, an end performance that notifies the end of each mode is executed, and the mode is switched to the special mode. The end performance is executed before the stop display of the pattern in the final change of each mode. After the end performance is executed, the performance mode is switched from the performance corresponding to the time-saving mode, the latent mode, or the extended mode to a special performance that can be executed only in the special mode. The start timing of the special performance is, for example, before the stop display of the pattern in the final change of the time-saving mode, the latent mode, or the extended mode (switch 3). The timing for starting the special effect may be after the symbols are displayed stationary in the final change of the time-saving mode, latent mode, or extension mode, or may be during the display of the symbols in the final change. In other words, it may be before the symbols start to change in the first change of the special mode. The special effect may be started when the symbols start to change in the first change of the special mode.

If the special mode does not result in a jackpot, the special mode ends with the display of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), which starts in a low ball entry and low probability state with no reserved second lottery value, as the final change. The special effect ends in the middle of the final change of the special mode, and a normal effect (e.g., the first normal effect) starts before the stop display of the symbol in the final change of the special mode. In other words, the timing of switching from the special effect to the normal effect is before the stop display of the symbol in the final change of the special mode (switch 4). As a result, the special effect is not executed after the stop display of the symbol in the final change of the special mode, and the normal effect is executed. Note that if a jackpot is won in the final change of the special mode, it is not necessary to switch from the special effect to the normal effect before the stop display of the symbol in the final change of the special mode. For example, the special effect may be executed at the timing when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped or stopped in a jackpot state (e.g., 777) in the final change of the special mode.

According to this embodiment, since the special effect is not executed after the stop display of the pattern in the final variation of the special mode, even if the game is stopped at the end of the high ball entry state (time-saving mode, latent mode, or extension mode), the display of the special effect can be prevented from continuing after the game ends. If the display of the special effect continues, it is possible to determine that the state is immediately after the end of the special mode, and it is possible to estimate that the number of remaining times to reach the ceiling, which is the condition for entering the B time-saving mode, is relatively large. When the A time-saving mode is entered as a result of a jackpot, the number of remaining times to reach the ceiling at the end of the special mode (special effect) to which the A time-saving mode is entered after the end of the A time-saving mode is approximately equal to the value (e.g., 700 times) obtained by subtracting the number of times to reach the ceiling (e.g., 900 times) from the number of times at the end of the A time-saving mode (e.g., 200 times). When the player is shifted to the hidden mode due to a jackpot, the number of times remaining to reach the ceiling at the end of the special mode depends on the timing of winning the fall judgment, but is at most approximately equal to the number of times the ceiling is reached (e.g., 900 times), or at least approximately equal to the value obtained by subtracting the number of times the hidden mode continues (e.g., 220 times) from the number of times the ceiling is reached (e.g., 680 times). When the player is shifted to the special mode (special performance) after the end of the B time-saving mode, the player cannot re-shift to the B time-saving mode, so the number of times remaining to reach the ceiling at the end of the special mode (special performance) is essentially infinite. Only when the player is shifted to the special mode (special performance) after the end of the C time-saving mode, the number of times remaining to reach the ceiling at the end of the special mode (special performance) may be relatively small. If the special effect continues for at least 10 symbol changes, and a number notification effect is executed to inform the player of the number of symbol changes since the end of the special game (for example, a display such as "120 spins after jackpot!" or "387 spins after jackpot!"), or the number of changes since the end of the special game is displayed on a data display (a data display connected to the game machine by the hall operator), which is an external device connected to the gaming machine, the player may be able to understand that there are many remaining times to reach the ceiling (i.e., the ceiling is far away) in consideration of the number of changes since the end of the special game that the player can grasp and the current situation in which the special effect is continuing to be displayed. For example, if the special effect is displayed 600 spins after the end of the special game, it can be understood that the special effect has been switched to between 591 and 600 spins. In this embodiment, when the special effect is started after the 222nd spin after the end of the special game, the high probability state is maintained until the 220th spin, and the fluctuation that won the fall judgment after the 221st spin is the fluctuation just before the special effect is started, so it is possible to understand that there is a high possibility that the high probability state was in place until just before the special effect was started. As a result, even if the number of times is displayed as "600 spins after the big win!" in the number of times notification effect, it is possible to understand that the number of times remaining to reach the ceiling is not 300 times, but 891 to 900 times (however, there is a possibility that the special mode (special effect) will be entered after the end of the C time-saving mode, and the number of times remaining to reach the ceiling may not be 891 to 900 spins). In that case, when another player tries to start playing, there is a possibility that the number of times remaining to reach the ceiling before entering the B time-saving mode is very large (it is very far to reach the ceiling), and this may reduce the player's desire to play. According to this aspect, by preventing the special effects from continuing to be displayed after a game ends, it is possible to prevent another player from being able to estimate the number of times remaining to reach the ceiling before entering time-saving mode B without starting a game when the other player is about to start playing.

(Aspect 2-3: Operation Instruction Presentation)
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an example of the execution process of the first effect triggered by the operation instruction effect. The operation instruction effect is an effect in which an operation means image 610 (also called a button image) that imitates an input operation means that accepts an input operation from a player, such as the effect button 109 or the effect lever 112, is displayed, and an input operation to the input operation means is instructed to the player. FIG. 56(a) is an example of a screen of the operation instruction effect. In the operation instruction effect, an operation means image 610 that imitates the effect button 109 is displayed in the center of the screen, and a word "Press!!" that prompts the player to operate the effect button 109 is displayed. A timer image 612 that indicates the operation effective period during which the input operation is effective is displayed below the operation means image 610, and the remaining time until the operation effective period ends is displayed by gradually shortening the length of a bar 614 of the timer image 612. The example shown in the figure is an operation instruction effect that is executed during the pattern change, and a simple pattern 600 consisting of three rows of patterns is displayed in a changing manner at the bottom right of the screen.

56(b) is an example of the first performance that can be executed after the operation instruction performance is executed, and as the first performance, a role operation performance is executed in which the movable role 616 is operated so as to appear in front of the screen. The role operation performance of FIG. 56(b) is executed when the performance button 109 is operated in the operation instruction performance of FIG. 56(a), or when the bar 614 of the timer image 612 disappears and the operation effective period ends. When the first performance is executed, the operation means image 610 is not displayed. A performance other than the role operation performance may be executed as the first performance, or an arbitrary notice performance may be executed after the operation instruction performance is executed. A plurality of types of first performances may be prepared, and any of the plurality of types of first performances may be executed when the operation means image 610 is not displayed. Note that if the operation effective period ends without the performance button 109 being operated in the operation instruction performance, the first performance may not be executed after the operation means image 610 is not displayed.

Figure 57 is a diagram showing an example of the execution process of the second performance triggered by the operation instruction performance. Figure 57 (a) shows an example of the screen of the operation instruction performance, which is the same as Figure 56 (a) described above. Figures 57 (b) and (c) show an example of the execution of the second performance that can be executed after the execution of the operation instruction performance. Unlike the first performance, the second performance is executed while the operation means image 620 is displayed. The second performance has a performance process in which the performance button 109 does not work properly and is in a broken state. Note that the performance button 109 is not actually broken during the second performance, but is expressed to make it look as if the performance button 109 is broken for the purpose of the performance. The display mode of the operation means image 620 for the second performance is different from that of the normal operation means image 610 for the operation instruction performance, and for example, the display mode is one that suggests a failure of the performance button 109. The operation means image 620 for the second performance has a display form that looks, for example, like the performance button 109 has melted and deformed due to high heat, or like the performance button 109 has been subjected to impact and broken, or like the normal operation means image 610 has been disturbed by the addition of noise. The display form of the operation means image 620 in the second performance is dedicated to the second performance, and is not used when the operation instruction performance is executed. The display position of the operation means image 620 for the second performance is the same as the display position of the normal operation means image 610.

The second performance is not executed when the performance button 109 is operated, but when the bar 614 of the timer image 612 disappears and the effective operation period ends, in order to suggest a malfunction of the performance button 109. Therefore, even if the performance button 109 is operated before the bar 614 of the timer image 612 disappears, no preview performance is executed. After the bar 614 of the timer image 612 disappears, the display of the operation means image 620 continues, but since the timer image 612 is not displayed, it is outside the effective operation period and input operations are not valid. During the execution of the second performance, a message suggesting a malfunction of the performance button 109, such as "Huh? Is it broken?" may be displayed. During the execution of the second performance, a message suggesting that something will occur due to a malfunction of the performance button 109, such as "Maybe...", may be displayed.

57(d) shows an example of a screen after the second performance ends, and shows an example of a reach occurrence performance in which the left and right rows of the decorative pattern 602 become the same pattern and reach is reached. In the example shown, the execution of the second performance suggests that a reach will occur. The reach performance executed after the end of the second performance may be an SP reach performance with a high expectation of a jackpot. Note that, instead of a reach occurring after the end of the second performance, any advance notice performance may be executed. The second performance may be a pre-indication performance that suggests in advance the occurrence of a advance notice performance with a high expectation of a jackpot. Since the second performance has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the first performance, there may be cases where a reach does not occur after the end of the first performance (or the possibility of a reach is low), but it may be set so that a reach always occurs after the end of the second performance (or the possibility of a reach increases). The possibility of an advance notice performance with a high expectation of a jackpot being executed may be reduced after the end of the first performance, and the possibility of an advance notice performance with a high expectation of a jackpot being executed may be increased after the end of the second performance.

A plurality of types of second performances may be prepared, and the display mode of the operation means image 620 and the execution time from the start to the end of the second performance may differ depending on the type of the second performance. In addition, the expectation of the notice performance executed after the end of the second performance may differ depending on the display mode and execution time of the operation means image 620 in the second performance, and the expectation of the jackpot after the end of the second performance may differ. For example, the expectation of the jackpot may be increased when the change in the display mode of the operation means image 620 is large or the execution time of the second performance is long. Furthermore, the end of the second performance may be triggered by displaying the normal operation means image 610 that is not broken again, and the notice performance may be always executed when the performance button 109 is operated. In other words, when the normal operation means image 610 is displayed again at the end of the second performance, the second performance may not be reexecuted. In this case, the longer the execution time of the second performance, the higher the possibility that the operation means image 610 with a display mode with a high expectation of the jackpot will be displayed after the end of the second performance. It is also possible to have the operation means image 610 not be displayed again (or have a low probability of being displayed again) after the first performance ends, and to have the operation means image 610 be displayed again (or have a high probability of being displayed again) after the second performance ends.

56(a) or 57(a), a button generation suggestion effect (also called a button appearance teasing effect) that suggests that the operation instruction effect will occur may be executed. The button generation suggestion effect when the first effect is executed may be the same as the button generation suggestion effect when the second effect is executed. In other words, it may be impossible to distinguish whether the first effect or the second effect will be executed depending on the execution mode of the button generation suggestion effect. On the other hand, when the normal operation means image 610 is displayed again after the end of the second effect, a button generation suggestion effect having an execution mode different from the button generation suggestion effect that triggers the start of the second effect may be executed after the end of the second effect. The execution mode of the button suggestion effect executed after the end of the second effect may be distinguished as being able to execute the first effect and being unable to execute the second effect thereafter. In addition, the button generation suggestion effect may not be executed before the execution of the operation instruction effect of FIG. 56(a) or 57(a), and the button generation suggestion effect may be executed when the operation means image 610 is displayed again after the end of the second effect.

When the first performance is executed, the display mode of the operation means image 610 at the start of the operation instruction performance may be of multiple types. For example, as the initial display mode of the operation means image 610, in addition to the normal color, a display mode with a high expectation of a jackpot, such as red or a giraffe pattern, or a display mode suggesting the confirmation of a jackpot, such as rainbow color, may be used. On the other hand, the initial display mode of the operation means image 610 when the second performance is executed may be fewer than when the first performance is executed. For example, the initial display mode of the operation means image 610 when the second performance is executed may be only the normal color. In addition, when the operation means image 610 is displayed again after the end of the second performance, the display mode of the operation means image 610 displayed again may be more likely to be a display mode with a higher expectation of a jackpot than the display mode of the operation means image 610 displayed at the start of the second performance.

According to this aspect, after the operation instruction performance is executed, not only the performance button 109 may operate normally and the first performance may be executed, but also the performance button 109 may not operate normally and may break down and a second performance may be executed. By making it possible to execute such a second performance, it is possible to realize a performance that creates an awkward feeling that the performance button 109 does not respond when operated, thereby increasing the interest of the performance.

According to this aspect, regardless of whether the first or second performance is executed, the initial display state of the operation means image 610 displayed in the operation instruction performance can be the same (e.g., normal color), so that even if the performance button 109 is displayed in normal color, it is possible to create a performance that has promising developments.

(Aspect 2-4: Indication of remaining number of times to reach the ceiling)
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, a special effect can be executed that indicates the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling, which is a condition for entering the B time reduction. The special effect does not directly indicate the specific value of the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling, but indicates which of a plurality of ranges the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling falls into. If the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling is in a first range (e.g., 301 times or more), the first special effect can be executed, if the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling is in a second range different from the first range (e.g., 201 times or more and 300 times or less), the second special effect can be executed, and if the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling is in a third range different from the first and second ranges (e.g., 101 times or more and 200 times or less), the third special effect can be executed. In addition, if the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling is in a fourth range (e.g., 1 time or more and 100 times or less), the fourth special effect can be executed. In addition, it may be suggested that it falls into a specific range by not executing the special effect when it falls into any of a plurality of ranges. For example, it may be suggested that it is in the fourth range by not executing the special effect when the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling falls into a fourth range (e.g., 1 time or more and 100 times or less).

The special effects may be executable only in a specific game state. The special effects may be executed only in a low probability and low ball entry state, for example, only in normal mode. The special effects may be executed in a specific time-saving mode, for example, in C time-saving mode. On the other hand, the special effects may not be executed in A time-saving mode or B time-saving mode. The special effects may not be executed in a high probability state, for example, not in latent mode or extended mode.

The special effect is executed when the special symbol starts to change. When the special effect is executed when the symbol starts to change, the special effect is executed so that it ends before the symbol stops changing. The execution time from the start to the end of the special effect is set so that it falls within the shortest change time among the selectable change patterns in the game state in which the special effect can be executed. The execution time from the start to the end of the special effect is, for example, 2 or 3 seconds.

The special effect may be an effect displayed on the effect display device 60. For example, a character dedicated to the special effect may appear when the pattern starts to change. In this case, the type of character and the difference in the display color may indicate which of a plurality of ranges the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling falls into. For example, when a blue character appears, it falls into the first range, when a green character appears, it falls into the second range, and when a red character appears, it falls into the third range. The special effect may be an effect using sound output from the speaker 108, or a lamp effect in which the decorative lamp 111 flashes in a specific color (blue when it falls into the first range, green when it falls into the second range, and red when it falls into the third range).

The special effect may be executed over multiple consecutive pattern changes. For example, multiple special effects corresponding to each of the multiple consecutive pattern changes may be executed. Specifically, the first special effect may be executed when the pattern starts to change, the second special effect may be executed when the next pattern starts to change, and the third special effect may be executed when the next pattern starts to change. When multiple special effects are executed in response to multiple consecutive pattern changes, the execution mode of the multiple special effects may be the same, or the execution mode of the special effect may be determined based on the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling at the start of the pattern change in which the first special effect is executed. In addition, when the execution mode of the special effect is determined based on the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling at the start of the pattern change in which each special effect is executed, the execution mode of the multiple special effects executed in response to multiple consecutive pattern changes may change midway. For example, if the number of times remaining to reach the ceiling when the first special effect is executed is 201, the number of times remaining to reach the ceiling when the second special effect is executed is 200, and the number of times remaining to reach the ceiling when the third special effect is executed is 199, the second special effect (e.g., a green character) may be executed the first time, and the third special effect (e.g., a red character) may be executed the second and third times. In addition, as special effects, a fifth special effect and a sixth special effect that have the role of suggesting the probability of a jackpot may be prepared. For example, when the fifth special effect (e.g., a gold character) is executed, it may be suggested that the probability of a jackpot for the pattern change for which the fifth special effect is executed is high, and when the sixth special effect (e.g., a rainbow character) is executed, it may be suggested that the pattern change for which the sixth special effect is executed is a guaranteed jackpot.

When multiple special effects are executed in response to multiple consecutive pattern changes, the time interval between the end of one special effect and the start of the next may vary depending on the pattern change time during which the special effect is executed. For example, if the pattern change time during which the first special effect is executed is 10 seconds, the pattern change time during which the second special effect is executed is 30 seconds, and the execution time of the special effect is 2 seconds, the time interval between the end of the first special effect and the start of the second special effect is approximately 8 seconds, and the time interval between the end of the second special effect and the start of the third special effect is approximately 28 seconds.

The special effects may be executable when the number of times the patterns change after the RAM clear process, the power off recovery process, or the standby demo screen is displayed reaches a specific number (e.g., 30 times). For example, the counter for special effects may be initialized and set to a specific number when the RAM clear process, the power off recovery process, or the standby demo screen is displayed, and the counter for special effects may be decremented by 1 when the patterns stop changing. When the counter for special effects becomes 0, the special effects may be executed when the next pattern starts changing. The counter for special effects may be decremented only in a game state in which special effects can be executed, and may not be decremented in a game state in which special effects cannot be executed. The counter for special effects may be decremented even in a game state in which special effects cannot be executed.

The counter for the special effect may be initialized when a special effect is executed. For example, if a special effect is executed in normal mode and then the number of times the pattern changes in normal mode reaches a specific number (e.g., 30 times), the special effect may be executed again. A special effect may be executed each time the number of times the pattern changes reaches a specific number (e.g., every 30 times) in a game state in which a special effect can be executed.

The standby demo screen is a screen display indicating that the game is on standby, and is displayed when a predetermined time (e.g., 120 seconds) has elapsed in a situation where a pattern is stopped in normal play and neither the first lottery value nor the second lottery value is reserved. The standby demo screen may be displayed when no game balls are shot for a certain period of time in normal mode. The standby demo screen does not have to be displayed in any mode other than normal mode. For example, in a high ball entry state such as C time-saving mode, the standby demo screen may not be displayed even if no game balls are shot for a certain period of time.

According to this embodiment, the special effect is executed when the number of symbol changes in normal mode reaches at least a specific number, so that by continuing to play in normal mode, the player can know the approximate number of times remaining to reach the ceiling. This allows the player to receive benefits by continuing to play. On the other hand, when play ends in normal mode, a standby demo screen is displayed, and the counter for the special effect is initialized when the standby demo screen is displayed, so that the execution of the special effect is prohibited immediately after another player starts playing. This makes it possible to prevent players who are not continuing to play in normal mode from easily knowing the number of times remaining to reach the ceiling. For example, it is possible to prevent hyena behavior such as searching for an advantageous gaming machine and starting play while checking the number of times remaining to reach the ceiling.

(Aspect 2-5: Opening effect in stealth mode)
When the hidden mode is entered after the end of the special game, a special effect (also called an opening effect) that can continue for a special period from the start of the hidden mode until at least a predetermined time has elapsed is executed. The opening effect is executed for a pattern change period within a specific number of times (e.g., 20 times) from the start of the hidden mode. If a jackpot occurs with a pattern change within a specific number of times (e.g., 20 times) from the start of the hidden mode, the opening effect ends with a pattern change that results in a jackpot. At the end of the opening effect, a branching effect is executed to encourage whether a jackpot occurs or the hidden mode continues and enters the RUSH zone. If a jackpot occurs, a role-operation effect that notifies the player of the confirmation of a jackpot is executed in the branching effect, and then a change effect (e.g., a full rotation effect) is executed with the jackpot confirmed. If a jackpot does not occur with a pattern change within a specific number of times (e.g., 20 times) from the start of the hidden mode, the opening effect ends with a pattern change that occurs a specific number of times (e.g., the 20th time). If no jackpot is obtained within the special period, a branching effect is executed at the end of the opening effect, and entry into the RUSH zone is notified. In the effect notifying entry into the RUSH zone, the number of times the RUSH zone will continue (100 times or 200 times) may be notified or suggested.

Figure 58 is a diagram showing the process of executing the opening performance. Figure 58 shows the case where the maximum number of pattern changes (i.e., the specific number of times) that the opening performance can continue is 20 times. Figure 58 (a) shows the process of execution when the opening performance is executed and all changes from the first change to the final change are misses. When a miss change occurs, the change time of the first change and the final change is relatively long, and the change time of the intermediate changes (2nd to 19th) excluding the first and final changes is relatively short. For example, the change time of the first change that is a miss is 10 seconds, the change time of the intermediate change that is a miss is 2.5 seconds, the change time of the final change that is a miss is 25 seconds, and the elapsed time from the start of the first change to the end of the final change is 80 seconds. In the opening performance, the 80-second elapsed time when the first change to the final change is a miss is used to continuously play a dedicated video used only in the opening performance. The contents of the dedicated video include, for example, an overview of the performance that can occur in the RUSH zone and an explanation of the premise. Playback of the special video begins when the first fluctuation begins, and ends before the branching effect occurs during the final fluctuation.

In the opening performance, the preview performance can be executed at multiple timings, and the step-up preview (or chance-up performance) can be executed by executing the preview performance multiple times. The execution timing and execution contents of the multiple preview performances are synchronized with the playback contents of the dedicated video. The execution timing of the multiple preview performances is determined by the playback time of the dedicated video. For example, the preview 1 can be executed 30 seconds after the start of playback of the dedicated video, the preview 2 can be executed 38 seconds after the start of playback of the dedicated video, the preview 3 can be executed 48 seconds after the start of playback of the dedicated video, and the preview 4 can be executed 55 seconds after the start of playback of the dedicated video. In the preview 1, a preview performance is executed in which the characters of the title display change from a normal color to a high expectation color such as green or red in accordance with the title display of the opening performance included in the dedicated video. In the preview 2, a preview performance is executed in which the type of character that appears by a cut-in in the dedicated video suggests the expectation level. In the preview 3, a preview performance is executed in which the presence or absence of a cut-in such as "A shocking development will occur after this!" suggests the expectation level. In notice 4, a notice performance is executed that suggests the degree of expectation depending on the content of the narration lines included in the dedicated video and the type of character performing the narration. If all variations from the first variation to the final variation in which the opening performance is executed are misses, notice 1 is executed during the 9th pattern variation, notice 2 is executed during the 12th pattern variation, notice 3 is executed during the 16th pattern variation, and notice 4 is executed during the 19th pattern variation. Depending on the type of notices 1 to 4, a notification performance is executed that notifies the player of a confirmed jackpot after the branching performance is executed, and the expectation of the full rotation performance being executed afterwards is suggested. The more notices 1 to 4 that have high expectation performance content, the higher the expectation of a subsequent jackpot.

Figure 58 (b) shows the execution process when the final variation in which the opening performance is executed results in a jackpot. The first to 19th pattern variations, excluding the final variation, are all misses, and the execution process is the same as in (a). If the final variation results in a jackpot, a branching performance is executed after the end of the dedicated video playback period, and after the branching performance is executed, a notification performance is executed to notify the player that a jackpot has been confirmed, and then a full rotation performance is executed. In order to ensure the execution time of the full rotation performance, the variation time of the final variation that results in a jackpot is longer than the variation time of the final variation that results in a miss. The variation time of the final variation that results in a jackpot is, for example, 85 seconds, which is 60 seconds longer than the variation time (25 seconds) of the final variation that results in a miss. The difference of 60 seconds is used to execute the notification performance, the full rotation performance, and the jackpot performance when the patterns stop.

Figure 58 (c) shows the execution process when a jackpot occurs during an intermediate variation when an opening effect is executed, and shows a case where a jackpot occurs during the 14th pattern variation. In other words, the first through thirteenth pattern variations before the jackpot are all misses, and the jackpot occurs during the 14th pattern variation. The execution process of the opening effect when a jackpot occurs during an intermediate variation is the same as the execution process when a jackpot occurs during the final variation in (b). In other words, a branching effect is executed after the end of the dedicated video playback period, and after the branching effect is executed, a notification effect is executed to notify the player that a jackpot has been confirmed, and then a full rotation effect is executed.

The timing of the pattern stop when the intermediate variation results in a jackpot is the same as the timing of the pattern stop when the final variation results in a jackpot. The fluctuation time of the intermediate variation resulting in a jackpot is equal to the fluctuation time of the final variation resulting in a jackpot plus the fluctuation time of the intermediate variation resulting in a miss. If the fluctuation time of the final variation resulting in a jackpot is P (85 seconds), the fluctuation time of the intermediate variation resulting in a miss is Q (2.5 seconds), the maximum number of pattern fluctuations in the opening performance is N (20 times), and the number of fluctuations from the first time to the intermediate variation resulting in a jackpot is K (14 times), the fluctuation time P _K of the intermediate variation resulting in a jackpot is P _K = P + Q (N-K). In the case of K = 14 times, the fluctuation time of the 14th pattern fluctuation resulting in a jackpot is 85 + 2.5 x 6 = 100 seconds.

The timing of the execution of the preview performance when the intermediate variation results in a jackpot is the same as when the final variation results in a miss or a jackpot. Starting from the start of playback of the dedicated video, preview 1 is executed 30 seconds later, preview 2 38 seconds later, preview 3 48 seconds later, and preview 4 55 seconds later. As a result, preview 1 can be executed at the 9th pattern variation that results in a miss, preview 2 can be executed at the 12th pattern variation that results in a miss, while preview 3 and preview 4 can be executed at the 14th pattern variation that results in a jackpot. Therefore, the execution mode of preview 3 and preview 4 can be determined by utilizing the fact that the variation (the 14th pattern variation) at the time of the execution of preview 3 and preview 4 results in a jackpot. In other words, the selection probability of the performance lottery for preview 3 and preview 4 can be set so that the performance content with a high expectation is more likely to be selected in preview 3 and preview 4 than in the case of a miss variation (for example, a miss variation until the final variation). In addition, if the lottery value corresponding to the 14th pattern change is reserved at the start of the 12th pattern change, the execution mode of the preview performance can be determined by looking ahead. In other words, the selection probability of the performance lottery for Preview 2 can be set so that a performance content with a high expectation is more likely to be selected in Preview 2 than in the case of a miss change (for example, a miss change until the final change).

Figure 58 (d) shows the execution process when the opening performance is executed and the jackpot is reached at the third pattern change. In other words, the first and second pattern changes before the jackpot are misses, and the jackpot is reached at the third pattern change. The execution process of the opening performance when the jackpot is reached at the third pattern change is the same as the execution process of (b) and (c). The change time of the third pattern change that results in a jackpot is 85 + 2.5 x 17 = 127.5 seconds. The execution timing of the notice performance when the jackpot is reached at the third pattern change is the same as when the jackpot is reached at the last change and when the jackpot is reached at the last change. As a result, all notice performances (notice 1 to notice 4) can be executed at the third pattern change that results in a jackpot, and the execution mode of notice 1 to notice 4 can be determined by utilizing the fact that the change results in a jackpot. In other words, the selection probability for the performance lottery for previews 1 to 4 can be set so that the performance content with high expectations is more likely to be selected in previews 1 to 4 than in the case of a losing variation (for example, a losing variation until the final variation).

Figure 58 (e) shows the execution process when the first variation in which the opening performance is executed results in a jackpot. The execution process when the first variation results in a jackpot is the same as the execution process of (b) to (d). The fluctuation time of the first variation that results in a jackpot is the sum (140 seconds) of the fluctuation time of the first variation that results in a miss, the sum of the fluctuation times of the intermediate variations that result in a miss from the second to the 19th (2.5 x 18 = 45 seconds), and the fluctuation time of the final variation that results in a jackpot (85 seconds). In other words, the fluctuation time of the first variation that results in a jackpot is equal to the elapsed time of the special period. The execution timing of the notice performance when the first pattern variation results in a jackpot is the same as when the final variation results in a miss or when the final variation results in a jackpot. As a result, all notice performances (notice 1 to notice 4) can be executed in the first variation that results in a jackpot, and the execution mode of notice 1 to notice 4 can be determined by utilizing the fact that the variation results in a jackpot. In other words, the selection probability for the performance lottery for previews 1 to 4 can be set so that the performance content with high expectations is more likely to be selected in previews 1 to 4 than in the case of a losing variation (for example, a losing variation until the final variation).

At the timing of execution of the preview performance in the opening performance, a command is sent from the control CPU 320 to the sub CPU 310 to notify the execution timing of the preview performance. The control CPU 320 sends a command to the sub CPU 310 at the timing when the playback time of the video reaches a predetermined time starting from the start timing of the playback of the dedicated video. For example, when the dedicated video is played for 30 seconds, a command is sent from the control CPU 320 to the sub CPU 310 to notify that it is the timing to execute preview 1. Similarly, when the dedicated video is played for 38 seconds, a command is sent to notify that it is the timing to execute preview 2, when it is played for 48 seconds, a command is sent to notify that it is the timing to execute preview 3, and when it is played for 55 seconds, a command is sent to notify that it is the timing to execute preview 4. The sub CPU 310 (performance determination means 303) determines the execution mode of the preview performance based on the change or pending lottery value when it receives the command from the control CPU 320, and sends a command to notify the execution mode of the preview performance to the control CPU 320. The control CPU 320 (performance control device 313) causes the performance display device 60 to display the preview performance specified by the command received from the sub-CPU 310.

In the pattern change from the first time the opening performance is performed to a specific number of times, a dedicated pattern selection state is used to fix the change time. As an example, 20 types of pattern selection states are prepared that correspond to the maximum number of pattern changes that the opening performance can continue, and the pattern selection state is switched in sequence for each pattern change. In the pattern selection state for the first time, a 10-second miss pattern is selected in the case of a miss, and a 140-second jackpot pattern is selected in the case of a jackpot. In the pattern selection state for the second time, a 2.5-second miss pattern is selected in the case of a miss, and a 130-second jackpot pattern is selected in the case of a jackpot. In the pattern selection state for the third time, a 2.5-second miss pattern is selected in the case of a miss, and a 127.5-second jackpot pattern is selected in the case of a jackpot. In the pattern selection state for the fourth time, a 2.5-second miss pattern is selected in the case of a miss, and a 125-second jackpot pattern is selected in the case of a jackpot. To generalize, in the variation pattern selection state for the Kth time excluding the first and final times, a miss variation pattern of 2.5 seconds is selected in the case of a miss, and a jackpot variation pattern of 130-(K-2) x 2.5 seconds is selected in the case of a jackpot. In the variation pattern selection state for the final time, a miss variation pattern of 25 seconds is selected in the case of a miss, and a jackpot variation pattern of 85 seconds is selected in the case of a jackpot. Therefore, the variation time of the jackpot variation pattern selected in the pattern variation from the first time to a specific number of times in the special period decreases as the number of pattern variations increases. On the other hand, the variation time of the miss variation pattern selected in the pattern variation from the first time to a specific number of times in the latent mode is common (2.5 seconds) to intermediate variations excluding the first and final times.

During the special period, a countdown display of the number of times the pattern will change may be displayed along with the playback of the special video. For example, at the first change, "19 times left" may be displayed, at the second change, "18 times left" may be displayed, at the 19th change, "1 time left" may be displayed, and at the final change, "0 times left" may be displayed. Note that at the final change, the countdown display may be hidden after "0 times left" is displayed. Alternatively, the countdown display may be hidden when the final change begins, in which case "0 times left" may not be displayed.

During the special period, a simple pattern 600 is displayed to indicate the change and stop of the pattern along with the playback of a dedicated video. The simple pattern 600 is also called a "simple decorative pattern," "sub decorative pattern," "sub decoration pattern," "mini decorative pattern," or "mini decoration pattern." The simple pattern 600 changes and is displayed when the special pattern starts to change, and is displayed stopped in accordance with the stop display of the special pattern. If a jackpot is reached in the first to 19th times excluding the final change, the simple pattern 600 may be temporarily stopped and re-changed in accordance with the pattern stop and change start timing in the case where all the patterns up to the final change are misses. For example, if a jackpot is reached on the first play, the simple pattern 600 is temporarily stopped at the same timing as the pattern stop timing of the first change, which is a miss, and the simple pattern 600 is re-changed at the same timing as the change start timing of the second change, which is a miss, and the temporary stop and re-change of the simple pattern 600 are repeated thereafter. In the case of a first big win, the simple pattern 600 is temporarily stopped and re-changed 19 times, and then a branching effect, a notification effect, and a full rotation effect are executed, and then the simple pattern 600 is stopped and displayed in a big win mode. In the case of a Kth intermediate change, the next change display starts after the simple pattern 600 is stopped and displayed in the first to K-1th miss changes, and in the Kth big win change, the simple pattern 600 is temporarily stopped and re-changed. In the Kth big win change, the simple pattern 600 is temporarily stopped and re-changed N-K-1 times. As a result, a pseudo continuous change display is executed that makes it look as if the simple pattern 600 is stopped and changed at the same timing as when all the changes are misses up to the final change. By displaying the simple pattern 600 in a pseudo continuous change, even if a big win occurs in the 19th pattern change from the first, it can be made to look as if a big win occurs in the 20th pattern change. Also, by temporarily stopping the simple pattern 600 during playback of the dedicated video, it is possible to suggest that a jackpot has been confirmed. During the special period, the decorative pattern 602 is not displayed except during a jackpot variation, and is only displayed during a full rotation effect during a jackpot variation. During periods other than the special period (periods other than the normal mode period and the special period in the special mode), the decorative pattern 602 is displayed regardless of whether the variation is a jackpot or a miss, and the simple pattern 600 is also displayed at all times, but even if the decorative pattern 602 is temporarily stopped (pseudo continuous variation), unlike during the special period, the simple pattern 600 does not temporarily stop.

According to this aspect, regardless of whether the number of pattern changes performed during the special period in which the opening performance is performed is from 1 to N (e.g., 20), if a jackpot occurs within the special period, the timing of the stopped display of the jackpot pattern will be the same. In other words, the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed upon the end of the special period. As a result, regardless of whether a jackpot occurs during one to N pattern changes, a common performance time can be secured, and special performances including the playback of a dedicated video can be executed within the common performance time.

According to this embodiment, a maximum of N pattern changes (e.g., 20 times) can be performed within the special period, which increases the probability of a jackpot occurring within the special period compared to when the special period is made up of only one pattern change with a fixed change time. As a result, a unique state can be created in which a jackpot is more likely to occur at the end of the special period, further increasing the anticipation of the opening performance.

In addition, if the specification is to switch the variation pattern selection state for each pattern change, 20 types of variation pattern selection states must be prepared, and 20 types of jackpot variation patterns must also be prepared. This causes the limited storage capacity of the main ROM 292 to become strained. Therefore, instead of switching the variation pattern selection state for each pattern change, the specification may be such that the variation pattern selection state is switched for multiple pattern changes. For example, in the intermediate changes of 2 to 19 times, the variation pattern selection state may be switched for every three pattern changes. In this case, the first variation pattern selection state for the first time, the second variation pattern selection state for the second to fourth times, the third variation pattern selection state for the fifth to seventh times, the fourth variation pattern selection state for the eighth to tenth times, the fifth variation pattern selection state for the eleventh to thirteenth times, the sixth variation pattern selection state for the fourteenth to sixteenth times, the seventh variation pattern selection state for the seventeenth to nineteenth times, and the eighth variation pattern selection state for the final time are prepared. As a result, the number of types of variation pattern selection states can be reduced from 20 to 8. In addition, since it is sufficient to prepare a jackpot variation pattern for each variation pattern selection state, the number of types of jackpot variation patterns can also be reduced from 20 to 8. However, by aggregating the number of types of jackpot variation patterns for multiple pattern variations and standardizing the variation time, a shift in the timing of the pattern stopping that results in a jackpot may occur depending on which variation, from the first time to a specific number of times, results in a jackpot.

Figure 59 shows an example of the execution process of the opening performance, and shows an example of a case where a slight difference occurs in the timing of the pattern stop resulting in a jackpot depending on the number of fluctuations from the first time to the pattern fluctuation resulting in a jackpot. Figure 59(a) shows a case where a jackpot occurs in the final fluctuation, and is the same as the execution process of Figure 58(b). Figures 59(b) to (d) show a case where a jackpot occurs in a pattern fluctuation in which the second fluctuation pattern selection state for the second to fourth times is selected. Figure 59(b) shows a case where a jackpot occurs in the second pattern fluctuation, Figure 59(c) shows a case where a jackpot occurs in the third pattern fluctuation, and Figure 59(d) shows a case where a jackpot occurs in the fourth pattern fluctuation. When a jackpot occurs in any of the second to fourth pattern fluctuations, a common jackpot fluctuation pattern is selected based on the common second fluctuation pattern selection state, so the fluctuation time is the same. In other words, the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern when the jackpot is hit on the second try, the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern when the jackpot is hit on the third try, and the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern when the jackpot is hit on the fourth try are all the same.

In the example of FIG. 59, the fluctuation time is determined based on the execution process when the third pattern fluctuation results in a jackpot, and the fluctuation time of 127.5 seconds is adopted for the third jackpot in FIG. 58(d). As a result, the timing at which the jackpot pattern stops when the third jackpot in FIG. 59(c) is the same as the timing at which the jackpot pattern stops when the final fluctuation in FIG. 59(a) is a jackpot. On the other hand, the timing at which the jackpot pattern stops when the second jackpot in FIG. 59(b) is a time t1 earlier than the timing at which the jackpot pattern stops when the final fluctuation in FIG. 59(a) is a jackpot. The shift time t1 of the pattern stop timing corresponds to the fluctuation time (2.5 seconds) of the intermediate fluctuation that results in a miss. This is because the number of intermediate fluctuations that result in a miss in FIG. 59(b) is one less than that in FIG. 59(c). Conversely, the timing at which the jackpot pattern stops when a jackpot occurs on the fourth try in FIG. 59(d) is delayed by time t2 from the timing at which the jackpot pattern stops when a jackpot occurs in the final variation in FIG. 59(a). The delay time t2 in the pattern stop timing corresponds to the variation time (2.5 seconds) of the intermediate variation that results in a miss. This is because in the case of FIG. 59(d), there is one more intermediate variation that results in a miss than in the case of FIG. 59(c).

The same applies to the case where a jackpot occurs on the 5th to 19th pattern changes. For example, when a jackpot occurs on the 6th, 9th, 12th, 15th, and 18th pattern changes, which are multiples of 3, the timing at which the jackpot pattern stops is the same as the timing at which the jackpot pattern stops in the final change. On the other hand, when a jackpot occurs on the 5th, 8th, 11th, 14th, and 17th pattern changes, which are multiples of 3 minus 1, the timing at which the jackpot pattern stops is earlier by time t1 than the timing at which the jackpot pattern stops in the final change. Conversely, when a jackpot occurs on the 7th, 10th, 13th, 16th, and 19th pattern changes, which are multiples of 3 plus 1, the timing at which the jackpot pattern stops is later by time t2 than the timing at which the jackpot pattern stops in the final change.

In the example of FIG. 59, the timing at which the winning symbol stops varies depending on which symbol change results in a winning jackpot, from the first to a specific number of times. However, because the difference can be kept to ±2.5 seconds, the timing at which the winning symbol stops can be made substantially the same. As a result, a substantially common performance time can be secured for the opening performance, and the number of types of change pattern selection states and winning change patterns can be restricted to prevent the storage capacity of the main ROM 292 from becoming strained.

During special periods, dedicated videos are played, so there are no effects that can be selected by lottery when the fluctuation starts, or the number of types of effects that can be selected by lottery is relatively small. On the other hand, outside of special periods, instead of playing dedicated videos, fluctuation effects that correspond to the fluctuation patterns of the patterns are executed, so there are effects that can be selected by lottery when the fluctuation starts, and the number of types of effects that can be selected by lottery is relatively large.

During the special period, regardless of which of the multiple pattern changes that can be performed from the start to the end of the special period results in a jackpot, the execution timing of the jackpot effect based on the start of the special period is the same or substantially the same. If it is substantially the same, the shift in the execution timing of the jackpot effect may be the same as the shortest pattern change time selectable in the special period. Here, the jackpot effect may be a notification effect that is executed immediately after a branching effect, a full rotation effect that is executed after a notification effect, or an effect in which a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode (e.g., 777).

The number of types of variation pattern selection states selected during a special period may be the same as the maximum number of pattern changes that can be performed during a special period, may be less than the maximum number, or may be less than half the maximum number. The number of transitions of the variation pattern selection state during a special period may be less than the maximum number of pattern changes that can be performed during a special period, or may be less than half the maximum number.

During the special period, a special effect (e.g., playback of a dedicated video) can be executed, which can proceed regardless of the timing of the start and stop of the pattern fluctuation. During the execution of the special effect, one or more preview effects can be executed, and multiple preview effects may be executed. A chance-up effect may be executed by executing multiple preview effects.

During the special period, the special performance may proceed regardless of whether or not the pattern changes. In other words, during the special period, even if the lottery value related to the pattern change is not reserved and the pattern change is stopped and the next pattern change is not started, the special performance may continue to proceed, and for example, the dedicated video may continue to be played. The preview performance that can be executed during the execution of the special performance may be executed at a timing according to the progress of the special performance. In other words, the preview performance may be executed regardless of the cumulative number of pattern changes or the presence or absence of pattern change, and the preview performance may occur even if the lottery value related to the pattern change is not reserved and the pattern change is stopped and the next pattern change is not started. If the special performance ends before the end of the final change in the special period, the image displayed at the end timing of the special performance may continue to be displayed until the end of the final change.

During the special period, if there is no pattern change, the progress of the special performance may be paused. During the special period, if the lottery value related to the pattern change is not reserved and the pattern change remains stopped and the next pattern change does not start, the progress of the special performance may be paused, for example, the playback of the dedicated video may be paused. The special performance may have multiple pauseable timings. If there is no pattern change at any of the multiple pauseable timings, the progress of the special performance may be continued until any of the pauseable timings, and the progress of the special performance may be paused when any of the pauseable timings is reached. During the pause of the special performance, a warning display may be displayed to the effect that a game operation should be performed, for example, a right-hit warning display may be displayed superimposed on the pause screen of the dedicated video. The warning display may start at approximately the same timing as the pause of the dedicated video, or may start after a predetermined time has elapsed since the pause of the dedicated video (for example, after 5 seconds have elapsed without the pattern change starting even after the dedicated video is paused). If the pattern change starts while the special effect is paused, the right-hit warning display is hidden, the pause of the special effect is released, and the progress of the special effect may resume from any pause timing. The preview effect that can be executed during the execution of the special effect may be executed at a timing according to the progress of the special effect, or may be executed at a timing according to the cumulative number of pattern changes.

As a modified example of this embodiment, when a jackpot is reached in the first change of the special period, a jackpot effect different from the special effect may be executed. When a jackpot is reached in the first change of the special period and a jackpot effect different from the special effect is executed, the timing of the stop of the symbol that will be the jackpot may be different from the timing of the stop of the symbol that will be the jackpot in the final change of the special period. For example, when the number of symbol changes executed in the special period changes from M times (M is 2 or more and less than N) to N times, the symbol that will be the jackpot may be displayed as a stop at the end of the special period. On the other hand, when the number of symbol changes executed in the special period becomes less than M times, the special effect may not be executed and the symbol that will be the jackpot may be displayed as a stop before the end of the special period. In addition, in the case of a non-modified example, when the number of symbol changes executed in the special period changes from M times (M is 1 or more and less than N) to N times, the symbol that will be the jackpot may be displayed as a stop at the end of the special period.

(Aspect 2-6: Special color effects)
As a pattern change performance in which a decorative pattern is changed and displayed, a first performance in which a performance display device 60 displays a normal color performance and a second performance in which a performance display device 60 displays a special color performance different from the normal color can be executed. The second performance has a performance process similar to that of the first performance, but only the display color of the performance is different from the first performance. In the second performance, for example, the display color of the entire screen of the performance display device 60 becomes a special color different from the normal color. For example, in the first performance, a performance in which a normal color display is executed, and in the second performance, a performance in which a monochrome display or a negative-positive inversion display is executed. The second performance is executed, for example, by changing the display color of the display image for the first performance by the display control circuit 326. According to this aspect, by executing the second performance in which the display color of the entire screen is changed to a special color, a performance with an impact can be executed. In addition, since the image for the second performance can be displayed by simply changing the display color of the image for the first performance by image processing, it is not necessary to prepare a separate image for the second performance, and an excessive increase in development man-hours can be suppressed.

Figure 60 is a diagram showing an example of the execution process of a normal color variation presentation. Figure 60 (a) shows an example of the screen when the variation stops, with multiple rows of simple patterns 630 displayed as stopped at "112" in a losing state in the lower right of the screen, and multiple rows of decorative patterns 632 displayed as stopped at "112" in a losing state in the center of the screen. A right-hit image 634 is displayed in the upper right of the screen, indicating that the game is in a gaming state in which a right hit is required, and a "RUSH-zone" remaining zone image 636 is displayed in the lower left of the screen, indicating that the player is remaining in the RUSH zone.

The display colors of the simple patterns 630 and the decorative patterns 632 are determined according to the pattern type (number). For example, the pattern "1" is pink, the pattern "2" is light blue, the pattern "3" is red, the pattern "4" is purple, the pattern "5" is green, the pattern "6" is blue, and the pattern "7" is gold. The correspondence between the pattern numbers and the display colors is common to the simple patterns 630 and the decorative patterns 632. By standardizing the display colors of the simple patterns 630 and the decorative patterns 632 according to the pattern type, the simple patterns 630 and the decorative patterns 632 can be displayed in correspondence with each other, and the pattern types of the simple patterns 630 and the decorative patterns 632 can be more easily shown to the player. As a variation, the simple patterns 630 may be unified into one color instead of using multiple colors in order to improve visibility, and for example, all of the patterns "1" to "7" may be white.

Figure 60 (b) shows the state immediately after the start of the next pattern change. The decorative pattern 632 in the center of the screen starts to change from the "112" that is the stopping mode immediately before the change starts. On the other hand, the simple pattern 630 in the bottom right of the screen starts to change not from the "112" that is the stopping mode immediately before the change starts, but from the "123" pattern sequence combination as its starting point. In other words, the simple pattern 630 starts to change from a fixed pattern sequence combination as its starting point, regardless of the stopping mode immediately before the change starts. A right-hit image 634 continues to be displayed in the top right of the screen, and a stay zone image 636 continues to be displayed in the bottom left of the screen.

Figure 60(c) shows a preview effect that starts when the variation starts, and shows the entry screen to the "Street Battle effect" which suggests that defeating all enemy characters will result in a jackpot (or develop into a super reach). In the center of the screen, a preview image 638 of "Entering Street Battle!!" is displayed instead of the decorative pattern 632. Figure 60(d) shows an example of a screen for a street battle effect, and in the center of the screen, a performance image 640 is displayed showing the performance process in which the main character defeats many enemy characters. A simple pattern 630 is displayed in a variable manner in the lower right of the screen. A right hit image 634 is continuously displayed in the upper right of the screen, and a stay zone image 636 is continuously displayed in the lower left of the screen.

Figure 61 is a diagram showing an example of the execution process of the special color variable performance. The performance process in Figure 61 is the same as the performance process in Figure 60, but the display color of the performance is different halfway through. Figure 61 (a) is an example of a normal color screen before the special color variable performance starts, and is the same as Figure 60 (a). Figure 61 (b) shows an example of a screen at the start of the special color variable performance. In the example of Figure 61 (b), the display color of the entire screen is changed from color to grayscale. For example, the background display of the screen becomes black, the decorative pattern 642 in the center of the screen changes from color display to monochrome display, and the staying zone image 646 of the "RUSH-zone" at the bottom left of the screen also changes from color display to monochrome display. In other words, the display color of the decorative pattern 642 in the second performance is different from the display color of the decorative pattern 632 in the first performance. On the other hand, the display color of the simple pattern 630 and the right hit image 634 does not change, and the normal color display is maintained as in the normal color variable performance in Figure 60 (b). In other words, the display colors of the simple pattern 630 and right hit image 634 in the second performance are the same as the display colors of the simple pattern 630 and right hit image 634 in the first performance.

Figure 61 (c) shows an example of a screen during the execution of a special color change effect, where the change effect is executed while the display color of the entire screen remains grayscale. For example, the background display of the screen remains black, and the "RUSH-zone" stay zone image 646 in the lower left of the screen remains in monochrome. In addition, the preview image 648 of "Entering Street Battle!!" in the center of the screen also changes from color to monochrome. The display colors of the simple pattern 630 and right-hit image 634 do not change, and the normal color display is maintained, just like the normal color change effect in Figure 60 (c).

Figure 61 (d) shows an example of a screen during execution of a special color change performance, in which the change performance is executed while the display color of the entire screen remains grayscale. The background display of the screen remains black, and the "RUSH-zone" stay zone image 646 at the bottom left of the screen remains in monochrome. In addition, the performance image 640 in the center of the screen, which shows the performance process in which the main character defeats multiple enemy characters, also becomes monochrome. The display colors of the simple pattern 630 and the right hit image 634 do not change, and the normal color display is maintained, just like the normal color change performance in Figure 60 (c).

The second performance in the special color ends within one pattern change period during which the second performance is executed. For example, if the second performance is started triggered by the start of the pattern change, the second performance ends before the end of the pattern change during which the second performance started, and the first performance in the normal color returns. Therefore, when the pattern change starts and when it is stopped, the first performance in the normal color is executed, and the second performance in the special color can be executed while the pattern is changing. By displaying the decorative pattern 632 in the normal color when it is stopped, the visibility of the pattern type of the decorative pattern 632 can be improved.

At the start of the special color change effect in FIG. 61(b), that is, when switching from the first effect to the second effect, a transition effect may be executed in which the display color of the entire screen is switched multiple times in a short period of time. In the transition effect, for example, the display state of the normal color and the display state of the special color may be switched multiple times so that the entire screen flashes. In addition, the display state of the first special color in which the normal color image is grayscaled and the display state of the second special color in which the luminance value of the grayscale image is inverted (so-called negative-positive inversion) may be switched multiple times. In addition, in the transition effect, a display state in which the luminance of the entire screen is increased to make it whitish, or a display state in which the luminance of the entire screen is decreased to make it darker, or text such as "Color change!" may be displayed.

When the second performance and the transition performance are being performed, there may be display objects whose display color changes and display objects whose display color does not change. For example, displays related to the performance, such as the display of the decorative pattern 632, the background display, the display of the stay zone image 636, the reserved display showing the reserved lottery value, and the display of a preview image showing a character that will appear during the performance process, may be display objects whose display color is subject to change. On the other hand, displays related to the game, such as the display of the simple pattern 630, the display of the right hit image 634, and the error display, may be display objects whose display color is not subject to change. By excluding the display color of important display objects related to the game from the objects that are subject to change, a decrease in visibility of important displays related to the game can be prevented.

When the special color change effect ends, that is, when switching from the second effect to the first effect, it is not necessary to execute a transition effect in which the display color of the entire screen is switched multiple times in a short period of time. In other words, when returning from the second effect to the first effect, the display color of the entire screen may be switched only once.

After executing a transition effect while the first effect is being executed, a false transition effect may be executed that returns to the first effect without switching to the second effect. In other words, the execution of the transition effect may suggest a transition to the second effect, and after the execution of the transition effect, there may be cases where the effect switches to the second effect, and cases where the effect does not switch to the second effect.

Figure 62 is a diagram showing an example of the execution process of the reel operation performance. Figure 62 (a) shows an example of the execution of the reel operation performance in which the movable reel 660 appears in front of the performance display device 60 of the normal color variable performance (i.e., the first performance). In the reel operation performance, the lamps included in the movable reel 660 are lit in a specific lighting mode (including lighting color and color change), and an auxiliary performance display 662 is displayed on the performance display device 60 in association with the operation of the movable reel 660. When the movable reel 660 operates in the first performance in which the color is normal, the auxiliary performance display 662 is displayed in a display color corresponding to the lighting mode of the movable reel 660. For example, when the movable reel 660 is lit in red, the red performance display 662 is displayed, and when the movable reel 660 is lit in rainbow colors, the rainbow performance display 662 is displayed. The display color of the auxiliary performance display 662 in the first performance may differ depending on the lighting color of the movable reel 660.

Figure 62 (b) shows an example of the execution of a reel operation performance in which the movable reel 664 appears in front of the display screen of the special color variable performance (i.e., the second performance). In the second performance, an auxiliary performance display 666 accompanying the operation of the movable reel 664 is also performed. The lighting state of the movable reel 664 when the reel operation performance is executed in the second performance in which the special color is displayed may be the same as the lighting state of the movable reel 660 when the reel operation performance is executed in the first performance in which the normal color is displayed. On the other hand, the display state of the auxiliary performance display 666 accompanying the operation of the movable reel 664 in the second performance may be different from the display state of the auxiliary performance display 662 accompanying the operation of the movable reel 660 in the first performance. For example, even if the lighting color of the movable reel 664 is red or rainbow, the display color of the auxiliary performance display 666 may be grayscale or monochrome. The display color of the auxiliary performance display 666 in the second performance may be common regardless of the lighting color of the movable reel 664.

(Aspect 2-7: Suggested performance with selectable execution mode)
FIG. 63 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation process in which the execution mode of the suggestive presentation can be selected. After the symbol fluctuation starts, a specific presentation (also called an execution mode selection presentation) can be performed in which options are displayed for the player to select the execution mode. When the first or second mode is selected in the execution mode selection presentation, a suggestive presentation that suggests the likelihood of a jackpot is performed, and after the suggestive presentation is performed, a notification presentation that confirms a jackpot is performed, or a symbol that is a miss is displayed stationary. In the execution mode selection presentation, the player can select whether the execution mode of the suggestive presentation is the first mode or the second mode by operating the presentation button 109 or the cross key 110.

In the suggestive performance, for example, a cut-in display is made over the entire screen during a super reach performance such as the second specific performance, and the cut-in display is changed (developed) in stages to suggest the likelihood of a jackpot. When the first mode is selected, a suggestive performance in which the cut-in display remains at the first stage (silver) or changes from the first stage (silver) to the final stage (rainbow) can be executed. In other words, when the first mode is selected, there are only two types of cut-in display at the end of the suggestive performance: the first stage and the final stage. On the other hand, when the second mode is selected, there is a suggestive performance in which the cut-in display remains at the first stage (silver) or changes from the first stage (silver) to the second stage (purple), third stage (red), fourth stage (giraffe pattern) or final stage (rainbow). Therefore, when the second mode is selected, there are five types of cut-in display at the end of the suggestive performance: the first stage, the second stage, the third stage, the fourth stage, and the final stage. In addition, the display contents (e.g., the type of character appearing and the content of the dialogue) included in the cut-in display may be different depending on the selected execution mode so that it is possible to know which execution mode was selected even after the selection. For example, when the first mode is selected, the cut-in display may show a first character appearing and a first dialogue, and when the second mode is selected, the cut-in display may show a second character appearing and a second dialogue.

If the cut-in display at the end of the suggestive effect is the final stage (rainbow), a jackpot is confirmed. Therefore, an effect in which the cut-in display at the final stage (rainbow) in the suggestive effect is a confirmed effect in which a jackpot is confirmed. On the other hand, if the cut-in display at the end of the suggestive effect is anything other than the final stage, it may be a jackpot or a miss, so a jackpot is not confirmed. Therefore, an effect in which the cut-in display at the final stage (rainbow) in the suggestive effect does not end in any of the first to fourth stages, and the change (development) ends, is a non-confirmed effect in which a jackpot is not confirmed.

When the first mode is selected, either one type of definite effect or one type of non-deterministic effect is executed. When the second mode is selected, either one type of definite effect or four types of non-deterministic effect is executed. Therefore, the number of types of non-deterministic effects that can be executed when the second mode is selected is greater than the number of types of non-deterministic effects that can be executed when the first mode is selected. When the second mode is selected and a non-deterministic effect is executed, the probability of a subsequent jackpot differs depending on which of the four types of non-deterministic effects is executed. Specifically, the probability of a subsequent jackpot increases as the number of stages of change in the cut-in display in the suggestive effect increases, and the probability of a jackpot increases in the following order for the display mode of the cut-in display at the end of the suggestive effect: first stage < second stage < third stage < fourth stage.

If a jackpot is obtained after the selection of the first mode, for example, there is a 20% probability that a non-definite effect is executed, and a 80% probability that a definite effect is executed. On the other hand, if a jackpot is obtained after the selection of the second mode, for example, there is a 75% probability that a non-definite effect is executed, and a 25% probability that a definite effect is executed. If a jackpot is obtained after the selection of the second mode, for example, there is a 5% probability that the jackpot will end in the first stage, a 10% probability that it will progress to the second stage (purple), a 25% probability that it will progress to the third stage (red), a 35% probability that it will progress to the fourth stage (giraffe pattern), and a 25% probability that it will progress to the fifth stage (rainbow). Therefore, the probability of a jackpot being obtained by executing a definite effect after the selection of the first mode (for example, 80%) is higher than the probability of a jackpot being obtained by executing a definite effect after the selection of the second mode (for example, 25%). In addition, the probability (e.g., 20%) that the suggestive presentation will end in the first stage after the first mode is selected and a jackpot will result is higher than the probability (e.g., 5%) that the suggestive presentation will end in the first stage and a jackpot will result after the second mode is selected.

Whether the first or second mode is selected, a revival effect that appears to be a miss after a confirmed effect is executed and then results in a jackpot is not executed. Conversely, whether the first or second mode is selected, a revival effect that appears to be a miss after a non-confirmed effect is executed and then results in a jackpot is executed.

The period during which the first or second mode can be selected in the execution mode selection display (e.g., 15 seconds) may be longer than the execution period (e.g., 5 seconds) of the suggestion display (confirmed or non-confirmed display) that is executed thereafter. During the period during which the first or second mode can be selected in the execution mode selection display, one or more advance notice displays may be executed. One or more advance notice displays executed during the period during which the execution mode can be selected in the execution mode selection display may indicate the expectation of a jackpot, or may indicate the expectation of whether a confirmed or non-confirmed display will be executed after the selection of the first or second mode. For example, the greater the number of small characters displayed at the edge of the screen, the higher the expectation of a confirmed or non-confirmed display with high expectation being executed after the selection of the first or second mode. By lengthening the period during which the first or second mode can be selected and allowing one or more preview effects within that period, the player can be given time to consider whether to select the first or second mode depending on the content of the preview effect, and the interest of the execution mode selection effect can be increased. As a variation, the period during which the first or second mode can be selected in the execution mode selection effect can be made shorter than the execution period of the suggestion effect (confirmation effect or non-confirmation effect) that is executed thereafter, forcing the player to make an immediate decision.

The execution time of the suggestive performance may vary depending on the number of stages to be developed, and the execution time may be longer as the number of stages to be developed increases. For example, if each stage from the first stage to the final stage is executed for 1 second, the execution time of the suggestive performance is 1 second if it ends at the first stage, 2 seconds if it ends after developing to the second stage, 3 seconds if it ends after developing to the third stage, 4 seconds if it ends after developing to the fourth stage, and 5 seconds if it ends after developing to the final stage. The execution time of each stage may be different, for example, the execution time of the first stage and the final stage may be relatively long, and the execution time of the intermediate stages from the second stage to the fourth stage may be relatively short. For example, the first stage may be 2 seconds, each stage from the second stage to the fourth stage may be 0.5 seconds, and the final stage may be 3 seconds.

When the confirmation performance is executed after the first or second mode is selected, the timing of execution of the first stage and the timing of execution of the final stage may be the same regardless of whether the first or second mode is selected. For example, when the confirmation performance is executed after the second mode is selected, the cut-in display of each of the second to fourth stages may be superimposed on the background display, whereas when the confirmation performance is executed after the first mode is selected, the background display may be visible without the cut-in display being superimposed during the interval period from the end of the first stage to the start of the final stage.

As a variation of this embodiment, when the first embodiment is selected, a final effect can be executed, whereas when the second embodiment is selected, a final effect cannot be executed. In other words, when the first embodiment is selected, it is possible to progress from the first stage to the final stage, whereas when the second embodiment is selected, the progress may end at any of the first to fourth stages, and progress to the final stage may not be possible.

(Aspect 2-8: High ball remaining number increase effect)
If the jackpot is not hit within a specific number of times (20 times) after the transition to the latent mode, that is, if the jackpot is not hit during the execution of the opening performance, the RUSH zone is entered. The RUSH zone can continue for at least 100 or 200 pattern change periods. In the RUSH zone, the remaining number of pattern changes that will allow the high ball entry state to continue is displayed on the screen, and the remaining number displayed on the screen is subtracted by 1 when the pattern stops or starts to change. If the number of times the high ball entry state can continue after the transition to the latent mode is the first number of times (120 times), the number of times the high ball entry state can continue at the start of the RUSH zone is the first number of times (120 times) minus the specific number of times (20 times) (100 times). If the number of times that a high ball scoring state can be continued after transitioning to the latent mode is the second number (220 times), the number of times that a high ball scoring state can be continued at the start of the RUSH zone is the second number (220 times) minus a specific number (20 times) (200 times).

At the end of the opening performance or the start of the RUSH zone, a notification performance is executed to notify the number of times the high ball entry state can be continued in the RUSH zone. If the number of times the high ball entry state can be continued after switching to the latent mode is the first number (120 times), a notification performance of "Entering RUSH zone for 100 spins!" is executed at the start of the RUSH zone. If the number of times the high ball entry state can be continued after switching to the latent mode is the second number (220 times), a notification performance of "Entering RUSH zone for 200 spins!" can be executed at the start of the RUSH zone. Also, if the number of times the high ball entry state can be continued after switching to the latent mode is the second number (220 times), a notification performance of "Entering RUSH zone for 100 spins!" can be executed at the start of the RUSH zone. This notification is a false notification because, although the actual remaining number of times is 200, it indicates a false remaining number of times of 100, which is less than the actual remaining number of times.

If a false remaining number of times is announced at the start of the RUSH zone, a number increase effect can be executed that increases the apparent remaining number of times in the middle of the RUSH zone. For example, even if the number of times the high ball entry state has continued at the start of the RUSH zone is 200 times, if a false announcement effect of "Entering 100 spins in the RUSH zone!" is executed at the start of the RUSH zone, a number increase effect can be executed in which a display such as "+100 spins!!" is displayed in the middle of the RUSH zone. On the other hand, if the actual remaining number of times is announced at the start of the RUSH zone, a number increase effect that increases the remaining number of times in the middle of the RUSH zone is not executed.

Figure 64 is a diagram showing an example of the execution process of the number of times increase effect. Figure 64 (a) shows an example of a screen in which a false notification effect of "RUSH zone 100 spins entered!" is executed, even though the actual number of times the RUSH zone continues is 200 times, which is a notification effect at the start of the RUSH zone. A simple pattern 600 is displayed in the lower right of the screen, and a right-hit image 634 is displayed in the upper right of the screen. Figure 64 (b) shows an example of a screen at the time of the first change of the RUSH zone. A decorative pattern 602 is displayed in a changing manner in the center of the screen, and a staying zone image 636 of "RUSH-zone" is displayed in the lower left of the screen. A remaining number image 652 of "99 times remaining" is displayed in the upper part of the screen, which indicates the apparent remaining number of times until the number of times the RUSH zone continues is reached. Figure 64 (c) shows an example of a screen of the number of times increase effect. In the example of FIG. 64(c), "+100 spins!!" is displayed when the apparent remaining number of spins is 34. FIG. 64(d) shows an example of a screen after the number of spins increase effect is executed, and the remaining number of spins shown by the remaining number of spins image 652 has increased to "134 spins remaining" as a result of the number of spins increase effect.

When a false remaining number of times is notified at the start of the RUSH zone, the effect determination means 303 executes an effect lottery to determine whether or not to execute a number-increasing effect at the start of the pattern change in the RUSH zone. If the number of pattern changes from the start of the RUSH zone is less than a predetermined number (e.g., 50 times), the number-increasing effect will not be executed even if the effect lottery is won. In other words, the execution of the number-increasing effect is prohibited when the pattern changes less than a predetermined number (e.g., 50 times) from the start of the RUSH zone. On the other hand, if the number of pattern changes from the start of the RUSH zone is more than a predetermined number (e.g., 50 times), the number-increasing effect is executed for the pattern change that won the effect lottery. In other words, the number-increasing effect can be executed when the pattern changes more than a predetermined number (e.g., 50 times) from the start of the RUSH zone. In addition, if the false remaining number of times is notified at the start of the RUSH zone, and the number of times increase effect is not executed by the end of the pattern change when the false remaining number of times is 1 (i.e., the 99th time from the start of the RUSH zone), the number of times increase effect is forcibly executed at the start of the pattern change when the false remaining number of times is 0 (i.e., the 100th time from the start of the RUSH zone), and the remaining number of times displayed on the screen increases to "100 times remaining". As a modified example, if the number of pattern changes from the start of the RUSH zone is less than a predetermined number (e.g., 50 times), an effect lottery to determine whether or not to execute the number of times increase effect at the start of the pattern change in the RUSH zone may not be executed, and an effect lottery may be executed when the pattern changes the predetermined number of times (e.g., 50 times) or more from the start of the RUSH zone.

In the opening performance before the transition to the RUSH zone, instead of displaying the remaining number of times that the high ball entry state can be continued in the latent mode, the remaining number of times of pattern change or pseudo continuous change until the opening performance ends may be displayed. Therefore, at the start of the opening performance, a false remaining number is not displayed, and the remaining number starting from the maximum number of pattern changes (20 times) that can be performed in the opening performance is displayed by subtracting it. In the opening performance, the remaining number is not necessarily subtracted by the pattern change, but may be subtracted by the pseudo pattern change. In addition, in the opening performance, a notice performance that suggests whether the number of times that the RUSH zone can be continued is the first number or the second number may be executed. For example, a text notice performance may be executed in which the possibility of the second number is higher when the second notice performance in which the text "Number UP!?" is displayed is executed than when the first notice performance in which the text "Number UP?" is displayed is executed during the opening performance.

According to this embodiment, when a false remaining number of times is notified at the start of the RUSH zone, the execution of the number of times increase effect is prohibited when the pattern changes less than a predetermined number of times from the start of the RUSH zone, so that the expectation of the player can be effectively increased by executing the number of times increase effect. When the number of times of pattern changes from the start of the RUSH zone is less than the predetermined number of times, the remaining number of times displayed is large (e.g., 50 times or more), so there is little anxiety that a jackpot may not be achieved by the end of the RUSH zone. On the other hand, when the number of times of pattern changes from the start of the RUSH zone is greater than the predetermined number of times, the remaining number of times displayed is small (e.g., less than 50 times), so there is great anxiety that a jackpot may not be achieved by the end of the RUSH zone. By enabling the execution of the number of times increase effect at a timing when there is great anxiety that the RUSH zone may end, it is possible to effectively increase the expectation of a jackpot due to the increase in the remaining number of times.

When it is decided by the effect lottery that the number of times increase effect will be executed, the number of times increase effect may be executed with the change that executed the effect lottery, or the number of times increase effect may be executed with the change that corresponds to the reserved lottery value. In other words, the number of times increase effect may be an effect by looking ahead. When the number of times increase effect is executed by looking ahead, a pre-suggestion effect may be executed that suggests in advance that the number of times increase effect will be executed during a pattern change prior to the pattern change that executes the number of times increase effect.

(Aspect 2-9: Variable performance in extension mode)
In the extension mode, a special effect is executed in which multiple types of individual effects can be executed in a predetermined order. Each individual effect can be executed over multiple pattern changes. As the individual effects, for example, there is a first individual effect in which an ally character appears and a second individual effect in which an enemy character appears, and by alternately executing the first individual effect and the second individual effect, an effect in which a battle between an ally character and an enemy character progresses is executed. In the individual effect, for example, a video is played in which an ally character or an enemy character appears and utters a specific line or performs a specific killer move. Note that the individual effect is an effect that starts immediately after the start of the variable display, and is not started just before the end of the variable display.

Figure 65 is a diagram showing an example of the execution process of individual effects, showing the process of executing multiple individual effects together with multiple pattern changes. In the example of Figure 65, a flow is shown in which a first individual effect A (1A) in which an ally character appears, a second individual effect A (2A) in which an enemy character appears, a first individual effect B (1B) in which an ally character appears, and a second individual effect B (2B) in which an enemy character appears are executed in order. Each individual effect 1A, 2A, 1B, and 2B can be executed over multiple pattern changes. Note that the change time of the pattern change in which each individual effect 1A to 2B is executed is not necessarily uniform, and the change time may differ depending on the selected change pattern. If the change time of the pattern change that triggers the start of an individual effect is long, the individual effect may start and end within one pattern change, as in individual effect 1B. The execution time of each individual effect may be uniform regardless of the type of individual effect, or may differ depending on the type of individual effect.

In the extended mode, the effect selection means 303 selects whether or not to execute an individual effect, and if the effect selection is won, the individual effect is executed when the pattern change starts. When an individual effect is executed, the effect selection is prohibited until the individual effect ends in order to prevent the individual effect from being interrupted midway and another individual effect from starting. For example, if an individual effect starts when the pattern change starts and the individual effect is still being executed at the start of the next pattern change, the effect selection is prohibited while the individual effect continues. After that, when the individual effect ends, the prohibition on the effect selection is lifted and the effect selection is permitted. Therefore, the start of the individual effect triggers a state in which the effect selection is prohibited, and the end of the individual effect triggers a state in which the effect selection is permitted.

At the start of an individual performance, the sub-CPU 310 (performance determination means 303) transmits a command to the control CPU 320 (performance control device 313) to instruct the start of the individual performance. When the sub-CPU 310 transmits the start command to the control CPU 320, it changes the flag indicating whether or not the performance lottery can be executed to a prohibited state. The start command is transmitted, for example, after the start of the pattern change that starts the individual performance. The start command includes information specifying the type of individual performance. When the control CPU 320 receives the start command from the sub-CPU 310, it controls the operation of the display control circuit 326 so that playback of the video corresponding to the type of individual performance specified in the start command is started. When playback of the video of the individual performance ends, the control CPU 320 transmits a command to notify the sub-CPU 310 of the end of the individual performance. The end command may include information specifying the type of individual performance that has ended. When the sub-CPU 310 receives the end command from the control CPU 320, it changes the flag indicating whether or not the performance lottery can be executed to a permitted state.

Since an individual performance may be performed over multiple pattern changes, it may be started only in a situation where multiple pattern changes are possible. For example, an individual performance may be started only when a lottery value is reserved and it is confirmed that multiple pattern changes will be performed in succession. An individual performance may be started only if the number of reserved values is a specific number or more. For example, if an individual performance is performed over three pattern changes, the performance lottery may be executed only if the number of reserved lottery values is three or more or four. In other words, if the number of reserved values immediately after the change display starts is three (if the change display starts when one reserved value is consumed from a situation where the number of reserved values is four), the execution of an individual performance can be started. On the other hand, if the number of reserved values is less than the specific number, the performance lottery may be skipped without being executed even if the performance lottery is permitted.

There may be low-expectation individual performances and high-expectation individual performances as types of individual performances. If the lottery values reserved at the start of the pattern change at which the individual performance is started include lottery values with high expectations, such as lottery values that result in a jackpot or a reach change, a high-expectation individual performance may be started. On the other hand, if the lottery values reserved at the start of the pattern change at which the individual performance is started do not include lottery values with high expectations, such as lottery values that result in a jackpot or a reach change, a low-expectation individual performance may be started. Also, if the pattern change at which the individual performance is started (i.e., the change in question) is a pattern change with high expectations, such as a pattern change that results in a jackpot or a reach change, a high-expectation individual performance may be started. On the other hand, if the pattern change that starts the individual performance (i.e., the change in question) is not a pattern change with a high expectation such as a pattern change that results in a jackpot or a reach change, a low expectation individual performance may be started, but if the lottery values reserved during the pattern change include lottery values with a high expectation such as a lottery value that results in a jackpot or a reach change (i.e., they are predicted in advance), a high expectation individual performance may be started.

The number of types of high-expectation individual performances may be less than the number of types of low-expectation individual performances. For example, five types of first individual performances and five types of second individual performances are prepared as low-expectation individual performances, and two types of first individual performances and two types of second individual performances are prepared as high-expectation individual performances. If the situation continues in which the lottery value of high expectation is not included at the start of the individual performance, 10 types of low-expectation individual performances, which are the total of the first individual performances (for allies) and the second individual performances (for enemies) with low expectation, are executed in a predetermined order (for example, along the order of progression of the story or the order of progression of the battle), and the first individual performances and the second individual performances are executed alternately. On the other hand, if the lottery value of high expectation is included at the start of the individual performance, a high-expectation individual performance may be executed instead of the low-expectation individual performance that should be executed next according to the predetermined order. In other words, a high-expectation individual performance may be executed so as to be inserted in the middle of the execution order of the low-expectation individual performances. If the situation continues in which a lottery value with a high expectation is included at the start of an individual performance, two or more high expectation individual performances may be executed in succession. Even when a high expectation individual performance is executed, the rule that the first individual performance (for allies) and the second individual performance (for enemies) are executed alternately may be observed. Following the first individual performance with a low expectation, the second individual performance with a low expectation or high expectation may be executed, and the first individual performance with a low expectation or high expectation may not be executed. Following the second individual performance with a low expectation, the first individual performance with a low expectation or high expectation may be executed, and the second individual performance with a low expectation or high expectation may not be executed. Following the first individual performance with a high expectation, the second individual performance with a low expectation or high expectation may be executed, and the first individual performance with a low expectation or high expectation may not be executed. Following the second individual performance with a high expectation, the first individual performance with a low expectation or high expectation may be executed, and the second individual performance with a low expectation or high expectation may not be executed.

Individual effects may not be executed while a specific look-ahead effect (a pending change effect or a background change effect that transitions to a look-ahead stage) is being executed. Even if the flag indicating whether or not the effect lottery can be executed is in an allowed state, the execution of the specific look-ahead effect may be prioritized while a specific look-ahead effect is being executed, and the effect lottery may be skipped without being executed, so that an individual effect is not executed (or the effect lottery may be executed, but the individual effect may not be executed even if the effect lottery is won).

If power is restored while an individual performance is being executed, the execution of the individual performance is stopped by the power recovery process and the video for the individual performance is hidden, but because the individual performance did not end normally, the control CPU 320 does not send an end command for the individual performance to the sub-CPU 310. If this happens, the state in which the execution of the performance lottery is prohibited will continue after power is restored, and the individual performance will not be executed in the extended mode after power is restored. Therefore, when power is restored after power is restored, the flag indicating whether or not the performance lottery can be executed may be forcibly changed to an allowed state when the pattern change at the time of power recovery ends. In this case, the prohibited state of the performance lottery will continue until the pattern change at the time of power recovery ends, and the performance lottery will be allowed when the next pattern change after power is restored starts, allowing the execution of the individual performance.

During or after the individual performance is completed, an operation instruction performance may be executed to instruct input operations to the performance button 109 or the like, and a reel operation performance may be executed after the operation instruction performance is completed. When a power-off recovery process is executed, the movable reel 66 may perform a predetermined initialization operation after the power-off recovery. When an individual performance is executed during the initialization operation of the movable reel 66, an operation instruction performance may be executed after that. In other words, an operation means image imitating the input operation means may be displayed during the initialization operation of the movable reel 66. When an operation means image is displayed during the initialization operation of the movable reel 66, even if an input operation is performed to the input operation means, a reel operation performance may not be executed, but an auxiliary performance display 662 accompanying the operation of the movable reel 660 may be executed.

According to this embodiment, even when executing an individual performance that does not fit within one pattern change, control can be performed so that another individual performance triggered by the start of the pattern change is not executed before the end of the individual performance, thereby ensuring the consistency of the performance. In addition, by switching between the permitted and prohibited states of the performance lottery based on the start and end commands of the individual performance, it is possible to prevent control from becoming complicated.

(Aspect 2-10: Opening performance pause process)
As described in the above-mentioned aspect 2-5, a special effect (opening effect) can be executed during a special period from the start of the latent mode until at least a predetermined time has elapsed, and a video playback effect in which a dedicated video is played is executed in the opening effect. The video playback effect is executed continuously over a plurality of pattern change periods, and is executed continuously regardless of the timing of the start of the change and the timing of the stop display during the plurality of pattern change periods. In this aspect, if the lottery value related to the pattern change is not reserved during the execution of the video playback effect, and the pattern change remains stopped and the next pattern change does not start, the progress of the video playback effect is immediately stopped and a video in a maintained stopped state is displayed. This prevents the playback of the dedicated video from continuing when no game is being played.

When the lottery value related to the pattern change is reserved, the display of the pattern change corresponding to the next pattern change begins a first time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) after the pattern is displayed stationary. On the other hand, when the lottery value related to the pattern change is reserved, the display of the pattern change corresponding to the next pattern change does not begin a first time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) after the pattern is displayed stationary, and the stationary display of the pattern continues. Therefore, if the pattern corresponding to the next pattern change is not displayed a second time (e.g., 1 second) longer than the first time after the pattern is displayed stationary, the progress of the video playback performance is immediately stopped. On the other hand, if the display of the pattern corresponding to the next pattern change begins a first time after the pattern is displayed stationary, the progress of the video playback performance is allowed to continue.

During the execution of the video playback effect, it is possible to execute an audio effect that outputs sound from the speaker 108 according to the progress of the video, and a lamp effect that lights up the decorative lamp 111. When the video playback effect is stopped, the image of the video paused at the point where the second time has elapsed since the symbol was stopped is continuously displayed, and the audio effect and lamp effect are also paused. Meanwhile, even when the video playback effect is stopped, a right-hit image is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, and a large right-hit warning display is displayed in the center of the screen. Also, even when the video playback effect is stopped, any lamp display (error display, game status display, symbol display, etc.) on the symbol display unit 120 continues without being paused.

The video playback performance may have multiple performance branching points, and the playback content of the dedicated video may differ after each performance branching point. The timing of each performance branching point in the video playback performance is determined according to the playback time of the dedicated video. Therefore, if the stopped state of the pattern continues during the execution of the video playback performance and the playback of the video is paused, the elapsed time from the start of the video playback performance to each performance branching point will be delayed by the pause time of the video. If a performance branching point is reached during the execution of the video playback performance, a feedback command is sent from the control CPU 320 to the sub CPU 310 to notify that it is a performance branching point. The sub CPU 310 determines the execution mode of the lamp performance or notice performance after each performance branching point based on the notification command of the performance branching point received from the control CPU 320. By determining the execution mode of the performance based on the feedback command, it is possible to align the playback content of the dedicated video with the execution timing of the lamp performance or notice performance for each performance branching point, even if the elapsed time from the start of the video playback performance to each performance branching point changes due to the pause of the video playback.

According to this embodiment, when the progress of the video playback effect is paused, the video playback display and the execution of the lamp effects and preview effects linked to the video playback content are paused, so that the lamp effects and preview effects can be executed in sync with the video playback content. On the other hand, when the progress of the video playback effect is paused, important displays related to the game can be continued by continuing the error display, right-hit display, etc.

(Aspect 2-11: Determination process based on the game state stored at the beginning of the fluctuation start process)
In this embodiment, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 51, since the fall judgment is executed in the variation start process and then the winning/losing judgment is executed, the game state stored at the beginning of the variation start process may differ from the game state at the time of the winning/losing judgment. For example, if the fall judgment is won in the extension mode, the start of the variation start process related to the symbol variation that won the fall judgment is a high probability and high ball entry state, but the subsequent winning/losing judgment is a low probability and low ball entry state. Since the extension mode is a right-handed play state, the second special symbol 52 will vary, but if the launch of the game ball is stopped and the lottery value related to the second special symbol 52 is no longer reserved, the first special symbol 51 may vary. If the first special symbol 51 varies in the extension mode, the fall judgment is won in the variation start process of the first special symbol 51, and the winning/losing judgment results in a jackpot, the game state at the time of the execution of the winning/losing judgment that results in a jackpot is a low probability and low ball entry state. In this case, even if the player stays in the extension mode, the first special symbol 51 will be a jackpot with a low probability and a low ball entry state, so it will be considered a jackpot in the normal mode, and it will be possible to switch from the extension mode to the A time-saving mode. Although the probability of this situation occurring is extremely low, it is not desirable because it causes a large disadvantage to the player when it does occur.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the game state after the special game ends is determined based on the game state stored at the beginning of the fluctuation start process so that if the first special pattern 51 falls into a low probability and low ball entry state during the extension mode and a jackpot is obtained with the first special pattern 51, the game state after the special game ends is determined based on the game state stored at the beginning of the fluctuation start process so that the game state can be transitioned to the latent mode rather than the A time-saving mode. Specifically, in the case of a jackpot, the game state after the special game ends is determined based on the game state stored in the process of S1300 in FIG. 51. Since the fall judgment is not executed in the normal mode, when a jackpot is obtained in the normal mode, the game state at the start of the fluctuation start process is a low probability and low ball entry state. On the other hand, since the game state at the start of the fluctuation start process before the fall judgment is executed in the extension mode is a high probability and high ball entry state, by using the game state at the start of the fluctuation start process as a standard, the same transition destination (latent mode) can be achieved when a jackpot is obtained, regardless of whether the fall judgment is subsequently won or not won. This makes it possible to appropriately transition the game state.

According to this embodiment, during right-hand play (i.e., A time-saving mode, B time-saving mode, C time-saving mode, latent mode, and extension mode), if the first special pattern 51 becomes a 4R jackpot instead of the second special pattern 52, the game state after the special play is determined based on the game state (high ball entry state) stored in the processing of S1300 in FIG. 51, so that the game state after the special play ends can be shifted to the latent mode in which the low probability and high ball entry state 220 times are set, rather than the A time-saving mode in which the low probability and high ball entry state 200 times are set. This makes it possible to appropriately transition the game state. As described above, by determining the game state after the special play ends based on the game state (high ball entry state) stored in the processing of S1300 in FIG. 51, even if the first special pattern 51 becomes a 4R jackpot in the final change of the extension mode, it is possible to shift to the latent mode in which the low probability and high ball entry state 220 times are set. On the other hand, the situation in which the first special symbol 51 becomes a 4R jackpot during left-hand play only occurs in normal mode, and cannot occur in special mode. In normal mode, the game state stored in the processing of S1300 in FIG. 51 is a low ball entry state, so by making the specification such that when the first special symbol 51 becomes a 4R jackpot in a low ball entry state, the game state can be appropriately transitioned by making the transition to the A time-saving mode.

In this embodiment, if the C time-saving symbol stops in the normal mode, the mode is switched to the C time-saving mode. In principle, the mode is switched to the C time-saving mode when the first special symbol 51 stops and is displayed as the C time-saving symbol in a low probability and low ball entry state. At this time, if the mode is allowed to switch to the C time-saving mode based on the game state when the C time-saving symbol stops, the first special symbol 51 changes in the extension mode, the first special symbol 51 wins the fall judgment in the change start process, and the first special symbol 51 stops and is displayed as the C time-saving symbol, the condition for entering the C time-saving mode is met. If the final change in the extension mode does not result in a jackpot, the game flow is set to switch to the normal mode via the special mode, so it is not preferable to be able to enter the C time-saving mode from the extension mode. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in the processing of S1340 in FIG. 52, the game state at the start of the variation start processing stored in S1300 is used as a criterion to determine whether or not to transition to the C time-saving mode. In this case, even if the C time-saving symbol stops in a low probability and low ball entry state in the final variation of the extension mode, the game state at the start of the variation start processing of the final variation in which the C time-saving symbol stops is a high probability and high ball entry state, so the condition for transitioning to the C time-saving mode is not met. This makes it possible to appropriately transition the game state.

(Aspect 2-12: Variation pattern selection state transition according to whether or not there is a fall)
FIG. 66 is a diagram showing an example of the transition process of the variation pattern selection state when the mode is shifted to the latent mode. FIG. 66 shows the transition process of the miss variation pattern selection state selected when the result of the hit/miss judgment is other than a big hit (miss), and the winning variation pattern selection state selected when the big hit is achieved is omitted, but the transition process is the same as the transition process of the miss variation pattern selection state, and the winning variation pattern selection state transitions in the following order: a special period from the first variation to a specific number of times (e.g., 20 times), from the first variation of the RUSH zone to less than the final number of times of the RUSH zone (e.g., 99 times or less or 199 times or less), the final number of times of the RUSH zone (e.g., 100 times or 200 times), the extension mode, and the special mode. Note that the variation pattern selection state for the A time-saving mode, the variation pattern selection state for the B time-saving mode, and the variation pattern selection state for the C time-saving mode are different variation pattern selection states, and only one type is prepared for each, and the type of the variation pattern selection state is different from any of the variation pattern selection states for the latent mode. Furthermore, the variable pattern selection state does not transition within each of the time-saving modes A to C.

As the miss variation pattern selection states for the latent mode, broadly speaking, selection states A, B, C1, and C2 are prepared. In the latent mode, variation pattern selection state A is selected in a special period from the first variation to a specific number of times (e.g., 20 times). Variation pattern selection state A is a selection state for executing an opening performance, and includes, for example, the first to eighth variation pattern selection states described in aspect 2-5. When a specific number of pattern variations (e.g., 20 times) from the first variation of the latent mode ends, variation pattern selection state B is selected at the next (e.g., 21st) pattern variation, and the variation pattern selection state transitions from A to B. Variation pattern selection state B is a selection state selected other than the final variation of the RUSH zone, and is selected at a pattern variation from the first variation of the RUSH zone to less than the final number of times of the RUSH zone (e.g., 99 times or less or 199 times or less). These fluctuation pattern selection states A and B are always selected within the final number of times, regardless of whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state (whether or not the fall judgment has already been won). The fluctuation pattern selection state C1 or C2 is selected at the pattern fluctuation that is the final number of times of the RUSH zone (for example, 100 times or 200 times), and the fluctuation pattern selection state transitions from B to C1 or C2. Therefore, in the final fluctuation of the latent mode, two types of miss fluctuation pattern selection states C1 or C2 can be selected. The fluctuation pattern selection state C1 is a selection state that is selected when the fall judgment is not won between the first fluctuation and the final fluctuation of the latent mode, and is selected when the high probability state is maintained in the final fluctuation of the latent mode. The fluctuation pattern selection state C2 is a selection state that is selected when the fall judgment is won anywhere from the first fluctuation to the final fluctuation of the latent mode, and is selected when the final fluctuation of the latent mode is in a low probability state.

If the variation pattern selection state C1 is selected in the final variation of the latent mode, the next pattern variation will transition to the extension mode. Two types of variation pattern selection states D1 and D2 are prepared as the miss variation pattern selection state for the extension mode. The variation pattern selection state D1 is selected when the high probability state is maintained in the extension mode, that is, when the extension mode continues in the next pattern variation. The variation pattern selection state D2 is selected when the extension mode falls into a low probability state, that is, when the extension mode does not continue in the next pattern variation and transitions to the special mode. If the fall judgment is not won in the first variation of the extension mode, the variation pattern selection state D1 is selected in the first variation of the extension mode. If the variation pattern selection state D1 is selected, the variation pattern selection state D1 is selected until the fall judgment is won, and the variation pattern selection state D2 is selected in the pattern variation that wins the fall judgment, and the variation pattern selection state transitions from D1 to D2. In addition, if the fall judgment is won in the first change in the extension mode, the change pattern selection state D2 is selected in the first change, so the change pattern selection state D1 is not selected in the extension mode. The pattern change in which the change pattern selection state D2 is selected in the extension mode becomes the final change in the extension mode, and the next pattern change will transition to the special mode.

One type of selection state E is selected as the miss fluctuation pattern selection state for the special mode. The fluctuation pattern selection state E is selected when the game state at the start of the fluctuation is a low probability and low ball winning state, and the second special pattern 52 fluctuates. When all the reserved second special patterns 52 are consumed, the mode is switched to the normal mode. In the normal mode, the fluctuation pattern selection state for the normal mode is selected.

The change pattern selection state (C1 or C2) when a change pattern related to a pattern change in which the number of pattern changes after transitioning to a high probability and high ball entry state is a predetermined number (for example, 120 times or 220 times) is determined is different from the change pattern selection state (A or B) when a change pattern related to a pattern change in which the number of pattern changes after transitioning to a high probability and high ball entry state is less than a predetermined number (for example, 119 times or less or 219 times or less) is determined, and is also different from the change pattern selection state (D1 or D2) when a change pattern related to a pattern change exceeding a predetermined number (120 times or 220 times) is determined. When the number of pattern changes after transitioning to a high probability and high ball entry state is less than a predetermined number (for example, 119 times or less or 219 times or less), the change pattern selection state (A or B) determined after winning the fall judgment is the same as the change pattern selection criterion (A or B) determined after not winning the fall judgment. If the number of pattern changes after transitioning to a high probability and high ball entry state is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (e.g., 120 or 220 times) and the result of the win/lose judgment is a miss, the change pattern selection criterion (D2) determined after winning the fall judgment is different from the change pattern selection criterion (D1) determined after not winning the fall judgment.

If the final variation of the latent mode or the final variation of the extension mode (a variation that wins the fall judgment in the extension mode) results in a miss, a performance that notifies the continuation of the high ball entry state or a performance that notifies the win or loss of the fall judgment can be executed. For example, when the miss variation pattern selection state C1, C2, or D2 is selected, a specific variation pattern that can execute a notification performance that notifies the continuation of the high ball entry state or the win or loss of the fall judgment can be selected. When the miss variation pattern selection state C1, C2, or D2 is selected, only a specific variation pattern that can execute a notification performance may be selected. When the miss variation pattern selection state C1 is selected, the right hit image 634 remains displayed, and a reach performance is not performed, and a continuation provocation performance that prompts the continuation of the high ball entry state is executed, and the continuation of the high ball entry state is confirmed. When the miss variation pattern selection state C2 is selected, the right hit image 634 remains displayed, no reach effect is performed, and a continuation teasing effect is performed to tease whether the high ball entry state can be continued, followed by a high ball entry state end effect that confirms that the high ball entry state will not continue, and a result effect that notifies the player of the total number of winning balls during the winning streak until the high ball entry state ends. When the miss variation pattern selection state D2 is selected, the right hit image 634 is erased (hidden) at the start of the variation, a battle effect is performed, resulting in a miss, and then the high ball entry state end effect and the result effect are executed. Note that when the variation pattern selection state D1 is selected, the high ball entry state end effect is not executed.

If a jackpot occurs in the final variation of the latent mode or in any pattern variation of the extended mode (a variation that wins the fall judgment in the extended mode or a variation that does not win the fall judgment in the extended mode), a winning variation pattern selection state is selected. If a winning variation pattern selection state is selected in the final variation of the latent mode or in any pattern variation of the extended mode, any of a plurality of winning variation patterns may be selected based on the winning variation pattern selection state. As a plurality of winning variation patterns, a normal winning pattern without a battle performance, a reach normal winning pattern that becomes a jackpot as it is after the battle performance, a revival winning pattern that appears to be a miss after the battle performance and then becomes a jackpot, and a result revival winning pattern that revives and wins after executing a high ball entry state end performance and a result performance after the battle performance may be prepared. If a jackpot occurs in any pattern variation of the extended mode (a variation that wins the fall judgment in the extended mode or a variation that does not win the fall judgment in the extended mode), the right hit image 634 is erased at the start of the variation. The number of types of winning change patterns that can be selected when a jackpot is reached by the final change in the latent mode or any pattern change in the extended mode may be, for example, 2 or more, 3 or more, or 4 or more. The number of types of change patterns that can be selected when a jackpot is reached by a pattern change in which the number of pattern changes after a transition to a high probability and high ball entry state is a predetermined number (for example, 120 or 220 times) or more may be greater than the number of types of change patterns that can be selected when a miss is reached by a pattern change in which the number of pattern changes after a transition to a high probability and high ball entry state is a predetermined number (for example, 120 or 220 times) or more (for example, 1 type). When a jackpot is reached by the final change in the latent mode, instead of executing a continuation provocation performance while the right-hit image 634 is still displayed and then executing a high ball entry state continuation performance or a high ball entry state end performance, a jackpot performance in which 777 is suddenly displayed may be executed. If a jackpot occurs with any pattern change in the extension mode (a change that does not result in a fall judgment in the extension mode) and if the change pattern selection state D1 is selected, a battle presentation may be executed without erasing the right-hit image 634, or if a jackpot occurs, only a reach normal winning pattern that results in a jackpot after the battle presentation may be executed. If the change pattern selection state D1 is selected, a battle presentation may be executed and a miss may be obtained, but a continuation miss pattern may be executed to notify that the high ball entry state will continue.

Two types of deviation pattern selection states may be prepared when the fall judgment is not won in the extension mode: a medium-speed time-saving pattern selection state D1a and a high-speed time-saving pattern selection state D1b. For example, when the fall judgment is not won in the first fluctuation of the extension mode, the medium-speed time-saving pattern selection state D1a is selected, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied without winning the fall judgment thereafter, for example, when the number of pattern fluctuations from the first time of the extension mode is a predetermined number or more (for example, 100 times or more), the high-speed time-saving pattern selection state D1b is selected. When the high-speed time-saving pattern selection state D1b is selected, the pattern fluctuation efficiency is increased compared to when the medium-speed time-saving pattern selection state D1a is selected. For example, when the medium-speed time-saving pattern selection state D1a is selected, a medium-speed time-saving pattern is selected, and when the high-speed time-saving pattern selection state D1b is selected, a high-speed time-saving pattern with a shorter fluctuation time than that for the medium-speed time-saving pattern is selected. If a fall judgment is won without satisfying a predetermined condition after selecting the medium-speed time-saving fluctuation pattern selection state D1a, the state may transition to the special mode fluctuation pattern selection state E without transitioning to the high-speed time-saving fluctuation pattern selection state D1b. If a predetermined condition is satisfied after selecting the medium-speed time-saving fluctuation pattern selection state D1a, or if a fall judgment is won in the fluctuation that transitions from the medium-speed time-saving fluctuation pattern selection state D1a to the high-speed time-saving fluctuation pattern selection state D1b or the fluctuation after the transition (i.e., the fluctuation after the transition), the state may transition to the special mode fluctuation pattern selection state E.

When the C time-saving pattern stops in a pattern change where the number of pattern changes after transitioning to a high probability and high ball entry state is a predetermined number or more (e.g., 120 times or 220 times), the same change pattern as when a losing pattern other than the C time-saving pattern stops may be selected, and the same presentation may be possible. Also, when the C time-saving pattern stops in a pattern change where the number of pattern changes after transitioning to a high probability and high ball entry state is less than a predetermined number (e.g., 120 times or 220 times), the same change pattern as when a losing pattern other than the C time-saving pattern stops may be selected, and the same presentation may be possible. Furthermore, if the number of pattern changes after transitioning to a high probability and high winning state is a predetermined number (e.g., 120 or 220 times) or more, a fall judgment is won and the C time-saving pattern stops, the game state during the change display and when the change stops will be a low probability and low winning state, but the same change pattern can be selected as when a losing pattern other than the C time-saving pattern stops, and the same performance may be executed.

According to this aspect, even if the game flow branches in a complex manner depending on the timing of winning the fall judgment after transitioning to a high probability and high ball entry state, the game state can be appropriately transitioned using a limited number of variation pattern selection states, preventing the control from becoming complicated.

(Aspect 2-13: Symbol Stop Processing)
In this embodiment, three types of easy-to-score states are prepared: time reduction A, time reduction B, and time reduction C. Time reduction A is an easy-to-score state that can be entered when a special game is executed, and time reduction B and time reduction C are easy-to-score states that can be entered when the result of the hit/miss judgment is other than a jackpot. Time reduction B is an easy-to-score state that is entered when the cumulative number of pattern changes reaches a specified ceiling number of times without a jackpot occurring in a low probability state, and time reduction C is an easy-to-score state that is entered when the result of the hit/miss judgment is other than a jackpot in a low probability state and the hit/miss lottery value or the pattern lottery value falls within a specific range. For example, time reduction C can be entered when the pattern for time reduction C stops.

As described above with reference to FIG. 52, there are a time-saving count subtraction process, a C time-saving entry process, and a B time-saving count subtraction process when the pattern stops in relation to the easy-to-score state. In the example of FIG. 52, when the pattern stops, the process is executed in the order of time-saving count subtraction process → C time-saving entry process → B time-saving count subtraction process. By executing the process in this order, if the C time-saving entry condition and the B time-saving entry condition are met at the same time, the C time-saving entry process can be overwritten by the B time-saving entry process by executing the B time-saving entry process after the C time-saving entry process. In other words, if the C time-saving entry condition and the B time-saving entry condition are met at the same time, the B time-saving is prioritized over the C time-saving, and the game is switched to the B time-saving. In this embodiment, the B time-saving, which can be continued up to 200 times, is more advantageous to the player than the C time-saving, which can be continued up to 100 times, so that the C time-saving is prioritized to prevent the player from being placed in a disadvantageous situation.

In a modified example, the advantage of the C time reduction to the player may be greater than the advantage of the B time reduction to the player. For example, the number of times the C time reduction continues may be set to 200 times, the number of times the B time reduction continues may be set to 100 times, and the number of times the C time reduction continues may be greater than the number of times the B time reduction continues. In this case, the order of the C time reduction entry process and the B time reduction number subtraction process when the pattern stops may be reversed, and the processes may be executed in the order of the time reduction number subtraction process → B time reduction number subtraction process → C time reduction entry process. In other words, after the process related to the time reduction (B time reduction) with a relatively low advantage to the player is executed, the process related to the time reduction (C time reduction) with a relatively high advantage to the player may be executed. This allows the C time reduction to be prioritized over the B time reduction, and it is possible to prevent a situation where the player is disadvantaged by prioritizing the B time reduction over the C time reduction.

The remaining number of high balls that are subtracted by the time-saving number subtraction process and the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling that are subtracted by the B time-saving number subtraction process are initialized after the RAM clear process. After the RAM clear process, the state is forced to be low probability and low balls, the remaining number of high balls that are subtracted by the time-saving number subtraction process becomes 0, and the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling becomes a predetermined initial value (for example, 900 times). On the other hand, the remaining number of high balls that are subtracted by the time-saving number subtraction process and the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling that are subtracted by the B time-saving number subtraction process are not initialized after the power-off recovery process, and maintain the number before the power-off. The lamp display of the pattern display unit 120 in a state where play has not started after the RAM clear process becomes a special mode. For example, the display mode of the first special pattern display unit 41 and the second special pattern display unit 42 after the RAM clear process becomes a special mode different from when the pattern stops and when the pattern changes, and for example, all the lamps included in the first special pattern display unit 41 and the second special pattern display unit 42 are lit. This special mode is the same as the display mode immediately after recovery when the power failure recovery process is performed in a low probability and low ball winning state. In other words, simply checking that all the lamps included in the first special symbol display unit 41 and the second special symbol display unit 42 are lit does not allow one to determine whether the process is after a RAM clear process or after a power failure recovery process. Note that the display mode immediately after recovery when the power failure recovery process is performed is the same regardless of the display mode of the symbol display unit 120 before the power failure.

(Aspect 2-14: Test signal and outer end signal for easy-to-go state)
There are three states regarding the ease of scoring into the second starting hole 12: a normal scoring state, a first easy scoring state, and a second ready scoring state. If a jackpot is hit in the normal scoring state, it is possible to transition to the first easy scoring state (e.g., time reduction A). If a non-jackpot is hit in the normal scoring state, it is possible to transition to the second easy scoring state (e.g., time reduction B or time reduction C).

In the first easy ball entry state, the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery is high (e.g., 100%), and the opening time of the normal electric device 90 (also called the electric chute, or ball entry variation mechanism) when the normal symbol lottery is won is short (e.g., 1.5 seconds). On the other hand, in the second easy ball entry state, the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery is low (e.g., 25%), and the opening time of the normal electric device 90 when the normal symbol lottery is won is long (e.g., 5.5 seconds). As a result, when the right hit is continued in the easy ball entry state, the performance of the second starting hole 12 in terms of the ease of ball entry is approximately the same in the first easy ball entry state and the second easy ball entry state.

The pachinko gaming machine 100 has a test signal output terminal (not shown) for outputting a test signal, and an external information output terminal 160 for outputting an outer end signal. The test signal output terminal outputs a signal created in the test signal output process (S348 in FIG. 19) to a test device. The test device is a device external to the gaming machine, and is a device for checking whether the current gaming state of the gaming machine and the operating status of the special electric device and normal electric device are normal by checking whether a signal corresponding to the state and situation of the gaming machine is output. The external information output terminal 160 outputs a signal created in the external information output process (S354 in FIG. 19) to, for example, a data display, which is an external device connected to the gaming machine (a data display connected to the gaming machine by the hall management).

The test signal output terminal has at least a first terminal for outputting a first test signal indicating the first easy ball-scoring state, and a second terminal for outputting a second test signal indicating the second easy ball-scoring state. The external information output terminal has at least a third terminal for outputting a time-saving signal indicating the first easy ball-scoring state, the second easy ball-scoring state, or a special game, a fourth terminal for outputting a second time-saving start signal indicating the start of the second easy ball-scoring state, and a fifth terminal for outputting a second time-saving signal indicating the second easy ball-scoring state. The test signal output terminal does not have to have a terminal for outputting a test signal indicating the time-saving state. Basically, the A time-saving mode, the latent mode, and the extension mode correspond to the first easy ball-scoring state, and the B time-saving mode and the C time-saving mode correspond to the second easy ball-scoring state.

Figure 67 shows an example of the output of a test signal and an outer end signal related to the easy ball entry state. Figure 67 shows a case where a jackpot is hit in normal mode (normal ball entry state), a transition to the first easy ball entry state occurs after the special game ends, a transition to the special mode (normal ball entry state in which the reserved second special symbol 52 is consumed) without a jackpot in the first ball entry state, a transition to the normal mode after the special mode ends, a transition to the second easy ball entry state, a transition to the special mode without a jackpot in the second easy ball entry state, and a transition to the normal mode after the special mode ends.

The first test signal is turned on only in the first easy-to-score state, and is turned off otherwise. The first test signal is turned off in the normal easy-to-score state, the second easy-to-score state, and during special play. If the final change in the first easy-to-score state (for example, the final change in the A time-saving mode or the final change in the latent mode in which the game state at the time of the win/loss judgment is in a low probability state) results in a miss and the game transitions to a special mode, the first test signal changes from on to off when the pattern stops in the final change of the first easy-to-score state. Note that if the fall judgment is not won in the latent mode and the game transitions to the extension mode, the first test signal changes from on to off when the pattern fluctuation that wins the fall judgment or the win/loss judgment begins in the extension mode.

The second test signal is turned on only in the second easy-to-score state, and is turned off otherwise. The second test signal is turned off in the normal ball-scoring state, the first easy-to-scoring state, and while a special game is being played. If the final change in the second easy-to-scoring state (B time-saving mode or C time-saving mode) results in a miss and the mode transitions to the special mode, the second test signal will change from on to off when the pattern stops during the final change in the second easy-to-scoring state.

The first test signal is turned off in the second easy-to-score state, and the second test signal is turned off in the first easy-to-score state, so the first test signal and the second test signal are never turned on at the same time. By providing the first test signal and the second test signal separately, it is possible to clearly distinguish between the first easy-to-score state and the second easy-to-score state, and it is possible to reliably distinguish between the types of time-saving modes when testing the gaming machine.

The second test signal may be a signal common to time reduction B and time reduction C. The second test signal may be prepared separately for time reduction B and time reduction C (for example, there may be a second test signal B which is a test signal for time reduction B and a second test signal C which is a test signal for time reduction C). The test signal output terminal may have a terminal for outputting a test signal for time reduction B and a terminal for outputting a test signal for time reduction C separately. The test signal for time reduction B is turned on only during time reduction B and turned off during time reduction C. The test signal for time reduction C is turned on only during time reduction C and turned off during time reduction B. Therefore, the test signal for time reduction B and the test signal for time reduction C are never turned on at the same time.

The time-saving signal is a signal common to the first and second easy-to-score states, and is turned on when the high-score state continues. The time-saving signal is turned on when the first test signal is turned on and when the second test signal is turned on. The time-saving signal is turned on during the execution of a special game. When a jackpot is hit in the first or second easy-to-score state and a special game is executed, and the state transitions to the first easy-to-score state after the execution of the special game, the time-saving signal is turned on during the easy-to-score state before and after the execution of the special game and during the execution of the special game. The time-saving signal is turned off when the first special pattern 51 is changed in a low probability and low-score state, that is, when the normal mode is in effect, but the on state continues when the second special pattern 52 is changed in a low probability and low-score state immediately after the end of the first or second easy-to-score state (that is, when the special mode is in effect). The time-saving signal remains on when the first or second easy-to-score state ends and transitions to the special mode, and switches from on to off when the special mode ends and transitions to the normal mode (i.e., when all remaining reserve second lottery values are consumed immediately after the first or second easy-to-score state ends and the second special symbol 52 corresponding to the last remaining second lottery value is stopped and displayed). The time-saving signal may be turned off when the final change in the first or second easy-to-score state stops. In that case, even when a symbol change that wins the fall judgment or the win/loss judgment in the extension mode is stopped and displayed, the symbol is turned off.

The second time-saving start signal turns on when the second easy-to-score state begins, and switches to an off state after the on state has continued for a certain period of time (e.g., one second). The second time-saving start signal turns on, for example, when the second time-saving signal switches from an off state to an on state. The second time-saving start signal may be a signal common to the start of time-saving B and time-saving C. Separate signals may be prepared as the second time-saving start signal for time-saving B and time-saving C. For example, the external information output terminal 160 may have a terminal for outputting the time-saving B start signal and a terminal for outputting the time-saving C start signal separately.

The second time-saving signal is a time-saving signal specialized for the second easy-to-score state, and is turned on when the high-ball-score state continues with the start of the second easy-to-score state. The second time-saving signal is turned on when the low-ball-score state transitions to the second easy-to-score state. The second time-saving signal is turned off when the second easy-to-score state ends, that is, when the final fluctuation of the second easy-to-score state stops. Therefore, when the first special pattern 51 fluctuates in a low probability and low-ball-score state, that is, when the normal mode is in effect, the signal is turned off. When a jackpot occurs in the second easy-to-score state, the second time-saving signal is turned off when the jackpot pattern stops. The second time-saving signal is turned off during special play and in the first easy-to-score state to which the special play transitions after the special play. As a variant, the on state may continue when the second special symbol 52 changes in the low probability and low ball scoring state immediately after the second easy ball scoring state ends (i.e., when remaining in special mode), in which case the on state continues when the second easy ball scoring state ends and transitions to special mode, and switches from the on state to the off state when the special mode ends and transitions to normal mode (when all remaining reserved second lottery values are consumed immediately after the second easy ball scoring state ends and the second special symbol 52 corresponding to the last remaining second lottery value is displayed).

By providing a time-saving signal as the outer end signal, it is possible for the player to easily grasp whether or not a favorable state is continuing. Also, by providing a second time-saving start signal, it is possible to reliably grasp whether or not a time-saving mode has been entered that is not triggered by a jackpot. By providing a second time-saving signal in addition to the time-saving signal, it is possible to more appropriately grasp the situation during a time-saving mode that is not triggered by a jackpot.

Figure 68 shows an example of the output of a test signal and an outer end signal related to an easy-to-score state, and shows an example in which multiple time-saving states continue without a jackpot occurring. Figure 68 shows a case in which a special mode is entered without a jackpot occurring in the first easy-to-score state, the C time-saving symbol stops due to a change in the special mode, and the state is entered into the second easy-to-score state (C time-saving mode), and the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling becomes 0 in the middle of the C time-saving mode, and the state is entered into the B time-saving mode. Note that this assumes that a C time-saving symbol is prepared for the second special symbol 52.

In the example of FIG. 68, the first test signal is turned on only in the first easy-to-score state, and turned off in the special mode and the second easy-to-score state (time-saving C mode and time-saving B mode). The second test signal is turned off in the first easy-to-score state and the special mode, and remains on in the second easy-to-score state (time-saving C mode and time-saving B mode). The time-saving signal remains on. The second time-saving start signal is turned on at the start of the time-saving C mode, but is not turned on at the start of the time-saving B mode. This is because the state has not transitioned from a state that is not the second easy-to-score state to the second easy-to-score state at the start of the time-saving B mode. The second time-saving signal is turned off in the first easy-to-score state and the special mode, and remains on in the second easy-to-score state (time-saving C mode and time-saving B mode).

When the transition condition to the second easy-to-score state is met upon the first change from special mode to normal mode, the time-saving signal may remain in the on state without turning off upon the start of the first change in normal mode. Note that, when the transition condition to the second easy-to-score state is met upon the first change from special mode to normal mode, the time-saving signal may turn off upon the start of the first change in normal mode, and turn on upon the start of the pattern change that initiates the second easy-to-score state.

When the easy-to-score state transitions to the second easy-to-score state when the C time-saving symbol stops or the number of remaining times to reach the ceiling becomes zero, the time-saving signal may continue to be in the on state. On the other hand, when the easy-to-score state transitions to the second easy-to-score state when the C time-saving symbol stops or the number of remaining times to reach the ceiling becomes zero, the second time-saving start signal may or may not be on at the start of the second easy-to-score state. When transitioning directly from the first easy-to-score state to the second easy-to-score state, the second time-saving signal may remain in the off state in the second easy-to-score state, or may be in the on state.

The time-saving signal may remain on when the C time-saving symbol stops in the final change of the first easy-to-score state and transitions to the second easy-to-score state (C time-saving mode). For example, in the final change of the extension mode, the C time-saving symbol may stop in a state where it has fallen into a low probability and low-score state. For example, if one of the conditions for entering the C time-saving mode is that the symbol is in a low probability state when it stops, the game state when the symbol stops in the final change of the extension mode is a low probability state, so transition to the C time-saving mode is possible when the C time-saving symbol stops in the final change of the extension mode. In this case, transition to the second easy-to-score state may occur after the end of the extension mode, that is, the end of the first easy-to-score state, and the time-saving signal may continue to be on. On the other hand, if transition to the C time-saving mode is possible on the condition that the symbol is in a low probability state at the start of the change, the game state at the start of the change of the final change of the extension mode is a high probability state, so even if the C time-saving symbol stops in the final change of the extension mode, transition to the C time-saving mode is not possible. In this case, the end of the extension mode, i.e., the end of the first easy-to-score state, may trigger the time-saving signal to switch from an on state to an off state (i.e., there is no need to transition to time-saving mode C).

Above, several aspects of this embodiment have been described. The technology described in this embodiment may be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 100 described in Base Technology 1 or the first embodiment, or to the slot machine 1010 described in Base Technology 2. For example, the operation instruction presentation described in Aspect 2-3 and the suggestion presentation that allows selection of the execution mode described in Aspect 2-7 can be applied to the slot machine shown in Base Technology 2, and can also be applied to slot machines and gaming machines installed in casinos, game centers, etc.

In the second embodiment described above, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is shown to have both the B time reduction and the C time reduction. In a modified example, the pachinko gaming machine 100 may have only one of the B time reduction and the C time reduction, and not the other.

The techniques described in the embodiments and variations may be specified by the following items:

[Item 1]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A first starting hole provided in the game area;
A second starting hole provided in the game area and having a ball entry change mechanism operable to change the state in which the game ball is relatively difficult to enter into an easy state;
A winning/losing determination means for performing a winning/losing determination based on a lottery value obtained when a ball enters the first starting hole or the second starting hole;
A pattern display device which displays a pattern in a variable manner and indicates the result of the winning/losing judgment by a stationary display of the pattern;
a special game control means for enabling a player to execute a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game after a symbol indicating that the result of the hit/miss judgment is a big hit is displayed on the symbol display device;
a ball-scoring state control means for transitioning from a normal ball-scoring state in which the ease of scoring a ball into the second starting hole is relatively low to an easy ball-scoring state in which the ease of scoring a ball into the second starting hole is relatively high;
A performance control means for controlling the performance,
The easy-to-score-ball state includes a first easy-to-score-ball state to which the ball can be shifted when the special game is executed, and a second easy-to-score-ball state to which the ball can be shifted when the result of the hit/miss determination is other than a big hit,
A first specific performance and a second specific performance that indicate the expectation that the result of the hit/miss judgment will be a jackpot can be executed,
If a pattern indicating that the result of the hit/miss judgment is other than a big hit is displayed after the execution of the first specific performance, the state is not transitioned to the second ball-scoring easy state after the stop display,
In the pinball game machine, when a symbol indicating that the result of the hit/miss judgment is other than a jackpot after the execution of the second specific performance is stopped and displayed, the pinball game machine may transition to the second ball-scoring easy state after the stopped display.

[Item 2]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A first starting hole provided in the game area;
A second starting hole provided in the game area and having a ball entry change mechanism operable to change the state in which the game ball is relatively difficult to enter into an easy state;
A winning/losing determination means for determining whether or not a winning/losing decision is made based on a first lottery value obtained in response to a ball entering the first starting hole or a second lottery value obtained in response to a ball entering the second starting hole;
A pattern display device which displays a pattern in a variable manner and indicates the result of the winning/losing judgment by a stationary display of the pattern;
A reservation control means for reserving a predetermined number of the first lottery value and the second lottery value up to an upper limit until a variation of a pattern corresponding to the lottery starts;
a special game control means for enabling a player to execute a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game after a symbol indicating that the result of the hit/miss judgment is a big hit is displayed on the symbol display device;
a ball-scoring state control means for transitioning from a normal ball-scoring state in which the ease of scoring a ball into the second starting hole is relatively low to an easy ball-scoring state in which the ease of scoring a ball into the second starting hole is relatively high;
A performance control means for controlling the performance,
A normal performance can be executed when a pattern corresponding to the first lottery value is displayed in a variable manner in the normal ball entry state,
When the easy-to-score state is shifted to the normal-score state, one or more reserved second lottery values are consumed in the normal-score state and a pattern is displayed in a variable manner, and a special performance can be executed.
In the normal ball entry state, when the second lottery value is not reserved and a pattern corresponding to the second lottery value is displayed in a variable manner, and when a pattern indicating that the result of the win/lose judgment is a miss is displayed in a stopped state, the normal performance is executed before the stopped display of the pattern, and the special performance is not executed after the stopped display of the pattern.

[Item 3]
A main control means for controlling the progress of a game;
A performance control means for controlling the performance;
An input operation means for receiving an input operation from a player,
a manipulation means image simulating the input manipulation means is displayed, and a manipulation instruction effect is executed in which the player is instructed to perform an input operation on the input manipulation means;
a first performance that can be executed while hiding the image of the operation means after the operation instruction performance is executed and an input operation is performed on the input operation means;
The gaming machine has a second performance that can be executed while the operation means image is displayed after the operation instruction performance is executed and an input operation is performed on the input operation means.

[Item 4]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A first starting hole provided in the game area;
A second starting hole provided in the game area and having a ball entry change mechanism operable to change the state in which the game ball is relatively difficult to enter into an easy state;
A winning/losing determination means for performing a winning/losing determination based on a lottery value obtained when a ball enters the first starting hole or the second starting hole;
A pattern display device which displays a pattern in a variable manner and indicates the result of the winning/losing judgment by a stationary display of the pattern;
a special game control means for enabling a player to execute a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game after a symbol indicating that the result of the hit/miss judgment is a big hit is displayed on the symbol display device;
a probability state control means for shifting from a low-probability state in which the probability of the result of the hit/miss judgment being a jackpot is normal to a high-probability state in which the probability of the result of the hit/miss judgment being a jackpot is higher than normal;
a ball-scoring state control means for transitioning from a normal ball-scoring state in which the ease of scoring a ball into the second starting hole is relatively low to an easy ball-scoring state in which the ease of scoring a ball into the second starting hole is relatively high;
A performance control means for controlling the performance,
In the low probability state, the number of consecutive symbol changes that result in a miss in the hit/miss judgment reaches a predetermined number, and the state can be transitioned to the easy-to-score state.
A special effect having a different execution mode can be executed depending on the remaining number of times until the consecutive number of times reaches the predetermined number of times,
The special performance cannot be executed until the number of symbol changes after a RAM clear process, a power off recovery process, or a standby demo screen display reaches a specific number in this pinball game machine.

[Item 5]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A starting port provided in the game area;
A winning/losing determination means for performing a winning/losing determination based on a lottery value obtained when the ball enters the starting hole;
A pattern display device which displays a pattern in a variable manner and indicates the result of the winning/losing judgment by a stationary display of the pattern;
a special game control means for enabling a player to execute a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game after a symbol indicating that the result of the hit/miss judgment is a big hit is displayed on the symbol display device;
A performance control means for controlling the performance,
A special effect that can be continued for a special period from the start of the variation of the pattern until at least a predetermined time has elapsed is executable,
During the special period, a maximum of N symbol variations (N is 2 or more) can be performed.
If the pattern change performed during the special period results in a jackpot, regardless of whether the number of pattern changes performed during the special period is between M times (M is less than N) and N times, a pattern indicating a jackpot will be displayed at the end of the special period,
A specific effect that indicates the expectation of a jackpot during the special period can be executed, and the specific effect can be executed after a specific time has elapsed since the start of the special period, regardless of whether the number of pattern changes executed during the special period is M to N times.
In the pinball game machine, when the specific performance is executed after the specific time has elapsed from the start of the special period, the number of pattern changes executed from the start of the special period to the execution of the specific performance can differ depending on whether the number of pattern changes executed during the special period is M or N.

[Item 6]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A starting port provided in the game area;
A winning/losing determination means for performing a winning/losing determination based on a lottery value obtained when the ball enters the starting hole;
A special symbol display device which displays a special symbol in a variable manner and indicates the result of the winning/losing judgment by stopping the display of the special symbol;
a special game control means for enabling a player to execute a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game after a symbol indicating that the result of the win/loss judgment is a jackpot is displayed on the special symbol display device;
A performance display device that displays a performance,
When the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the decorative symbol and the simple symbol are displayed in a variable manner on the performance display device from the start of the special symbol's variation to the end of the variation,
A first effect is a effect that displays a normal color effect on the effect display device, and a second effect is a effect that displays a special color effect different from the normal color on the effect display device,
The display color of the decorative pattern displayed in a variable manner superimposed on the first performance is different from the display color of the decorative pattern displayed in a variable manner superimposed on the second performance,
In this pinball game machine, the display color of the simple symbols variably displayed while being superimposed on the first performance is the same as the display color of the simple symbols variably displayed while being superimposed on the second performance.

[Item 7]
A main control means for controlling the progress of a game;
A performance control means for controlling the performance;
An input operation means for receiving an input operation from a player,
As the suggestive effects that suggest the expectation of a favorable result to the player, there are a definite effect that determines that the advantageous result will be obtained, and a non-deterministic effect that does not determine that the advantageous result will be obtained.
The player can perform an input operation to select the execution mode of the suggestion performance during the progress of the game,
As selection candidates for the execution mode of the suggestion performance, there are a first mode and a second mode,
The number of types of the non-deterministic performances that can be executed after the selection of the first mode is smaller than the number of types of the non-deterministic performances that can be executed after the selection of the second mode,
A gaming machine in which the probability of the fixed effect being executed after the first mode is selected is greater than the probability of the fixed effect being executed after the second mode is selected.

[Item 8]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A first starting hole provided in the game area;
A second starting hole provided in the game area and having a ball entry change mechanism operable to change the state in which the game ball is relatively difficult to enter into an easy state;
A winning/losing determination means for performing a winning/losing determination based on a lottery value obtained when a ball enters the first starting hole or the second starting hole;
A pattern display device which displays a pattern in a variable manner and indicates the result of the winning/losing judgment by a stationary display of the pattern;
a special game control means for enabling a player to execute a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game after a symbol indicating that the result of the hit/miss judgment is a big hit is displayed on the symbol display device;
a ball-scoring state control means for transitioning from a normal ball-scoring state in which the ease of scoring a ball into the second starting hole is relatively low to an easy ball-scoring state in which the ease of scoring a ball into the second starting hole is relatively high;
A performance control means for controlling the performance,
When the state is shifted to the easy-to-score state after the end of the special game, the number of times the symbols change from the end of the special game to the specific end of the easy-to-score state may be a first number, or may be a second number greater than the first number.
In the easy-to-score state, an actual remaining number of times until the specific end period is reached or an apparent remaining number of times that is less than the actual remaining number of times can be displayed;
When the apparent remaining number of times is displayed, if the number of times the pattern changes after transition to the easy-to-score state is less than a predetermined number which is less than the first number of times, a number-increasing effect for increasing the apparent remaining number of times cannot be executed, and if the number of times the pattern changes after transition to the easy-to-score state is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the number-increasing effect can be executed.

[Item 9]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A starting port provided in the game area;
A winning/losing determination means for performing a winning/losing determination based on a lottery value obtained when the ball enters the starting hole;
A pattern display device which displays a pattern in a variable manner and indicates the result of the winning/losing judgment by a stationary display of the pattern;
a special game control means for enabling a player to execute a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game after a symbol indicating that the result of the hit/miss judgment is a big hit is displayed on the symbol display device;
A performance control means for controlling the performance,
There are a first performance and a second performance that are executed over a plurality of pattern changes triggered by the start of the pattern change,
When a new pattern change starts after the end of the first performance, a second performance can be executed in response to the start of the new pattern change.
In this pinball game machine, when a new pattern variation starts before the end of the first performance, the second performance triggered by the start of the new pattern variation cannot be executed.

[Item 10]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A starting port provided in the game area;
A winning/losing determination means for performing a winning/losing determination based on a lottery value obtained when the ball enters the starting hole;
A pattern display device which displays a pattern in a variable manner and indicates the result of the winning/losing judgment by a stationary display of the pattern;
a special game control means for enabling a player to execute a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game after a symbol indicating that the result of the hit/miss judgment is a big hit is displayed on the symbol display device;
A performance control means for controlling the performance,
There is a video playback effect in which a video is continuously played over a plurality of pattern changes of the pattern,
During the execution of the video playback performance, if a new pattern variation starts after the first time has elapsed since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the video is continuously played during the period from the stopped display of the symbol to the start of the new pattern variation,
In the pinball game machine, if a new pattern variation does not start after a second time longer than the first time has elapsed since the stopped display of the pattern during the execution of the video playback performance, the playback of the video is temporarily stopped after the stopped display of the pattern, and the video in the paused state is displayed.

[Item 11]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A first starting hole provided in the game area;
A second starting hole provided in the game area and having a ball entry change mechanism operable to change the state in which the game ball is relatively difficult to enter into an easy state;
A winning/losing determination means for performing a winning/losing determination based on a lottery value obtained when a ball enters the first starting hole or the second starting hole;
A pattern display device which displays a pattern in a variable manner and indicates the result of the winning/losing judgment by a stationary display of the pattern;
a special game control means for enabling a player to execute a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game after a symbol indicating that the result of the hit/miss judgment is a big hit is displayed on the symbol display device;
a probability state control means for shifting from a low-probability state in which the probability of the result of the hit/miss judgment being a jackpot is normal to a high-probability state in which the probability of the result of the hit/miss judgment being a jackpot is higher than normal;
A fall determination means for performing a fall determination from the high probability state to the low probability state;
and a ball-scoring state control means for transitioning from a normal ball-scoring state in which the ease of scoring a ball into the second starting hole is relatively low to an easy ball-scoring state in which the ease of scoring a ball into the second starting hole is relatively high,
When the variable display of the pattern is started, the variable display of the pattern is started after the variable start process in which the winning/losing judgment regarding the pattern is executed;
When the symbol variation start process is started in the high probability state, a fall judgment is executed in the variation start process related to the symbol, and then a win/loss judgment is executed. If the fall judgment is won, a win/loss judgment is executed in the low probability state. If the fall judgment is not won, a win/loss judgment is executed in the high probability state.
After the special game ends, the state is shifted to the high probability state and the easy-to-score state, and if a fall judgment is won regarding a pattern change in which the number of pattern changes after the special game ends is within a predetermined number of times, the state is shifted to the normal winning state after the pattern change stops, where the number of pattern changes after the special game ends is the predetermined number of times,
After the special game ends, the state is shifted to the high probability state and the easy ball entry state, and if a fall judgment is won for a pattern change in which the number of pattern changes after the special game ends exceeds the predetermined number of times, the state is shifted to the low probability state and the normal ball entry state after the winning fall judgment,
In the low probability state and the normal winning state, the process of starting the variation of the pattern is started, and if the result of the hit/miss judgment regarding the pattern is other than a big hit, the stop display of the pattern may trigger a transition to the easy winning state,
In the pinball game machine, when the process of starting the variation of the pattern is started in the high probability state and the easy ball-scoring state, and when a fall judgment is won before the execution of the hit/miss judgment for the pattern, and the state is shifted to a low probability state and a normal ball-scoring state, even if the result of the hit/miss judgment for the pattern is other than a jackpot, the pinball game machine does not shift to the easy ball-scoring state upon the stopped display of the pattern.

[Item 12]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A first starting hole provided in the game area;
A second starting hole provided in the game area and having a ball entry change mechanism operable to change the state in which the game ball is relatively difficult to enter into an easy state;
A winning/losing determination means for performing a winning/losing determination based on a lottery value obtained when a ball enters the first starting hole or the second starting hole;
A pattern display device which displays a pattern in a variable manner and indicates the result of the winning/losing judgment by a stationary display of the pattern;
A variation pattern determination means for determining a variation pattern that determines a variation time from the start of the variation of the pattern to the stop display based on a variation pattern selection state;
a special game control means for enabling a player to execute a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game after a symbol indicating that the result of the hit/miss judgment is a big hit is displayed on the symbol display device;
a probability state control means for shifting from a low-probability state in which the probability of the result of the hit/miss judgment being a jackpot is normal to a high-probability state in which the probability of the result of the hit/miss judgment being a jackpot is higher than normal;
A fall determination means for performing a fall determination from the high probability state to the low probability state;
and a ball-scoring state control means for transitioning from a normal ball-scoring state in which the ease of scoring a ball into the second starting hole is relatively low to an easy ball-scoring state in which the ease of scoring a ball into the second starting hole is relatively high,
When the variable display of the pattern is started, the variable display of the pattern is started after the variable start process in which the winning/losing judgment regarding the pattern is executed;
When the variation start process of the pattern is started in the high probability state, a fall judgment is executed in the variation start process, and then a win/loss judgment is executed. If the fall judgment is won, a win/loss judgment is executed in the low probability state. If the fall judgment is not won, a win/loss judgment is executed in the high probability state.
After the special game ends, the state is shifted to the high probability state and the easy-to-score state, and if a fall judgment is won regarding a pattern change in which the number of pattern changes after the special game ends is within a predetermined number of times, the state is shifted to the normal winning state after the pattern change stops, where the number of pattern changes after the special game ends is the predetermined number of times,
After the special game ends, the state is shifted to the high probability state and the easy ball entry state, and if a fall judgment is won for a pattern change in which the number of pattern changes after the special game ends exceeds the predetermined number of times, the state is shifted to the low probability state and the normal ball entry state after the winning fall judgment,
When the pattern change start process is started, a change pattern selection state is determined after a win/loss judgment is performed in the change start process, and a change pattern that determines the change time of the pattern is determined based on the determined change pattern selection state,
The change pattern selection state when a change pattern related to a pattern change in which the number of times of pattern change after transition to the high probability state and the easy-to-score state is the predetermined number is determined is different from the change pattern selection state when a change pattern related to a pattern change in which the number of times of pattern change after transition to the high probability state and the easy-to-score state is less than the predetermined number is determined, and is also different from the change pattern selection state when a change pattern related to a pattern change exceeding the predetermined number is determined,
When the number of times of pattern fluctuation after transition to the high probability state and the easy-to-score state is less than the predetermined number of times, the fluctuation pattern selection state determined after winning the fall judgment is the same as the fluctuation pattern selection criterion determined after not winning the fall judgment,
In the pinball game machine, when the number of times of pattern change after the transition to the high probability state and the easy-to-score state is equal to or more than the predetermined number of times and the result of the win/lose judgment is a miss, the change pattern selection criterion determined after the win in the fall judgment is different from the change pattern selection criterion determined after the loss in the fall judgment.

[Item 13]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A first starting hole provided in the game area;
A second starting hole provided in the game area and having a ball entry change mechanism operable to change the state in which the game ball is relatively difficult to enter into an easy state;
A winning/losing determination means for performing a winning/losing determination based on a lottery value obtained when a ball enters the first starting hole or the second starting hole;
A pattern display device which displays a pattern in a variable manner and indicates the result of the winning/losing judgment by a stationary display of the pattern;
a special game control means for enabling a player to execute a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game after a symbol indicating that the result of the hit/miss judgment is a big hit is displayed on the symbol display device;
a probability state control means for shifting from a low-probability state in which the probability of the result of the hit/miss judgment being a jackpot is normal to a high-probability state in which the probability of the result of the hit/miss judgment being a jackpot is higher than normal;
and a ball-scoring state control means for transitioning from a normal ball-scoring state in which the ease of scoring a ball into the second starting hole is relatively low to an easy ball-scoring state in which the ease of scoring a ball into the second starting hole is relatively high,
The easy-to-score state includes a first easy-to-score state and a second easy-to-score state that is more advantageous to a player than the first easy-to-score state,
In the easy-to-score state, a process for starting the variation of the pattern is started, and if the result of the hit/miss judgment for the pattern is other than a jackpot, a first process is executed in which the stopped display of the pattern is used as a trigger to update a first number of times for the execution of the pattern variation after the transition to the easy-to-score state, and if the updated first number of times satisfies a first condition, a transition to the normal winning state is made;
In the normal ball-scoring state, the process of starting the variation of the pattern is started, and if the result of the hit/miss judgment for the pattern is other than a jackpot, a second process is executed in which a transition judgment to the first ball-scoring easy state is executed based on the lottery value for the pattern, triggered by the stop display of the pattern, and a transition judgment to the first ball-scoring easy state is executed if the transition judgment is successful;
A process for starting the variation of the pattern is started in the low probability state, and when the result of the hit/miss judgment for the pattern is other than a jackpot, a third process is executed in which the stop display of the pattern is used as a trigger to update a second number of times for executing the variation of the pattern in the low probability state in which the result of the hit/miss judgment is other than a jackpot, and when the updated second number of times satisfies a second condition, a transition to the second easy-to-score state is made;
The first process can be executed at least before the third process;
The pinball game machine, wherein the second process is executable at least before the third process.

[Item 14]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A first starting hole provided in the game area;
A second starting hole provided in the game area and having a ball entry change mechanism operable to change the state in which the game ball is relatively difficult to enter into an easy state;
A winning/losing determination means for performing a winning/losing determination based on a lottery value obtained when a ball enters the first starting hole or the second starting hole;
A pattern display device which displays a pattern in a variable manner and indicates the result of the winning/losing judgment by a stationary display of the pattern;
a special game control means for enabling a player to execute a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game after a symbol indicating that the result of the hit/miss judgment is a big hit is displayed on the symbol display device;
a ball-scoring state control means for transitioning from a normal ball-scoring state in which the ease of scoring a ball into the second starting hole is relatively low to an easy ball-scoring state in which the ease of scoring a ball into the second starting hole is relatively high;
a test signal output terminal for outputting a test signal;
an external information output terminal for outputting an outer end signal;
The easy-to-score-ball state includes a first easy-to-score-ball state to which the ball can be shifted when the special game is executed, and a second easy-to-score-ball state to which the ball can be shifted when the result of the hit/miss determination is other than a big hit,
The test signal output terminals include a first terminal for outputting a test signal indicating that the ball is in the first easy-to-score state, and a second terminal for outputting a test signal indicating that the ball is in the second easy-to-score state,
The pinball game machine has, as the external information output terminals, a third terminal from which an outer end signal indicating that the first easy ball scoring state, the second easy ball scoring state, or the special game is in progress is output, a fourth terminal from which an outer end signal indicating the start of the second easy ball scoring state is output, and a fifth terminal from which an outer end signal indicating that the second easy ball scoring state is in progress is output.

11 First start port, 12 Second start port, 60 Performance display device, 80 Game board, 81 Game area, 210 Lottery means, 213 Regular drawing means, 220 Win/lose determination means, 230 Variation pattern determination means, 260 Special game control means, 275 Opening/closing control means, 303 Performance determination means, 304 Performance control means.

Claims (1)

A game board on which a game area is formed;
A starting port provided in the game area;
A winning/losing determination means for performing a winning/losing determination based on a lottery value obtained when the ball enters the starting hole;
A special symbol display device which displays a special symbol in a variable manner and indicates the result of the winning/losing judgment by stopping the display of the special symbol;
A reservation control means for reserving a predetermined number of the lottery values up to an upper limit until the start of variation of the special symbol corresponding to the lottery;
a special game control means for enabling a player to execute a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game after a special symbol that indicates that the result of the win/loss judgment is a jackpot is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device;
A performance display device that displays a performance,
A special effect can be executed by transforming an image that can be displayed on the performance display device into a special mode and displaying the image on the performance display device,
The display device includes at least one or more first images that are objects to be transformed in the special effect, and at least one or more second images that are not objects to be transformed in the special effect,
A reserved image showing the reserved status of the lottery value can be displayed, and the reserved image can be additionally displayed with an animation display at the time of the occurrence of a reservation corresponding to a new ball being entered,
The display of the reserved image is started with the reserved occurrence animation display before the execution of the special effect is started, and when the special effect is started during the execution of the reserved occurrence animation display, the reserved occurrence animation display is continued without being stopped,
When a new ball is entered, a predetermined pre-reading effect that suggests the expected probability of transition to a special game related to the reserved ball corresponding to the advance information based on advance information on the lottery value corresponding to the new ball can be executed by a pattern change prior to the pattern change related to the reserved ball corresponding to the advance information;
There are a first performance pattern in which the hold occurrence animation display is executed without executing the predetermined look-ahead performance when a hold corresponding to a new ball is generated, and a second performance pattern in which the hold occurrence animation display is executed with the execution of the predetermined look-ahead performance.
When a reservation corresponding to a new ball entry occurs during the execution of the special effect, the first effect pattern can be executed, while the second effect pattern is not executed,
The execution period of the special effect is longer than the execution period of the animation display at the time of the hold occurrence,
A predetermined standby effect can be executed during game standby, and the special effect is not executed during the execution of the predetermined standby effect,
A normal decorative pattern and a simple decorative pattern can be displayed on the performance display device, and the normal decorative pattern and the simple decorative pattern can be displayed while the special pattern is being displayed,
The normal decorative pattern can be transformed into the special mode during the execution of the special performance, and the simple decorative pattern is not transformed into the special mode during the execution of the special performance,
As a performance process during the variable display of the special symbol, there is a first performance process in which the special performance can be executed and a predetermined common performance can be executed during the variable display of the special symbol, and a second performance process in which the special performance is not executed but the predetermined common performance can be executed during the variable display of the special symbol,
Based on the start of a new pattern variation of the special pattern, a predetermined variation performance suggesting a special game transition expectation degree related to the new pattern variation can be executed with the new pattern variation,
As the predetermined look-ahead performance, there are a first look-ahead performance in which the expectation of transition to a special game is relatively low, and a second look-ahead performance in which the expectation of transition to a special game is relatively high,
As the predetermined variation performance, there are a first variation performance in which the expectation of transition to a special game is relatively low, and a second variation performance in which the expectation of transition to a special game is relatively high,
The execution of the second look-ahead performance as the predetermined look-ahead performance is more likely to result in the execution of the special performance in the pattern variation related to the reserved that triggered the execution of the predetermined look-ahead performance than the execution of the first look-ahead performance,
The execution expectation of the special effect in the pattern change that triggered the execution of the predetermined change performance is higher when the second change performance is executed than when the first change performance is executed as the predetermined change performance,
The first variable performance may be executed after the second pre-reading performance is executed,
The second variable performance may be executed after the first pre-reading performance is executed.
Ball game machine.

Images